817154
532
Zoom out
Zoom in
Vorherige Seite
1/541
Nächste Seite
Disclaimer
The following online version of the Owner’s Man-
ual describes all models as well as all the stand-
ard and optional equipment of your vehicle. Coun-
try-specific differences in the language variants
are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be
fitted with all features described. This is also the
case for safety-relevant systems and functions.
Please contact your authorised Mercedes-Benz
dealer if you would like to have a printed Owner’s
Manual for other vehicle models and vehicle
model years. The online version is the current
valid Owner’s Manual version. Possible variations
to your vehicle may not be taken into account as
Mercedes-Benz constantly updates their vehicles
and equipment to the state of the art and introdu-
ces changes in design and equipment.
Please also read the printed Owner’s Manual, any
supplementary documents and the digital Own-
er’s Manual in the vehicle.
Copyright
All Rights Reserved. All texts, images, graphics,
are subject to Copyright and other laws for the
protection of intellectual property. They may not
be copied for commercial purposes or for trans-
mission, nor changed and used on other websites.
Digital in the vehicle Vehicle document wallet Digital on the Internet Digital as an App
Familiarise yourself with
the contents of the Own-
er's Manual directly via
the vehicle's multimedia
system (menu item "Vehi-
cle information"). Start
with the quick guide or
broaden your knowledge
with practical tips.
Here you can nd com-
prehensive information
about operating your
vehicle and about serv-
ices and guarantees in
printed form.
You can nd the Owner's
Manual on the Mercedes-
Benz homepage.
The Mercedes-Benz
Guides App is available
free-of-charge in familiar
App stores.
É1775845013Z102(ËÍ
1775845013Z102
Apple® iOS AndroidTM
Order no. P177 0873 02 Part no. 177 584 50 13 Z102
Edition ÄJ2022-Ma
A-Class
Operator's Manual
A-Class
Publication details
Internet
Further information about Mercedes-Benz vehi-
cles and about Mercedes‑Benz AG can be found
on the following websites:
https://www.mercedes-benz.com
https://group.mercedes-benz.com
Documentation team
You are welcome to forward any queries or sug-
gestions you may have regarding this Owner's
Manual to the technical documentation team at
the following address:
Mercedes‑Benz AG, HPC: CAC, Customer Service,
70546 Stuttgart, Germany
©Mercedes‑Benz AG: Not to be reprinted, transla-
ted or otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part,
without written permission from
Mercedes‑Benz AG.
Vehicle manufacturer
Mercedes‑Benz AG
Mercedesstraße 120
70372 Stuttgart
Germany
Front passenger airbag warning
&WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
an enabled co-driver airbag
If the co-driver airbag is enabled, a child on
the co-driver seat may be struck by the co-
driver airbag during an accident.
#NEVER use a rearward-facing child
restraint system on a seat with an ENA-
BLED FRONT AIRBAG. DEATH or SERI-
OUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur.
Observe the chapter "Children in the vehicle".
As at 01.04.22
Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz
Before your rst drive, please read this Owner's
Manual carefully and familiarise yourself with your
vehicle. For your own safety and a longer service
life of the vehicle, follow the instructions and
warning notices in this Owner's Manual. Disre-
garding them may lead to damage to the vehicle
or injury to people.
The standard equipment and product description
of your vehicle may vary and depends on the fol-
lowing factors:
RModel
ROrder
RNational version
RAvailability
Your vehicle may therefore dier from that shown
in the descriptions and illustrations in individual
cases.
The illustrations in this Owner's Manual show a
le-hand drive vehicle. On right-hand drive vehi-
cles, the layout of vehicle parts and controls dif-
fers accordingly.
Mercedes-Benz is constantly developing its vehi-
cles further.
Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right to
introduce changes in the following areas:
RDesign
REquipment
RTechnical features
The following documents are components of the
vehicle:
RDigital Owner's Manual
RPrinted Owner's Manual
RService Booklet
RSupplementary manuals relating to specic
equipment
RSupplementary documents
Keep these documents in the vehicle at all times.
Ensure that all documents are in the vehicle or
passed on in the event of sale or rental.
1775845013Z102
1775845013Z102
Symbols .......................................................... 5
At a glance ...................................................... 6
Cockpit ........................................................... 6
Cockpit (plug-in hybrid) ................................... 8
Indicator and warning lamps .......................... 10
Overhead control panel ................................. 12
Door operating unit and seat adjustment ....... 14
Emergencies and breakdowns ....................... 16
Digital Owner's Manual ................................. 18
Calling up the Digital Owner's Manual ............ 18
General notes ............................................... 19
Protection of the environment ....................... 19
Take-back of end-of-life vehicles .................... 19
Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts ........................ 20
Owner's Manual ............................................ 21
Touch-sensitive controls ................................ 21
Mercedes me App ......................................... 22
Operating safety ............................................ 22
Notes on assembling the number plate on
the front licence plate holder ......................... 25
Declarations of conformity and notes on
driving in dierent countries .......................... 26
Diagnostics connection ................................. 30
Qualied specialist workshop ........................ 32
Vehicle registration ....................................... 32
Correct use of the vehicle ............................. 32
Information on the REACH regulation ............. 32
Notes for persons with electronic medical
aids .............................................................. 33
Implied warranty ........................................... 34
QR code for rescue card ............................... 34
Data storage ................................................. 34
Copyright ...................................................... 37
Occupant safety ............................................ 38
Brief overview of most important points ......... 38
Information on the automatic functions of
the restraint system ...................................... 45
Purpose and function of the restraint sys-
tem ............................................................... 48
Seat belts ..................................................... 53
Airbags ......................................................... 54
Safely transporting children in the vehicle ...... 55
Brief overview of most important points ......... 55
Important safety notes .................................. 56
Suitable child restraint systems for the
transport of children ..................................... 62
Suitable seats for attaching child restraint
systems ........................................................ 65
Securing the child restraint system ................ 68
Child safety locks .......................................... 73
Opening and closing ...................................... 76
Key ............................................................... 76
Doors ............................................................ 80
Boot .............................................................. 85
Side windows ................................................ 88
Sliding sunroof .............................................. 92
Anti-the protection ...................................... 96
Seats and stowing ......................................... 99
Notes on the correct driver's seat position .... 99
Notes on grab handles ................................ 100
Seats .......................................................... 100
Steering wheel ............................................ 110
Easy entry and exit feature .......................... 111
2Contents
Memory function ......................................... 113
Stowage areas ............................................ 114
Sockets ....................................................... 121
Wireless charging of the mobile phone
and connection with the exterior aerial ........ 122
Fitting/removing the oor mats ................... 124
Light and sight ............................................ 126
Exterior lighting ........................................... 126
Interior lighting ............................................ 134
Changing bulbs (only for vehicles with hal-
ogen headlamps) ......................................... 136
Windscreen wipers and windscreen
washer system ............................................ 138
Mirrors ........................................................ 140
Climate control ........................................... 144
Overview of climate control systems ............ 144
Operating the climate control system .......... 145
Driving and parking ..................................... 153
Driving ........................................................ 153
DYNAMIC SELECT button ............................ 171
Automatic transmission ............................... 175
Function of 4MATIC ..................................... 180
Refuelling .................................................... 180
Charging the high-voltage battery (plug-in
hybrid) ........................................................ 187
Parking ....................................................... 203
Driving and driving safety systems ............... 210
Trailer hitch ................................................. 267
Bicycle rack function ................................... 272
Vehicle towing instructions .......................... 274
Driver's display ........................................... 275
Notes on the driver's display ....................... 275
Operating the driver's display ...................... 275
Driver display menus ................................... 276
Head-up display .......................................... 278
Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical
system ........................................................ 279
Function of the power meter ........................ 280
Overview of status displays on the driver's
display ........................................................ 280
MBUX multimedia system ............................ 282
Overview and operation ............................... 282
System settings .......................................... 289
Plug-in hybrid settings ................................. 293
Navigation and trac .................................. 294
Telephone ................................................... 304
Mercedes me Apps ..................................... 307
Mercedes-Benz emergency call system ....... 316
Radio & media ............................................. 323
Sound settings ............................................ 327
Maintenance and care ................................. 328
ASSYST PLUS service interval display .......... 328
Maintenance Management .......................... 329
Telediagnostics ........................................... 329
Engine compartment ................................... 330
Cleaning and care ....................................... 337
Breakdown assistance ................................. 346
Emergency .................................................. 346
Flat tyre ...................................................... 348
Battery (vehicle) .......................................... 355
Tow-starting or towing away ........................ 361
Electrical fuses ............................................ 367
Contents 3
Wheels and tyres ......................................... 371
Notes on noise or unusual handling char-
acteristics ................................................... 371
Notes on regularly inspecting wheels and
tyres ........................................................... 371
Notes on snow chains ................................. 371
Tyre pressure .............................................. 372
Wheel change ............................................. 376
Emergency spare wheel ............................... 386
Technical data ............................................. 389
Notes on technical data .............................. 389
On-board electronics ................................... 389
Regulatory radio information ....................... 392
Vehicle identication plate, VIN and
engine number overview .............................. 396
Operating uids ........................................... 398
Vehicle data ................................................ 407
Trailer hitch ................................................. 409
Display messages and warning/indicator
lamps .......................................................... 412
Display messages ........................................ 412
Warning and indicator lamps ....................... 482
Index .......................................................... 500
4Contents
In this Owner's Manual, you will nd the following
symbols:
&WARNING Danger due to not observing
the warning notices
Warning notices draw your attention to haz-
ards that may endanger your health or life, or
the health or life of others.
#Observe the warning notices.
+ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental
damage due to failure to observe environ-
mental notes
Environmental notes include information on
environmentally responsible behaviour or envi-
ronmentally responsible disposal.
#Observe environmental notes.
*NOTE Damage to property due to failure
to observe notes on material damage
Notes on material damage inform you of risks
which may lead to your vehicle being dam-
aged.
#Observe notes on material damage.
%These symbols indicate useful instructions or
further information that could be helpful to
you.
#Instruction
(/ page) Further information on a topic
Display Display in the central display
4Highest menu level, which is to be
selected in the multimedia system
5Relevant submenus, which are to be
selected in the multimedia system
* Indicates a cause
Symbols 5
Le-hand-drive vehicles
6At a glance – Cockpit
1Steering wheel gearshi paddles 177
2Combination switch 128
3Driver's display 280
4DIRECT SELECT lever 175
5ü Start/stop button 157
è ECO start/stop function 164
6Central display 282
7Climate control systems 145
8£ Hazard warning light system 129
9PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps 43
AGlove compartment 117
BStowage compartment 117
CCup holder
Dc Active Parking Assist 262
Eú Fingerprint sensor 282
FStowage space
G8 Controller for volume and switching
sound on/o
282
Ü Switches the MBUX multimedia system
on/o
282
HDYNAMIC SELECT button 173
IControl panel for the MBUX multimedia system 282
JAdjusts the steering wheel 110
Ký Switches the steering wheel heater
on/o
110
LControl panel:
Driver's display 280
Cruise control or variable limiter 221
I Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC 226
MDiagnostics connection 30
NOpens the bonnet 331
O! Electric parking brake 206
PLight switch 126
At a glance – Cockpit 7
Le-hand-drive vehicles
8At a glance – Cockpit (plug-in hybrid)
1Driver's display:
õ Operational readiness 279
Power availability display 279
Power meter 280
Trip computer
ECO Assist 169
2Central display:
Plug-in hybrid settings 293
Energy ow display 294
3& Switches immediate pre-entry climate
control on/o
149
4A Sets pre-entry climate control for depar-
ture time
149
5q Reduces recuperation 168
6± Increases recuperation 168
76 Depressurises the fuel tank 180
At a glance – Cockpit (plug-in hybrid) 9
Driver's display
10 At a glance – Indicator and warning lamps
1#! Turn signal lights 128
2ï Trailer hitch 486
3ä Suspension (red) 493
ä Suspension (yellow) 493
4# Electrical fault 488
5Ù Power steering (red) 486
Ù Power steering (yellow) 486
66 Restraint system 484
7ü Seat belt 484
8L Distance warning 493
9! ABS 493
Ah Tyre pressure monitoring system 498
B; Engine diagnostics 488
Cå ESP® OFF 493
÷ ESP®493
D% Diesel engine: preglow
Ep Petrol engine: reduced power 174
Fÿ Coolant temperature 488
GCoolant temperature display
H! Electric parking brake (yellow) 491
I! Electric parking brake (red) 491
JJ Brakes (red) 491
J Brakes (yellow) 491
K8 Reserve fuel with fuel ller ap location
indicator
488
LFuel level
MK High beam 128
L Low beam 126
T Standing lights 126
NR Rear fog light 127
OH Mercedes-Benz emergency call system 497
At a glance – Indicator and warning lamps 11
12 At a glance – Overhead control panel
1Sun visors
2p Switches the le-hand reading lamp
on/o
134
3| Switches automatic interior lighting con-
trol on/o
134
4c Switches the front interior lighting on/o 134
5u Switches the rear interior lighting on/o 134
6p Switches the right-hand reading lamp
on/o
134
7; me button 307
8G SOS button 307
93 Opens/closes the panorama sliding sun-
roof
92
3 Opens/closes the roller sunblind 92
AInside rear-view mirror 141
At a glance – Overhead control panel 13
14 At a glance – Door operating unit and seat adjustment
1V Operating the memory function 113
2Adjusts the seats electrically 105
3w Switching the seat heating on/o 109
4Only Mercedes AMG vehicles: s Switching
the seat ventilation on/o
5ß Ü Locks/unlocks the vehicle 81
6Opens the door 80
7p Opening the boot lid 85
8Í Operating the outside mirrors 140
9W Opens/closes the right side window 88
AW Opens/closes the rear right side window 88
BS Child safety lock for the rear side win-
dows
75
CW Opens/closes the rear le side window 88
DW Opens/closes the le side window 88
EAdjusting the head restraints 106
FConguring the seat settings 107
GAdjusting the seat backrest inclination 102
HAdjusting the seat height 102
IAdjusts the seat cushion inclination 102
JAdjusts the seat fore-and-a position 102
KAdjusts the seat cushion length 102
At a glance – Door operating unit and seat adjustment 15
16 At a glance – Emergencies and breakdowns
1Safety vests 346
2Fire extinguisher 347
3; me button 307
G SOS button 307
4£ Hazard warning light system 129
5Stowage compartment for customer literature
6Starting assistance 360
7Checking and topping up service products 398
8Tow-starting or towing away 363
9Flat tyre 348
AB-pillar with:
QR code for accessing the rescue card 34
BTow-starting or towing away 363
CTIREFIT kit 350
DFirst-aid kit (so-sided) 347
EFuel ller ap with:
Information label on fuel type 180
Information label on tyre pressure 373
QR code for accessing the rescue card 34
FWarning triangle 346
At a glance – Emergencies and breakdowns 17
Calling up the Digital Owner's Manual
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5Info
5Owner's Manual
5Open Digital Owner's Manual
The Digital Owner's Manual describes the func-
tions and operation of the vehicle and the multi-
media system.
#Select one of the following menu items in the
Digital Owner's Manual:
RQuick start: nd the rst steps towards
adjusting your seat (driver's side).
RTips: nd information that prepares you for
certain everyday situations with your vehicle.
RAnimations: watch animations of the vehicle
functions.
RMessages: receive additional information
about the messages in the driver's display.
RLanguage: select the language for the Digital
Owner's Manual.
You can search for keywords using the search
eld Search, in order to nd quick answers to
questions about the operation of the vehicle.
1Menu
2Search
3Back
4Contents section
Some sections in the Digital Owner's Manual,
suchas warning notes, can be expanded and col-
lapsed.
Additional methods of calling up the Digital Own-
er's Manual:
Driver's display: call up brief information as dis-
play messages in the driver's display
MBUX Voice Assistant: call up via the voice con-
trol system
Global search: call up search results for contents
of the Digital Owner's Manual in the home screen
For safety reasons, the Digital Owner's Manual is
deactivated while driving.
18 Digital Owner's Manual
Protection of the environment
+ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental
damage due to operating conditions and
personal driving style
The pollutant emission of the vehicle is
directly related to the way you operate the
vehicle.
Operate your vehicle in an environmentally
responsible manner to help protect the envi-
ronment. Please observe the following recom-
mendations on operating conditions and per-
sonal driving style.
Operating conditions:
#Make sure that the tyre pressure is cor-
rect.
#Do not carry any unnecessary weight
(e.g. roof luggage racks once you no lon-
ger need them).
#Adhere to the service intervals.
A regularly serviced vehicle will contrib-
ute to environmental protection.
#Always have maintenance work carried
out at a qualied specialist workshop.
Personal driving style:
#Do not depress the accelerator pedal
when starting the engine.
#Do not warm up the vehicle while sta-
tionary.
#Drive carefully and maintain a suitable
distance from the vehicle in front.
#Avoid frequent, sudden acceleration and
braking.
#Change gear in good time and use each
gear only up to Ô of its maximum
engine speed.
#Switch o the vehicle in stationary traf-
c, e.g. by using the ECO start/stop
function.
#Drive in a fuel-ecient manner. Observe
the ECO display for an economical driv-
ing style.
Plug-in hybrid
+ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental
pollution caused by irresponsible disposal
of the high-voltage battery
A high-voltage battery contains materials
which are harmful to the environment.
#Dispose of faulty high-voltage batteries
at a qualied specialist workshop.
Take-back of end-of-life vehicles
EU countries only:
Mercedes-Benz will take back your end-of-life
vehicle for environment-friendly disposal in
accordance with the European Union (EU) End-Of-
Life Vehicles Directive.
A network of vehicle take-back points and dis-
mantlers has been established for you to return
your vehicle. You can leave it at any of these
points free of charge. This makes an important
contribution to closing the recycling circle and
conserving resources.
General notes 19
For further information about the recycling and
disposal of end-of-life vehicles, and the take-back
conditions, please visit the national Mercedes-
Benz website for your country.
Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts
+ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental
damage caused by not using recycled
reconditioned components
Mercedes‑Benz AG oers recycled recondi-
tioned components and parts with the same
quality as new parts. The same entitlement
from the implied warranty is valid as for new
parts.
#Recycled reconditioned components and
parts from Mercedes‑Benz AG.
*NOTE Impairment of the operating e-
ciency of the restraint systems from
installing accessory parts or from repairs
or welding
Airbags and seat belt tensioners, as well as
control units and sensors for the restraint sys-
tems, may be installed in the following areas
of your vehicle:
Rdoors
Rdoor pillars
RSill
RSeats
RCockpit
RDriver's display
RCentre console
Rlateral roof frame
#Do not install accessory parts such as
audio systems in these areas.
#Do not carry out repairs or welding.
#Have accessories retrotted at a quali-
ed specialist workshop.
You could jeopardise the operating safety of your
vehicle if you use parts, tyres and wheels as well
as accessories relevant to safety that have not
been approved by Mercedes-Benz. Safety-critical
systems (e.g. the brake system) may malfunction.
Use only Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts or parts of
equal quality. Use only tyres, wheels and acces-
sory parts that have been specically approved
for your vehicle model.
Mercedes-Benz tests original parts and conver-
sion parts and accessory parts that have been
specically approved for your vehicle model for
their reliability, safety and suitability. Despite
ongoing market research, Mercedes-Benz is
unable to assess other parts. Mercedes-Benz
therefore accepts no responsibility for the use of
such parts in Mercedes-Benz vehicles, even if
they have been ocially approved or independ-
ently approved by a testing centre.
Certain parts are ocially approved for installa-
tion or modication only if they comply with legal
requirements. All Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts
meet the approval requirements. The use of non-
approved parts may invalidate the vehicle's gen-
eral operating permit.
20 General notes
This is the case in the following situations:
RThe vehicle type is dierent from that for
which the vehicle's general operating permit
was granted.
ROther road users could be endangered.
RThe exhaust gas or noise level gets worse.
Always specify the vehicle identication number
(VIN) (/ page 396) when ordering Mercedes-
Benz GenuineParts.
Owner's Manual
This Owner's Manual and the Digital Owner's
Manual in the vehicle describe the following mod-
els and the standard and special equipment for
your vehicle:
RThe models and the standard and special
equipment available at the time of this Own-
er's Manual going to press.
RThe models and the standard and special
equipment only available in certain countries.
RThe models and the standard and special
equipment, which will only be available at a
later date.
Note that your vehicle may not be tted with all
features described. This is also the case for sys-
tems relevant to safety. Therefore, the equipment
on your vehicle may dier from that in the
descriptions and illustrations.
The original purchase agreement for your vehicle
contains a list of the equipment in your vehicle at
the time of delivery.
Should you have any questions concerning equip-
ment and operation, please consult a Mercedes-
Benz Service Centre.
%Please note that all speed specications in
these operating instructions are approximate
and the values are subject to a certain toler-
ance.
The Owner's Manual, Supplement, further supple-
mentary documents and Service Booklet are
important documents and should be kept in the
vehicle.
Touch-sensitive controls
In addition to conventional switches and buttons,
your vehicle is equipped with touch-sensitive con-
trols.
These are located in the following areas of your
vehicle:
RRoof and door control panel
RClimate control
RSteering wheel
RMBUX multimedia system
The controls have touch-sensitive user interface
surfaces. The surfaces are controlled by pressing
or swiping to adjust settings or to trigger func-
tions, forexample.
When handling touch-sensitive user interface sur-
faces, observe the following points to avoid prob-
lems operating:
RDo not ax stickers orsimilar objects on the
surfaces
RKeep the surfaces protected from moisture
and wet conditions.
General notes 21
RKeep the surfaces free of dust and dirt
(/ page 343).
Some touch-sensitive control elements have a
symbol and integrated indicator lamps. When
operating, make sure to press on the symbol of
the control element.
Mercedes me App
Notes about the on-demand feature
You can also activate various functions (on-
demand feature) subsequently via Mercedes me
aer purchasing your vehicle.
Information is available at any Mercedes-Benz
Service Centre.
Activating on-demand feature using Mercedes me
Requirements:
RThe vehicle has a wireless connection.
RThe vehicle is linked to the Mercedes me user
account.
Ordering and activating on-demand feature
#Add the desired on-demand feature for the
vehicle to the shopping basket in the
Mercedes me Store.
#Complete the order.
The on-demand feature is activated when
operating the vehicle.
Speeding up activation
#Switch the vehicle o and lock it.
#Unlock the vehicle aer about two minutes
and switch on the vehicle.
The on-demand feature has been activated.
For some features, a notication also appears
in the vehicle's multimedia system.
If the activation was not successful, repeat the
process.
Operating safety
&WARNING Risk of accident due to mal-
functions or system failures
If you do not have the prescribed service/
maintenance work or any required repairs car-
ried out, this could result in malfunctions or
system failures.
#Always have the prescribed service‑ and
maintenance work or any required
repairs carried out in a qualied work-
shop.
&WARNING Risk of accident or injury due
to improper modications to electronic
components
Modications to electronic components, their
soware or wiring can impair their functional-
ity and/or the functionality of other networked
components or safety-relevant systems.
This can endanger the vehicle's operating
safety.
22 General notes
#You must not tamper with wiring, elec-
tronic components, or their soware.
#Always have work on electrical and elec-
tronic devices carried out at a qualied
specialist workshop.
If you modify the on-board electronics, the gen-
eral operating permit is rendered invalid.
Observe the "On-board electronics" section in
"Technical data".
&WARNING Risk of re due to ammable
material coming into contact with hot
parts of the exhaust system
If combustible materials, e.g. leaves, grass or
twigs, come into contact with hot parts of the
exhaust system, they may ignite.
#When driving o-road or on unpaved sur-
faces, check the underside of the vehicle
at regular intervals.
#In particular, remove any trapped parts
of plants or other ammable material.
#If damage should occur, immediately
inform a qualied specialist workshop.
*NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to driv-
ing too fast and due to impacts to the
vehicle underbody or suspension compo-
nents
In the following situations, in particular, there
is a risk of damage to the vehicle:
Rthe vehicle becomes grounded, e.g. on a
high kerb or an unpaved road
Rthe vehicle is driven too fast over an obsta-
cle, e.g. a kerb, speed bump or pothole
Ra heavy object strikes the underbody or
suspension components
In situations such as these, damage to the
body, underbody, suspension components,
wheels or tyres may not be visible. Compo-
nents damaged in this way can unexpectedly
fail or, in the case of an accident, may no lon-
ger absorb the resulting force as intended.
If the underbody panelling is damaged, am-
mable materials such as leaves, grass or twigs
can collect between the underbody and the
underbody panelling. These materials may
ignite if they come into contact with hot parts
of the exhaust system.
#Have the vehicle checked and repaired
immediately at a qualied specialist
workshop.
or
#If driving safety is impaired while con-
tinuing your journey, pull over and stop
the vehicle immediately, while paying
attention to road and trac conditions,
and contact a qualied specialist work-
shop.
Plug-in hybrid
Hybrid vehicles have an internal-combustion
engine and at least one electric motor. The energy
supply for operating the vehicle electrically is pro-
vided by the high-voltage on-board electrical sys-
tem.
General notes 23
&DANGER Risk of death and re due to
modied and/or damaged components of
the high-voltage on-board electrical sys-
tem
The vehicle's high-voltage on-board electrical
system is under high voltage. If you modify
component parts in the vehicle's high-voltage
on-board electrical system or touch damaged
component parts, you may be electrocuted. In
addition, modied and/or damaged compo-
nents may cause a re.
In the event of an accident or impact to the
vehicle underbody, components of the high-
voltage electrical system may be damaged
although the damage is not visible.
#Never make any modications to the
high-voltage on-board electrical system.
#Do not switch on or use the vehicle if its
high-voltage on-board electrical system
components have been modied or dam-
aged.
#Never touch damaged components of
the high-voltage on-board electrical sys-
tem.
#Aer an accident, do not touch any com-
ponents of the high-voltage on-board
electrical system.
#Aer an accident, have the vehicle trans-
ported away.
#Have the components of the high-voltage
on-board electrical system checked at a
qualied specialist workshop and
replaced if necessary.
The components of the vehicle's high-voltage on-
board electrical system are marked with yellow
warning stickers. The cables of the high-voltage
on-board electrical system are orange.
High-voltage components that can become very
hot are marked with an additional warning sticker:
Example
24 General notes
vehicles with hybrid systems generate signicantly
less noise than vehicles with internal-combustion
engines.
When you are driving in electric mode, the vehicle
may not be heard by other road users due to the
signicantly lower noise generated.
For this reason the vehicle is equipped with a
sound generator, which serves as an acoustic
vehicle alerting system (AVAS). This protective
equipment is prescribed by law.
The outside sound produced by the sound genera-
tor (AVAS) can be heard in the passenger com-
partment at low speeds and does not represent a
malfunction.
Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical system
&DANGER Risk of fatal injury by touching
damaged high-voltage components
Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical sys-
tem contain individual high-voltage compo-
nents. These high-voltage components are
under high voltage.
If you modify component parts of these high-
voltage components or touch damaged com-
ponent parts, you may be electrocuted.
High voltage components may be damaged in
an accident, although the damage may not be
visible.
#Never perform modications to compo-
nent parts of high-voltage components.
#Never touch damaged component parts
of high-voltage components.
#Never touch component parts of high-
voltage components aer an accident.
Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical system
contain high-voltage components. These compo-
nents are marked with a high-voltage label:
All work on high voltage components must be car-
ried out at a qualied specialist workshop.
Notes on assembling the number plate on the
front licence plate holder
*NOTE Malfunctions and system failures
due to incorrect assembly of the licence
plate on the front licence plate holder
If the licence plate is incorrectly assembled on
the front licence plate holder, sensors, cam-
eras or driving and safety systems may mal-
function or fail.
General notes 25
Observe the following points when assembling
the licence plate on the front licence plate
holder:
#Assemble the licence plate directly on
the licence plate holder without advertis-
ing media or other holders.
#Assemble the licence plate so that it
does not protrude above or to the side of
the licence plate adapter.
Declarations of conformity and notes on driving
in dierent countries
Electromagnetic compatibility
The electromagnetic compatibility of the vehicle
components has been checked and certied
according to the currently valid version of Regula-
tion UN-R 10.
National information for components subject to
radio regulations
Only for EU and EFTA countries and countries that
recognise the EU manufacturer's declaration of
conformity:
The following information applies to all wireless
components of the vehicle and of the information
systems and communication devices integrated in
the vehicle:
The manufacturers of the wireless components
ensure that all wireless components installed in
the vehicle comply with Directive 2014/53/EU.
The full texts of the EU declarations of conformity
are available at the following web address:
https://moba.i.mercedes-benz.com/markets/
ece-row/baix/cars/certicates-of-conformity/
en_GB/index.html
You can obtain further information from a
Mercedes-Benz service centre.
For Israel only:
It is prohibited to make any change to a vehicle-
installed radio component that could aect the
wireless specications of the device, including
soware changes, replacement of the original
antenna, or adding the option to connect the
device to an external antenna, without rst obtain-
26 General notes
ing approval from the Communica-tions Ministry,
because of concern about wireless interference.
For the United Kingdom only:
The following information applies to all wireless
components of the vehicle and of the information
systems and communication devices integrated in
the vehicle:
The manufacturers of the radio components
declare that all radio equipment installed in the
vehicle is in compliance with the relevant statu-
tory requirements. The full texts of the declara-
tions of conformity are available at the following
web address:
https://moba.i.mercedes-benz.com/markets/
ece-row/baix/cars/certicates-of-conformity/
en_GB/index.html
For Brazil only:
Note on two-way radio systems in the vehicle:
These systems are not protected against harmful
interference and must not cause interference in
properly approved systems.
For Jamaica only:
All wireless vehicle components have received
type approval from the SMA.
For Nigeria only:
Connection and use of the radio communications
equipment in this vehicle is permitted by the
Nigerian Communications Commission
General notes 27
For Russia only:
The manufacturers of the wireless components
installed in the vehicle hereby declare that all
wireless components installed in the vehicle com-
ply with the technical regulations for two-way
radios. You can obtain further information from a
Mercedes-Benz service centre.
For Ukraine only:
The manufacturers of the wireless components
installed in the vehicle hereby declare that the
wireless components installed in the vehicle com-
ply with the technical regulations for two-way
radios. You can obtain further information from a
Mercedes-Benz service centre.
Importer information for wireless components
For Moldova only:
Importer
S.C. GRAND PREMIUM S.R.L. Moldova
mun. Chisinau, str. Hîncesti sos., 2/2
For Turkey only:
Importer
Mercedes Benz Otomotiv Ticaret ve Hizmetler
A.Ş. Genel Merkez
Akçaburgaz Mah. Süleyman Şah Cad. No: 6/1
34522 Esenyurt/İstanbul
For Ukraine only:
Importer
PJSC “AUTOCAPITAL
Velyka Vasylkivska str. 15/2
01004 Kyiv
Ukraine
For the United Kingdom only:
Importer
Mercedes-Benz Cars UK Limited
Delaware Drive, Tongwell
Milton Keynes, MK15 8BA
England
Importer of Mercedes-Benz spare parts
Mercedes-Benz Parts Logistics
Delaware Drive, Tongwell
Milton Keynes, MK15 8BA
England
Jack
Copy and translation of the original declaration of
conformity:
EC declaration of conformity
1.
28 General notes
The undersigned, representing
Manufacturer:
BRANO a.s.
747 41 Hradec nad Moravicí, Opavská 1000,
The Czech Republic
ID No.: 64-387-5933
VAT No.: CZ64-387-5933
herewith declares under our sole responsibility
that the product:
2. a)
Name:
Jack
Type, Number:
A) A 164 580 02 18, A 166 580 01 18
B) A 240 580 00 18
C) A 639 580 02 18
D) A 639 580 03 18
E) A 910 580 00 00
F) A 247 580 00 00, A 293 580 00 00
G) A 247 580 01 00, A 293 580 01 00
H) A 247 580 02 00, A 293 580 02 00
Year of manufacture: 2022
Complies with all relevant provisions
Directive No. 2006/42/EC
b)
Description and purpose of use:
Car jack is intended solely for liing of the con-
crete car, in accordance with the instruction label
on the car jack.
3.
References of harmonized and other standards or
specications
ISO 4063, EN ISO 14341-A, AS 2693, DBL
8230.10, DBL 7382.20, DBL 7392.10, DBL
8451.15, MBN 10435,
Technical documentation of the product is stored
at the premise of the manufacturer. The person
responsible for assembling the technical docu-
mentation of the product: Head of the Technical
Department Brano a.s.
4.
Hradec nad Moravicí
Place
5.
14.03.2022
Date
Dipl. Engineer Michal Koberský
[Signature]
Director SBU-CJ
TIREFIT kit
Copy and translation of the original declaration of
conformity:
EU Declaration of Conformity CE
We,
Aircom Automotive Sp. z o.o. Sp.k.
ul. Fabryczna 20B
55-080 Pietrzykowice
Poland (1)
Hereby declare that the product
Electric air pump (2)
Models: (3)
General notes 29
5N0.012.615.
F
5N0.012.615.
G
9P1.012.615.
B
1EA.012.615.
A
1EA.012.615
992.012.615
8P0.012.615.
E
8P0.012.615.
F
7P0.012.617.
B
9849949580
7P0.012.617.
A
4L0.012.615
760.012.615
760.012.615.
A
A000583850
5
6898012
32340090
FGA_AC01_0
001
4L0.012.615.
A
32271819
8888002695
FGA_AC03_0
001
4G0.012.615.
C
4G0.012.615.
B
FGA_AC02_0
001
FGA_AC02_0
002
complies with all essential requirements of the
directives listed opposite (4)
2006/42/EC (EC Machinery Directive)
2014/30/EU (EC EMC Directive)
2000/14/EG & 2005/88/EG (EC noise emis-
sions)
2011/65/EU & 2015/863/EU (RoHS)
Authorised person for the compilation of technical
documentation according to Annex VII A of Direc-
tive 2006/42/EC
Aircom Automotive Sp. z o.o. Sp.k.
Dominik Gschwender (5)
ul. Fabryczna 20B
55-080 Pietrzykowice
Poland
Applied harmonised standards (6)
DIN EN 60204-1: 2019-06
DIN EN 60335-1: 2020-08
DIN EN 1012-1: 2011-02
DIN EN 55012: 2010-04
DIN EN 50498: 2011-04
EN 50498:2010
DIN EN ISO 12100:2011-03
DIN EN ISO 3744:2011-02
DIN EN ISO 2151:2009-01
DIN EN ISO 4871:2009-11
DIN EN ISO 13732-1:2008-12
Other technical standards and specications
applied
None (7)
Pietrzykowice, 06.07.2021
[Signature, D. Gschwender]
Dominik Gschwender, general management
Note: this declaration loses its validity if technical
or operational changes are made without the con-
sent of the manufacturer.
Diagnostics connection
The diagnostics connection is a technical inter-
face in the vehicle. It is used, for example, during
repair and maintenance work or for reading out
vehicle data in a specialist workshop. Diagnostic
devices should therefore only be connected in a
qualied specialist workshop.
30 General notes
&WARNING Risk of accident due to con-
necting devices to the diagnostics con-
nection
If you connect devices to the diagnostics con-
nection of the vehicle, the function of vehicle
systems and operating safety may be
impaired.
#For safety reasons, we recommend that
you only use and connect products
approved by a Mercedes-Benz service
centre.
&WARNING Risk of accident due to objects
in the driver's footwell
Objects in the driver's footwell may impede
pedal travel or block a depressed pedal.
This jeopardises the operating and road safety
of the vehicle.
#Stow all objects in the vehicle securely
so that they cannot get into the driver's
footwell.
#Always t the oor mats securely and as
prescribed in order to ensure that there
is always sucient room for the pedals.
#Do not use loose oor mats and do not
place oor mats on top of one another.
*NOTE Battery discharging from using devi-
ces connected to the diagnostics connec-
tion
Using devices at the diagnostics connection
drains the battery.
#Check the charge level of the battery.
#If the charge level is low, charge the bat-
tery, e.g. by driving a considerable dis-
tance.
Please also note the information about the 12 V
battery and short-distance trips in the "Driving
and Parking" chapter (/ page 160).
Connecting and using another device with the
diagnostics connection can have the following
eects:
RMalfunctions in the vehicle system
RPermanent damage to vehicle components
Please refer to the warranty terms and conditions
for this matter.
General notes 31
Moreover, connecting equipment to the diagnos-
tics connection can lead to emissions monitoring
information being reset, for example. This may
lead to the vehicle failing to meet the require-
ments of the next emissions inspection during the
main inspection.
Qualied specialist workshop
A qualied specialist workshop has the necessary
special skills, tools and qualications to correctly
carry out any necessary work on your vehicle.
This particularly applies to safety-relevant work.
Always have the following work carried out on
your vehicle at a qualied specialist workshop:
RSafety-relevant work
RService and maintenance work
RRepair work
RModications as well as installations and con-
versions
RWork on electronic components
RPlug-in hybrid: work on the hybrid system
RVehicles with 48 V on-board electrical system:
work on the high-voltage component of the 48
V on-board electrical system
Mercedes‑Benz recommends a Mercedes‑Benz
service centre.
Vehicle registration
Mercedes-Benz may ask its service centres to
carry out technical inspections on certain vehi-
cles. The quality or safety of the vehicle is
improved as a result of the inspection.
Mercedes-Benz can only inform you about vehicle
checks if Mercedes-Benz has your registration
data.
It is possible that your vehicle has not yet been
registered in your name in the following cases:
Rif your vehicle was not purchased at an author-
ised specialist dealer.
Rif your vehicle has not yet been examined at a
Mercedes-Benz service centre.
It is advisable to register your vehicle with a
Mercedes-Benz service centre.
Inform Mercedes-Benz as soon as possible about
any change in address or vehicle ownership. You
can do this at a Mercedes-Benz service centre,
for example.
Correct use of the vehicle
If you remove any warning stickers, you or others
could fail to recognise certain dangers. Leave
warning stickers in position.
Observe the following information in particular
when driving your vehicle:
Rthe safety notes in this Owner's Manual, vehi-
cle-specic supplements and further supple-
mentary documents
Rtechnical data for the vehicle
Rtrac rules and ‑regulations
Rlaws and safety standards pertaining to motor
vehicles
Information on the REACH regulation
EU and EFTA countries only:
32 General notes
the REACH regulation (Regulation (EC) No.
1907/2006, Article 33) stipulates a duty to sup-
ply information about substances of very high
concern (SVHCs).
Mercedes‑Benz AG acts to the best of its knowl-
edge to prevent these SVHCs from being used
and to enable customers to safely handle these
substances. There are SVHCs known to
Mercedes‑Benz AG, according to supplier informa-
tion and internal product information, found in
individual components of this vehicle in quantities
of over 0.1 percent by weight.
Further information can be obtained at the follow-
ing addresses:
Rhttps://reach.daimler.com/de/home/
Rhttps://reach.daimler.com/en/home/
Notes for persons with electronic medical aids
Mercedes-Benz AG cannot, despite carefully
developing vehicle systems, completely rule out
the interaction of vehicle systems with electronic
medical aids such as cardiac pacemakers.
In addition, there are components installed in the
vehicle that, regardless of the operating status of
the vehicle, can generate magnetic elds on a par
with permanent magnets. These elds can be
found, for example, in the area around the multi-
media and sound system or also in the area of the
seats, depending on the vehicle equipment.
For this reason, the following can occur in isolated
cases, depending on the aids used:
RMedical aids malfunctioning
RAdverse health eects
Observe the notes and warnings of the manufac-
turer of the medical aids; if in doubt, contact the
device manufacturer and/or your doctor. If there
is continuing uncertainty concerning the possibil-
ity of medical aids malfunctioning, Mercedes-
Benz AG recommends using only few electrical
vehicle systems and/or maintaining a distance
from the components.
Plug-in hybrid
When charging the high-voltage battery, keep a
distance of at least an arm's length between the
medical aid and the following components:
Rthe power supply equipment
This includes charging stations in the form of a
wallbox or a public charging point, for exam-
ple.
Rvehicle components carrying live voltage
This includes the charging cable and the
charging control box, for example.
Only have repairs and maintenance work in the
area of the following components carried out at a
qualied specialist workshop:
Rvehicle components carrying live voltage
Rtransmission aerials
Rmultimedia system and sound system
If you have any queries or suggestions, consult a
qualied specialist workshop.
General notes 33
Implied warranty
*NOTE Damage to the vehicle arising from
violation of these operating instructions.
Damage to the vehicle can arise from violation
of these operating instructions.
This damage is not covered either by the
Mercedes-Benz implied warranty or by the
New‑ or Used-Vehicle Warranty.
#Follow the instructions in these operat-
ing instructions on proper operation of
your vehicle as well as on possible vehi-
cle damage.
QR code for rescue card
QR codes are attached in the fuel ller ap and on
the opposite side on the B-pillar. In the event of
an accident, rescue services can use the QR code
to quickly nd the appropriate rescue card for
your vehicle. The current rescue card contains the
most important information about your vehicle
(e.g. the routing of the electric lines) in compact
form.
Further information can be obtained at https://
www.mercedes-benz.de/qr-code
Data storage
Data processing in the vehicle
Electronic control units
Electronic control units are tted in your vehicle.
Control units process data which, forexample,
they receive from vehicle sensors, generate them-
selves or exchange between themselves. Some
control units are required for the safe operation of
your vehicle, some assist you when driving,
suchas driver assistance systems, while others
enable convenience or infotainment functions.
The following provides you with general informa-
tion regarding data processing in the vehicle.
Additional information regarding exactly which
data in your vehicle are collected, saved and
transmitted to third parties, and for what purpose,
can be found in the information directly related to
the functional characteristics in question in their
respective operating instructions. This information
is also available online and, depending on the
vehicle equipment, digitally.
Personal data
Every vehicle is identied by a unique vehicle
identication number. Depending on the country,
this vehicle identication number can be used by,
forexample, governmental authorities to deter-
mine the identity of the owner. There are other
possibilities to use data collected from the vehicle
to identify the owner or driver, suchas the licence
plate number.
Therefore, data generated or processed by control
units may be attributable to a person or, under
certain conditions, become attributable to a per-
son. Depending on which vehicle data are availa-
ble, it may be possible to make inferences about,
forexample, your driving behaviour, your location,
your route or your use patterns.
Legal requirements regarding the disclosure of
data
If legally required to do so, manufacturers are, in
individual cases, legally obliged to provide govern-
mental entities, upon request and to the extent
required, data stored by the manufacturer.
Forexample, this may be the case during the
investigation of a criminal oence.
34 General notes
Governmental entities are themselves, in individ-
ual cases and within the applicable legal frame-
work, authorised to read out data from the vehi-
cle. In the case of an accident, information that
can help with an investigation can, therefore, be
taken from the airbag control unit, forexample.
Operational data in the vehicle
This is data regarding the operation of the vehicle,
which have been processed by control units.
This includes the following data, forexample:
Rvehicle status information suchas the speed,
longitudinal acceleration, lateral acceleration,
number of wheel revolutions or the fastened
seat belts display
Rambient conditions, suchas temperature, rain
sensor or distance sensor
Generally, the use of these data is temporary;
they will not be stored beyond the period of oper-
ation and will only be processed within the vehicle
itself. Control units oen contain data memories
for vehicle keys, forexample. Their use permits the
temporary or permanent documentation of techni-
cal information about the vehicle's operating
state, component loads, maintenance require-
ments and technical events or faults.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the follow-
ing data are stored:
Roperating status of system components,
suchas ll levels, tyre pressure or battery sta-
tus
Rmalfunctions or faults in important system
components, suchas lights or brakes
Rsystem reactions in special driving situations,
suchas airbag deployment or the intervention
of stability control systems
Rinformation on events leading to vehicle dam-
age
In certain cases, it may be required to store data
that would have otherwise been used only tempo-
rarily. This may be the case if the vehicle has
detected a malfunction, forexample.
If you use services, suchas repair services and
maintenance work, stored operational data as
well as the vehicle identication number can be
read out and used. They can be read out by
service network employees, suchas workshops
and manufacturers or third parties, suchas break-
down services. The same is true in the case of
warranty claims and quality assurance measures.
In general, the readout is performed via the legally
prescribed port for the diagnostics connection in
the vehicle. The operational data that are read out
document technical states of the vehicle or of
individual components and assist in the diagnosis
of malfunctions, compliance with warranty obliga-
tions and quality improvement. To that end, these
data, in particular information about component
loads, technical events, malfunctions and other
faults may be transmitted along with the vehicle
identication number to the manufacturer. Fur-
thermore, the manufacturer is subject to product
liability. For this reason the manufacturer also
uses operational data from the vehicle, forexam-
ple, for recalls. These data can also be used to
examine the customer's warranty and guarantee
claims.
Fault memories in the vehicle can be reset by a
service outlet or at your request as part of repair
or maintenance work.
General notes 35
Convenience and infotainment functions
You can store convenience settings and individual
settings in the vehicle and change or reset them
at any time.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, this
includes the following settings, forexample:
Rseat and steering wheel positions
Rsuspension and climate control settings
Rindividual settings, suchas interior lighting
Depending on the selected equipment, you can
import data into vehicle infotainment functions
yourself.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, this
includes the following data, forexample:
Rmultimedia data, suchas music, lms or pho-
tos for playback in an integrated multimedia
system
Raddress book data for use in connection with
an integrated hands-free system or an integra-
ted navigation system
Rentered navigation destinations
Rdata about the use of Internet services
These data for convenience and infotainment
functions may be saved locally in the vehicle or
they may be located on a device which you have
connected to the vehicle, suchas a smartphone,
USB ash drive or MP3 player. If you have entered
these data yourself, you can delete them at any
time.
This data is transmitted from the vehicle to third
parties only at your request. This applies, in par-
ticular, when you use online services in accord-
ance with the settings that you have selected.
Smartphone integration (e.g. Android Auto or
Apple CarPlay®)
If your vehicle is accordingly equipped, you can
connect your smartphone or another mobile end
device to the vehicle. You can then control them
by means of the control elements integrated in
the vehicle. Images and audio from the smart-
phone can be output via the multimedia system.
Certain information is simultaneously transferred
to your smartphone. Depending on the type and
integration, thisincludes position data, day/night
mode and other general vehicle statuses. For
more information please consult the Owner's
Manual of the vehicle/infotainment system.
This integration allows the use of selected smart-
phone apps, suchas navigation or music player
apps. There is no further interaction between the
smartphone and the vehicle; in particular, vehicle
data is not directly accessible. The type of addi-
tional data processing is determined by the pro-
vider of the app being used. Which settings you
can make, if any, depends on the specic app and
the operating system of your smartphone.
Online services
Wireless network connection
If your vehicle has a wireless network connection,
it enables data to be exchanged between your
vehicle and additional systems. The wireless net-
work connection is made possible by the vehicle's
own transmitter and receiver or by a mobile end
device that you have brought into the vehicle,
forexample, a smartphone. Online functions can
be used via the wireless network connection. This
includes online services and applications/apps
provided to you by the manufacturer or by other
providers.
36 General notes
Manufacturer's services
Regarding the manufacturer's online services, the
individual functions are described by the manu-
facturer in a suitable place, forexample, in the
Owner's Manual or on the manufacturer's web-
site, where the relevant data protection informa-
tion is also given. Personal data may be used for
the provision of online services. Data are
exchanged via a secure connection, suchas the
manufacturer's designated IT systems. Any per-
sonal data which are collected, processed and
used, other than for the provision of services, is
done so exclusively on the basis of legal permis-
sion. This is the case, forexample, for a legally
prescribed emergency call system, a contractual
agreement or when consent has been given.
You can have services and functions, some of
which are subject to a fee, activated or deactiva-
ted. This excludes legally prescribed functions and
services, suchas an emergency call system.
Third party services
If you use online services from other providers
(third parties), these services are the responsibil-
ity of the provider in question and subject to that
provider's data protection conditions and terms of
use. As a general rule, the manufacturer has no
inuence on the content exchanged.
For this reason, when services are provided by
third parties, please ask the service provider in
question for information about the type, extent
and purpose of the collection and use of personal
data.
Data protection rights
Depending on your country or the equipment and
range of functions of your vehicle as well as the
services you use and the services on oer, you
are entitled to dierent data protection rights.
Further information on data protection and your
data protection rights can either be found on the
manufacturer's website or you will receive this
information as part of the various services and
service oers. There you will also nd the contact
information for the manufacturer and its data pro-
tection ocers.
At a workshop, forexample, with the support of a
specialist and possibly for a fee, you can have
data read out which is stored only locally in the
vehicle.
Copyright
Information on licences for free and open-source
soware used in your vehicle can be found on the
data carrier in your vehicle document wallet and
with updates on the following website:
https://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource
General notes 37
Brief overview of most important points
Basic information
Make sure that the following prerequisites in par-
ticular have been met so that the components of
the restraint system are able to provide the inten-
ded level of protection:
RSit correctly (/ page 39).
RFasten the seat belt correctly (/ page 40).
-Function of the ü seat belt warning
lamp (/ page 42).
-Function of the rear seat belt status dis-
play (/ page 42).
RThe 6 restraint system warning lamp is not
lit up aer the self-test (/ page 41).
RThe PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps dis-
play the correct status of the front passenger
airbag (/ page 43).
For clear understanding
The chapter "Occupant safety" includes informa-
tion on equipment, functions and behaviours that
contribute directly to safety of vehicle occupants.
The information is structured as follows:
RThe most important information in brief: in this
chapter, you are provided with an overview of
the relationship between the restraint system
and the correct behaviour of all vehicle occu-
pants.
RSpecic information: in further sections of the
chapter "Occupant safety", you can nd spe-
cic information on the equipment and func-
tions of the restraint system.
RKeyword directory: you can also nd certain
subjects in this Owner's Manual using the key-
word directory.
Information on the following subjects, among oth-
ers, are not provided in the chapter "Occupant
safety":
RChildren in the vehicle (/ page 55)
RDriving and driving safety systems
(/ page 210)
RStowage areas (/ page 114)
Dening generic terms clearly
In this Owner's Manual, the following generic
terms are used:
ROccupant safety: comprises the components
and system functions which help to minimise,
as much as possible, the stresses on and con-
sequences for vehicle occupants during an
accident.
RRestraint system: comprises those compo-
nents which, along with the vehicle structure,
help prevent vehicle occupants from poten-
tially coming into contact with parts of the
vehicle interior. The seat belts and airbags, for
example, are components of the restraint sys-
tem.
RChild restraint system: you can nd all infor-
mation on this subject in the chapter "Children
in the vehicle" (/ page 55).
Be diligent
For the components of the restraint system to
provide the intended level of protection, it is
essential that your posture is correct and that the
seat belt is correctly fastened.
38 Occupant safety
Bear in mind that negligence when adjusting your
sitting position and fastening the seat belt may
have serious consequences. Be diligent and make
sure that all vehicle occupants are sitting cor-
rectly and have fastened their seat belts properly
before starting every journey.
Information on the correct seat position
The seat position must be correct in order for the
components of the restraint system to provide the
intended level of protection.
The seat position inuences both the protection
provided by the seat belt and the additional pro-
tection provided by the airbag.
A correct seat position in which the seat is nearly
perfectly upright and a correctly fastened seat
belt reduce the risks posed by the airbag when it
is deployed.
Keep space considerations in mind when choos-
ing a seat. With the seat in the correct, nearly
upright position, your head should not touch the
roof.
&WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
an incorrect seat position
If you deviate from the correct seat position,
the airbag cannot provide its intended protec-
tive function.
Each vehicle occupant must make sure of the
following.
#Put the seat in the correct position.
#Fasten seat belts correctly. Pregnant
women must take particular care to
ensure that the lap belt never lies across
the abdomen.
#Observe the following information.
In order for the restraint system to provide the
intended level of protection, observe the following
information:
RBefore starting your journey, adjust your seat
correctly (/ page 99).
When doing so, make sure you are able to fas-
ten your seat belt correctly. The shoulder belt
strap must be routed forward from the seat
belt outlet over the centre of your shoulder.
RKeep your distance from the airbags, espe-
cially the front airbags. Set the driver's seat
and front passenger seat as far back as possi-
ble while making sure the seat belt is fastened
correctly.
RIf persons are sitting on the rear seats, vehicle
occupants should maintain an sucient dis-
tance to the parts of the vehicle interior in
front of them.
RMake sure there are no people, animals or
objects between the vehicle occupants and an
airbag.
RIf you are the driver, observe the following
information on the correct position of the driv-
er's seat (/ page 99).
Only hold the steering wheel by the steering
wheel rim. This allows the driver's airbag to
fully deploy.
RAssume a nearly upright sitting posture, with
your buttocks positioned as far back as possi-
ble in the gap between the seat cushion and
the seat backrest.
Your back must lie as atly and as rmly as
possible against the seat backrest.
Occupant safety 39
RWhile driving, do not lean forward and do not
lean against the door or side window. You may
otherwise be in the deployment area of the
airbags.
RSit with their feet resting on the oor, if possi-
ble. Your thighs are slightly supported by the
seat cushion
Do not put your feet on the cockpit, for exam-
ple. Your feet may otherwise be in the deploy-
ment area of the airbag.
RFasten the seat belt correctly.
Notes on wearing the seat belt correctly
Always fasten your seat belt correctly before
starting a journey. A seat belt can only provide
the best level of protection if it is worn correctly.
&WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
incorrectly fastened seat belt
If the seat belt is not worn correctly, it cannot
perform its intended protective function.
In addition, an incorrectly fastened seat belt
can also cause injuries, for example, in the
event of an accident or when braking or
changing direction suddenly.
#Always ensure that all vehicle occupants
have their seat belts fastened correctly
and are sitting properly.
&WARNING Risk of injury or death when
additional restraint systems are not used
for persons with a smaller stature
Persons under 1.50 m tall cannot wear the
seat belt correctly without a suitable addi-
tional restraint system.
#Always secure persons under 1.50 m tall
in a suitable restraint system.
Each vehicle occupant must observe the following
notes in particular:
RThe seat belt must not be twisted.
RThe shoulder belt strap must be routed
forward from the seat belt outlet over the
centre of your shoulder.
RThe shoulder belt strap should neither touch
your neck nor be routed under your arm or
behind your back.
RThe lap belt must be routed as low down
across the hips as possible.
In addition, push the lap belt down as far as
possible across your hips and pull tight with
the shoulder belt strap. Never route the lap
belt across your abdomen.
Pregnant women must also take particular
care with this.
RAer being tightened, the shoulder belt strap
and lap belt must t snugly against the body.
RAvoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter
coat.
RNever route the seat belt across sharp, poin-
ted, abrasive or fragile objects.
ROnly one person should use each seat belt at
any one time.
RNever secure objects with a seat belt if the
seat belt is also being used by one of the vehi-
cle's occupants.
40 Occupant safety
Also ensure that no objects, e.g. a cushion,
are ever placed between a person and the
seat.
Fastening seat belts
If the seat belt is pulled quickly or sharply, the
seat belt retractor locks. The seat belt strap can-
not be pulled out any further.
#Always engage seat belt tongue 2 of the seat
belt into seat belt buckle 1 of the corre-
sponding seat.
*NOTE Deployment of components of the
restraint system when the front passenger
seat is unoccupied and a seat belt is
buckled
When the front passenger seat is unoccupied
and the seat belt tongue of the seat belt is
engaged in the seat belt buckle, components
of the restraint system may deploy unnecessa-
rily on the front passenger side, e.g. the seat
belt tensioner.
#Only buckle the seat belts as intended.
Function of the restraint system warning lamp
When the vehicle is switched on, a self-test is per-
formed, during which the 6 restraint system
warning lamp lights up. It goes out no later than a
few seconds aer the vehicle is started. The com-
ponents of the restraint system are then func-
tional.
A malfunction has occurred in the restraint sys-
tem if:
Rthe 6 restraint system warning lamp does
not light up when the vehicle is switched on
Rthe 6 restraint system warning lamp lights
up continuously or repeatedly during a journey
If components of the restraint system have been
deployed, the 6 restraint system warning lamp
lights up continuously.
&WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunc-
tions in the restraint system
Components in the restraint system may be
activated unintentionally or not deploy as
intended in an accident.
#Have the restraint system checked and
repaired immediately at a qualied spe-
cialist workshop.
Plug-in hybrid vehicles: if the restraint system is
malfunctioning, the automatic high voltage emer-
gency shuto may not function.
Occupant safety 41
&DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to mal-
functioning automatic high-voltage emer-
gency shuto
In the event of an accident, the high-voltage
on-board electrical system may not be deacti-
vated as intended.
You may receive an electric shock if you touch
the damaged components of the high-voltage
on-board electrical system.
#Have the automatic high-voltage emer-
gency shuto checked and repaired
immediately at a qualied specialist
workshop.
#Aer an accident, switch o the vehicle
immediately.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the
vehicle towed to a qualied specialist workshop.
Function of the seat belt warning lamp
The ü seat belt warning lamp in the Instru-
ment Display is a reminder that all vehicle occu-
pants must wear their seat belts correctly.
In addition, a warning tone may sound.
As soon as the driver and front passenger fasten
their seat belts, the seat belt warning goes out.
Function of the rear seat belt status display
The rear seat belt status display is only available
for certain countries.
When the vehicle is switched on, the rear seat
belt status display informs you for a certain
amount of time which rear seat belt is not fas-
tened.
The status of the rear seat belt can be recognised
by the colour of the symbol in the driver's display:
RGrey: the seat belt tongue of a rear seat belt is
not engaged in the seat belt buckle of the cor-
responding seat.
RGreen: the seat belt tongue of a rear seat belt
is engaged in the seat belt buckle of the corre-
sponding seat.
Every vehicle occupant must always fasten
their seat belt correctly before starting a jour-
ney.
RRed: a vehicle occupant in the rear passenger
compartment has released the seat belt
buckle using the release button and may not
be properly secured.
If a vehicle occupant unfastens a seat belt in the
rear, the rear seat belt status display appears
again.
In addition, a warning tone may sound.
42 Occupant safety
Function of the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator
lamps (front passenger airbag)
Vehicles without automatic front passenger airbag
shuto have a special sticker axed to the side of
the cockpit on the front passenger side
(/ page 62).
The PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps display
the status of the front passenger airbag.
If the front passenger seat is occupied or a child
restraint system is tted on the front passenger
seat, you must make sure both before, and also
during the journey, that the status of the front
passenger airbag is correct for the situation.
&WARNING Risk of potentially fatal injuries
due to objects trapped under the front
passenger seat
Objects trapped under the front passenger
seat may interfere with the function of the
automatic front passenger airbag shuto or
damage the system.
#Do not stow any objects under the front
passenger seat.
#When the front passenger seat is occu-
pied, ensure that no objects have
become trapped beneath the front
passenger seat.
Self-test: when the vehicle is switched on, both
the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and OFF indicator
lamps light up simultaneously for several seconds.
Aer the self-test, you can determine the status of
the front passenger airbag as follows:
RFront passenger airbag disabled: PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF lights up continuously.
The front passenger airbag will not be
deployed in the event of an accident. If
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF is lit, no one may
use the front passenger seat.
If a rearward-facing child restraint system is
tted on the front passenger seat,
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF must be lit continu-
ously.
RFront passenger airbag enabled: PASSENGER
AIR BAG ON lights up for up to 60 seconds or
until both the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and
OFF indicator lamps go out.
The front passenger airbag may be deployed
during an accident. If the front passenger air-
bag is in this status, no rearward-facing child
restraint system may be tted on the front
passenger seat.
Occupant safety 43
%If you are driving with a child in the vehicle,
observe the information in the chapter "Chil-
dren in the vehicle" (/ page 55)
&WARNING Risk of injury or death due to a
disabled front passenger airbag
The front passenger airbag is disabled when
the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
is lit.
A person in the front passenger seat could
then, for example, come into contact with the
vehicle interior, especially if the person is sit-
ting too close to the cockpit.
If the front passenger seat is occupied, always
ensure that:
Rthe classication of the person in the front
passenger seat is correct and the front
passenger airbag is enabled or disabled in
accordance with the person in the front
passenger seat.
Rthe front passenger seat has been moved
as far back as possible.
Rthe person is seated correctly.
#Both before and during the journey,
ensure that the status of the front
passenger airbag is correct.
Malfunction of the automatic front passenger air-
bag shuto
The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp and
the 6 restraint system indicator lamp light up
simultaneously.
In this case, no one may use the front passenger
seat and no child restraint system may be tted
on the front passenger seat.
Have the automatic front passenger airbag shuto
checked and repaired immediately at a qualied
specialist workshop.
Be sure to also observe the following further rela-
ted subjects:
RChild restraint system on the front passenger
seat (/ page 59)
RSuitable positioning of the child restraint sys-
tem (/ page 65)
Disabling or enabling the front passenger airbag
The automatic front passenger airbag shuto can
disable or enable the front passenger airbag
according to the situation.
This happens automatically as a result of the clas-
sication of the person or child restraint system
on the front passenger seat.
You cannot manually disable or enable the front
passenger airbag.
Also observe the following information:
RThe status of the front passenger airbag, see
"Function of the PASSENGER AIR BAG indica-
tor lamps" (/ page 43)
RNotes on using the automatic front passenger
airbag shuto, see "Information on the auto-
matic front passenger airbag shuto"
(/ page 45)
RIf you are driving with a child in the vehicle,
observe the chapter "Children in the vehicle"
(/ page 55)
44 Occupant safety
Information on the child restraint system
When tting a child restraint system, observe the
notes in "Children in the vehicle" (/ page 55).
Notes on the child restraint system on the front
passenger seat
&WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
an enabled co-driver airbag
If the co-driver airbag is enabled, a child on
the co-driver seat may be struck by the co-
driver airbag during an accident.
#NEVER use a rearward-facing child
restraint system on a seat with an ENA-
BLED FRONT AIRBAG. DEATH or SERI-
OUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur.
Also pay particular attention to the notes on rear-
ward-facing or forward-facing child restraint sys-
tems on the front passenger seat (/ page 59).
Information on the automatic functions of the
restraint system
Function of the automatic front passenger airbag
shuto
A person on the front passenger seat must
observe the following information:
RSit correctly (/ page 39).
RFasten the seat belt correctly (/ page 40).
The automatic front passenger airbag shuto can
disable or enable the front passenger airbag
according to the situation.
Make sure you observe the following information:
RStatus of the front passenger airbag, see
"Function of the PASSENGER AIR BAG indica-
tor lamps" (/ page 43).
RWhen tting a child restraint system to the
front passenger seat, observe the vehicle-spe-
cic information (/ page 59).
Status of the front passenger airbag in relation to
the stature of the person:
RFront passenger airbag disabled: PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF lights up continuously.
The front passenger airbag will not be
deployed in the event of an accident. If
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF is lit, no one may
use the front passenger seat.
RFront passenger airbag enabled: PASSENGER
AIR BAG ON lights up for up to 60 seconds or
until both the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and
OFF indicator lamps go out.
The front passenger airbag may be deployed
during an accident. Observe the following
information on the correct seat position
(/ page 39).
Vehicles with rear seats: a person of smaller
stature should use a rear seat.
System limits
The front passenger airbag may be disabled by
mistake, for example, in the following situation:
RThe front passenger transfers their weight by
supporting themselves on a vehicle armrest.
Occupant safety 45
RThe front passenger sits in such a way that
their weight is raised from the seat surface.
*NOTE Deployment of components of the
restraint system when the front passenger
seat is unoccupied
In an accident, the components of the
restraint system may deploy unnecessarily on
the front passenger side if:
RThere are heavy objects on the front
passenger seat.
RThe seat belt tongue is engaged in the seat
belt buckle of the front passenger seat and
the front passenger seat is unoccupied.
#Stow objects in a suitable place.
#Only one person should use each seat
belt at any one time.
Depending on the detected accident situation, the
window airbag on the front passenger side may
deploy. The airbag is deployed regardless of
whether the front passenger seat is occupied.
Function of PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant
protection)
PRE-SAFE® is able to detect certain critical driv-
ing situations and implement pre-emptive meas-
ures to protect the vehicle occupants.
PRE-SAFE® can implement the following meas-
ures independently of each other:
RTightening the seat belts on the driver's seat
and front passenger seat.
RClosing the side windows.
RVehicles with sliding sunroof: closing the slid-
ing sunroof.
RVehicles with memory function: moving the
front passenger seat to a more favourable seat
position.
RPRE-SAFE® Sound: provided that the multime-
dia system is switched on, generating a brief
noise signal to stimulate the innate protective
mechanism of a person's hearing.
*NOTE Damage caused by objects in the
footwell or behind the seat
The automatic adjustment of the seat position
may result in damage to the seat and/or the
object.
#Stow objects in a suitable place.
Reversing the PRE-SAFE® system measures
If an accident did not occur, the pre-emptive
measures that were taken are reversed.
You will need to perform certain settings yourself.
#If the seat belt pre-tensioning is not reduced,
move the seat backrest back slightly.
The locking mechanism releases.
Function of PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occu-
pant protection plus)
PRE-SAFE® PLUS can detect certain impacts, par-
ticularly an imminent rear impact, and take pre-
emptive measures to protect the vehicle occu-
46 Occupant safety
pants. These measures cannot necessarily pre-
vent an imminent impact.
PRE-SAFE® PLUS can implement the following
measures independently of each other:
RTightening the seat belts on the driver's seat
and front passenger seat.
RActivating the rear hazard warning lights at a
higher ashing frequency.
RIncreasing brake pressure when the vehicle is
stationary. This brake application is cancelled
automatically when the vehicle pulls away.
If an accident did not occur, the pre-emptive
measures that were taken are reversed.
System limits
The system will not initiate any action in the fol-
lowing situations:
Rwhen reversing
or
Rwhen the vehicle is towing a trailer and there
is a risk of a rear impact
The system will not initiate any braking application
in the following situations:
Rwhilst driving
or
Rwhen entering or exiting a parking space while
using Active Parking Assist
Seat belt adjustment function
Vehicles with PRE-SAFE®: aer you have fastened
the seat belt of the front seat, it may adjust itself
against your body by pulling at the shoulder until
somewhat tight. Do not hold the seat belt tightly
while it is adjusting.
This function is a reminder that all vehicle occu-
pants must wear their seat belts correctly.
You can activate and deactivate the seat belt
adjustment function using the multimedia system
(/ page 47).
Activating/deactivating seat belt adjustment via
the multimedia system
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5Vehicle
5Occupant protection
#Activate or deactivate Belt adjustment.
Overview of the automatic measures aer an acci-
dent
Depending on the type and severity of the acci-
dent, and depending on the vehicle's equipment,
the following measures can be implemented, for
example:
Rautomatic braking (post-collision brake)
Ractivating the hazard warning lights
Rtriggering an automatic emergency call
(/ page 318)
Rswitching o the engine
To start the vehicle again, switch the vehicle
o and on once more (/ page 157). Depend-
ing on the type and severity of the accident,
you may no longer be able to start the vehicle.
Occupant safety 47
Rswitching o the fuel supply
RPlug-in hybrid: switching o the hybrid system
and high-voltage on-board electrical system
Runlocking the vehicle doors
Rlowering the side windows
Rdisplaying the emergency guide in the central
display
Rswitching on the interior lighting
Function of the post-collision brake aer an acci-
dent
Depending on the accident situation, the post-col-
lision brake can minimise the severity of a further
collision or even avoid it.
If an accident is detected, the post-collision brake
can initiate automatic braking. When the vehicle
has come to a standstill, the electric parking
brake is automatically applied.
The driver can cancel automatic braking by taking
the following actions:
Rbraking more strongly than automatic braking
Rfully depressing the accelerator pedal with
force
Purpose and function of the restraint system
Overview of deployment situations (restraint sys-
tem)
Make sure that the following prerequisites in par-
ticular have been met so that the components of
the restraint system are able to provide the inten-
ded level of protection:
RSit correctly (/ page 39).
RFasten the seat belt correctly (/ page 40).
-Function of the seat belt warning lamp
(/ page 42).
-Function of the rear seat belt status dis-
play (/ page 42).
RThe 6 restraint system warning lamp is not
lit up aer the self-test (/ page 41).
RThe PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps dis-
play the correct status of the front passenger
airbag (/ page 43).
Depending on the detected deployment situation,
the components of the restraint system can be
activated or deployed independently of each
other:
RSeat belt tensioner: frontal impact, rear
impact, side impact, rollover1
RDriver's airbag, front passenger airbag: frontal
impact
RKnee airbag: frontal impact
RSide airbag: side impact
RWindow airbag: side impact, rollover1, frontal
impact
1) Only for certain countries.
The installation location of an airbag is identied
by the AIRBAG symbol (/ page 54).
Observe the information on the function of the
restraint system (/ page 48).
Information on how the restraint system works
How the restraint system functions depends on
the severity of the impact detected and the appa-
rent type of accident.
48 Occupant safety
For more information about types of accidents,
see "Overview of deployment situations"
(/ page 48).
The activation thresholds for the components of
the restraint system are determined based on the
evaluation of the sensor values measured at vari-
ous points in the vehicle. This process is pre-emp-
tive in nature. The triggering/deployment of the
components of the restraint system must take
place in good time at the start of the collision.
Factors which can only be seen and measured
aer a collision has occurred cannot play a deci-
sive role in airbag deployment. Nor do they pro-
vide an indication of airbag deployment.
The vehicle may be deformed signicantly without
an airbag being deployed. This is the case if only
parts which are relatively easily deformed are
aected and the rate of vehicle deceleration is
not high. Conversely, an airbag may be deployed
even though the vehicle suers only minor defor-
mation. If very rigid vehicle parts such as longitu-
dinal members are hit, this may result in su-
ciently high levels of vehicle deceleration.
Depending on the apparent type of accident and
the detected deployment situation, seat belt ten-
sioners and/or airbags supplement the protection
oered by a correctly worn seat belt.
When enabled, an airbag can provide additional
protection for the respective vehicle occupant.
Potential protection provided by each airbag:
RKnee airbag: thigh, knee and lower leg
RDriver's airbag, front passenger airbag: head
and ribcage
RWindow airbag: head
RSide airbag: ribcage and pelvis
*NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles
#Observe the notes in the Supplement.
You could otherwise fail to recognise
dangers.
However, no system available today can com-
pletely eliminate injuries and fatalities in every
accident situation. In particular, the seat belt and
airbag generally do not protect against objects
penetrating the vehicle from the outside. It is also
not possible to completely rule out the risk of
injury caused by the airbag deploying.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the
vehicle towed to a qualied specialist workshop
aer an accident. Take this into account, particu-
larly if a seat belt tensioner is triggered or an air-
bag deployed.
If the seat belt tensioners are triggered or an air-
bag is deployed, you will hear a bang, and a small
amount of powder may also be released:
RThe bang will not generally aect your hearing.
RIn general, the powder released is not hazard-
ous to health but may cause short-term
breathing diculties to persons suering from
asthma or other pulmonary conditions.
Provided it is safe to do so, leave the vehicle
immediately or open the window in order to
prevent breathing diculties.
Occupant safety 49
Information on the limited protection provided by
the restraint system
Risk due to the incorrect behaviour of vehicle
occupants
Every vehicle occupant must make sure of the fol-
lowing in particular:
RThey observe the information on the correct
seat position (/ page 39).
RThere are no heavy, sharp-edged or fragile
objects in the pockets of their clothing. Store
such objects in a suitable place.
&WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
incorrect seat position
The seat belt will not oer the intended level
of protection if you have not moved the seat
backrest to an almost vertical position.
In particular, you may slip under the seatbelt
and injure yourself.
#Adjust the seat properly before begin-
ning your journey.
#Always ensure that the seat backrest is
in an almost vertical position and that
the shoulder section of your seat belt is
routed across the centre of your shoul-
der.
Risk due to objects in the vehicle interior
Every vehicle occupant must make sure of the fol-
lowing in particular:
RThey observe the information on the correct
seat position (/ page 39).
RThere are no objects between the seat, door
and door pillar (B-pillar).
RThere are no hard objects, e.g. coat hangers,
hanging on the grab handles or coat hooks.
RThere are no heavy, sharp-edged or fragile
objects in the pockets of their clothing. Store
such objects in a suitable place.
&WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
blocked seat belt buckle or seat belt
anchorage
Objects next to the front seat that block the
seat belt buckle or the moving seat belt
anchorage on the front seat impair the func-
tion of the seat belt tensioners.
#Before starting the journey, make sure
that there are no objects around the seat
belt buckle or between the front seat
and door.
&WARNING Risk of injury from objects in
the deployment area of an airbag
Objects in the deployment area of an airbag
can hinder or prevent the correct deployment
of the airbag.
The airbag may then deploy in an uncontrolled
manner and may even cause additional inju-
ries to the vehicle occupants by deploying.
This may be the case in particular if the airbag
is integrated into the seat.
#Always stow and secure objects cor-
rectly.
#Before commencing your journey, make
sure that no objects are stowed in the
deployment area of an airbag.
50 Occupant safety
The installation location of an airbag is identied
by the AIRBAG (/ page 54) symbol.
Risk due to tting accessories
Do not attach accessories such as mobile naviga-
tion devices, mobile phones or cup holders, within
the deployment area of an airbag, e.g. on the
cockpit, on the door, on the side window or on the
side trim.
In addition, no connecting cables, tensioning
straps or retaining straps must be routed or
attached to the vehicle within the deployment
area of an airbag. Always comply with the acces-
sory manufacturer's installation instructions and,
in particular, the notes on suitable places for
installation.
&WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
unsuitable protective covers
Due to unsuitable protective covers, the air-
bags cannot protect vehicle occupants as they
are designed to do.
#You should only use protective covers
that have been approved for the corre-
sponding seat by Mercedes-Benz.
In addition, the function of the automatic front
passenger airbag shuto could be restricted due
to an unsuitable protective cover. If the front
passenger seat is occupied, ensure that the
PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps display the
correct status of the front passenger airbag
(/ page 43).
Risk due to pets in the vehicle interior
&WARNING Risk of accident and injury due
to animals le unsecured or unattended in
the vehicle
If you leave animals in the vehicle unattended
or unsecured, they could press buttons or
switches, for instance.
An animal may:
Ractivate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example
Rswitch systems on or o and endanger
other road users
Unsecured animals may be thrown about the
vehicle in the event of an accident, or sudden
steering and braking manoeuvres, and injure
vehicle occupants.
#Never leave animals unattended in the
vehicle.
#Always correctly secure animals while
driving, e.g. using a suitable animal car-
rier.
Risk due to modication, damage or wear to the
components of the restraint system
*NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles
#Observe the notes in the Supplement.
You could otherwise fail to recognise
dangers.
&WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
modications to the restraint system
Vehicle occupants may no longer be protected
as intended if alterations are made to the
restraint system.
Occupant safety 51
#Never alter the parts of the restraint sys-
tem.
#Never tamper with the wiring or any elec-
tronic component parts or their so-
ware.
If it is necessary to modify the vehicle to accom-
modate a person with disabilities, contact a quali-
ed specialist workshop.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use driving
aids which have been approved for your vehicle by
Mercedes-Benz.
&WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
damaged or modied seat belts
Seat belts cannot provide protection in the fol-
lowing situations:
Rthe seat belt is damaged, has been modi-
ed, is extremely dirty, bleached or dyed
Rthe seat belt buckle is damaged or
extremely dirty
Rmodications have been made to the seat
belt tensioner, seat belt anchorage or seat
belt retractor
Seat belts may sustain non-visible damage in
an accident, e.g. due to glass splinters.
Modied or damaged seat belts could tear or
fail in the event of an accident, for example.
Modied seat belt tensioners could acciden-
tally trigger or fail to function as intended.
#Never modify the seat belt system, for
example the seat belt, seat belt buckle,
seat belt tensioner, seat belt anchorage
and seat belt retractor.
#Make sure that the seat belts are undam-
aged, not worn and clean.
#Always have the seat belts checked
immediately aer an accident at a quali-
ed specialist workshop.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use seat
belts which have been approved for your vehicle
by Mercedes-Benz.
The seat is designed for the standard three-point
seat belt. If you t a dierent multipoint seat belt,
for example a four-point seat belt, the restraint
system cannot provide the intended level of pro-
tection.
Depending on the type of vehicle, there may be
openings in the seat backrest. These openings
have no function.
&WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury due
to modied seat belt systems
If you feed seat belts through the opening in
the seat backrest, the seat backrest may be
damaged or may even break in the event of an
accident.
#Only use the standard three-point seat
belt.
#Never modify the seat belt system.
52 Occupant safety
&WARNING Risk of injury due to modica-
tions to the cover of an airbag
If you modify the cover of an airbag or ax
objects such as stickers to it, the airbag can
no longer function as intended.
#Never modify the cover of an airbag.
#Do not attach any objects to the cover.
The installation location of an airbag is identied
by the AIRBAG symbol (/ page 54).
&WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunc-
tioning sensors in the door
The function of the airbags can be impaired
due to modications or incorrect work per-
formed on the doors or door trim, or if the
doors are damaged.
#Never modify the doors or parts of the
doors.
#Always have work on the doors or door
trim carried out at a qualied specialist
workshop.
Risk due to components of the restraint system
which have already been deployed
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the
vehicle towed to a qualied specialist workshop
aer an accident.
&WARNING Risk of burns from hot airbag
components
The airbag parts are hot aer an airbag has
been deployed.
#Do not touch the airbag parts.
#Have a deployed airbag replaced at a
qualied specialist workshop as soon as
possible.
&WARNING Risk of injury due to deployed
airbag
A deployed airbag no longer oers any protec-
tion.
#Have the vehicle towed to a qualied
specialist workshop in order to have the
deployed airbag replaced.
Have deployed airbags replaced immediately.
&WARNING Risk of injury or death from
deployed pyrotechnic seat belt tensioners
Pyrotechnic seat belt tensioners that have
been deployed are no longer operational and
are unable to perform their intended protec-
tive function.
#Therefore, have deployed pyrotechnic
seat belt tensioners immediately
replaced at a qualied specialist work-
shop.
Seat belts
Releasing seat belts
#Press the release button in the seat belt
buckle and guide the seat belt back with the
seat belt tongue.
*NOTE Damage caused by trapping the
seat belt
If an unused seat belt is not fully retracted, it
may become trapped in the door or in the seat
mechanism.
Occupant safety 53
#Always ensure that an unused seat belt
is fully retracted.
Airbags
Overview of airbags
1Knee airbag
2Driver's airbag
3Front passenger airbag
4Window airbag
5Side airbag
The installation location of an airbag is identied
by the AIRBAG symbol.
Observe the information in "Overview of deploy-
ment situations" (/ page 48).
54 Occupant safety
Brief overview of most important points
Safely transporting children in the vehicle
Always observe the following when transporting
children:
RNever leave children unattended in the vehicle
(/ page 57).
RSecure children up to a height of 1.50 m on
the respective seat (see illustration above)
properly with a suitable and approved child
restraint system (/ page 62), and secure
small children in a rearward-facing child
restraint system.
RObserve the child restraint system manufac-
turer's installation instructions.
Le/right rear seat (preferred seats)
Preferred securing system:
®ISOFIX mounting bracket (/ page 65)
or
°i‑Size mounting bracket (/ page 66)
and
¯Also secure Top Tether if present
(/ page 71).
Alternative securing system:
7Vehicle seat belt
¯Additionally attach Top Tether if recom-
mended by the manufacturer of the child
restraint system (/ page 71).
The following child restraint systems within the
Universal category are approved: U, UF, i-U, IUF.
Observe the other alternatives for use
(/ page 65).
Front passenger seat
Securing system:
7Vehicle seat belt
Be sure to observe:
RIf the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure
that the status of the front passenger airbag is
correct for the current situation (/ page 43).
The following child restraint systems within the
Universal category are approved: U(*), UF.
Observe the other alternatives for use
(/ page 67).
(*) rearward-facing child restraint system only in
combination with automatic airbag shuto
Centre rear seat
Securing system:
7Vehicle seat belt
Safely transporting children in the vehicle 55
The following belt-secured child restraint systems
within the Universal category are approved: U, UF.
Observe the other alternatives for use
(/ page 73).
Important safety notes
Basic information
Be diligent
Bear in mind that negligence when securing a
child in the child restraint system may have seri-
ous consequences. Always be diligent in securing
a child carefully before every journey.
Never allow babies and children to travel sitting
on the lap of another vehicle occupant.
To improve protection for children younger than
12 years old or under 1.50 m in height,
Mercedes-Benz recommends you observe the fol-
lowing information:
RAlways secure the child in a child restraint sys-
tem suitable for this Mercedes-Benz vehicle.
RThe child restraint system must be appropriate
to the age, weight and size of the child.
RThe vehicle seat must be suitable for the child
restraint system to be tted:
-ISOFIX mounting brackets: (/ page 65)
-i‑Size mounting brackets: (/ page 66)
-Securing with the vehicle seat belt:
(/ page 67)
Accident statistics show that children secured on
the rear seats are generally safer than children
secured on the front seats. For this reason,
Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you t a
child restraint system to a rear seat.
The generic term child restraint system
The generic term child restraint system is used in
this Owner's Manual. A child restraint system is,
for example:
Ra baby car seat
Ra rearward-facing child seat
Ra forward-facing child seat
Ra child booster seat – Mercedes-Benz recom-
mends using a child booster seat with a back-
rest and seat belt guide.
Observe laws and legal requirements
Always observe the legal requirements when
using a child restraint system in the vehicle.
Make sure that the child restraint system is
approved in accordance with the valid test speci-
cations and guidelines. Further information can
be obtained at a qualied specialist workshop.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose.
Securing systems for child restraint systems in
the vehicle
Only use the following securing systems for child
restraint systems:
Rthe ISOFIX or i-Size mounting brackets
Rthe vehicle's seat belt system
Rthe Top Tether anchorages
Simply attaching to the ISOFIX mounting brackets
or i‑Size mounting brackets on the vehicle can
reduce the risk of tting the child restraint system
incorrectly.
When securing a child with the integrated seat
belt of the ISOFIX or i-Size child restraint system,
always comply with the permissible gross weight
56 Safely transporting children in the vehicle
for the child and child restraint system
(/ page 70).
Important warning notices
Always secure a child restraint system correctly
&WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
incorrect installation of the child restraint
system
The child can then not be protected or
restrained as intended.
#Be sure to comply with the manufactur-
er's installation instructions for the child
restraint system and its correct use.
#Make sure that the entire base of the
child restraint system always rests on
the sitting surface of the seat.
#Never place objects (e.g. cushions)
under or behind the child restraint sys-
tem.
#Use child restraint systems only with the
original cover designed for them.
#Always replace damaged covers with
genuine covers.
RAlways observe the vehicle-specic informa-
tion.
-Fitting an ISOFIX or i‑Size child restraint
system on the rear seat (/ page 70).
-Securing the child restraint system with
the seat belt (/ page 73).
RObserve the warning labels in the vehicle inte-
rior and on the child restraint system.
&WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
unsecured child restraint systems in the
vehicle
If the child restraint system is incorrectly tted
or not secured, it can become detached.
The child cannot then be protected or
restrained as intended.
The unused child restraint system can be
become detached and strike vehicle occu-
pants.
#Always comply with the manufacturer's
installation instructions for the child
restraint system and its correct use.
#Always t child restraint systems cor-
rectly, even if they are transported
unused in the vehicle.
Do not modify the child restraint system
&WARNING Risk of injury due to modica-
tions to the child restraint system
The child restraint system can no longer func-
tion properly. This poses an increased risk of
injury.
#Never modify a child restraint system.
#Only ax accessories which have been
specially approved for this child restraint
system by the child restraint system's
manufacturer.
Safely transporting children in the vehicle 57
Only use child restraint systems which are in
proper working condition
&WARNING Risk of injury or death caused
by the use of damaged child restraint sys-
tems
Child restraint systems or their retaining sys-
tems that have been subjected to stress in an
accident may not be able to perform their
intended protective function.
It may be the case that the child cannot be
properly restrained.
#Always immediately replace child
restraint systems that have been dam-
aged or involved in an accident.
#Have the securing systems for the child
restraint systems checked at a qualied
specialist workshop before installing a
child restraint system again.
Avoid direct sunlight
&WARNING Risk of burns when the child
seat is exposed to direct sunlight
If the child restraint system is exposed to
direct sunlight or heat, parts could heat up.
Children could suer burns from these parts,
particularly on metallic parts of the child
restraint system.
#Always make sure that the child restraint
system is not exposed to direct sunlight.
#Protect the child restraint system with a
blanket, for example.
#If the child restraint system has been
exposed to direct sunlight, allow it to
cool before securing a child into it.
#Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
Observe when stopping or parking
&WARNING Risk of fatal injury due to expo-
sure to extreme heat or cold in the vehicle
If persons, particularly children, are subjected
to prolonged exposure to intense heat or cold,
there is a risk of severe injury or even death.
#Never leave persons, particularly chil-
dren, unattended in the vehicle.
&WARNING Accident– and risk of injury
with unsupervised children in the vehicle
If you leave children unattended in the vehicle,
they can in particular
ROpen doors and thereby endanger other
persons or road users.
Rget out of the car and are hit by trac.
ROperate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, forexample.
58 Safely transporting children in the vehicle
In addition, the children could also set the
vehicle in motion, for exampleby:
Rreleasing the parking brake.
Rchange the gearbox setting.
Rstart the vehicle.
#Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
#When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
#Keep the key out of reach of children.
Overview of warning stickers in the vehicle
1Front passenger airbag warning (on the front
passenger sun visor) (/ page 59)
2Vehicles without automatic front passenger
airbag shuto (visible when the front
passenger door is open) (/ page 62)
Notes on rearward-facing and forward-facing child
restraint systems on the front passenger seat
&WARNING Risk of injury or death when
using a rearward-facing child restraint sys-
tem while the front passenger airbag is
enabled
If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child
restraint system on the front passenger seat
and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp is o, the front passenger airbag can
deploy in the event of an accident.
The child could be struck by the airbag.
#Always ensure that the front passenger
airbag is disabled. The PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit.
#NEVER use a rearward-facing child
restraint system on a seat with an ENA-
BLED FRONT AIRBAG. This can result in
the DEATH of or SERIOUS INJURY to the
CHILD.
Safely transporting children in the vehicle 59
Observe the specic instructions for the rear-
ward-facing and forward-facing child restraint sys-
tems (/ page 68).
If it is absolutely necessary to install a child
restraint system on the front passenger seat,
always observe the additional notes.
RThe notes on automatic front passenger airbag
shuto (/ page 44).
RWhen using a rearward-facing child restraint
system on the front passenger seat, the front
passenger airbag must always be disabled.
This is only the case if the PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit continuously
(/ page 43).
RThe front passenger airbag is enabled when
the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
is not lit. The front passenger airbag may be
deployed during an accident. In that case, do
not use rearward-facing child restraint sys-
tems.
Information on the automatic front passenger air-
bag shuto
If the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure,
both before and during the journey, that the sta-
tus of the front passenger airbag is correct for the
current situation.
&WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
objects between the seat surface and the
child restraint system
Objects between the seat surface and the
child restraint system could aect the function
of the automatic co-driver airbag shuto.
#Do not place any objects between the
seat surface and the child restraint sys-
tem.
#Make sure that the entire base of the
child restraint system is always resting
on the seat surface of the co-driver seat.
#The backrest of the forward-facing child
restraint system must, as far as possible,
be resting on the seat backrest of the
co-driver seat.
#It is essential to comply with the child
restraint system manufacturer's installa-
tion instructions.
When tting a child restraint system to the front
passenger seat, observe the vehicle-specic infor-
mation (/ page 59).
Rearward-facing child restraint system on the
front passenger seat
If a rearward-facing child restraint system is tted
on the front passenger seat, the front passenger
airbag must be disabled. The PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF indicator lamp must light up continu-
ously (/ page 43).
&WARNING Risk of injury or death when
using a rearward-facing child restraint sys-
tem while the front passenger airbag is
enabled
If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child
restraint system on the front passenger seat
and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp is o, the front passenger airbag can
deploy in the event of an accident.
60 Safely transporting children in the vehicle
The child could be struck by the airbag.
#Always ensure that the front passenger
airbag is disabled. The PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit.
#NEVER use a rearward-facing child
restraint system on a seat with an ENA-
BLED FRONT AIRBAG. This can result in
the DEATH of or SERIOUS INJURY to the
CHILD.
%The front passenger airbag is enabled
depending on the child restraint system and
the stature of the child. The PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF indicator lamp does not light up.
The front passenger airbag may be deployed
during an accident. If the front passenger air-
bag is in this status, no rearward-facing child
restraint system may be tted on the front
passenger seat.
Instead, t the rearward-facing child restraint
system to a suitable rear seat.
Forward-facing child restraint system on the front
passenger seat
If a forward-facing child restraint system is tted
on the front passenger seat, the front passenger
airbag may be automatically enabled or disabled.
The status of the front passenger airbag depends
on the child restraint system and the stature of
the child.
The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is
either lit continuously, or it is not lit (/ page 43).
Always observe the following information.
&WARNING Risk of injury or death caused
by incorrect positioning of the child
restraint system
If you secure a child in a forward-facing child
restraint system on the front passenger seat
and you position the front passenger seat too
close to the cockpit, in the event of an acci-
dent, the child could:
RCome into contact with the vehicle interior
if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp is lit, for example.
RBe struck by the airbag if the PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is o.
#Always move the front passenger seat as
far back as possible. In doing so, always
make sure that the shoulder belt strap is
correctly routed from the seat belt outlet
of the vehicle to the shoulder belt guide
on the child restraint system. The shoul-
der belt strap must be routed forwards
and downwards from the seat belt outlet.
If necessary, adjust the passenger seat
accordingly.
#Always comply with the child restraint
system manufacturer's installation
instructions.
Be sure to also observe the following further rela-
ted subjects:
RFunction of the automatic front passenger air-
bag shuto (/ page 43)
RSuitable positioning of the child restraint sys-
tem
Safely transporting children in the vehicle 61
Notes on vehicles without automatic front
passenger airbag shuto
Vehicles without automatic front passenger airbag
shuto have a special sticker axed to the side of
the cockpit on the front passenger side
(/ page 59).
Make sure you observe the following information:
RNever t a rearward-facing child restraint sys-
tem to the front passenger seat
RAlways t a rearward-facing child restraint sys-
tem to a suitable rear seat
RNotes on rearward-facing and forward-facing
child restraint systems on the front passenger
seat (/ page 59)
Suitable child restraint systems for the transport
of children
Information on the advantage of a rearward-facing
child restraint system
Transport a baby in a suitable rearward-facing
child restraint system only. It is also preferable to
transport a small child in a suitable rearward-
facing child restraint system. In this case, the
child sits in the opposite direction to the direction
of travel and faces backwards.
Babies and small children have comparatively
weak neck muscles in relation to the size and
weight of their head. The risk of injury to the cer-
vical spine during an accident can be reduced in a
rearward-facing child restraint system.
Approval categories for child restraint systems
Only child restraint systems that meet the follow-
ing UNECE standards are permitted for use in the
vehicle:
RUN-R44
RUN-R129
Identication on the child restraint system
The following information, e.g., is available on the
approval label on the child restraint system:
RApproval category
RChild weight group
RAuthorisation number
RChild restraint size class
Approval categories in accordance with UN-R44
Example of an approval label
RUniversal: child restraint systems in the "Uni-
versal" category are approved for installation
in vehicles. They can be used, in accordance
with overviews of the suitability of seats for
securing child restraint systems, on seats
labelled U, UF or IUF.
62 Safely transporting children in the vehicle
The identication IUF refers to ISOFIX child
restraint systems in the "Universal" category.
These child restraint systems must also be
secured with Top Tether.
RSemi-Universal: child restraint systems in the
"Semi-Universal" category may only be used if
the vehicle and vehicle seat are listed in the
child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle
model list.
RVehicle-specic: child restraint systems in the
"vehicle-specic" category may only be used if
the vehicle and vehicle seat are listed in the
child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle
model list.
Approval categories in accordance with UN-R129
Example of an approval label
Ri‑Sizechild restraint systems and booster seats
with backrest: suitable for attachment to i‑Size
mounting brackets. They can be used on the
seats marked i‑U.
Child restraint systems in this category can
also be attached to ISOFIX bars if approved by
the child restraint system manufacturer. i‑Size
booster seats with backrest can be used on
seats marked U if the seat is approved for cat-
egory B2/B3.
RBelted child restraint systems and belted
booster seats without backrest of the Univer-
salcategory: suitable for attachment to the
seats marked U.
RVehicle-specic child restraint systems (ISO-
FIX or belted attachment as well as child
booster seats with and without backrest): suit-
able for attachment to the seats marked i‑U or
U if this is approved by the child restraint sys-
tem manufacturer.
Observe the suitability of vehicle seats
RSuitability of the seats for attaching ISOFIX
child restraint systems (/ page 65)
RSuitability of seats for securing i‑Size child
restraint systems (/ page 66).
RSuitability of seats for attaching belt-secured
child restraint systems (/ page 67)
Safely transporting children in the vehicle 63
Overview of recommended child restraint systems
%Further information on the correct child
restraint system can be obtained at a quali-
ed specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz rec-
ommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz
Service Centre for this purpose.
Securing with ISOFIX
Weight category 0+ (up to 13 kg and up to
approximately 15 months)
Type1BABY SAFE plus
(including base)
Size category E
Approval E1 04 301 146
Order number2B6 6 86 8224
1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer. 2 With colour code 9H95.
Weight category I (9 to 18 kg and from approx-
imately 9 months to 4 years)
Type1DUO plus
Size category B1
Approval E1 04 301 133
Order number2A 000 970 43 02
1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer. 2 With colour code 9H95.
Securing with the vehicle seat belt
Weight category 0 (up to 10 kg and approximately
6 months) and weight category 0+ (up to 13 kg
and approximately 15 months)
Type1BABY SAFE plus II
Approval E1 04 301 146
Order number2A 000 970 38 02
1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer. 2 With colour code 9H95.
Weight category I (9 to 18 kg and from approx-
imately 9 months to 4 years)
Type1DUO plus
Approval E1 04 301 133
Order number2A 000 970 43 02
1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer. 2 With colour code 9H95.
Weight category II/III (15 to 36 kg and from
approximately 3 to 12 years)
Type1KIDFIX XP
Approval E1 04 301 304
Order number2A 000 970 49 02
Type1AMG KIDFIX XP
Approval E1 04 301 304
Order number2A 000 970 33 02
1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer. 2 With colour code 9H95.
64 Safely transporting children in the vehicle
Suitable seats for attaching child restraint sys-
tems
Overview of suitability of the seats for attaching
ISOFIX child restraint systems
ISOFIX is a standardised securing system for spe-
cially designed child restraint systems.
®The symbol indicates seats suitable for
attaching an ISOFIX child restraint system
in accordance with UN R44 (/ page 62).
°ISOFIX child restraint systems can also be
installed on seats with i‑Size markings
(/ page 66).
Attach only ISOFIX child restraint systems that
are approved in accordance with UN R44 as per
the following ISOFIX tables.
Legend for the following ISOFIX tables
X Not suitable for an ISOFIX child restraint
system in this weight group and/or size
class.
IL Suitable for ISOFIX child restraint sys-
tems according to the table in "Overview
of the recommended child restraint sys-
tems", or if the vehicle and the seat are
listed on the child restraint system manu-
facturer's vehicle model list.
IUF Suitable for forward-facing ISOFIX child
restraint systems of the "Universal" cate-
gory in this weight group.
U Suitable for child restraint systems of the
"Universal" category in this weight cate-
gory.
L Suitable for semi-universal child restraint
systems according to the table in "Rec-
ommended child restraint systems", or if
the vehicle and the seat are listed in the
child restraint system manufacturer's
vehicle model list.
UF Suitable for forward-facing child restraint
systems of the "Universal" category in
this weight category.
Carry cot
Size class –
Equipment
Le/right rear seat
F – ISO/L1 X
G – ISO/L2 X
Weight group 0 (up to 10 kg and up to approx. 6
months)
Size class –
Equipment
Le/right rear seat
E – ISO/R1 IL
Safely transporting children in the vehicle 65
Weight group 0+ (up to 13 kg and up to approx.
15 months)
Size class –
Equipment
Le/right rear seat
E – ISO/R1 IL
D – ISO/R2,
ISO/R2X IL
C – ISO/R3 IL (1)
(1) When using a child restraint system of size class (ISO/R3),
move the front seat into the highest position. Make sure that the
seat backrest of the front seat does not rest against the child
restraint system.
Weight group 1 (9–18 kg and approx. 9 months to
4 years)
Size class –
Equipment
Le/right rear seat
D – ISO/R2,
ISO/R2X IL
C – ISO/R3 IL (1)
Size class –
Equipment
Le/right rear seat
B – ISO/F2 IUF
B1 – ISO/F2X IUF
A – ISO/F3 IUF
(1) When using a child restraint system of size class (ISO/R3),
move the front seat into the highest position. Make sure that the
seat backrest of the front seat does not rest against the child
restraint system.
Overview of suitability of the seats for attaching
i‑Size child restraint systems
i‑Size is a standardised securing system for spe-
cially designed child restraint systems.
°i‑Size child restraint systems can be
attached to a seat with the i‑Size marking
(/ page 62).
Child restraint systems that are approved
in accordance with the following i‑Size
table may be attached.
Legend for the following i‑Size tables
X Not suitable for an i‑Size child restraint
system in the "Universal" category.
i‑U Suitable for forward-facing and rearward-
facing i‑Size child restraint systems in
the "Universal" category.
Le and right rear seat
i‑Size child restraint systems (ISO/R1,
ISO/R2, ISO/R2X, ISO/R3, ISO/F2,
ISO/F2X, ISO/F3, ISO/B2, ISO/B3)
i‑U
Front passenger seat
i‑Size child restraint systems (ISO/R1,
ISO/R2, ISO/R2X, ISO/R3, ISO/F2,
ISO/F2X, ISO/F3, ISO/B2, ISO/B3)
X
66 Safely transporting children in the vehicle
Overview of the suitability of seats for attaching
belt-secured child restraint systems
Legend for the following tables
U Suitable for child restraint systems of the
"Universal" category in this weight cate-
gory.
X Not suitable for children in this weight
category.
L Suitable for semi-universal child restraint
systems according to the table in "Rec-
ommended child restraint systems", or if
the vehicle and the seat are listed in the
child restraint system manufacturer's
vehicle model list.
UF Suitable for forward-facing child restraint
systems of the "Universal" category in
this weight category.
Rear seats
Weight category 0: to 10 kg
Le/right rear seat U, L
Centre rear seat1U, L
Weight category 0+: to 13 kg
Le/right rear seat U, L
Centre rear seat1U, L
Weight category I: 9 to 18 kg
Le/right rear seat U, L
Centre rear seat1U, L
Weight category II: 15 to 25 kg
Le/right rear seat U, L
Centre rear seat1U, L
Weight category III: 22 to 36 kg
Le/right rear seat U, L
Centre rear seat1U, L
1 Child restraint systems with a supporting bracket are not suitable
for this seat.
Notes on child restraint systems on the front
passenger seat
RIf it is absolutely necessary for you to t a
child restraint system to the front passenger
seat, be sure to observe the information on
child restraint systems on the front passenger
seat (/ page 59).
RObserve the specic instructions for the rear-
ward-facing and forward-facing child restraint
systems. If the front passenger seat is occu-
pied, ensure, both before and during the jour-
ney, that the status of the front passenger air-
bag is correct for the current situation
(/ page 43).
Front passenger seat
Weight category 0: to 10 kg
Front passenger airbag enabled1X
Front passenger airbag disabled1, 2 U, L
Weight category 0+: to 13 kg
Front passenger airbag enabled1X
Safely transporting children in the vehicle 67
Front passenger airbag disabled1, 2 U, L
Weight category I: 9 to 18 kg
Front passenger airbag enabled1UF, L
Front passenger airbag disabled1, 2 U, L
Weight category II: 15 to 25 kg
Front passenger airbag enabled1UF, L
Front passenger airbag disabled1, 2 U, L
Weight category III: 22 to 36 kg
Front passenger airbag enabled1UF, L
Front passenger airbag disabled1, 2 U, L
1 Adjust the seat cushion inclination so that the front edge of the
seat cushion is in the highest position and the rear edge of the seat
cushion is in the lowest position.
2 The vehicle is equipped with automatic front passenger airbag
shuto. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit.
Securing the child restraint system
Adjusting the seat correctly
When tting a child restraint system on the le or
right rear seat, always observe the following:
#Make sure that the child's feet do not touch
the front seat. If necessary, move the front
seat slightly forwards.
If the head restraint of the child restraint system
cannot be fully extended when it is installed in the
vehicle, this will result in restrictions on the maxi-
mum size setting for certain child restraint sys-
tems. Observe the child restraint system manu-
facturer's installation instructions.
%Contact with the roof when the head restraint
is fully extended and locked in place will not
result in any restrictions on use.
®° When tting an ISOFIX or i‑Size child
restraint system, also observe the following:
#When using a rearward-facing child restraint
system on a rear seat: adjust the front seat so
that it does not touch the child restraint sys-
tem.
#When using a forward-facing child restraint
system with integrated child seat belt: adjust
the head restraint of the respective seat so
that it does not push the child restraint system
forwards. If necessary, the respective head
restraint can be removed. In addition, the
backrest of the child restraint system must lie
as at as possible against the backrest of the
vehicle seat. Aer the child restraint system
has been removed, replace the vehicle head
restraint immediately and adjust correctly.
#The child restraint system must not be put
under strain between the roof and the seat
cushion and/or be tted facing the wrong
direction. Where possible, adjust the seat
cushion inclination accordingly.
#Adjust the vehicle head restraints so that the
child restraint system is not put under strain
by the head restraint.
7 When tting a belt-secured child restraint
system, also observe the following:
#When using a rearward-facing child restraint
system on a rear seat: adjust the front seat so
68 Safely transporting children in the vehicle
that it does not touch the child restraint sys-
tem.
#When using a forward-facing child restraint
system with integrated child seat belt: adjust
the head restraint of the respective seat so
that it does not push the child restraint system
forwards. If necessary, the respective head
restraint can be removed. In addition, the
backrest of the child restraint system must lie
as at as possible against the backrest of the
vehicle seat. Aer the child restraint system
has been removed, replace the vehicle head
restraint immediately and adjust correctly.
#The backrest of the forward-facing child
restraint system must, as far as possible, be
resting on the seat backrest of the rear seat.
#The child restraint system must not be put
under strain between the roof and the seat
cushion and/or be tted facing the wrong
direction. Where possible, adjust the seat
cushion inclination accordingly.
#Adjust the vehicle head restraints so that the
child restraint system is not put under strain
by the head restraint.
#Make sure that the child's feet do not touch
the front seat. If necessary, move the front
seat slightly forwards.
7 Depending on the vehicle equipment,
always observe the following when tting a belt-
secured child restraint system on the front
passenger seat:
#Observe the notes on rearward-facing and
forward-facing child restraint systems on the
front passenger seat (/ page 59).
#When using a forward-facing child restraint
system integrated child seat belt: remove the
head restraint from the respective seat, if pos-
sible. Aer the child restraint system has been
removed, immediately replace the head
restraint and adjust correctly.
#The backrest of the forward-facing child
restraint system must, as far as possible, be
resting on the seat backrest of the front
passenger seat.
#The child restraint system must not be put
under strain between the roof and the seat
cushion and/or be tted facing the wrong
direction.
#Adjust the vehicle head restraints so that the
child restraint system is not put under strain
by the head restraint.
#Never place objects (e.g. cushions) under or
behind the child restraint system.
#Set the front passenger seat as far back as
possible and move the seat into the highest
possible position. Always make sure that the
shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from
the seat belt outlet of the vehicle to the shoul-
der belt guide on the child restraint system.
The shoulder belt strap must be routed for-
wards from the seat belt outlet and, where
possible, downwards to the child restraint sys-
tem.
#Fully retract the seat cushion length adjust-
ment.
#Adjust the seat cushion inclination so that the
front edge of the seat cushion is in the highest
position and the rear edge of the seat cushion
is in the lowest position.
Safely transporting children in the vehicle 69
#Set the seat backrest to the most vertical
position possible.
Fitting an ISOFIX or i-Size child restraint system
&WARNING Risk of accident if the rear
bench seat, rear seat and seat backrest
are not engaged
The rear bench seat, rear seat and seat back-
rest may fold forwards, even while the vehicle
is in motion.
RAs a result, the vehicle occupant will be
pressed into the seat belt with increased
force. The seat belt will not be able to pro-
tect as intended and could cause addi-
tional injury.
RObjects or loads in the boot or load com-
partment cannot be restrained by the seat
backrest.
#Make sure that the rear bench seat, the
rear seat and the seat backrest are
engaged before every trip.
If the rear seat backrest is not engaged and
locked in place, the red lock verication indicator
will be visible.
&WARNING Risk of injury or death if the
permissible gross mass of the child and
child restraint system together is excee-
ded.
Too much load may be placed on the ISOFIX
or i‑Size child restraint systems and the child
may not be restrained correctly in the event of
an accident, for example.
#If the child is secured in an ISOFIX or i-
Size child restraint system with integra-
ted seat belts, the total mass of the child
and child restraint system must not
exceed 33 kg.
Always comply with the information about the
mass of the child restraint system:
Rin the manufacturer's installation and operat-
ing instructions for the child restraint system
used
Ron a label on the child restraint system, if
present
Regularly check that the permissible gross mass
of the child and child restraint system is still com-
plied with.
When tting a child restraint system, observe the
following:
OAlways observe the correct use of the seats
and consider their suitability for attaching a
child restraint system.
ISOFIX mounting brackets (/ page 65)
or
i‑Size mounting brackets (/ page 66)
70 Safely transporting children in the vehicle
1ISOFIX mounting bracket
2i‑Size mounting bracket
#Before every journey, make sure that the ISO-
FIX child restraint system or the i‑Size child
restraint system is engaged correctly in both
mounting brackets in the vehicle.
*NOTE Damage to the seat belt for the
centre seat during installation of the child
restraint system
#Make sure that the seat belt is not trap-
ped.
#Attach the ISOFIX or i‑Size child restraint sys-
tem to both mounting brackets in the vehicle.
Fastening a Top Tether
&WARNING Risk of injury or death if the
rear seat backrests are not locked aer
Top Tether belts are tted
The rear seat backrests may fold forwards
when you are driving.
As a result, child restraint systems will no lon-
ger be able to perform their intended protec-
tive function. This may also cause additional
injuries.
#Always lock rear seat backrests aer t-
ting Top Tether belts.
#Observe the lock verication indicator.
If the rear seat backrest is not engaged and
locked in place, the red lock verication indicator
will be visible.
¯If the child restraint system is equipped
with a Top Tether belt:
The risk of injury may be reduced by Top
Tether. The Top Tether belt enables an
additional connection between the child
restraint system attached with ISOFIX or
i‑Size and the vehicle.
Safely transporting children in the vehicle 71
#Fold up cover 2 of Top Tether anchorage 3.
Vehicles with adjustable head restraints:
#If necessary, slide head restraint 1 upwards
(/ page 107).
#Guide Top Tether belt 4 under head restraint
1 between the two head restraint bars.
Vehicles without adjustable head restraints:
#Top Tether belt with one seat belt strap: guide
Top Tether belt 4 over the centre of head
restraint 1.
or
#Top Tether belt with two seat belt straps: guide
one Top Tether belt 4 past head restraint 1
on the right and le sides respectively.
All vehicles:
#Fit the ISOFIX or i‑Size child restraint system
with Top Tether. In doing so, comply with the
child restraint system manufacturer's installa-
tion instructions.
#Hook Top Tether hook 5 of Top Tether belt
4 into Top Tether anchorage 3 without
twisting.
#Tension Top Tether belt 4. In doing so, com-
ply with the child restraint system manufactur-
er's installation instructions.
#Fold down cover 2 of Top Tether anchorage
3.
Vehicles with adjustable head restraints:
#If necessary, slide head restraint 1 down-
wards (/ page 107). Make sure that you do
not interfere with the correct routing of Top
Tether belt 4.
72 Safely transporting children in the vehicle
Securing the child restraint system with the seat
belt
&WARNING Risk of accident if the rear
bench seat, rear seat and seat backrest
are not engaged
The rear bench seat, rear seat and seat back-
rest may fold forwards, even while the vehicle
is in motion.
RAs a result, the vehicle occupant will be
pressed into the seat belt with increased
force. The seat belt will not be able to pro-
tect as intended and could cause addi-
tional injury.
RObjects or loads in the boot or load com-
partment cannot be restrained by the seat
backrest.
#Make sure that the rear bench seat, the
rear seat and the seat backrest are
engaged before every trip.
If the rear seat backrest is not engaged and
locked in place, the red lock verication indicator
will be visible.
#For a child restraint system in the "Universal"
or "Semi-Universal" category, make sure that
the system has been approved for the vehicle
seat.
#Install the child restraint system.
The entire base of the child restraint system
must always rest on the sitting surface of the
seat.
#Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap
is correctly routed from the seat belt outlet of
the vehicle to the shoulder belt guide on the
child restraint system.
The shoulder belt strap must be routed for-
wards from the seat belt outlet and, where
possible, downwards to the child restraint sys-
tem.
#When tting on the rear seat: also secure Top
Tether if present.
#When tting on the front passenger seat: if
necessary, adjust the seat belt outlet and the
front passenger seat accordingly.
Child safety locks
Activating or deactivating the child safety lock for
the rear doors
&WARNING Accident– and risk of injury
with unsupervised children in the vehicle
If you leave children unattended in the vehicle,
they can in particular
ROpen doors and thereby endanger other
persons or road users.
Rget out of the car and are hit by trac.
ROperate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, forexample.
In addition, the children could also set the
vehicle in motion, for exampleby:
Rreleasing the parking brake.
Rchange the gearbox setting.
Rstart the vehicle.
#Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
Safely transporting children in the vehicle 73
#When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
#Keep the key out of reach of children.
&WARNING Risk of fatal injury due to expo-
sure to extreme heat or cold in the vehicle
If persons, particularly children, are subjected
to prolonged exposure to intense heat or cold,
there is a risk of severe injury or even death.
#Never leave persons, particularly chil-
dren, unattended in the vehicle.
&WARNING Risk of accident and injury due
to children le unattended in the vehicle
If children are travelling in the vehicle, they
could, in particular:
Ropen doors, thereby endangering other
persons or road users.
Rget out and be struck by oncoming trac.
Roperate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example.
#Always activate the installed child safety
locks if children are travelling in the vehi-
cle.
#Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
#When leaving the vehicle, always take the
key with you and lock the vehicle.
Vehicles for the United Kingdom: observe the
important safety notes in the "Notes on the addi-
tional door lock" section.
There are child safety locks for the rear doors and
the rear side windows.
The child safety lock on the rear doors secures
each door separately. The doors can no longer be
opened from the inside. #Press the lever in direction 1 (activate) or 2
(deactivate).
#Make sure that the child safety locks are work-
ing properly.
74 Safely transporting children in the vehicle
Activating and deactivating the child safety lock
for the rear side windows
#To activate/deactivate: press button 2.
The rear side window can be opened or closed
in the following cases:
Rindicator lamp 1 is lit: via the switch on
the driver's door
Rindicator lamp 1 is o: via the switch on
the corresponding rear door or driver's
door
Safely transporting children in the vehicle 75
Key
Overview of key functions
&WARNING Accident– and risk of injury
with unsupervised children in the vehicle
If you leave children unattended in the vehicle,
they can in particular
ROpen doors and thereby endanger other
persons or road users.
Rget out of the car and are hit by trac.
ROperate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, forexample.
In addition, the children could also set the
vehicle in motion, for exampleby:
Rreleasing the parking brake.
Rchange the gearbox setting.
Rstart the vehicle.
#Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
#When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
#Keep the key out of reach of children.
*NOTE Damage to the key caused by mag-
netic elds
#Keep the key away from strong magnetic
elds.
Vehicle key
1Locking
2Indicator lamp
3Unlocking
4Opening the boot lid
%If indicator lamp 2 does not light up aer
pressing the Ü or ß button, the battery
is weak or possibly discharged. Replace the
battery as soon as possible.
Replace the key battery (/ page 78).
The key locks and unlocks the following compo-
nents:
RDoors
RFuel ller ap
RSocket ap (plug-in hybrid)
RBoot lid
If the vehicle is not opened within approximately
40 seconds aer unlocking, it locks again. Anti-
the protection is primed again.
Do not keep the key together with electronic devi-
ces or metal objects. This can aect the key's
functionality.
76 Opening and closing
Activating/deactivating the acoustic locking veri-
cation signal
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5Vehicle
5Open/close
#Activate or deactivate the Acoustic lock.
%Please observe:
The selected setting for the acoustic locking
verication signal must comply with the rele-
vant national road and trac regulations. In
some countries, including Germany, using the
acoustic locking verication signal is forbid-
den by trac laws (in accordance with §16
Para. 1 and §30 Para. 1 of the German
national road trac regulations). The driver of
the vehicle must comply with these regula-
tions. In countries where the use of this func-
tion is forbidden, this function is not activated
in the vehicle and must not be activated.
Changing the unlocking settings
Possible unlocking functions of the key:
RCentral unlocking
RUnlocking the driver's door and fuel ller ap
RPlug-in hybrid: unlocking the driver's door and
fuel ller ap/socket ap
#To switch between settings: press the Ü
and ß buttons simultaneously for approx-
imately six seconds until the indicator lamp
ashes twice.
Options if the unlocking function for the driver's
door and fuel ller ap has been selected:
RTo unlock the vehicle centrally: press the
Ü button twice.
RVehicles with KEYLESS-GO: if you touch the
inner surface of the door handle on the driv-
er's door, only the driver's door and the fuel
ller ap are unlocked.
Options if the unlocking function for the driver's
door and fuel ller ap/socket ap has been
selected (plug-in-hybrid):
RTo unlock the vehicle centrally: press the
Ü button twice.
RVehicles with KEYLESS-GO: if you touch the
inner surface of the door handle on the driv-
er's door, only the driver's door and the fuel
ller ap/socket ap are unlocked.
Deactivating the function of the key
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: if you deactivate the
function of the key, the KEYLESS-GO functions are
also deactivated. Access or drive authorization by
KEYLESS-GO is then no longer possible with that
particular key. Activate the function of the key so
that all its functions will again be available.
You can also deactivate the function of the key to
reduce the energy consumption of the key if you
do not use the vehicle or a key for an extended
period of time.
#Press and hold the key ß button.
#With the key button ß pressed, immedi-
ately press key button Ü twice in quick
succession.
The indicator light of the key lights up once
briey and once for a long time.
%You have the following options to reactivate
the key:
RPress any key on the key.
Opening and closing 77
RStart the vehicle with the key in the centre
console storage compartment
(/ page 158).
Removing/inserting the emergency key
Removing the emergency key
#Press release button 1.
Emergency key 2 is pushed out slightly.
#Pull out emergency key 2 until it engages in
the intermediate position.
%Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the
intermediate position is not available.
#Press release button 1 again and fully
remove emergency key 2.
Inserting the emergency key
#Press release button 1.
#Insert emergency key 2 to the intermediate
position or fully until it engages.
%You can use the intermediate position of
emergency key 2 to attach the key to a key
ring.
Replacing the key battery
&DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to swal-
lowing batteries
Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substan-
ces. If batteries are swallowed or otherwise
enter the body, severe internal burns can
occur within two hours.
There is a risk of fatal injury!
#Keep the batteries out of the reach of
children.
#If the lid and/or the battery compart-
ment do not close securely, stop using
the key and keep it away from children.
#If batteries are swallowed or otherwise
enter the body, seek immediate medical
attention.
+ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental
damage due to improper disposal of bat-
teries
Batteries contain pollutants. It is illegal
to dispose of them with the household rub-
bish.
#
Dispose of batteries in an
environmentally responsible manner.
Take discharged batteries to a qualied
specialist workshop or to a collection
point for used batteries.
78 Opening and closing
Requirements
RYou require a CR 2032 3 V cell battery.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the
battery replaced at a qualied specialist work-
shop.
#Remove the emergency key (/ page 78).
#Press release knob 2 down fully and slide
cover 1 in the direction of the arrow.
#Fold out cover 1 in the direction of the arrow
and remove.
#Remove battery compartment 3 and take
out the discharged battery.
#Insert the new battery into battery compart-
ment 3. Observe the positive pole marking in
the battery compartment and on the battery
when doing this.
#Push in battery compartment 3.
#Re-attach cover 1 and push it until it
engages.
Problems with the key, troubleshooting
You can no longer lock or unlock the vehicle
Possible causes:
RThe key battery is weak or discharged.
#Check the battery using the indicator lamp
(/ page 76).
#Replace the key battery, if necessary
(/ page 78).
#Use the replacement key.
#Use the emergency key to lock or unlock
(/ page 83).
#Have key checked at a qualied specialist
workshop.
There is interference from a powerful radio signal
source
Possible causes if the function of the key is
impaired:
Rhigh voltage power lines
Rmobile phones
Relectronic devices (notebooks, tablets)
Rshielding due to metal objects or induction
loops for electrical gate systems or automatic
barriers
#Make sure that there is sucient distance
between the key and the potential source of
interference.
You have lost a key
#Have the key deactivated at a qualied spe-
cialist workshop.
#If necessary, have the mechanical lock
replaced as well.
Opening and closing 79
Doors
Notes on the additional door lock
The additional door lock is only available for vehi-
cles for the United Kingdom.
&WARNING Risk of injury to persons inside
the vehicle when the additional door lock
is activated
If the additional door lock is activated, the
doors can no longer be opened from the
inside.
#Never leave persons, in particular chil-
dren, unattended in the vehicle.
#If there are persons in the vehicle, do not
activate the additional door lock.
The additional door lock is automatically activated
in the following situations:
RThe vehicle is locked using the key.
RThe vehicle is locked using KEYLESS-GO.
If the vehicle has been locked via Mercedes me
connect, the additional door lock is not activated
(/ page 311).
If the additional door lock is activated, the doors
cannot be opened from the inside.
%Aer locking you can issue a signal with the
horn.
You can prevent the additional door lock from
being activated by deactivating interior protection
before locking the vehicle (/ page 98).
Unlocking/opening the doors from the inside
#United Kingdom only: observe the notes on
the additional door lock (/ page 80).
#Pull the door 1 handle.
80 Opening and closing
Centrally locking and unlocking the vehicle from
the inside
#To unlock: press 1 button.
#To lock: press button 2.
The red indicator lamp on button 2 lights up
once the vehicle is locked.
This does not lock or unlock the fuel ller ap.
Plug-in hybrid: the socket ap is also locked and
unlocked. The socket ap can be opened even if a
key is detected in the car.
The vehicle is not unlocked:
Rif you have locked the vehicle using the key
Rif you have locked the vehicle using KEYLESS-
GO
Locking/unlocking the vehicle with KEYLESS-GO
Requirements:
RThe key is outside the vehicle.
RThe distance between the key and the vehicle
does not exceed 1 m.
RThe driver's door and the door on which the
door handle is used are closed.
*NOTE Damage to the vehicle caused by
unintentionally opening the boot lid
Rwhen using an automatic car wash
Rwhen using a high pressure cleaner
#Deactivate the function of the key in
these situations.
or
#Make sure that the key is at a minimum
distance of 3 m away from the vehicle.
Observe the notes:
Ron washing the vehicle in a car wash
(/ page 337)
Ron using a high pressure cleaner
(/ page 339)
Opening and closing 81
#To unlock the vehicle: touch the inner surface
of the door handle.
#To lock the vehicle: touch sensor surface 1
or 2.
#Convenience closing: touch recessed sensor
surface 2 until the closing process has been
completed.
%Further information on convenience closing
(/ page 91).
If you open the boot lid from outside, the boot lid
is automatically unlocked.
Problems with KEYLESS-GO, troubleshooting
You can no longer lock or unlock the vehicle using
KEYLESS-GO
Possible causes:
RThe function of the key has been deactivated.
RThe key battery is weak or discharged.
#Activate the function of the key (/ page 77).
#Check the battery using the indicator lamp
(/ page 76).
#Replace the key battery, if necessary
(/ page 78).
#Use the replacement key.
#Use the emergency key to lock or unlock
(/ page 83).
#Have the vehicle and key checked at a quali-
ed specialist workshop.
There is interference from a powerful radio signal
source
Possible causes if the function of KEYLESS-GO is
impaired:
Rhigh voltage power lines
Rmobile phones
Relectronic devices (notebooks, tablets)
Rshielding due to metal objects or induction
loops for electrical gate systems or automatic
barriers
#Make sure that there is sucient distance
between the key and the potential source of
interference.
Activating/deactivating the automatic locking fea-
ture
The vehicle is locked automatically when the vehi-
cle is switched on and the wheels are turning
faster than walking pace.
82 Opening and closing
#To activate: press and hold button 2 for
approximately ve seconds until an acoustic
signal sounds.
#To deactivate: press and hold button 1 for
approximately ve seconds until an acoustic
signal sounds.
The red indicator lamp on button 2 lights up
once the vehicle is locked.
In the following situations, there is a danger of
being locked out when the function is activated:
Rwhile the vehicle is being tow-started or
pushed
Rif the vehicle is being tested on a roller dyna-
mometer
Activating or deactivating the automatic locking
feature
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5Vehicle
5Open/close
%The vehicle is locked automatically when the
vehicle is switched on and the wheels are
turning faster than walking pace.
#Activate or deactivate Automatic locking.
In the following situations, there is a danger of
being locked out when the function is activated:
RThe vehicle is being towed or pushed.
RIf the vehicle is being tested on a roller dyna-
mometer.
Locking/unlocking the vehicle with the emer-
gency key
Locking/unlocking the driver's door with the
emergency key
%If you wish to lock the vehicle entirely using
the emergency key, rst press the button for
locking from the inside while the driver's door
is open. Then proceed to lock the driver's
door using the emergency key.
%If you unlock and open the driver's door with
the emergency key, this triggers the burglar
alarm system.
Opening and closing 83
#Remove the emergency key (/ page 78).
#Insert the emergency key as far as it will go
into opening 1 in the cover.
#Pull and hold the door handle.
#Pull the cover on the emergency key as
straight as possible away from the vehicle until
it releases.
#Release the door handle.
#To unlock: turn the emergency key anti-clock-
wise to position 1.
#To lock: turn the emergency key clockwise to
position 1.
#Carefully press the cover onto the lock cylin-
der until it engages and is seated rmly.
Locking the front passenger door and rear doors
#Insert a suitable object, e.g. the emergency
key, into opening 1 on the door lock.
#To lock the le-hand side of the vehicle: turn
the emergency key anti-clockwise as far as it
will go.
84 Opening and closing
#To lock the right-hand side of the vehicle: turn
the emergency key clockwise as far as it will
go.
If the locked door is then closed, it can no longer
be opened from the outside.
Boot
Opening the boot lid
&DANGER Risk of exhaust gas poisoning
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust
gases can enter the vehicle interior if the boot
lid is open when the engine is running, espe-
cially if the vehicle is in motion.
#Always switch o the engine before
opening the boot lid.
#Never drive with the boot lid open.
*NOTE Damage to the boot lid by obstacles
above the vehicle
The boot lid swings upwards when it is
opened.
#Therefore, make sure that there is su-
cient clearance above the boot lid.
#Pull the boot lid handle.
#Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: make a
kicking movement with your foot below the
bumper (/ page 86).
#Pull remote operating switch 1 until the boot
lid opens.
or
#Press and hold the p button on the key.
Opening and closing 85
Closing the boot lid
&WARNING Risk of injury from unsecured
items in the vehicle
If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or
not secured suciently, they could slip, tip
over or be thrown around and thereby hit vehi-
cle occupants.
There is a risk of injury, particularly in the
event of sudden braking or a sudden change
in direction.
#Always stow objects in such a way that
they cannot be thrown around.
#Before the journey, secure objects, lug-
gage or loads against slipping or tipping
over.
Observe the notes on loading the vehicle.
Notes on closing the boot lid: your vehicle is
equipped with automatic key recognition. If a key
belonging to the vehicle is detected in the vehicle,
the boot lid will not be locked and will pop open
again.
Note that the boot lid will not be locked if the fol-
lowing situation occurs:
RYou have locked the vehicle and close the
boot lid while a key belonging to the vehicle is
inside the vehicle.
and
RA second key belonging to the vehicle is not
detected outside the vehicle.
Automatic key recognition is only an aid and is not
a substitute for your attentiveness.
#Before locking, ensure that at least one key
belonging to the vehicle is outside the vehicle.
#To close the boot lid: pull the boot lid down-
wards using the handle recess and push it
closed.
HANDS-FREE ACCESS function
With HANDS-FREE ACCESS you can open the
boot lid by performing a kicking movement under
the bumper.
Observe the notes when opening the boot lid
(/ page 85).
86 Opening and closing
&WARNING Risk of burns caused by a hot
exhaust system
The vehicle exhaust system can become very
hot. If you use HANDS-FREE ACCESS, you
could burn yourself by touching the exhaust
system.
#Always ensure that you only make a kick-
ing movement within the detection range
of the sensors.
*NOTE Damage to the vehicle caused by
unintentionally opening the boot lid
Rwhen using an automatic car wash
Rwhen using a high pressure cleaner
#Deactivate the function of the key in
these situations.
or
#Make sure that the key is at a minimum
distance of 3 m away from the vehicle.
When making the kicking movement, make sure
that you are standing rmly on the ground. You
could otherwise lose your balance, e.g. on ice.
Observe the following notes:
RThe key is behind the vehicle.
RStand at least 30 cm away from the vehicle
while performing the kicking movement.
RDo not come into contact with the bumper
while making the kicking movement.
RDo not carry out the kicking movement too
slowly.
RThe kicking movement must be towards the
vehicle and back again.
1Detection range of the sensors
If several consecutive kicking movements are not
successful, wait ten seconds.
System limits
The system may be impaired or may not function
in the following cases:
RThe sensors are dirty, e.g. due to road salt or
snow.
RThe kicking movement is made using a pros-
thetic leg.
Opening and closing 87
The boot lid could be opened unintentionally, in
the following situations:
RA person's arms or legs are moving in the sen-
sor detection range, e.g. when polishing the
vehicle or picking up objects.
RObjects are moved or placed behind the vehi-
cle, e.g. the hose of a fuel dispenser, a charg-
ing cable or luggage
RClamping straps, tarpaulins or other coverings
are pulled over the bumper.
RA protective mat with a length reaching over
the boot sill down into the detection range of
the sensors is used.
RThe protective mat is not secured correctly.
RWork is being done on the trailer hitch, trailers
or rear bicycle racks.
Deactivate the function of the key (/ page 77) or
do not carry the key about your person in such
situations.
Activating/deactivating the boot lid opening lim-
iter
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5Vehicle
5Other functions
#Activate or deactivate Opening height limiter.
This function prevents the boot lid from hitting a
low garage ceiling, for example.
Side windows
Opening and closing the side windows
&WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when
opening a side window
When you open a side window, parts of the
body could be drawn in or become trapped
between the side window and window frame.
#When opening, make sure that nobody is
touching the side window.
#If someone is trapped, release the but-
ton immediately or pull it in order to
close the side window again.
&WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when
closing a side window
When closing a side window, body parts could
be trapped in the closing area in the process.
#When closing, make sure that no body
parts are in the closing area.
#If someone is trapped, release the but-
ton immediately or press the button in
order to reopen the side window.
&WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when
children operate the side windows
Children could become trapped if they operate
the side windows, particularly when unatten-
ded.
#Activate the child safety lock for the rear
side windows.
88 Opening and closing
#When leaving the vehicle, always take the
key with you and lock the vehicle.
#Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
Requirements
RThe power supply or the vehicle has been
switched on.
1Closing
2Opening
The buttons on the driver's door take precedence.
#To start automatic operation: press the W
button beyond the point of resistance or pull
and release it.
#To interrupt automatic operation: press or pull
the W button again.
When the vehicle is switched o, you can con-
tinue to operate the side windows.
This function is available for around four minutes
or until a front door is opened.
Automatic reversing function of the side windows
If an obstacle impedes a side window during the
closing process, the side window will open again
automatically. The automatic reversing function is
only an aid and is not a substitute for your atten-
tiveness.
#During the closing process, make sure that no
body parts are in the closing area.
&WARNING Risk of becoming trapped
despite there being reversing protection
on the side window
The reversing function does not react:
Rto so, light and thin objects, e.g. ngers.
Rduring resetting.
The reversing function cannot prevent some-
one from becoming trapped in these situa-
tions.
Opening and closing 89
#During the closing process, make sure
that no body parts are in the closing
area.
#If someone becomes trapped, press the
W button to open the side window
again.
Automatic function of the side windows
In the following cases, the side windows will be
closed automatically when the vehicle is switched
o:
Rif it starts to rain
Rain is detected by a rain sensor on the wind-
screen.
Rin extreme temperatures
Raer a certain time (depending on the on-
board electrical system voltage)
Rif there is a malfunction in the power supply
The side windows will be closed as far as the ven-
tilation position.
Vehicles with a panorama sliding sunroof: the side
windows will be closed completely if the sliding
sunroof is open.
If the side windows are obstructed during auto-
matic closing, the side window concerned will
open again slightly. Aer another automatic clos-
ing process, the automatic function may be deac-
tivated. The automatic function will be active
again the next time the vehicle is started.
Convenience opening (ventilating the vehicle
before starting a journey)
&WARNING Risk of entrapment when open-
ing a side window
When opening a side window, parts of the
body could be drawn in or become trapped
between the side window and window frame.
#When opening, make sure that nobody is
touching the side window.
#Release the button immediately if some-
body becomes trapped.
Requirements
RThe key is in the immediate vicinity of the vehi-
cle.
#Press and hold the Ü button on the key.
The following functions are performed:
RThe vehicle is unlocked.
RThe side windows are opened.
RThe panoramic sliding roof is opened.
%If the roller sunblind of the panoramic sliding
sunroof is closed, the roller sunblind is
opened rst.
#To interrupt convenience opening: release
Ü the button.
#To continue convenience opening: press and
hold the Ü button again.
90 Opening and closing
Convenience closing (closing the vehicle from out-
side)
&WARNING Risk of entrapment due to not
paying attention during convenience clos-
ing
When the convenience closing feature is oper-
ating, parts of the body could become trapped
in the closing area of the side window and the
sliding sunroof.
#When the convenience closing feature is
operating, monitor the entire closing
process and make sure that no body
parts are in the closing area.
Requirements
RThe key is in the immediate vicinity of the vehi-
cle.
#Press and hold the ß button on the key.
The following functions are performed:
RThe vehicle is locked.
RThe side windows are closed.
RThe panoramic sliding roof is closed.
#To interrupt convenience closing: release the
s button.
#To continue convenience closing: press and
hold the s button again.
%Convenience closing also functions with KEY-
LESS-GO (/ page 81).
Resolving problems with the side windows
&WARNING Risk of becoming trapped or
fatally injured if reversing protection is not
activated
If you close a side window again immediately
aer it has been blocked, the side window will
close with increased or maximum force. The
reversing function is then not active and body
parts may become trapped.
#Make sure that no parts of the body are
in the closing area.
#To stop the closing process, release the
button or press the button again to
reopen the side window.
A side window cannot be closed and you cannot
see the cause.
#Check to see whether any objects are in the
window guide.
#Adjust the side windows.
Adjusting the side windows
If a side window is obstructed during closing and
reopens again immediately:
#Immediately aer this, pull and hold the corre-
sponding button again until the side window
has closed and hold the button for at least one
more second (re-adjustment).
The side window will be closed without the
automatic reversing function.
If the side window is obstructed again and
reopens again immediately:
#Immediately aer this, pull and hold the corre-
sponding button again until the side window
has closed and hold the button for at least one
more second (follow-up adjustment).
The side window will be closed without the
automatic reversing function.
Opening and closing 91
The side windows cannot be opened or closed
using the convenience opening feature.
Possible causes:
RThe key battery is weak or discharged.
#Check the battery using the indicator lamp
(/ page 76).
#Replace the key battery, if necessary
(/ page 78).
Sliding sunroof
Opening and closing the sliding sunroof
%The term "sliding sunroof" also refers to the
panorama sliding sunroof.
&WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when
the sliding sunroof is being opened and
closed
Body parts may become trapped in the range
of movement.
#During opening and closing, make sure
that no body parts are in the range of
movement.
#Release the button immediately if some-
body becomes trapped.
or
#Briey press the button in any direction
during automatic operation.
The opening or closing process will be
stopped.
&WARNING Risk of entrapment if the slid-
ing sunroof is operated by children
Children operating the sliding sunroof could
get caught in the moving parts, particularly if
unattended.
#Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
#When leaving the vehicle, always take the
key with you and lock the vehicle.
&WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when
the roller sunblind is being opened and
closed
Body parts may become trapped between the
roller sunblind and frame or sliding roof.
#When opening or closing, make sure that
no body parts are in the roller sunblind's
range of movement.
#Release the button immediately if some-
body becomes trapped.
or
#Briey press the button in any direction
during automatic operation.
The opening or closing process will be
stopped.
*NOTE Malfunction due to snow and ice
Snow and ice may cause the sliding sunroof to
malfunction.
#Open the sliding sunroof only if it is free
of snow and ice.
92 Opening and closing
*NOTE Damage caused by protruding
objects
Objects that protrude from the sliding sunroof
may damage the seals.
#Do not allow anything to protrude from
the sliding sunroof.
*NOTE Damage to the panorama sliding
sunroof due to non-approved roof luggage
racks
The panorama sliding sunroof may be dam-
aged by the roof luggage rack if you attempt to
open it when using a roof luggage rack not
tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz.
#When a roof luggage rack is tted, open
the panorama sliding sunroof only if this
has been tested and approved for
Mercedes-Benz.
The panorama sliding sunroof may be raised
to allow ventilation of the vehicle interior.
1Raise
2Open
3Close/lower
Use the 3 button to operate the panorama
sliding sunroof and the roller sunblind.
The panorama sliding sunroof can be operated
only when the roller sunblind is open.
#Check whether the sliding sunroof can be
raised or opened when a roof luggage rack is
tted.
#To start automatic operation: press the 3
button beyond the point of resistance or pull
and release it.
#To interrupt automatic operation: briey press
the 3 button in any direction.
The opening/closing process will be stopped.
Automatic reversing function of the sliding sun-
roof
If an obstacle obstructs the sliding sunroof during
the closing process, the sliding sunroof will open
again automatically. The automatic reversing func-
tion is only an aid and is not a substitute for your
attentiveness.
#During the closing process, make sure that no
body parts are in the closing area.
Opening and closing 93
&WARNING Risk of becoming trapped
despite the reversing function being active
In particular, the reversing function does not
react:
Rto so, light and thin objects, e.g. ngers.
Rtowards the end of the closing procedure.
Rduring resetting.
#During the closing process, make sure
that no body parts are in the closing
area.
#Release the button immediately if some-
body becomes trapped.
or
#Briey press the button in any direction
during automatic operation.
The closing process will be stopped.
Automatic reversing function of the roller sunblind
If an obstacle obstructs the roller sunblind during
the closing process, the roller sunblind will open
again automatically. The automatic reversing func-
tion is only an aid and is not a substitute for your
attentiveness.
#When closing the roller sunblind, make sure
that no body parts are in the area of move-
ment.
&WARNING Risk of becoming trapped
despite reversing function
In particular, the reversing function does not
react to so, light and thin objects, e.g. n-
gers.
#When closing the roller sunblind, make
sure that no body parts are in the range
of movement.
#Release the button immediately if some-
body becomes trapped.
or
#Briey press the button in any direction
during the automatic closing process.
The closing process will be stopped.
Automatic functions of the sliding sunroof
%The term "sliding sunroof" also refers to the
panorama sliding sunroof.
The sliding sunroof will be closed automatically
when the vehicle has been switched o in the fol-
lowing situations:
Rif it starts to rain
Rain is detected by a rain sensor on the wind-
screen.
Rin extreme temperatures
Raer a certain time (depending on the on-
board electrical system voltage)
Rif there is a malfunction in the power supply
The sliding sunroof will rise at the rear in order to
continue ventilating the vehicle interior.
If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during an auto-
matic closing procedure, the roof will be opened
again slightly. The automatic function for the slid-
ing sunroof and the side windows will then be
deactivated.
Rain closing function when driving
Vehicles with a panorama sliding sunroof: if it
starts to rain, the raised sliding sunroof will auto-
matically be lowered while the vehicle is in
motion.
94 Opening and closing
Automatic lowering function
Vehicles with a panorama sliding sunroof: if the
sliding sunroof is raised at the rear, it will auto-
matically be lowered slightly at higher speeds. At
low speeds, it will be raised again automatically.
&WARNING Risk of becoming trapped by
automatic lowering of the sliding sunroof
At higher speeds, the raised sliding sunroof
will automatically be lowered slightly at the
rear.
#Make sure that nobody reaches into the
sliding sunroof's range of movement
while the vehicle is in motion.
#If somebody becomes trapped, briey
push the sliding sunroof button forwards
or backwards.
%By pushing or pulling the 3 button, you
can interrupt the automatic functions "Rain
closing function when driving" and "Automatic
lowering".
Rectifying problems with the sliding sunroof
&WARNING Risk of becoming trapped or
fatal injuries when the sliding sunroof is
closed again
If the sliding sunroof is closed again immedi-
ately aer it has been blocked or reset, it will
close with increased force.
#Make sure that no parts of the body are
in the closing area.
#Release the button immediately if some-
body becomes trapped.
or
#Briey press the button in any direction
during the automatic closing process.
The closing process will be stopped.
The sliding sunroof cannot be closed and you can-
not see the cause.
%The term "sliding sunroof" also refers to the
panorama sliding sunroof.
If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during closing
and reopens again slightly:
#Immediately aer automatic reversing, pull
and hold the 3 button down again to the
point of resistance until the sliding sunroof is
closed.
The sliding sunroof will be closed with
increased force.
If the sliding sunroof is obstructed again and
opens again slightly:
#Repeat the previous step.
The sliding sunroof will be closed again with
increased force.
Vehicles with a panorama sliding sunroof: the slid-
ing sunroof or the roller sunblind is not operating
smoothly.
#Reset the sliding sunroof and the roller sun-
blind.
Resetting the sliding sunroof and the roller sun-
blind
#Pull and hold the 3 button little by little
until the sliding sunroof is fully closed.
#Pull and hold the 3 button little by little
until the roller sunblind is fully closed.
Opening and closing 95
#Use automatic operation to fully open and
then close the sliding sunroof.
Anti-the protection
Function of the immobiliser
The immobiliser prevents your vehicle from being
started without the correct key.
The immobiliser is automatically activated when
the vehicle is switched o, and deactivated when
the vehicle is switched on.
ATA (Anti-The Alarm system)
Function of the ATA system
If the ATA system is primed, a visual and audible
alarm is triggered in the following situations:
Rwhen a door is opened
Rwhen the boot lid is opened
Rwhen the bonnet is opened
Rwhen interior protection is triggered
(/ page 97)
Rwhen tow-away protection is triggered
(/ page 97)
The ATA system is primed automatically aer
approximately ten seconds in the following situa-
tions:
Raer locking the vehicle with the key
Raer locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO
Indicator lamp 1 ashes when the ATA system is
primed.
The ATA system is deactivated automatically in the
following situations:
Raer unlocking the vehicle with the key
Raer unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO
Raer pressing the start/stop button with the
key in the stowage compartment
(/ page 158)
Deactivating the ATA
#Press the Ü, ß or p button on the
key.
or
#Press the start/stop button with the key in the
stowage compartment (/ page 158)
Deactivating the alarm using KEYLESS-GO
#Grasp the outside door handle with the key
outside the vehicle.
96 Opening and closing
Function of tow-away protection
An audible and visual alarm is triggered if an alter-
ation to your vehicle's angle of inclination is
detected while tow-away protection is primed.
Tow-away protection is automatically primed aer
approximately 60 seconds:
Raer locking the vehicle with the key
Raer locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO
Tow-away protection is only primed when the fol-
lowing components are closed:
RDoors
RBoot lid
Tow-away protection is automatically deactivated:
Raer pressing the Ü or p button on the
key
Raer pressing the start/stop button with the
key in the stowage compartment
(/ page 158)
Raer unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO
Rwhen using HANDS-FREE ACCESS
Information on collision detection on a parked
vehicle (/ page 208).
Priming/deactivating tow-away protection
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5Vehicle
5Opening/closing 5Vehicle protection
#Prime or deactivate Tow-away protection.
Tow-away protection is primed again in the follow-
ing cases:
RThe vehicle is unlocked again.
RA door is opened.
RThe vehicle is locked again.
Function of interior protection
When interior protection is primed, a visual and
audible alarm is triggered if movement is detected
in the vehicle interior.
Interior protection is primed automatically aer
approximately ten seconds:
Raer locking the vehicle with the key
Raer locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO
Interior protection is only primed when the follow-
ing components are closed:
RDoors
RBoot lid
Interior protection is automatically deactivated:
Raer pressing the Ü or p button on the
key
Raer pressing the start/stop button with the
key in the stowage compartment
(/ page 158)
Raer unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO
Rwhen using HANDS-FREE ACCESS
The following situations can lead to a false alarm:
Rwhen there are moving objects suchas mas-
cots in the vehicle interior
Rif a side window is open
Rif the panoramic sunroof is open
Opening and closing 97
Priming/deactivating interior protection
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5Vehicle
5Opening/closing 5Vehicle protection
#Prime or deactivate Interior motion sensor.
Interior protection is primed again in the following
cases:
RThe vehicle is unlocked again.
RA door is opened.
RThe vehicle is locked again.
98 Opening and closing
Notes on the correct driver's seat position
&WARNING Risk of accident due to adjust-
ing the vehicle settings while the vehicle is
in motion
You could lose control of the vehicle in the fol-
lowing situations in particular:
Rif you adjust the driver's seat, the head
restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror
while the vehicle is in motion
Rif you fasten your seat belt while the vehi-
cle is in motion
#Before starting the vehicle: in particular,
adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel and mirror, and fasten
your seat belt. Ensure the following when adjusting steering
wheel 1, seat belt 2 and driver's seat 3:
RYou are sitting as far away from the driver's
airbag as possible, taking the following points
into consideration:
RYou are sitting in an upright position
RYour thighs are slightly supported by the seat
cushion
RYour legs are not fully extended and you can
depress the pedals properly
RThe back of your head is supported at eye
level by the centre of the head restraint
RYou can hold the steering wheel with your
arms slightly bent
RYou can move your legs freely
RYou can see all the displays on the driver's dis-
play clearly
RYou have a good overview of the trac condi-
tions
RObserve the notes on correctly fastening the
seat belt .
Vehicles with an AMG performance seat: if the
front passenger seat is unoccupied, this can lead
to noise caused by the seat belt tongue knocking
against the seat. You can prevent this by sliding
the seat belt tongue upwards with the belt clip. If
the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure that
the belt clip is pushed down. Only then will the
seat belt t snugly against the body.
Seats and stowing 99
Notes on grab handles
&WARNING Risk of injury due to excessive
load on the grab handles
If you apply your full body weight to the grab
handle or pull it abruptly, the grab handle may
be damaged or come loose from its anchor-
age. This may result in injuries.
#Use the grab handles only to stabilise
the seating position or to assist in get-
ting in and out of the seat.
Seats
Adjusting the front seat mechanically (without
Seat Comfort Package)
&WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the
seats are adjusted by children
Children could become trapped if they adjust
the seats, particularly when unattended.
#When leaving the vehicle, always take the
key with you and lock the vehicle.
#Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
This also applies to the Digital Vehicle Key.
&WARNING Risk of becoming trapped dur-
ing seat adjustment
When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle
occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the
seat guide rail.
#Make sure when adjusting a seat that no
one has any body parts in the sweep of
the seat.
Observe the safety notes on "Airbags" and "Chil-
dren in the vehicle".
&WARNING Risk of accident due to the
driver's seat not being engaged
The driver's seat may move unexpectedly
while driving.
This could cause you to lose control of the
vehicle.
#Always make sure that the driver's seat
is engaged before starting the vehicle.
&WARNING Risk of accident due to adjust-
ing the vehicle settings while the vehicle is
in motion
You could lose control of the vehicle in the fol-
lowing situations in particular:
Rif you adjust the driver's seat, the head
restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror
while the vehicle is in motion
Rif you fasten your seat belt while the vehi-
cle is in motion
#Before starting the vehicle: in particular,
adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel and mirror, and fasten
your seat belt.
100 Seats and stowing
&WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the
seat height is adjusted carelessly
If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or
other vehicle occupants could be trapped and
thereby injured.
Children in particular could accidentally press
the electrical seat adjustment buttons and
become trapped.
#While moving the seats, make sure that
hands or other body parts do not get
under the lever assembly of the seat
adjustment system.
&WARNING Risk of injury due to head
restraints not being tted or being adjus-
ted incorrectly
If head restraints have not been installed or
have not been adjusted correctly, there is an
increased risk of injury in the head and neck
area, e.g. in the event of an accident or when
braking.
#Always drive with the head restraints t-
ted.
#Before driving o, make sure for every
vehicle occupant that the centre of the
head restraint supports the back of the
head at about eye level.
Do not interchange the head restraints of the
front and rear seats. Otherwise, you will not be
able to adjust the height and angle of the head
restraints correctly.
Adjust the head restraint fore-and-a position so
that it is as close as possible to the back of your
head.
&WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
incorrect seat position
The seat belt will not oer the intended level
of protection if you have not moved the seat
backrest to an almost vertical position.
In particular, you may slip under the seatbelt
and injure yourself.
#Adjust the seat properly before begin-
ning your journey.
#Always ensure that the seat backrest is
in an almost vertical position and that
the shoulder section of your seat belt is
routed across the centre of your shoul-
der.
&WARNING Risk of injury due to excessive
load on the grab handles
If you apply your full body weight to the grab
handle or pull it abruptly, the grab handle may
be damaged or come loose from its anchor-
age. This may result in injuries.
#Use the grab handles only to stabilise
the seating position or to assist in get-
ting in and out of the seat.
Seats and stowing 101
&WARNING Risk of potentially fatal injuries
due to objects trapped under the front
passenger seat
Objects trapped under the front passenger
seat may interfere with the function of the
automatic front passenger airbag shuto or
damage the system.
#Do not stow any objects under the front
passenger seat.
#When the front passenger seat is occu-
pied, ensure that no objects have
become trapped beneath the front
passenger seat.
Adjusts the seat fore-and-a position
#Li lever 1 and slide the seat into the
desired position.
#Make sure that the seat is engaged.
#To adjust the seat height: push or pull lever 2
until the desired position has been reached.
#To adjust the seat backrest inclination: turn
handwheel 3 forwards and backwards until
the desired position has been reached.
Adjusting the front seat mechanically (with Seat
Comfort Package)
&WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the
seats are adjusted by children
Children could become trapped if they adjust
the seats, particularly when unattended.
#When leaving the vehicle, always take the
key with you and lock the vehicle.
#Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
This also applies to the Digital Vehicle Key.
&WARNING Risk of becoming trapped dur-
ing seat adjustment
When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle
occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the
seat guide rail.
102 Seats and stowing
#Make sure when adjusting a seat that no
one has any body parts in the sweep of
the seat.
Observe the safety notes on "Airbags" and "Chil-
dren in the vehicle".
&WARNING Risk of accident due to the
driver's seat not being engaged
The driver's seat may move unexpectedly
while driving.
This could cause you to lose control of the
vehicle.
#Always make sure that the driver's seat
is engaged before starting the vehicle.
&WARNING Risk of accident due to adjust-
ing the vehicle settings while the vehicle is
in motion
You could lose control of the vehicle in the fol-
lowing situations in particular:
Rif you adjust the driver's seat, the head
restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror
while the vehicle is in motion
Rif you fasten your seat belt while the vehi-
cle is in motion
#Before starting the vehicle: in particular,
adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel and mirror, and fasten
your seat belt.
&WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the
seat height is adjusted carelessly
If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or
other vehicle occupants could be trapped and
thereby injured.
Children in particular could accidentally press
the electrical seat adjustment buttons and
become trapped.
#While moving the seats, make sure that
hands or other body parts do not get
under the lever assembly of the seat
adjustment system.
&WARNING Risk of injury due to head
restraints not being tted or being adjus-
ted incorrectly
If head restraints have not been installed or
have not been adjusted correctly, there is an
increased risk of injury in the head and neck
area, e.g. in the event of an accident or when
braking.
#Always drive with the head restraints t-
ted.
#Before driving o, make sure for every
vehicle occupant that the centre of the
head restraint supports the back of the
head at about eye level.
Seats and stowing 103
Do not interchange the head restraints of the
front and rear seats. Otherwise, you will not be
able to adjust the height and angle of the head
restraints correctly.
Adjust the head restraint fore-and-a position so
that it is as close as possible to the back of your
head.
&WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
incorrect seat position
The seat belt will not oer the intended level
of protection if you have not moved the seat
backrest to an almost vertical position.
In particular, you may slip under the seatbelt
and injure yourself.
#Adjust the seat properly before begin-
ning your journey.
#Always ensure that the seat backrest is
in an almost vertical position and that
the shoulder section of your seat belt is
routed across the centre of your shoul-
der.
&WARNING Risk of injury due to excessive
load on the grab handles
If you apply your full body weight to the grab
handle or pull it abruptly, the grab handle may
be damaged or come loose from its anchor-
age. This may result in injuries.
#Use the grab handles only to stabilise
the seating position or to assist in get-
ting in and out of the seat.
&WARNING Risk of potentially fatal injuries
due to objects trapped under the front
passenger seat
Objects trapped under the front passenger
seat may interfere with the function of the
automatic front passenger airbag shuto or
damage the system.
#Do not stow any objects under the front
passenger seat.
#When the front passenger seat is occu-
pied, ensure that no objects have
become trapped beneath the front
passenger seat.
Adjusts the seat fore-and-a position
#Li lever 2 and slide the seat into the
desired position.
#Make sure that the seat is engaged.
#To adjust the seat cushion length (driver's
seat only): li lever 1 and slide the front sec-
tion of the seat cushion forwards or back-
wards.
104 Seats and stowing
#To adjust the seat cushion inclination: turn
handwheel 3 forwards and backwards until
the desired position has been reached.
#To adjust the seat height: push or pull lever 4
until the desired position has been reached.
#To adjust the seat backrest inclination: turn
handwheel 5 forwards and backwards until
the desired position has been reached.
Adjusting the front seat electrically
You can adjust the seats when the vehicle is
switched o.
1Seat backrest inclination
2Seat height
3Seat cushion inclination
4Seat fore-and-a position
#Save the settings with the memory function
(/ page 113).
Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support
1Higher
2Soer
3Lower
4Firmer
#Use buttons 1 to 4 to adjust the contour of
the backrest.
Seats and stowing 105
Head restraints
Adjusting the front seat head restraints man-
ually
&WARNING Risk of accident due to adjust-
ing the vehicle settings while the vehicle is
in motion
You could lose control of the vehicle in the fol-
lowing situations in particular:
Rif you adjust the driver's seat, the head
restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror
while the vehicle is in motion
Rif you fasten your seat belt while the vehi-
cle is in motion
#Before starting the vehicle: in particular,
adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel and mirror, and fasten
your seat belt.
&WARNING Risk of injury due to head
restraints not being tted or being adjus-
ted incorrectly
If head restraints have not been installed or
have not been adjusted correctly, there is an
increased risk of injury in the head and neck
area, e.g. in the event of an accident or when
braking.
#Always drive with the head restraints t-
ted.
#Before driving o, make sure for every
vehicle occupant that the centre of the
head restraint supports the back of the
head at about eye level.
Do not interchange the head restraints of the
front and rear seats. Otherwise, you will not be
able to adjust the height and angle of the head
restraints correctly.
Adjust the head restraint fore-and-a position so
that it is as close as possible to the back of your
head.
#To raise: pull the head restraint up.
#To lower: press release knob 1 in the direc-
tion of the arrow and push the head restraint
down.
#To move forwards: press release knob 2 and
pull the head restraint forwards.
#To move backwards: press release knob 2
and push the head restraint backwards.
106 Seats and stowing
Adjusting the head restraints of the rear seats
manually
#To raise: pull the head restraint up.
#To lower: press release knob 1 in the direc-
tion of the arrow and push the head restraint
down.
Fitting/removing the rear seat head restraints
Removing
#Release the rear seat backrest and fold it for-
wards slightly (/ page 117).
#Pull the head restraint upwards as far as it will
go.
#Push release knob 1 in the direction of the
arrow and pull out the head restraint.
Fitting
#Insert the head restraint such that the notches
on the bar are on the le when viewed in the
direction of travel.
#Push the head restraint down until it engages.
#Fold the rear seat backrest back until it
engages.
Conguring the seat settings
Multimedia system:
4© 5Comfort 5Seat
Adjusting the air cushions
#In the corresponding menu, adjust the air
cushions for Lumbar or Side bolsters.
Setting the seat heating balance
#Select Heating settings.
#Select Seat heating balance.
#Adjust the heat distribution for the desired
seat.
Seats and stowing 107
Setting automatic seat adjustment
&WARNING Risk of becoming trapped dur-
ing adjustment of the driver's seat aer
calling up a driver prole
Selecting a user prole may trigger an adjust-
ment of the driver's seat to the position saved
under the user prole. You or other vehicle
occupants could be injured in the process.
#Make sure that when the position of driv-
er's seat is being adjusted using the mul-
timedia system, no people or body parts
are in the seat's range of movement.
If there is a risk of someone becoming trap-
ped, immediately stop the adjustment process
by:
#a) Pressing the warning message on the
central display.
or
#b) Pressing a position button of the
memory function or a seat adjustment
switch in the driver's door.
The adjustment process is stopped.
Multimedia system:
4© 5Comfort 5Seat
5Position seat automatically
Manually adjusting driver's seat and steering
wheel position to body size
The vehicle calculates a suitable driver's seat and
steering wheel position on the basis of the driver's
body size and sets this directly.
#To set the unit of measurement: select cm or
ft/in.
#Set the size using the scale.
#Select Start positioning.
The driver's seat and steering wheel position
is adjusted to the body size that has been set.
%You can also congure these settings via the
Mercedes me user account for your user pro-
le. By synchronising the proles in the vehi-
cle and the Mercedes me connect proles,
you can carry over these settings for your
vehicle. Further information about synchronis-
ing user proles .
%If the driver's seat and steering wheel position
calculated by the vehicle is not practical or
comfortable, it can be manually adapted at
any time via the control buttons.
The outside mirrors are not set via this func-
tion. Instead, they have to be set manually via
the operating switches.
Selecting a massage programme for the front
seats
Multimedia system:
4© 5Comfort 5Massage
#Select a massage programme .
#Start the programme for the desired
seat ;.
#To set the massage intensity: switch High
intensity on or o .
%The availability of this function is dependent
on the vehicle's equipment.
108 Seats and stowing
Resetting seat settings
Multimedia system:
4© 5Comfort 5Seat
#Select Reset.
#Select ß for the desired seat.
Switching the seat heating on/o
&WARNING Risk of burns due to repeatedly
switching on the seat heating
Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can
cause the seat cushion and seat backrest pad-
ding to become very hot.
In particular, the health of persons with limited
temperature sensitivity or a limited ability to
react to high temperatures may be aected or
they may even suer burn-like injuries.
#Do not repeatedly switch on the seat
heating.
To protect against overheating, the seat heating
may be temporarily deactivated aer it has been
switched on repeatedly.
*NOTE Damage to the seats caused by
objects or documents when the seat
heater is switched on
When the seat heater is switched on, over-
heating may occur due to objects or docu-
ments placed on the seats e.g. seat cushions
or child seats. This could cause damage to the
seat surface.
#Make sure that no objects or documents
are on the seats when the seat heater is
switched on.
Requirements
RThe power supply is switched on.
#Press button 1 repeatedly until the desired
heating level is set.
Depending on the heating level, up to three
indicator lamps will light up. If all indicator
lamps are o, the seat heating is switched o.
%The seat heating will automatically switch
down from the three heating levels aer 8, 10
and 20 minutes until the seat heating
switches o.
Seats and stowing 109
Steering wheel
Adjusting the steering wheel manually
&WARNING Risk of accident due to adjust-
ing the vehicle settings while the vehicle is
in motion
You could lose control of the vehicle in the fol-
lowing situations in particular:
Rif you adjust the driver's seat, the head
restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror
while the vehicle is in motion
Rif you fasten your seat belt while the vehi-
cle is in motion
#Before starting the vehicle: in particular,
adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel and mirror, and fasten
your seat belt.
&WARNING Risk of entrapment for children
when adjusting the steering wheel
Children could injure themselves if they adjust
the steering wheel.
#Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
#When leaving the vehicle, always take the
key with you and lock the vehicle.
Unlocking
#Fold release lever 1 down as far as it will go.
#Adjust height 2 and distance 3 to the
steering wheel.
Locking
#Fold release lever 1 up as far as it will go.
#Check and make sure that the steering col-
umn is locked by moving the steering wheel.
Switching the steering wheel heater on/o
Depending on the vehicle version, the steering
wheel heating can be switched on and o using a
switch on the steering wheel.
Requirements
RThe vehicle is switched on.
110 Seats and stowing
#Push the switch into position 1 or 2.
If indicator lamp 3 lights up, the steering
wheel heater is switched on.
When you switch the vehicle o, the steering
wheel heater will switch o.
Linking the steering wheel heater to the seat heat-
ing
Requirements
RThe power supply or the vehicle has been
switched on.
Multimedia system:
4© 5Comfort 5Seat
5Heating settings
#Tap on Additional steering wheel heater.
The steering wheel heater will be linked to the
seat heating.
When the function has been activated, the steer-
ing wheel heater will automatically be activated
and deactivated when you switch the seat heating
on and o.
Easy entry and exit feature
Using the easy entry and exit feature
&WARNING Risk of accident when pulling
away during the adjustment process of
the easy entry and exit feature
You could lose control of the vehicle.
#Always wait until the adjustment process
is complete before driving o.
&WARNING Risk of becoming trapped dur-
ing adjustment of the easy entry and exit
feature
You and other vehicle occupants could
become trapped.
#Ensure that no-one has any body parts in
the range of movement of the seat.
If there is a risk of becoming trapped by the
driver's seat:
#Press the seat adjustment switch.
The adjustment process will be stopped.
Seats and stowing 111
You can stop the adjustment process by pressing
one of the memory function position switches.
&WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if
children activate the easy entry and exit
feature
Children could become trapped if they acti-
vate the easy entry and exit feature, particu-
larly when unattended.
#Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
#When leaving the vehicle, always take the
key with you and lock the vehicle.
When the easy entry and exit feature is active, the
driver's seat will move backwards and the back-
rest will be moved to a steeper position when:
RYou switch o the vehicle when the driver's
door is open.
RYou open the driver's door when the vehicle is
switched o.
%The driver's seat will then move backwards
only if it is not already at the rear of the seat
adjustment range.
The seat backrest will then move forwards
only if it is not already at the front of the back-
rest adjustment range.
The driver's seat will move back to the last drive
position when:
RYou switch the vehicle on when the driver's
door is closed.
RYou close the driver's door when the vehicle is
switched on.
The last drive position will be saved when:
RYou switch o the vehicle.
RYou call up the seat settings via the memory
function.
RYou save the seat settings via the memory
function.
Setting the easy entry and exit feature
Requirements
RThe automatic seat adjustment has been acti-
vated (/ page 108).
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5Vehicle
5Easy entry and exit feature
#Select Steering wheel and seat, Steering
wheel only or Off.
%If you are using an individual user prole, this
information is used for the easy entry and exit
feature. This will cause the driver's seat and
steering wheel to move into the correct posi-
tion automatically .
112 Seats and stowing
Memory function
Memory function
&WARNING Risk of an accident if the mem-
ory function is used while driving
If you use the memory function on the driver's
side while driving, you could lose control of
the vehicle as a result of the adjustments
being made.
#Only use the memory function on the
driver's side when the vehicle is station-
ary.
&WARNING Risk of entrapment when
adjusting the seat with the memory func-
tion
When the memory function adjusts the seat,
you and other vehicle occupants – particularly
children – could become trapped.
#During the adjustment process of the
memory function, make sure that no one
has any body parts in the sweep of the
seat.
#If someone becomes trapped, press a
preset position button or seat adjust-
ment switch immediately.
&WARNING Danger of entrapment when
memory function is activated by children
When children activate the memory function,
they can get trapped, especially if they are
unsupervised.
#Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
#When leaving the vehicle, always take the
key with you and lock the vehicle.
You can use the memory function when the vehi-
cle is switched o.
Seat adjustments for up to three people can be
stored and called up using the memory function.
You can save settings for the following systems:
RSeat
RSeat contour
ROutside mirrors
RHead-up display
Operating the memory function
Storing
#Set the desired position for all systems.
Seats and stowing 113
#Briey press memory button V and then
press preset position 4, T or U
within three seconds.
#To call up: press and briey hold one of preset
position buttons 4, T or U.
Aer releasing the button, all systems are
moved into the stored position.
Stowage areas
Notes on loading the vehicle
&DANGER Risk of exhaust gas poisoning
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust
gases can enter the vehicle interior if the boot
lid is open when the engine is running, espe-
cially if the vehicle is in motion.
#Always switch o the engine before
opening the boot lid.
#Never drive with the boot lid open.
&WARNING Risk of injury from unsecured
items in the vehicle
If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or
not secured suciently, they could slip, tip
over or be thrown around and thereby hit vehi-
cle occupants.
There is a risk of injury, particularly in the
event of sudden braking or a sudden change
in direction.
#Always stow objects in such a way that
they cannot be thrown around.
#Before the journey, secure objects, lug-
gage or loads against slipping or tipping
over.
&WARNING Risk of injury due to objects
being stowed incorrectly
If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed
incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around
and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup
holders, open stowage spaces and mobile
phone brackets cannot always retain all
objects they contain.
There is a risk of injury, particularly in the
event of sudden braking or a sudden change
in direction.
#Always stow objects in such a way that
they cannot be thrown around in such
situations.
#Always make sure that objects do not
protrude from stowage spaces, luggage
nets or stowage nets.
#Close the lockable stowage spaces
before starting a journey.
#Always stow and secure heavy, hard,
pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky
objects in the boot.
&WARNING Risk of accident from objects in
the driver's footwell and front-passenger
footwell
Objects in the driver's footwell and front-
passenger footwell may impede pedal travel or
block a depressed pedal.
This jeopardises the operating and road safety
of the vehicle.
114 Seats and stowing
#Stow all objects in the vehicle securely
so that they cannot get into the driver's
footwell or front-passenger footwell.
#Always t the oor mats securely and as
prescribed in order to ensure that there
is always sucient clearance for the
pedals.
#Do not use loose oor mats and do not
lay multiple oor mats on top of one
another.
Vehicles with automatic front-passenger airbag
shuto: Objects trapped under the front-
passenger seat may interfere with the operation
of the automatic front-passenger airbag shuto or
damage the system. Please observe the notes on
the operation of the automatic front-passenger
airbag shuto (/ page 44).
&WARNING ‑ Risk of accident or injury
when using the cup holder while the vehi-
cle is in motion
The cup holder cannot hold a container secure
while the vehicle is in motion.
If you use a cup holder while the vehicle is in
motion, the container may be ung around
and liquids could be spilled. The vehicle occu-
pants may come into contact with the liquid
and if it is hot, they could be scalded. You
could be distracted from trac conditions and
you may lose control of the vehicle.
#Only use the cup holder when the vehicle
is stationary.
#Only use the cup holder for containers of
the right size.
#Always close the container, particularly if
the liquid is hot.
*NOTE Damage to the cup holder
The cup holder can be damaged when folding
back the rear seat armrest. When open, the
cup holder can be damaged by body weight.
#The rear seat armrest can only be folded
back when the cup holder is closed.
#Do not sit or support yourself on the cup
holder when it is open.
*NOTE Damage to the rear armrest due to
body weight
When folded out, the rear armrest can be
damaged by body weight.
#Do not sit or support yourself on the rear
seat armrest.
&WARNING Risk of re and injury from hot
cigarette lighter
You can suer burns if you touch the hot heat-
ing element or the hot socket of the cigarette
lighter.
In addition, ammable materials can catch re
if:
Ryou drop the hot cigarette lighter.
Rchildren e.g. hold the hot cigarette lighter
to objects.
#Always hold the cigarette lighter by the
knob.
#Always make sure that the cigarette
lighter is out of the reach of children.
Seats and stowing 115
#Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
&WARNING Risk of burns from the tailpipe
and tailpipe trims
The exhaust tailpipe and tailpipe trims can
become very hot. If you come into contact
with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn
yourself.
#Always be particularly careful around the
tailpipe and the tailpipe trims and super-
vise children especially closely in this
area.
#Allow vehicle parts to cool down before
touching them.
%Leather is a natural product. It exhibits natural
surface properties such as, e. g. dierences
in structure, marks caused by growth and
injury or subtle colour dierences. These sur-
face properties are characteristics of leather
and not material faults. Leather is also subject
to a natural ageing process during which the
surface properties change.
The handling characteristics of your vehicle are
dependent on the distribution of the load within
the vehicle. You should bear the following in mind
when loading the vehicle:
RDo not exceed the permissible total mass or
the permissible axle loads of the vehicle
(including load and occupants).
information can be found on the vehicle identi-
cation plate (/ page 396).
RThe load must not protrude above the upper
edge of the seat backrests.
RAlways place the load behind unoccupied
seats if possible.
RSecure the load using the lashing eyelets and
distribute the load evenly.
Notes on driving with a roof load
RDistribute the roof load and the load inside the
vehicle evenly, placing heavy objects at the
bottom. Also comply with the notes on loading
the vehicle (/ page 114).
RDrive attentively, avoiding abrupt starts, brak-
ing and steering as well as rapid cornering.
RWhen transporting roof loads and when the
vehicle is fully loaded or fully occupied, select
one of the driving modes ; or A. These
are designed to focus on stability
(/ page 171).
%For more information on stowage compart-
ments and stowage areas, please refer to the
Digital Operator's Manual.
116 Seats and stowing
Stowage spaces in the vehicle interior
Overview of the front stowage compartments
1Stowage spaces in the doors
2Stowage compartment in the armrest with a
multimedia and USB connection
3Stowage compartment in the front centre
console with a USB port
4Glove compartment
Through-loading feature in the rear bench seat
(EASY-PACK Quickfold)
Folding the rear seat backrest forwards
&WARNING Risk of accident if the rear
bench seat, rear seat and seat backrest
are not engaged
The rear bench seat, rear seat and seat back-
rest may fold forwards, even while the vehicle
is in motion.
RAs a result, the vehicle occupant will be
pressed into the seat belt with increased
force. The seat belt will not be able to pro-
tect as intended and could cause addi-
tional injury.
RObjects or loads in the boot or load com-
partment cannot be restrained by the seat
backrest.
#Make sure that the rear bench seat, the
rear seat and the seat backrest are
engaged before every trip.
If the seat backrests are not engaged and locked
in place, the lock verication indicator will be red.
Requirements:
RTo fold the centre seat backrest forwards: the
centre seat backrest has been unlocked.
You can fold the centre and outer seat backrests
forwards separately.
Seats and stowing 117
Vehicles with a memory function: if necessary,
when the seat backrest in the rear is folded
forward, the corresponding front seat will move
forwards slightly to avoid a collision.
#If necessary, fully insert the head restraints in
the rear seat backrest.
The release handles are located beneath the rear
shelf.
#To fold the le and right seat backrests
forward: pull right or le release handle 1
and fold the corresponding seat backrest for-
wards.
#To fold the centre seat backrest forwards: pull
release catch 3 of seat backrest 2 for-
wards.
#Fold seat backrest 2 forwards.
#If necessary, reset the driver's or front
passenger seat.
Folding back the rear seat backrest
&WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when
adjusting the seats
When you adjust a seat, you may trap yourself
or a vehicle occupant.
#When adjusting a seat, make sure that
no one has any body parts in the sweep
of the seat.
*NOTE Damage caused by trapping the
seat belt when folding back the seat back-
rest
The seat belt could become trapped and thus
be damaged when the seat backrest is folded
back.
#Make sure that the seat belt is not trap-
ped when folding back the seat backrest.
#Move the driver's or front passenger seat for-
wards, if necessary.
118 Seats and stowing
#Fold corresponding seat backrest 1 back
until it engages.
Le and right seat backrests: if the seat back-
rest is not engaged and locked in place, red
lock verication indicator 2 will be visible.
Centre seat backrest: if the seat backrest is
not engaged and locked in place, red lock veri-
cation indicator 3 will be visible.
Locking the release catch of the centre rear
seat backrest
Requirements
RThe le and centre seat backrests are
engaged and joined together.
You can lock the centre seat backrest release
catch if you want to secure the boot against unau-
thorised access. The centre seat backrest can
then be folded forwards only together with the le
seat backrest.
#Fold the centre and le seat backrests for-
wards.
#To lock or unlock: slide catch 1 upwards or
downwards.
Overview of the tie-down eyes
Observe the notes on loading the vehicle
(/ page 114).
Seats and stowing 119
1Tie-down eyes (vehicles with through-loading
feature in the rear bench seat)
Attaching a roof luggage rack
&WARNING Risk of accident due to exceed-
ing the maximum roof load
The vehicle centre of gravity and the usual
driving characteristics as well as the steering
and braking characteristics alter.
If you exceed the maximum roof load, the driv-
ing characteristics, as well as steering and
braking, will be greatly impaired.
#Never exceed the maximum roof load
and adjust your driving style.
You will nd information on the maximum roof
load in the "Technical data" section.
*NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to not
observing the maximum permitted head-
room clearance
If the vehicle height is greater than the maxi-
mum permitted headroom clearance, the roof
and other parts of the vehicle may be dam-
aged.
#Observe the signposted headroom clear-
ance.
#If the vehicle height is greater than the
permitted headroom clearance, do not
enter.
#Observe the changed vehicle height with
add-on roof equipment.
*NOTE Vehicle damage from non-approved
roof luggage racks
The vehicle could be damaged by roof luggage
racks that have not been tested and approved
for Mercedes-Benz.
#Use only roof luggage racks tested and
approved for Mercedes-Benz.
#Depending on the vehicle equipment,
ensure that the sliding sunroof can be
fully raised when the roof luggage rack is
tted.
#Depending on the vehicle equipment,
ensure that the boot lid can be fully
120 Seats and stowing
opened when the roof luggage rack is t-
ted.
#Position the load on the roof luggage
rack in such a way that the vehicle will
not sustain damage even when it is in
motion.
*NOTE Damage to the panorama sliding
sunroof due to non-approved roof luggage
racks
The panorama sliding sunroof may be dam-
aged by the roof luggage rack if you attempt to
open it when using a roof luggage rack not
tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz.
#When a roof luggage rack is tted, open
the panorama sliding sunroof only if this
has been tested and approved for
Mercedes-Benz.
The panorama sliding sunroof may be raised
to allow ventilation of the vehicle interior.
*NOTE Damage to the covers
The covers may be damaged and scratched
when being opened.
#Do not use metallic or hard objects.
#Carefully fold covers 1 upwards in the direc-
tion of the arrow.
#Secure the roof luggage rack to the fastening
points beneath covers 1.
#Comply with the installation instructions of the
roof luggage rack manufacturer.
#Secure the load on the roof luggage rack.
Sockets
Using the 12 V socket
Requirements
ROnly devices up to a maximum of 180 W
(15 A) are permissible.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the vehicle
has the following 12 V sockets:
RIn the stowage compartment in the front
centre console
RIn the boot
Seats and stowing 121
Example: 12 V socket in the stowage compartment
in the front centre console
#Fold up socket cap 1.
#Insert the plug of the device.
12 V socket in the stowage compartment with
cover: if you have connected a device to the 12 V
socket, leave the cover of the stowage compart-
ment open.
USB port in the rear passenger compartment
%Depending on the vehicle equipment, the
design of the stowage compartment and the
number of USB ports in the rear centre con-
sole may vary.
When the vehicle is switched on, you can charge a
USB device, such as a mobile phone, at the USB
port using a suitable charging cable.
Wireless charging of the mobile phone and con-
nection with the exterior aerial
Notes on wirelessly charging a mobile phone
&WARNING Risk of injury due to objects
being stowed incorrectly
If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed
incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around
and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup
holders, open stowage spaces and mobile
phone receptacles cannot always retain all
objects within.
There is a risk of injury, particularly in the
event of sudden braking or a sudden change
in direction.
#Always stow objects so that they cannot
be thrown around in such situations.
#Always make sure that objects do not
protrude from stowage spaces, luggage
nets or stowage nets.
#Close the lockable stowage spaces
before starting a journey.
#Always stow and secure heavy, hard,
pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky
objects in the boot/load compartment.
Observe the notes on loading the vehicle.
&WARNING Risk of re from placing objects
in the mobile phone stowage compart-
ment
Placing other objects in the mobile phone
stowage compartment could constitute a re
hazard.
#Apart from a mobile phone, do not place
any other objects in the mobile phone
stowage compartment, especially those
made of metal.
122 Seats and stowing
*NOTE Damage to objects caused by plac-
ing them in the mobile phone stowage
compartment
If objects are placed in the mobile phone
stowage compartment, these may be dam-
aged by electromagnetic elds.
#Do not place credit cards, storage
media, ski passes or other objects sensi-
tive to electromagnetic elds in the
mobile phone stowage compartment.
*NOTE Damage to the mobile phone stow-
age compartment caused by liquids
If liquids enter the mobile phone stowage
compartment, the compartment may be dam-
aged.
#Ensure that no liquids enter the mobile
phone stowage compartment.
The following notes on wirelessly charging the
mobile phone must be observed:
RDepending on the vehicle equipment, the
mobile phone is connected to the vehicle's
exterior aerial via the charging module.
RThe charging function and wireless connection
of the mobile phone to the vehicle's exterior
aerial are only available if the vehicle is
switched on.
RSmall mobile phones may not be able to be
charged in every position of the mobile phone
stowage compartment.
RLarge mobile phones which do not rest at in
the mobile phone stowage compartment may
not be able to be charged or connected with
the vehicle's exterior aerial.
RThe mobile phone may heat up during the
charging process. This may particularly
depend on the applications (apps) currently
open in the background.
RTo ensure more ecient charging and connec-
tion with the vehicle's exterior aerial, remove
the protective cover from the mobile phone.
Protective covers which are necessary for
wireless charging are an exception.
Charging a mobile phone wirelessly
Requirements:
RThe mobile phone is suitable for wireless
charging.
A list of compatible mobile phones can be
found at: https://www.mercedes-benz-
mobile.com.
Seats and stowing 123
#Place the mobile phone as close to the centre
of the marked surface on mat 1 as possible
with the display facing upwards.
When a message is shown in the multimedia
system, the mobile phone is being charged.
Malfunctions during the charging process are
shown in the central display.
%The mat can be removed for cleaning, e.g.
using clean, lukewarm water.
Stowage compartment without cover
Make sure the mobile phone is properly stored
and secured to prevent it from falling out while
you are driving.
#To secure the mobile phone: swing lever 2
out.
Radio equipment approval numbers for Brazil
This device operates on a secondary basis, that is
to say it has no protection against harmful inter-
ference, not even from the same type of stations,
and must not cause interference with systems
operating on a primary basis.
This product is permitted in accordance with the
procedure dened in Directive 242/2000 by the
Brazilian telecommunications agency ANATEL and
meets the applicable technical requirements.
Further information is available on the ANATEL
website. www.anatel.gov.br
#Further information on the declaration of con-
formity for vehicle components which receive
and/or transmit radio waves.
Fitting/removing the oor mats
&WARNING Risk of accident due to objects
in the driver's footwell
Objects in the driver's footwell may impede
pedal travel or block a depressed pedal.
This jeopardises the operating and road safety
of the vehicle.
#Stow all objects in the vehicle securely
so that they cannot get into the driver's
footwell.
#Always t the oor mats securely and as
prescribed in order to ensure that there
is always sucient room for the pedals.
#Do not use loose oor mats and do not
place oor mats on top of one another.
124 Seats and stowing
Fitting oor mats
#Slide the corresponding seat backwards and
lay the oor mat in the footwell.
#Press studs 1 onto holders 2.
#Adjust the corresponding seat.
Removing oor mats
#Pull the oor mat o holders 2.
#Remove the oor mat.
Seats and stowing 125
Exterior lighting
Notes on changing the lights when driving abroad
It is not necessary to adjust the headlamps. The
legal requirements are also met in countries in
which trac drives on the other side of the road.
Information about lighting systems and your
responsibility
The various lighting systems of the vehicle are
only aids. The driver of the vehicle is responsible
for correct vehicle illumination in accordance with
the prevailing light and visibility conditions, legal
requirements and trac situation.
Light switch
Operating the light switch
1W Le-hand parking lights
2X Right-hand parking lights
3T Standing lights and licence plate light-
ing
4Ã Automatic driving lights (preferred light
switch position)
5L Low beam/high beam
6R Switches the rear fog light on/o.
When low beam is activated, the T indicator
lamp for the standing lights will be deactivated
and replaced by the L low-beam indicator
lamp.
#Always park your vehicle safely using sucient
lighting, in accordance with the relevant legal
stipulations.
*NOTE Battery discharging by operating the
standing lights
Do not have the standing lights switched on
over a period of several hours.
For vehicles that are wider than 2 m or longer
than 6 m, single-sided parking lighting is not per-
mitted in some countries. In this case, the stand-
ing lights are also switched on in the parking
lights position.
If the battery is insuciently charged, the stand-
ing lights or parking lights will be switched o
automatically to facilitate the next engine start.
126 Light and sight
The exterior lighting (except standing and parking
lights) will switch o automatically when the driv-
er's door is opened.
RObserve the notes on locator lighting
(/ page 134).
Automatic driving lights function
When the vehicle is switched on, the standing
lights, low beam and daytime running lights will be
switched on automatically depending on the light
conditions.
&WARNING Risk of accident when the
dipped beam is switched o in poor visi-
bility
When the light switch is set to Ã, the
dipped beam may not be switched on auto-
matically if there is fog, snow or other causes
of poor visibility such as spray.
#In such cases, turn the light switch to
L.
The automatic driving lights are only an aid. You
are responsible for the vehicle lighting.
Switching the rear fog light on/o
Requirements:
RThe light switch is in the L or à posi-
tion.
#Press button R .
Please observe the country-specic laws on the
use of rear fog lamps.
Regulating headlamp range (halogen head-
lamps)
The headlamp range adjuster allows you to adjust
the cone of light from the headlamps in relation to
the vehicle's load condition.
gDriver's seat and front passenger seat occu-
pied
1Driver's seat, front passenger seat and rear
seats occupied
2Driver's seat, front passenger seat and rear
seats occupied, boot laden
3Driver's seat and front passenger seat occu-
pied and maximum permissible rear axle load
utilised
Light and sight 127
#Turn the headlamp range adjuster to the posi-
tion that corresponds to the load condition of
your vehicle.
Operating the combination switch for the lights
1High beam
2Turn signal light, right
3Headlamp ashing
4Turn signal light, le
#Use the combination switch to select the
desired function.
Switching on high beam
#Turn the light switch to the L or Ã
position.
#Push the combination switch in the direction
of arrow 1.
When high beam is activated, the indicator
lamp for low beam L will be deactivated
and replaced by the indicator lamp for high
beam K.
Switching o high beam
#Push the combination switch in the direction
of arrow 1 or pull it in the direction of arrow
3.
Headlamp ashing
#Pull the combination switch in the direction of
arrow 3.
Turn signal light
#To indicate briey: push the combination
switch briey to the point of resistance in the
direction of arrow 2 or 4.
The corresponding turn signal light will ash
three times.
#To indicate permanently: push the combina-
tion switch beyond the point of resistance in
the direction of arrow 2 or 4.
128 Light and sight
Activating/deactivating the hazard warning lights
#Press button 1.
The hazard warning lights will switch on automati-
cally if:
Rthe airbag has been deployed.
Rthe vehicle is braked heavily from a speed of
more than 70 km/h to a standstill.
When you pull away again, the hazard warning
light system will switch o automatically at
approximately 10 km/h. You can also switch o
the hazard warning light system using button 1.
Adaptive functions, MULTIBEAM LED
Function of the dynamic low beam
The MULTIBEAM LED headlamps adapt to the
driving and weather situation and provide exten-
ded functions for improved illumination of the
road.
The system comprises the following functions:
RActive headlamps (/ page 129)
RCornering light (/ page 130)
RMotorway mode (/ page 130)
RCity lighting (/ page 130)
System limits
RThe system is active only when it is dark.
Active headlamps function
RThe headlamps follow the steering move-
ments.
RRelevant areas are better illuminated during a
journey.
The functions are active when the high beam is
switched on.
Light and sight 129
Cornering light function
The cornering light improves the illumination of
the carriageway over a wide angle in the turning
direction, enabling better visibility on tight bends,
for example. The cornering light will be activated
only when low beam is switched on.
The function will be active in the following cases:
RAt speeds below 40 km/h when the turn sig-
nal light is switched on or the steering wheel
is turned
RAt speeds between 40 km/h and 70 km/h
and when the steering wheel is turned
Roundabout and junction function: the cornering
light will be activated on both sides based on an
evaluation of the vehicle's current navigation posi-
tion. It will remain active until aer the vehicle has
le the roundabout or junction.
Motorway mode function
Motorway mode increases the range and bright-
ness of the cone of light, enabling better visibility.
The function will be active if a motorway journey
is detected by means of:
Rthe vehicle's speed
Rthe multifunction camera
Rthe GPS
The function is not active in the following cases:
Rat speeds below 80 km/h
The city lighting function
City lighting improves the illumination of roadsides
in urban areas using a broad distribution of light.
The function will be active in the following cases:
RAt low speeds
RIn illuminated parts of urban areas
Activating or deactivating dynamic low beam
Requirements
RThe vehicle is switched on.
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5Lights
5DIGITAL LIGHT
#Activate or deactivate Dynamic low beam.
Activating or deactivating enhanced assistance
functions
%The availability of the functions is dependent
on the country.
130 Light and sight
%This function is an on-demand feature
(/ page 22).
#Select Supporting projections.
#Activate or deactivate the desired projections.
#Switch Projection for greeting/farewell on or
o.
If the locator lighting or the exterior switch-o
delay time is activated, a high-resolution greet-
ing or farewell scene will be played back for a
short period of time when the vehicle is
opened or switched o. You can choose
between the Digital Rain and Star Wave
sequences.
%More information on locator lighting
(/ page 134)
More information on the exterior switch-o
delay time (/ page 134)
Adaptive Highbeam Assist
Adaptive Highbeam Assist function
&WARNING Risk of accident despite Adap-
tive Highbeam Assist
Adaptive Highbeam Assist does not react to:
Rroad users without lights, e.g. pedestrians
Rroad users with poor lighting, e.g. cyclists
Rroad users whose lighting is obstructed,
e.g. by a barrier
On very rare occasions, Adaptive Highbeam
Assist may fail to recognise other road users
with their own lighting, or may recognise them
too late.
In these, or in similar situations, the automatic
high beam will not be deactivated or will be
activated despite the presence of other road
users.
#Always observe the road and trac con-
ditions carefully and switch o the high
beam in good time.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist cannot take into
account road, weather or trac conditions.
Detection may be restricted in the following
cases:
RIn poor visibility, e.g. fog, heavy rain or snow
Rif there is dirt on the sensors or the sensors
are obscured
Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid. You are
responsible for adjusting the vehicle's lighting to
the prevailing light, visibility and trac conditions.
%Adaptive Highbeam Assist is an on-demand
feature (/ page 22).
Light and sight 131
Adaptive Highbeam Assist automatically switches
between the following types of light:
RLow beam
RHigh beam
At speeds greater than 30 km/h:
RIf no other road users are detected, high beam
will switch on automatically.
The high beam will switch o automatically in the
following cases:
RAt speeds below 25 km/h
RIf other road users are detected
RIf street lighting is sucient
%The system's optical sensor is located behind
the windscreen near the overhead control
panel.
Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist on/o
Switching on
#Turn the light switch to the à position.
#Switch on high beam using the combination
switch.
If Adaptive Highbeam Assist is activated,
the _ indicator lamp will light up on the
driver's display.
Switching o
#Switch o high beam using the combination
switch.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus function
&WARNING Risk of accident despite Adap-
tive Highbeam Assist Plus
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus does not react
to:
Rroad users without lights, e.g. pedestrians
Rroad users with poor lighting, e.g. cyclists
Rroad users whose lighting is obstructed,
e.g. by a barrier
On very rare occasions, Adaptive Highbeam
Assist Plus may fail to recognise other road
users with their own lighting, or may recognise
them too late.
In these, or in similar situations, the automatic
high beam will not be deactivated or will be
activated despite the presence of other road
users.
#Always observe the road and trac con-
ditions carefully and switch o the high
beam in good time.
132 Light and sight
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus cannot take into
account road, weather or trac conditions.
Detection may be restricted in the following
cases:
RIn poor visibility, e.g. fog, heavy rain or snow
RIf there is dirt on the sensors or the sensors
are obscured
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is only an aid. You
are responsible for adjusting the vehicle's lighting
to the prevailing light, visibility and trac condi-
tions.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus automatically
switches between the following types of light:
RLow beam
RPartial high beam
RHigh beam
Partial high beam uses the high beam to shine
past other road users rather than dazzling them.
The vehicle in front will be illuminated by the low
beam.
At speeds greater than 30 km/h:
RIf no other road users are detected, high beam
will switch on automatically.
RIf other road users are detected, partial high
beam will switch on automatically.
At speeds below 25 km/h or when there is su-
cient street lighting:
RThe high beam will switch o automatically.
RThe partial high beam will switch o automati-
cally.
%The system's optical sensor is located behind
the windscreen near the overhead control
panel.
Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus
on/o
Switching on
#Turn the light switch to the à position.
Light and sight 133
#Switch on high beam using the combination
switch.
When the high beam is switched on automati-
cally in the dark, the _ indicator lamp will
light up on the driver's display.
Switching o
#Switch o high beam using the combination
switch.
Setting low beam
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5Lights
5DIGITAL LIGHT 5Low beam
#Select Right-side traffic, Left-side traffic or
Automatic.
Setting the exterior lighting switch-o delay time
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5Lights
5Interior/exterior lighting
5Exterior lighting delayed switch off
#Set the switch-o delay time.
When the vehicle's engine is switched o, the
exterior lighting will be activated for the set
time.
Activating/deactivating the locator lighting
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5Lights
5Interior/exterior lighting
#Activate or deactivate Locator lighting.
When the function is activated, the exterior light-
ing will light up for 40 seconds aer the vehicle is
unlocked or the driver's door is opened when the
vehicle is parked and not locked. When you start
the vehicle, the locator lighting will be deactivated
and the automatic driving lights activated.
Interior lighting
Adjusting the interior lighting
Front overhead control panel
1p Front le reading lamp
2| Automatic interior lighting control
3c Front interior lighting
4u Rear interior lighting
5p Front right reading lamp
#To switch on or o: press button 15
accordingly.
134 Light and sight
Control panel in the grab handle
1p Rear reading lamp
#To switch on or o: press the 1 button.
Adjusting the ambient lighting
Multimedia system:
4© 5Comfort 5Ambient light
Setting the colour
#Select Colour.
#Select Monochrome or Multi-colour.
#Set the desired colour or colour scheme.
Adjusting the brightness
#Select Brightness.
#Adjust the brightness.
%Depending on the ambient light conditions,
the ambient lighting will automatically switch
between day and night modes.
Activating the brightness for zones
#Select Brightness.
#Switch o Link zones.
The Direct, Indirect and Accents zones can be
set separately.
Activating eects
&WARNING Risk of accident despite ambi-
ent lighting and active ambient lighting
eects switched on.
The warning assistance eects are fully active
only if the respective driving or driving safety
systems are switched on in the Driving Assis-
tance menu.
#Ensure that the respective driving or
driving safety systems are switched on.
%Observe the notes on driving systems and
your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to
recognise dangers (/ page 210).
#Select Effects.
#Activate the desired eect.
%Depending on the vehicle equipment, dierent
eects are available.
Operating feedback eects
RClimate: If changes are made to the tempera-
ture setting in the vehicle, the colour of the
ambient lighting will change briey.
RGreeting: When you get into the vehicle, a
special colour animation will play.
Multi-colour animation
RThe chosen colour combination will change at
predened intervals.
Light and sight 135
Switching the interior lighting switch-o delay
time on/o
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5Lights
5Interior/exterior lighting
5Interior lighting delayed switch off
#Activate or deactivate Interior lighting
delayed switch off.
If this function is active, the interior lighting
will be switched on for a short time aer the
end of the journey.
Changing bulbs (only for vehicles with halogen
headlamps)
Notes on changing bulbs
&WARNING Risk of burns from hot compo-
nent parts whilst replacing a bulb
Bulbs, lamps and plugs can become very hot
during operation.
When replacing a bulb, you could burn your-
self on these component parts.
#Allow the component parts to cool down
before replacing the bulb.
RDo not use an illuminant if it has been drop-
ped or if its glass has been scratched. The illu-
minant may otherwise explode.
RDo not touch the glass bulb with your bare
hands.
RProtect illuminants from moisture and do not
allow them to come into contact with liquids.
Overview of the bulbs to be changed
Halogen headlamps
1High beam: H7 55 W bulb
2Low beam: H7 55 W bulb
136 Light and sight
Changing the front bulbs (vehicles with halogen
headlamps)
Fitting/removing the cover in the front wheel
arch
Requirements:
RThe lighting system is switched o.
RThe appropriate front wheel is turned inwards.
#To remove: turn cover 1 to the le and
remove it from the wheel arch liner.
#To t: insert cover 1 into the wheel arch liner
and turn it to the right until it engages.
Replacing illuminants in the halogen headlamp
Requirements:
RLow beam: an H7 55 W illuminant is available.
RHigh beam: an H7 55 W illuminant is available.
1Low beam housing cover
2High beam housing cover
#Switch the lighting system o.
#Remove the cover in the front wheel arch
(/ page 137).
#Turn the relevant housing cover anti-clockwise
and remove it.
#Turn the socket anti-clockwise and remove it.
#Pull the illuminant out of the socket.
#Insert the new illuminant into the socket such
that the entire base of the illuminant is resting
on the bottom of the socket.
#Insert the socket and turn it clockwise.
#Position the housing cover and turn it clock-
wise.
#Replace the cover in the front wheel arch
(/ page 137).
Light and sight 137
Windscreen wipers and windscreen washer sys-
tem
Switching the windscreen wipers on/o
1g Windscreen wipers o
2Ä Automatic wiping, normal
3Å Automatic wiping, frequent
4° Continuous wiping, slow
5¯ Continuous wiping, fast
#Turn the combination switch to the corre-
sponding position 1 - 5.
#Single wipe/washing: push the button on the
combination switch in the direction of arrow
1.
Rí Single wipe
Rî Wipes with washer uid
%Observe the notes on washing the vehicle in a
car wash (/ page 337).
Replacing the windscreen wiper blades
&WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the
windscreen wipers are switched on while
wiper blades are being replaced
If the windscreen wipers begin to move while
you are changing the wiper blades, you can be
trapped by the wiper arm.
#Always switch o the windscreen wipers
and vehicle before changing the wiper
blades.
Moving the wiper arms into the replacement posi-
tion
#Switch the vehicle on and then o again
immediately.
#Within around 15 seconds, press and hold the
î button on the combination switch for
approximately three seconds (/ page 138).
The wiper arms will move into the replacement
position.
Removing the wiper blades
#Fold the wiper arms away from the wind-
screen.
138 Light and sight
#Hold the wiper arm with one hand. With the
other hand, turn the wiper blade away from
the wiper arm in the direction of arrow 1 as
far as it will go.
#Slide catch 2 in the direction of arrow 3
until it engages in the removal position.
#Remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm in
the direction of arrow 4.
Fitting the wiper blades
#Insert the new wiper blade into the wiper arm
in the direction of arrow 1.
#Slide catch 2 in the direction of arrow 3
until it engages in the locking position.
#Make sure that the wiper blade is seated cor-
rectly.
#Fold the wiper arms back onto the wind-
screen.
#Switch on the vehicle.
#Press the î button on the combination
switch (/ page 138).
The wiper arms will return to their original
positions.
#Switch o the vehicle.
%Check the condition of the wiper blades regu-
larly and replace them in the event of visible
damage or ongoing smearing.
Light and sight 139
Maintenance display
#Remove protective lm 1 from the mainte-
nance displays on the tips of the newly tted
wiper blades.
When the colour of the maintenance displays
changes from black to yellow, replace the wiper
blades.
%The duration until the colour changes varies
depending on the usage conditions.
Mirrors
Operating the outside mirrors
&WARNING Risk of accident due to adjust-
ing the vehicle settings while the vehicle is
in motion
You could lose control of the vehicle in the fol-
lowing situations in particular:
Rif you adjust the driver's seat, the head
restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror
while the vehicle is in motion
Rif you fasten your seat belt while the vehi-
cle is in motion
#Before starting the vehicle: in particular,
adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel and mirror, and fasten
your seat belt.
&WARNING Risk of accident due to mis-
judgement of distance when using the
outside mirror
The outside mirrors reect objects on a
smaller scale. The objects in view are in fact
closer than they appear.
#Therefore, always look over your shoul-
der in order to ensure that you are aware
of the actual distance between you and
the road users driving behind you.
140 Light and sight
#To fold in or out: briey press button 2.
#To set: press button 1 or 3 to select the
outside mirror to be adjusted.
#Use button 4 to adjust the position of the
mirror glass.
%If the battery has been disconnected or com-
pletely discharged, you will have to reset the
outside mirrors. Only then will the automatic
mirror folding function work properly.
#To reset: briey press button 2.
An outside mirror that has been pushed out of
position can be engaged in position again as fol-
lows:
#Vehicles without electrically folding outside
mirrors: manually move the outside mirror into
the correct position.
#Vehicles with electrically folding outside mir-
rors: press and hold button 2.
You will hear a click and the mirror will audibly
click into place. The outside mirror will now be
set to the correct position.
Automatic anti-dazzle mirrors function
&WARNING Risk of acid burns and poison-
ing due to the anti-dazzle mirror electro-
lyte
Electrolyte may escape if the glass in an auto-
matic anti-dazzle mirror breaks.
The electrolyte is hazardous to health and cau-
ses irritation. It must not come into contact
with your skin, eyes, respiratory organs or
clothing or be swallowed.
#If you come into contact with electrolyte,
observe the following:
RImmediately rinse the electrolyte
from your skin with water and seek
medical attention.
RIf electrolyte comes into contact with
your eyes, immediately rinse them
thoroughly with clean water and seek
medical attention.
RIf the electrolyte is swallowed, imme-
diately rinse your mouth out thor-
oughly. Do not induce vomiting. Seek
medical attention immediately.
RImmediately change out of clothing
which has been contaminated with
electrolyte.
RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek
medical attention immediately.
Light and sight 141
When light from a headlamp hits the sensor on
the inside rearview mirror, the inside rearview mir-
ror automatically dims.
System limits
The system will not go into anti-dazzle mode if:
RThe vehicle is switched o.
RReverse gear is engaged.
RThe interior lighting is switched on.
Front-passenger outside mirror parking position
function
The parking position makes parking easier.
The front-passenger outside mirror will swivel
downwards in the direction of the rear wheel on
the front passenger's side when:
Rthe parking position is stored (/ page 142).
Rthe front-passenger mirror is selected.
Rreverse gear is engaged.
The front-passenger outside mirror will move back
to its original position when:
Ryou shi the transmission to another transmis-
sion position.
Ryou are travelling at a speed greater than
15 km/h.
Ryou press the button for the outside mirror on
the driver's side.
Storing the parking position of the front-
passenger outside mirror using reverse gear
Storing
#Press button 1 to select the front-passenger
outside mirror.
#Engage reverse gear.
#Move the front-passenger outside mirror into
the desired parking position using button 2.
142 Light and sight
Calling up
#Press button 1 to select the front-passenger
outside mirror.
#Engage reverse gear.
The front-passenger outside mirror will move
into the stored parking position.
Activating/deactivating the automatic mirror fold-
ing function
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5Vehicle
5Open/close
#Activate or deactivate Automatic mirror fold-
in.
Light and sight 143
Overview of climate control systems
Notes on climate control
For the air-conditioning system, pollution level
monitoring and air ltration to function correctly,
an interior air lter must always be used. Make
sure that the lter is installed correctly. Use lters
recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Always have maintenance work carried out at a
qualied specialist workshop.
Overview of the air conditioning control panel
The indicator lamps on the buttons indicate that
the corresponding functions are activated.
THERMATIC air conditioning control panel with sta-
tionary heater (example)
1q Sets the temperature on the driver's
side
2Vehicles with THERMATIC or THERMOTRONIC
operating unit with stationary heater: A
calls up the air conditioning menu
Vehicles with THERMOTRONIC operating unit
without stationary heater: _ sets the air
distribution
3H Sets the airow or switches o climate
control
4Ã Sets climate control to automatic mode
(/ page 145)
5¬ Demists the windscreen
6¤ Switches the rear window heater on/o
7g Switches air-recirculation mode on/o
(/ page 146)
8Vehicles with THERMATIC operating unit
(with/without stationary heater):
¿ switches A/C function on/o
(/ page 145)
Vehicles with THERMOTRONIC operating unit
(with/without stationary heater): Á
switches A/C function on/o (/ page 145)
Switches residual heat on/o (/ page 146)
9Vehicles with THERMATIC or THERMOTRONIC
operating unit with stationary heater: &
switches stationary heater on/o
(/ page 150)
Vehicles with THERMOTRONIC operating unit
without stationary heater: 0 switches syn-
chronisation on/o (/ page 146)
Plug-in hybrid with THERMATIC or
THERMOTRONIC operating unit: &
switches "Immediate pre-entry climate con-
trol" on/o (/ page 149)
144 Climate control
AVehicles with THERMATIC operating unit
(with/without stationary heater): _ sets
the air distribution
Vehicles with THERMOTRONIC operating unit
(with/without stationary heater): q
adjusts temperature on front passenger side
%Residual heat can be used only in vehicles
with a diesel engine or vehicles with a station-
ary heater in combination with the
THERMOTRONIC air conditioning control
panel.
Operating the climate control system
Switching climate control on/o
#To switch on: set the airow to level 1 or
higher using the H button.
#To switch o: set the airow to level 0 using
the H button.
If climate control is switched o, the windows
may mist up more quickly. Switch climate control
o only briey.
Switching the A/C function on/o using the air
conditioning control panel
The A/C function heats, cools and dehumidies
the vehicle's interior air.
#Press the ¿/Á button.
Switch o the A/C function only briey; other-
wise, the windows may mist up more quickly.
Condensation may drip from the underside of the
vehicle when cooling mode is active. This is not
indicative of a fault.
Activating/deactivating the A/C function via the
air conditioning menu
Multimedia system:
4Climate menu 5First row of seats
Depending on the external conditions, support for
improved cooling and dehumidication of the inte-
rior air will be provided when the A/C function is
activated. If it is not possible to operate the A/C
function on the climate bar on the central display,
switch the function on or o in the climate menu
of the central display.
#Select A/C (A/C).
Setting climate control to automatic mode
In automatic mode, the set temperature is con-
trolled and maintained at a constant level by the
air supply.
#Press button à .
#To switch to manual mode: press the _ or
à button.
In automatic mode, you can choose between ve
dierent air quantities using the H button.
Automatic mode is retained.
Setting air distribution using the air conditioning
menu
Multimedia system:
4Climate menu
#Select First row of seats or Second row of
seats.
#To set the air distribution: select ¯, P
or O.
Climate control 145
#Set the airow.
%When the air conditioning system is switched
on, at least one zone is always active. How-
ever, several air distribution options can be
selected at the same time, for example to set
the climate control for the interior and the
footwells simultaneously. In doing so, the
¯ climate control for the windscreen can
only be selected for the rst seat row. When
automatic mode is active, the buttons for set-
ting the air distribution are automatically
deactivated. When the air conditioning system
is switched o, the buttons remain operable
and the last setting is saved.
Switching the synchronisation function on/o via
the air conditioning control panel
Climate control can be set centrally using the syn-
chronisation function. The temperature and air
distribution settings for the driver's side will be
adopted automatically for the front passenger
side.
#Press the 0 button.
The synchronisation function will be deactivated if
the settings for one of the other climate zones are
changed.
Switching the synchronisation function on/o via
the air conditioning menu
Multimedia system:
4Climate menu 5First row of seats
The synchronisation function controls the climate
control centrally. The driver's settings for temper-
ature, airow and air distribution are automatically
adopted for each climate zone.
#Select SYNC (SYNC).
Demisting the windows
Windows misted up on the inside
#Press the à button.
#If the windows remain misted up: press
the ¬ button.
Windows misted up on the outside
#Switch on the windscreen wipers.
#Press the à button.
Switching air-recirculation mode on/o
#Press the g button.
The interior air will be recirculated.
Air-recirculation mode automatically switches to
fresh air mode aer a while.
%If air-recirculation mode is switched on, the
windows may mist up more quickly. Switch on
air-recirculation mode only briey.
Switching residual heat on/o
Requirements
RThe vehicle is parked.
%Residual heat can be used only in vehicles
with a diesel engine or vehicles with a station-
ary heater in combination with the
THERMOTRONIC air conditioning control
panel.
It is possible to make use of the residual heat
from the engine to continue heating or ventilating
the front compartment of the vehicle for approx-
146 Climate control
imately 30 minutes, depending on the tempera-
ture set.
#To switch on: press the Á button.
Residual heat will be switched o automatically.
Pre-entry climate control via the key (plug-in
hybrid)
Function of pre-entry climate control via the
key (plug-in hybrid)
Before entering the vehicle, the driver's side or
the whole vehicle interior can be briey pre-
warmed or pre-cooled.
When pre-cooling, the following functions are acti-
vated as needed:
RAutomatic climate control
RBlower
When pre-heating, the following functions are acti-
vated as needed:
RAutomatic climate control
RBlower
RSeat heating
RSteering wheel heater
RMirror heater
RRear window heater
Setting pre-entry climate control when the vehi-
cle is unlocked in the multimedia system
Multimedia system:
4Climate menu 5Pre-entry climate ctrl
#Activate or deactivate the function.
Selecting seats
#Select Driver, Passenger, Rear left or Rear
right.
The seat-specic functions of pre-entry cli-
mate control, such as seat heating, will be per-
formed for the selected seats.
If pre-entry climate control is enabled, an LED on
the climate bar of the media display will light up
blue for a cooled vehicle and red for a heated
vehicle.
Activating/deactivating pre-entry climate con-
trol via the key (plug-in hybrid)
Requirements:
RThe high-voltage battery is charged su-
ciently.
RThe function has been activated via the multi-
media system.
#To switch on: unlock the vehicle.
The climate control functions are activated for
up to ve minutes for pre-heating and pre-
cooling.
Pre-entry climate control via the key cannot be
activated more than twice when the vehicle is
switched o.
#To switch o: push the & button up or
down.
The following functions will remain active once the
vehicle has been started:
RSeat heating
Climate control 147
Pre-entry climate control for departure time (plug-
in hybrid)
Function of pre-entry climate control for depar-
ture time (plug-in hybrid)
&WARNING Risk of fatal injury due to expo-
sure to extreme heat or cold in the vehicle
If persons, particularly children, are subjected
to prolonged exposure to intense heat or cold,
there is a risk of severe injury or even death.
#Never leave persons, particularly chil-
dren, unattended in the vehicle.
The vehicle interior can be air conditioned when
the vehicle is parked.
When the vehicle is connected to power supply
equipment, priority is given to charging the high-
voltage battery to a specied minimum charge.
The running time of pre-entry climate control may
be reduced under the following conditions:
RThe vehicle is not connected to power supply
equipment.
RThe high-voltage battery is not charged su-
ciently.
With active pre-entry climate control, the charge
level of the high-voltage battery may be reduced,
even if the charging cable connector is connec-
ted.
For cooling, the following functions are activated
as needed:
RAutomatic climate control
RBlower
For heating, the following functions are activated
as needed:
RAutomatic climate control
RBlower
RSeat heating
RSteering wheel heater
RMirror heater
RRear window heater
Setting pre-entry climate control for departure
time via the multimedia system
Multimedia system:
4Climate menu 5Pre-entry climate ctrl
Setting the departure time
#Select Edit departure time ´.
#Select a departure time or set a new depar-
ture time.
Setting the repeat days
#Select Edit departure time ´.
#Set the desired departure time and select the
corresponding weekdays on which this depar-
ture time is to apply.
#Press OK to conrm.
Selecting seats
#Select Driver, Passenger, Rear left or Rear
right.
Pre-entry climate control will take place for
the selected seats.
148 Climate control
Activating/deactivating pre-entry climate con-
trol for departure time (plug-in hybrid)
Requirements:
RThe high-voltage battery is charged su-
ciently.
RThe function has been activated via the multi-
media system.
#To activate: set the departure time
(/ page 148).
Pre-entry climate control for departure time
will switch on a maximum of 55 minutes
before the selected departure time. It will
remain active for another ve minutes if depar-
ture is delayed.
#To deactivate: press the & button up or
down.
The following functions will remain active once the
vehicle has been started:
RSeat heating
Activating/deactivating immediate pre-entry cli-
mate control
&WARNING Risk of fatal injury due to expo-
sure to extreme heat or cold in the vehicle
If persons, particularly children, are subjected
to prolonged exposure to intense heat or cold,
there is a risk of severe injury or even death.
#Never leave persons, particularly chil-
dren, unattended in the vehicle.
Air conditioning of the vehicle interior can con-
tinue for up to 50 minutes, e.g. if the journey is
interrupted.
The colours of the indicator lamp have the follow-
ing meanings:
RBlue: cooling is activated.
RRed: heating is activated.
RYellow: the departure time has been preselec-
ted.
#Set the desired temperature using the w
button.
Climate control 149
#Press button 1 .
The red or blue indicator lamp on button 1
will light up or go out.
Stationary heater/ventilation
Stationary heater/ventilation function
%The following function is equipment-depend-
ent.
RThe air inside the vehicle is heated or ventila-
ted to the set temperature.
RThe air inside the vehicle cannot be cooled
down to temperatures below the outside tem-
perature.
RIf the outside temperature changes, ventilation
mode will automatically switch to heating
mode or heating mode will automatically
switch to ventilation mode.
The stationary heater and the exhaust gas outlet
are situated in front of the right front wheel.
Switching the stationary heater/ventilation
on/o via the operating unit
&DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to poison-
ous exhaust gases
If the tailpipe is blocked or sucient ventila-
tion is not possible, poisonous exhaust gases
such as carbon monoxide may enter the vehi-
cle. This is the case in enclosed spaces or if
the vehicle gets stuck in snow, for example.
#Always switch the stationary heater o in
enclosed spaces without an air extrac-
tion system, e.g. in garages.
#Keep the tailpipe and the area around
the vehicle free from snow when the
engine or the stationary heater is run-
ning.
#Open a window on the side of the vehicle
facing away from the wind to ensure an
adequate supply of fresh air.
&WARNING Risk of re due to hot station-
ary heater components and exhaust gases
Flammable materials such as leaves, grass or
twigs may ignite.
#When the stationary heater is switched
on, make sure that:
Rhot vehicle parts do not come into
contact with ammable materials.
Rthe exhaust gas can ow out of the
stationary heater exhaust pipe unhin-
dered.
Rthe exhaust gas does not come into
contact with ammable materials.
*NOTE Battery discharge caused by sta-
tionary heater or stationary ventilation
operation
Operating the stationary heater or stationary
ventilation drains the battery.
#Aer heating or ventilating the vehicle
twice, drive for a longer period of time.
150 Climate control
Requirements
RThe fuel tank is at least Õ full.
#Set the desired temperature using the w
button.
#Press button 1.
The red or blue indicator lamp on button 1
will light up or go out.
The colours of the indicator lamp have the follow-
ing meanings:
RBlue: stationary ventilation is switched on.
RRed: the stationary heater is switched on.
RYellow: the departure time is preselected.
The stationary heater/ventilation will switch o
automatically aer 50 minutes.
Setting the stationary heater/ventilation via the
multimedia system
Requirements
RThe vehicle is tted with the stationary heater
equipment.
Multimedia system:
4Climate menu 5Stationary heater
Selecting the departure time
#Select Time A, Time B or Time C.
Setting the departure time
#Select Time A, Time B or Time C.
#Select the pen beside the time.
#Set a time.
Air vents
Adjusting the front air vents
&WARNING Risk of burns or frostbite due to
being too close to the air vents
Very hot or very cold air can ow from the air
vents.
#Make sure that all vehicle occupants
always maintain a sucient distance
from the air vents.
#If necessary, direct the airow to another
area of the vehicle interior.
To guarantee the ow of fresh air through the air
vents into the vehicle interior, note the following:
RAlways keep the vents and ventilation grilles in
the vehicle interior clear.
RKeep the air inlet free of residue build-up
(/ page 337).
Climate control 151
#To open or close: hold the centre of air
vent 1 and turn it to the le (open) or right
(closed) as far as it will go.
#To set the airow direction: hold the centre of
air vent 1 and move it up or down or to the
le or right.
Adjusting the rear air vents
#To open or close: hold the centre of air
vent 1 and turn it to the le or right as far as
it will go.
#To set the airow direction: hold the centre of
air vent 1 and move it up or down or to the
le or right.
152 Climate control
Driving
Notes on Mercedes-AMG vehicles
Observe the notes on the following additional top-
ics in the Supplement, as you may otherwise fail
to recognise dangers:
REmotion Start
RAMG exhaust system
RRACE START
RDRIFT MODE
RAMG RIDE CONTROL
RAMG steering-wheel buttons
Notes on plug-in hybrids
Notes on plug-in hybrid operation
&WARNING Risk of chemical burns and poi-
soning from damaged high-voltage battery
If the housing of the high-voltage battery has
been damaged, electrolyte and gases may
leak out.
#Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or
clothing.
#Immediately rinse electrolyte splashes
o with water and seek medical atten-
tion straight away.
&DANGER Risk of re and explosion from
excessive internal pressure of the high-
voltage battery
In the event of a vehicle re, ammable gas
can escape and ignite.
#Stop the charging process immediately
in case of unusual odours, smoke or
burn marks.
#Leave the danger zone immediately.
Secure the danger zone at a sucient
distance.
#Call the re service.
*NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles
#Observe the notes in the Supplement.
You could otherwise fail to recognise
dangers.
The hybrid system combines a combustion engine
with an electric motor.
Characteristics when the vehicle is at a standstill:
RThe combustion engine is generally switched
o.
RIdle speed occurs only in certain instances.
Characteristics when the vehicle is started:
RIf the high-voltage battery is suciently
charged, the vehicle can be started with the
electric drive system without the combustion
engine (noiseless start).
RIf the high-voltage battery for the electric drive
system is not suciently charged or the vehi-
cle conditions for a silent start are not met,
the vehicle will start with the combustion
engine.
Driving and parking 153
%Depending on the system, it may happen that
even though the high-voltage battery is
charged, electric mode has restricted or no
availability. Once the combustion engine has
been operated for long enough and ambient
conditions permit, electric mode is again
available without restriction.
%To start the combustion engine, the high-volt-
age battery can be used as a starter battery.
Characteristics with moderate power output
requests:
RThe combustion engine is switched o as
oen as possible during the journey.
RThe vehicle can, depending on the drive pro-
gram selected and the state of charge of the
high-voltage battery, be accelerated electri-
cally up to a speed of approximately
140 km/h.
Characteristics with high power output requests:
RThe electric motor supports the combustion
engine (boost eect), e.g. when you pull away
or accelerate.
RThe high-voltage battery is discharging.
Characteristics when the accelerator pedal is
released during the journey:
RThe electric motor will be operated as an alter-
nator when in overrun mode and during brak-
ing.
RThe high-voltage battery is charging.
Notes on electric mode:
RVehicles with hybrid systems generate signi-
cantly less noise when stationary and when
being driven than vehicles with combustion
engines.
RWhen you are driving in electric mode, the
vehicle may not be heard by other road users
due to the signicantly lower noise generated.
For this reason, the vehicle is equipped with a
sound generator, which serves as an acoustic
vehicle alerting system (AVAS). This safety
device is prescribed by law.
The external noise of the sound generator is
perceptible in the vehicle interior at low
speeds and does not represent a malfunction.
RIf not all of the vehicle conditions for electric
mode are met, then the combustion engine is
switched on.
RPerformance restrictions in electric mode are
possible as a result of the operating tempera-
ture of the high-voltage battery and drive sys-
tem, the ambient temperature and aging of
the high-voltage battery.
RIn electric mode, the maximum power is not
permanently available and may drop to contin-
uous output.
Notes on the acoustic vehicle alerting system:
RThe sound generator generates speed-depend-
ent vehicle noise emissions at a speed of up
to around 30 km/h when the vehicle is driving
both forwards and in reverse.
RThis helps other road users, particularly
pedestrians and cyclists, to hear your vehicle
better.
RWhen you drive at speeds above 20 km/h the
acoustic vehicle alerting system will gradually
switch o.
154 Driving and parking
RThe sound generator will be o when the vehi-
cle is stationary.
Manually disconnecting the high-voltage on-
board electrical system
&DANGER Risk of death and re due to
modied and/or damaged components of
the high-voltage on-board electrical sys-
tem
The vehicle's high-voltage on-board electrical
system is under high voltage. If you modify
component parts in the vehicle's high-voltage
on-board electrical system or touch damaged
component parts, you may be electrocuted. In
addition, modied and/or damaged compo-
nents may cause a re.
In the event of an accident or impact to the
vehicle underbody, components of the high-
voltage electrical system may be damaged
although the damage is not visible.
#Never make any modications to the
high-voltage on-board electrical system.
#Do not switch on or use the vehicle if its
high-voltage on-board electrical system
components have been modied or dam-
aged.
#Never touch damaged components of
the high-voltage on-board electrical sys-
tem.
#Aer an accident, do not touch any com-
ponents of the high-voltage on-board
electrical system.
#Aer an accident, have the vehicle trans-
ported away.
#Have the components of the high-voltage
on-board electrical system checked at a
qualied specialist workshop and
replaced if necessary.
Requirements
Only disconnect the high-voltage on-board electri-
cal system manually in the following situations:
RThe 6 restraint system warning lamp lights
up in the driver's display, e.g. aer an acci-
dent.
RThe vehicle is badly damaged, e.g. aer an
accident, and the restraint system compo-
nents have not been triggered.
Operating the high-voltage disconnect device
#Switch o the vehicle.
#Switch the transmission to position j.
#Apply the electric parking brake.
Driving and parking 155
#Secure the vehicle against rolling away (see
the vehicle Owner's Manual).
#Open the bonnet.
#Press release tab 1 in the direction of the
arrow and pull it out.
#Pull high-voltage disconnect device 2 in the
direction of the arrow until it engages.
The high-voltage on-board electrical system is
switched o.
All work on the hybrid drive system (including
aer disconnecting the high-voltage on-board
electrical system manually) may only be carried
out in a qualied specialist workshop.
Switching on the power supply or the vehicle
&WARNING Accident– and risk of injury
with unsupervised children in the vehicle
If you leave children unattended in the vehicle,
they can in particular
ROpen doors and thereby endanger other
persons or road users.
Rget out of the car and are hit by trac.
ROperate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, forexample.
In addition, the children could also set the
vehicle in motion, for exampleby:
Rreleasing the parking brake.
Rchange the gearbox setting.
Rstart the vehicle.
#Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
#When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
#Keep the key out of reach of children.
Requirements
RThe key is in the vehicle and is recognised.
RVehicles with automatic transmission: The
brake pedal is not depressed.
#To switch on the power supply: press button
1 once.
You can, for example, switch on the wind-
screen wipers.
156 Driving and parking
The power supply will be switched o again if the
following conditions are met:
RYou open the driver's door.
RYou press button 1 twice more.
#To switch on the vehicle: press button 1
twice.
Indicator and warning lamps will light up on
the driver's display.
The vehicle will be switched o again if one of the
following conditions is met:
RVehicles with automatic transmission: You do
not start the vehicle within 15 minutes and the
transmission is in position j or the electric
parking brake is applied.
RYou press button 1 once.
Starting the vehicle
Starting the vehicle with the start/stop button
&DANGER Risk of fatal injuries due to
exhaust gases
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Breathing in
these exhaust gases is hazardous to health
and results in poisoning.
#Never leave the engine and, if present,
the stationary heater, running in an
enclosed space without sucient venti-
lation.
&WARNING Risk of re due to ammable
materials in the engine compartment or
on the exhaust system
Flammable materials may ignite.
#Therefore, regularly check that there are
no ammable foreign materials in the
engine compartment or on the exhaust
system.
Requirements
RThe key is in the vehicle and is recognised.
#Vehicles with automatic transmission: Shi
the transmission to position j or i.
#Depress the brake pedal and press button 1
once.
#Keep the brake pedal depressed until the vehi-
cle is started.
#If the vehicle does not start: switch o non-
essential consumer equipment and press but-
ton 1 once.
#If the vehicle still does not start and the Place
the key in the marked space See Owner's
Manual display message appears on the driv-
er's display: start the vehicle with the key in
the marked space (emergency operation
mode) (/ page 158).
%You can switch o the vehicle while driving. To
do this, press and hold button 1 for about
three seconds or press button 1 three times
within three seconds. Be sure to observe the
safety notes concerning this under "Driving
tips" (/ page 160).
Driving and parking 157
Observe any information regarding display mes-
sages that may be shown on the driver's display.
Starting the vehicle with the key in the marked
space (emergency operation mode)
If the vehicle does not start and the Place the
key in the marked space See Owner's Manual
message appears on the driver's display, you can
start the vehicle in emergency mode.
Marked space (example with cup holder without
cover)
#Open the cover of marked space 2 if neces-
sary.
#Make sure that marked space 2 is empty.
#Remove key 1 from the key ring.
#Place key 1 on symbol 3 in marked space
2.
The vehicle will start aer a short time.
If you remove key 1 from marked space 2,
the vehicle can still be driven. For further
engine starts, however, key 1 must be loca-
ted on symbol 3 in marked space 2 during
the entire journey.
#Have key 1 checked at a qualied specialist
workshop.
If the vehicle does not start:
#Place key 1 in marked space 2 and leave it
there.
#Depress the brake pedal and start the vehicle
using the start/stop button.
#Keep the brake pedal depressed until the vehi-
cle is started.
%You can switch on the power supply or the
vehicle with the start/stop button.
Observe any information regarding display mes-
sages that may be shown on the driver's display.
158 Driving and parking
Starting the vehicle via Remote Online Services
Cooling or heating the vehicle interior before
starting the journey
Ensure the following before starting the engine:
RThe legal stipulations in the area where your
vehicle is parked allow engine starting via
smartphone.
RIt is safe to start and run the engine where
your vehicle is parked.
RThe fuel tank is suciently full.
RThe starter battery is suciently charged.
Charging the starter battery before starting the
journey
You can receive a message on your smartphone
when the state of charge of the starter battery is
low. You can then start the vehicle with the smart-
phone to charge the battery. The vehicle is auto-
matically switched o aer ten minutes.
Ensure the following before starting the engine:
RThe legal stipulations in the area where your
vehicle is parked allow engine starting via
smartphone.
RIt is safe to start and run the engine where
your vehicle is parked.
RThe fuel tank is suciently full.
Starting the vehicle (Remote Online)
&WARNING Risk of crushing or entrapment
due to unintentional starting of the engine
Limbs could be crushed or trapped if the
engine is started unintentionally during service
or maintenance work.
#Always secure the engine against unin-
tentional starting before carrying out
maintenance or repair work.
Requirements
RPark position j is selected.
RThe anti-the alarm system is not activated.
RThe hazard warning light system is switched
o.
RThe bonnet is closed.
RThe doors are closed and locked.
RThe windows and sliding sunroof are closed.
#Start the vehicle using the smartphone.
Aer every engine start, the engine runs for
ten minutes.
You can carry out a maximum of two consecutive
starting attempts. You must start the engine with
the key before trying to start the vehicle again
with the smartphone.
You can switch o the vehicle at any time as fol-
lows:
RVia the smartphone app
RBy pressing the Ü or ß button on the
key
%Further information can be found in the
smartphone app.
Securing the vehicle against starting before carry-
ing out maintenance or repair work:
#Switch on the hazard warning light system.
or
#Unlock the doors.
or
#Open a side window or the sliding sunroof.
Driving and parking 159
Running-in notes
To preserve the engine during the rst 1500 km:
RDrive at varying road speeds and engine
speeds.
RNo faster than 140 km/h.
RDrive the vehicle in drive mode A or ;.
RShi to the next higher gear at the very latest
when the needle reaches the last third before
the red area in the rev counter.
RDo not shi down manually in order to brake.
RAvoid overstraining the vehicle, e.g. driving at
full throttle.
ROnly increase the engine speed gradually and
accelerate the vehicle to full speed aer
1500 km.
This also applies when the engine or parts of the
drivetrain have been replaced.
Please also observe the following running-in
notes:
RIn certain handling and driving safety systems,
the sensors adjust automatically while a cer-
tain distance is being driven aer the vehicle
has been delivered or aer repairs. Full sys-
tem eectiveness is only reached when this
teaching-in process has concluded.
RBrake pads, brake disks and tyres that are
either new or have been replaced only achieve
optimum braking eect and grip aer driving
several hundred kilometres. Compensate the
reduced braking eect by applying greater
force to the brake pedal.
Notes on driving
&WARNING Risk of accident due to objects
in the driver's footwell
Objects in the driver's footwell may impede
pedal travel or block a depressed pedal.
This jeopardises the operating and road safety
of the vehicle.
#Stow all objects in the vehicle securely
so that they cannot get into the driver's
footwell.
#Always t the oor mats securely and as
prescribed in order to ensure that there
is always sucient room for the pedals.
#Do not use loose oor mats and do not
place oor mats on top of one another.
&WARNING Risk of accident due to incor-
rect footwear
Incorrect footwear includes, for example:
Rshoes with platform soles
Rshoes with high heels
Rslippers
There is a risk of an accident.
#Always wear suitable footwear so that
you can operate the pedals safely.
&WARNING Risk of accident if the vehicle is
switched o while driving
If you switch o the vehicle while driving,
safety functions are restricted or no longer
available.
160 Driving and parking
This may aect the power steering system and
the brake force boosting, for example.
You will need to use considerably more force
to steer and brake, for example.
#Do not switch o the vehicle while driv-
ing.
&DANGER Risk of fatal injuries due to
exhaust gases
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Breathing in
these exhaust gases is hazardous to health
and results in poisoning.
#Never leave the engine and, if present,
the stationary heater, running in an
enclosed space without sucient venti-
lation.
&WARNING Risk of skidding and of an acci-
dent due to shiing down on slippery road
surfaces
If you shi down on slippery road surfaces to
increase the engine braking eect, the drive
wheels may lose traction.
#Do not shi down on slippery road surfa-
ces to increase the engine braking
eect.
&DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to poison-
ous exhaust gases
If the tailpipe is blocked or sucient ventila-
tion is not possible, poisonous exhaust gases
such as carbon monoxide may enter the vehi-
cle. This is the case, for example, if the vehicle
gets stuck in the snow.
#Keep the tailpipe and the area around
the vehicle free from snow when the
engine or the stationary heater is run-
ning.
#Open a window on the side of the vehicle
facing away from the wind to ensure an
adequate supply of fresh air.
&WARNING Risk of accident due to the
brake system overheating
If you leave your foot on the brake pedal when
driving, the brake system may overheat.
This increases the braking distance and the
brake system can even fail.
#Never use the brake pedal as a footrest.
#Do not depress the brake pedal and the
accelerator pedal at the same time while
driving.
*NOTE Engine damage due to excessively
high engine speeds
The engine will be damaged if you drive with
the engine in the overrevving range.
#Do not drive with the engine in the over-
revving range.
Driving and parking 161
*NOTE Causing wear to the brake linings by
permanently depressing the brake pedal
#Do not permanently depress the brake
pedal while driving.
#To use braking eect of the engine, shi
to a lower gear in good time.
*NOTE Damage to the drivetrain and
engine when pulling away
#Do not warm up the engine while the
vehicle is stationary. Pull away immedi-
ately.
#Avoid high engine speeds and driving at
full throttle until the engine has reached
its operating temperature.
*NOTE Damage to the catalytic converter
due to non-combusted fuel
The engine is not running smoothly and is mis-
ring.
Non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic
converter.
#Only depress the accelerator pedal
slightly.
#Have the cause rectied immediately at
a qualied specialist workshop.
*NOTE Reduced battery life due to frequent
short-distance trips
The 12 V battery may not be suciently
charged when the vehicle is used only for
short-distance trips. This reduces the life of
the battery.
#Drive longer distances regularly to
charge the battery.
*NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to not
observing the maximum permitted head-
room clearance
If the vehicle height is greater than the maxi-
mum permitted headroom clearance, the roof
and other parts of the vehicle may be dam-
aged.
#Observe the signposted headroom clear-
ance.
#If the vehicle height is greater than the
permitted headroom clearance, do not
enter.
#Observe the changed vehicle height with
add-on roof equipment.
%Please bear in mind that all the speed values
stated in this Operator's Manual are approxi-
mate and are subject to a certain tolerance.
Notes on driving with a roof load, trailer or fully
laden vehicle
When driving with a loaded roof luggage rack or
trailer as well as with a fully laden or fully occu-
pied vehicle, the vehicle's driving and steering
characteristics change.
You should bear the following in mind:
RDo not exceed the permissible roof load and
towing capacity. Also observe the information
in the Technical Data.
RDistribute the roof load and the load inside the
vehicle evenly, placing heavy objects at the
162 Driving and parking
bottom. Also comply with the notes on loading
the vehicle (/ page 114).
RDrive attentively, and avoid abrupt starts, brak-
ing and steering as well as rapid cornering.
Advice on driving on salt-strewn roads
The braking eect is limited on salt-strewn road
surfaces.
Therefore, observe the following notes:
RDue to salt build-up on the brake disks and
brake pads, the braking distance can increase
considerably or result in one-sided braking.
RMaintain a much greater safety distance to the
vehicle travelling ahead.
Remove salt build-up as follows:
RBrake occasionally, paying attention to the
trac conditions
RCarefully depress the brake pedal at the end
of the journey and when starting the next jour-
ney
Notes on aquaplaning
Aquaplaning can take place if a certain depth of
water has built up on the road surface.
Observe the following notes during heavy precipi-
tation or in conditions in which aquaplaning may
occur:
RReduce speed
RAvoid tyre ruts
RAvoid sudden steering movements
RBrake carefully
%Also observe the notes on regularly checking
wheels and tyres (/ page 371).
Notes on driving through water on the road
Water ingress can damage the engine, electrics
and transmission.
Water can also enter the air intake of the engine
and cause engine damage.
Observe the following if you have to drive through
water:
RThe water, when calm, may reach no higher
than the lower edge of the vehicle body.
RDrive at walking speed at most; water can oth-
erwise enter the vehicle interior or the engine
compartment.
RVehicles travelling ahead, or oncoming vehi-
cles, can create waves which may exceed the
maximum permissible depth of the water.
The braking eect of the brakes is reduced aer
fording. Brake carefully, paying attention to the
trac conditions until braking power has been
fully restored.
ECO start/stop function
ECO start/stop function
%Depending on the engine, the ECO start/stop
function is not available in all drive programs.
Observe the status display on the driver's dis-
play concerning this.
%Plug-in hybrid: this function is not available.
The engine will be switched o automatically in
the following situations if all vehicle conditions for
an automatic engine stop are met:
RYou brake the vehicle to a standstill in trans-
mission position h or i.
Driving and parking 163
RVehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical sys-
tem: you depress the brake pedal when travel-
ling at a low speed.
If the system has detected one of the following
situations, the engine will not stop:
RYou stop at a stop sign and there is no vehicle
in front of you.
RThe vehicle that stopped in front of you starts
up again.
RYou manoeuvre, turn the steering wheel
sharply or engage reverse gear.
%If the system detects an intelligent stop inhibi-
tor, e.g. a stop sign, the engine will not stop.
If you activate the HOLD function or engage
the park position j, the engine can be
switched o despite an intelligent stop inhibi-
tor.
The engine will restart automatically in the follow-
ing cases:
RYou engage transmission position h or k.
RYou depress the accelerator pedal.
RThe vehicle requires an automatic engine
start.
RYou release the brake pedal.
RVehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical sys-
tem:
-You release the brake pedal on a downhill
gradient and the vehicle does not roll.
-The vehicle rolls on a downhill gradient and
does not automatically enter glide mode at
20 km/h.
ECO start/stop function symbols on the driver's
display:
RThe è symbol (green) appears when the
vehicle is at a standstill: the engine was
switched o by the ECO start/stop function.
RThe ç symbol (yellow) appears when the
vehicle is at a standstill: not all vehicle condi-
tions for an engine stop have been met.
RNeither the è symbol nor the ç symbol
appears when the vehicle is at a standstill: an
intelligent stop inhibitor, e.g. a stop sign, has
been detected.
RThe s symbol appears: the ECO start/stop
function is deactivated or there is a malfunc-
tion.
If the engine was switched o by the ECO start/
stop function and you leave the vehicle, a warning
tone will sound and the engine will not be restar-
ted. In addition, the following display message will
appear on the driver's display:
Vehicle is operational Switch off vehicle before
exiting
If you do not switch o the vehicle, it will automat-
ically be switched o aer three minutes.
Switching the ECO start/stop function on/o
*NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles
#Observe the notes in the Supplement.
You could otherwise fail to recognise
dangers.
164 Driving and parking
#Press the 1 button.
A display will appear on the driver's display
when you switch the ECO start/stop function
on/o.
%s will be continuously shown on the driv-
er's display while the ECO start/stop function
is deactivated.
ECO display function
%Depending on the model and equipment, your
vehicle has one of the following ECO displays.
The ECO display summarises your driving charac-
teristics from the start of the journey to its com-
pletion and assists you in achieving the most eco-
nomical driving style.
The ECO display assesses the following criteria for
an economical driving style:
Rcoasting at the right times
Rconsistent speed
Rmoderate acceleration
The lettering in the segment will light up brightly,
the outer edge will light up and the segment will
ll up when the following driving style is adopted:
R1 Steady speed
R2 Gentle deceleration and rolling
R3 Moderate acceleration
The lettering in the segment will be grey, the outer
edge will be dark and the segment will empty
when the following driving style is adopted:
R1 Fluctuations in speed
R2 Heavy braking
R3 Sporty acceleration
The ECO display will show you when you have
driven economically:
RThe three segments will ll up completely at
the same time
RThe edges around all three segments will light
up
The additional range achieved as a result of your
driving style in comparison with a driver with a
very sporty driving style will be shown in the
Driving and parking 165
centre of display 4. The range displayed does
not indicate a xed reduction in consumption.
The ECO display shows an evaluation of your driv-
ing style on the driver's display depending on the
situation. This enables you to check the eciency
of your driving style and adjust it if necessary. The
ECO display menu shows a ball 2 that will roll
forwards or backwards on a stylised road in the
direction of travel according to the driving charac-
teristics.
Above and below the road, lines mark the area for
an ecient driving style 3. Ball 2 will light up in
green if it is rolling within these lines. Outside the
lines, the ball will light up in orange.
The overall assessment of your driving style "from
start" is indicated using stars 1. It starts with
ve empty stars, which you can ll one aer the
other if you drive eciently. When all ve stars are
lled, a glow will appear in the background.
%You can call up the ECO display function via
the Classic menu (/ page 276).
ECO Assist function (vehicles with 48 V on-board
electrical system)
For plug-in hybrids, note the ECO Assist informa-
tion (/ page 169).
%ECO Assist is active only in drive pro-
grams ; and A.
ECO Assist analyses data for the vehicle's expec-
ted route. This allows the system to optimally
adjust the driving style for the route ahead, save
fuel and recuperate. If the system detects an
event ahead and the vehicle nears the event, ECO
Assist will calculate the optimum speed for maxi-
mum fuel economy and recuperative energy
based on the distance, speed and downhill gradi-
ent.
If the deceleration provided by ECO Assist is not
sucient, you must also brake with the service
brake. This is especially the case if, for example,
you pull away again in slow-moving trac and the
distance to the vehicle in front is very short.
1"Foot o the accelerator" recommendation
2Route event ahead
If a route event ahead or vehicle in front is detec-
ted that requires an adjustment of your driving
style for improved eciency, symbol 2 and the
ý symbol are displayed in grey.
If you release the accelerator pedal, the ý
symbol will turn green and recuperation in over-
166 Driving and parking
run mode will be initiated. If the deceleration is
not sucient, also apply the service brake. If ECO
Assist intervenes for a route event ahead (not for
a vehicle in front) and you then press the acceler-
ator pedal again, you end ECO Assist's control.
The ECO Assist display is hidden again in the fol-
lowing cases:
RYou do not react to the ECO Assist recommen-
dation for a long time.
RYou press the accelerator pedal while ECO
Assist is intervening for a route event ahead
(not for a vehicle in front).
RECO Assist cannot identify any further recom-
mendations from the route ahead.
In addition to a vehicle in front ¥, ECO Assist
can detect the following route events 2 depend-
ing on the vehicle's equipment:
~Roundabout
£T-junction
¤Downhill gradient
¦Speed limit
%In drive program A, ECO Assist reacts only
to the route event "vehicle in front" without
displaying the route event ¥ or recom-
mendation ý.
System limits
If the calculated route is adhered to when route
guidance is active, ECO Assist will operate with
greater accuracy. The basic function is also availa-
ble without active route guidance. Not all informa-
tion and trac situations can be foreseen. The
quality depends on the map data.
ECO Assist is only an aid. The driver is responsible
for keeping a safe distance from the vehicle in
front, for vehicle speed and for braking in good
time.
The system may be impaired or may not function
in the following situations:
RIf there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insucient
illumination of the road, highly variable shade
conditions, rain, snow, fog or heavy spray.
RIf there is glare, e.g. from oncoming trac,
direct sunlight or reections.
RIf the windscreen is dirty in the vicinity of the
multifunction camera.
RIf the multifunction camera is misted up, dam-
aged or obscured.
RIf road signs are hard to detect, e.g. due to
dirt, snow or insucient lighting, or because
they are obscured.
RIf the information in the navigation system's
digital map is incorrect or out of date.
RIf signs are ambiguous, e.g. road signs in road-
works or in adjacent lanes.
RIf the radar sensors are dirty or obscured.
RWhen you drive on roads with steep uphill or
downhill gradients.
RIf there are narrow vehicles in front, such as
bicycles or motorcycles.
Recuperative brake system (plug-in hybrid)
Function of the recuperative brake system
Depending on the selected recuperation level, the
electric motor is operated as an alternator when
in overrun mode and during braking in order to
Driving and parking 167
charge the high-voltage battery while driving. As
soon as you take your foot o the accelerator
pedal when the vehicle is in motion and in trans-
mission position h, recuperation in overrun
mode is initiated.
The higher the recuperation, the more sharply the
vehicle is braked when coasting and the more
electrical energy is fed into the high-voltage bat-
tery.
The deceleration in overrun mode may not be suf-
cient depending on the driving conditions. Decel-
erating to a standstill is not possible. Also brake
with the service brake if necessary. Always adapt
your speed to the driving conditions and keep a
sucient distance.
The recuperative brake system has the following
characteristics:
Rsupports braking with electronically controlled
brake force boosting
Rconverts the kinetic energy of the vehicle into
electric energy
%If you brake hard, the mechanical brake is
also used. This means that the maximum
recuperative energy cannot be recovered. The
more you drive and brake in an anticipatory
manner, the more eciently energy can be
recuperated.
System limits
The braking eect of the electric motor during
recuperation in overrun mode may be reduced or
may not be available at all in the following situa-
tions:
Rwhen the high-voltage battery charge level
increases
Rif the high-voltage battery is not yet at a nor-
mal operating temperature
In these cases, the desired deceleration is set by
the brake control system.
Manually setting recuperative deceleration
*NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles
#Observe the notes in the Supplement.
You could otherwise fail to recognise
dangers.
%You can use the steering wheel gearshi pad-
dles to adjust the intensity of recuperation in
drive programs n, o and Î.
The following recuperation levels are available:
Rhà Intelligent and anticipatory recupera-
tion with ECO Assist (/ page 169)
Rhq No recuperation: the vehicle rolls freely
Rh Normal recuperation
Rh± Increased recuperation: strong deceler-
ation in overrun mode, e.g. for driving on
downhill gradients
168 Driving and parking
Standard setting:
RhÃ: if the ECO Assist function is activa-
ted in the multimedia system (/ page 170).
Rh: if the ECO Assist function is deactivated
in the multimedia system.
%hà is only available if the ECO Assist
function is activated in the multimedia system
and if the function of the radar sensors is not
impaired. Also observe the information on
vehicle sensors and cameras (/ page 211).
#To increase recuperation: briey pull gearshi
paddle 1.
#To reduce recuperation: briey pull gearshi
paddle 2.
#Standard setting: pull and hold gearshi pad-
dle 1 or 2, or engage transmission position
h again.
%When the vehicle is started again, the stand-
ard setting is also set.
The driver's display shows the currently selected
recuperation level next to the transmission posi-
tion display.
ECO Assist (plug-in hybrid)
ECO Assist function
%The following function depends on the equip-
ment and the country.
ECO Assist analyses data for the vehicle's expec-
ted route. This allows the system to optimally
adjust the driving style for the route ahead, save
fuel and recuperate. If the system detects an
event ahead and the vehicle nears the event, ECO
Assist will calculate the optimum speed for maxi-
mum fuel economy and recuperative energy
based on the distance, speed and downhill gradi-
ent.
If the deceleration provided by ECO Assist is not
sucient, you must also brake with the service
brake. This is especially the case if, for example,
you pull away again in slow-moving trac and the
distance to the vehicle in front is very short.
The function will be active in the following circum-
stances:
RThe function is activated in the multimedia
system (/ page 170).
RThe hà recuperation level is selected
(/ page 168).
RManual gearshiing p is not activated.
RDrive program C is not selected.
1"Foot o the accelerator" recommendation
2Route event ahead
If a route event that can be dealt with more e-
ciently by adjusting your driving style is detected
ahead, corresponding symbol 2 and the ý
symbol will be displayed in grey.
If you release the accelerator pedal, the ý
symbol will turn green and recuperation in over-
Driving and parking 169
run mode will be initiated. If the deceleration is
not sucient, also apply the service brake.
If ECO Assist intervenes for a route event ahead
and you press the accelerator pedal, you end ECO
Assist's control. This does not apply in the case of
a vehicle in front.
The ECO Assist display is hidden again in the fol-
lowing cases:
RYou do not react to the ECO Assist recommen-
dation for a long time.
RYou press the accelerator pedal while ECO
Assist is intervening because of a route event
ahead. This does not apply in the case of a
vehicle in front.
RECO Assist cannot identify any further recom-
mendations from the route ahead.
In addition to a vehicle in front ¥, ECO Assist
can detect the following route events 2 depend-
ing on the vehicle's equipment:
~Roundabout
¡S-bend
¢Sharp bend
£T-junction
¤Downhill gradient
¦Speed limit
System limits
If the calculated route is adhered to when route
guidance is active, ECO Assist will operate with
greater accuracy. The basic function is also availa-
ble without active route guidance. Not all informa-
tion and trac situations can be foreseen. The
quality depends on the map data.
ECO Assist is only an aid. The driver is responsible
for keeping a safe distance from the vehicle in
front, for vehicle speed and for braking in good
time.
The system may be impaired or may not function
in the following situations:
RIf there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insucient
illumination of the road, highly variable shade
conditions, rain, snow, fog or heavy spray.
RIf there is glare, e.g. from oncoming trac,
direct sunlight or reections.
RIf the windscreen is dirty in the vicinity of the
multifunction camera.
RIf the multifunction camera is misted up, dam-
aged or obscured.
RIf road signs are hard to detect, e.g. due to
dirt, snow or insucient lighting, or because
they are obscured.
RIf the information in the navigation system's
digital map is incorrect or out of date.
RIf signs are ambiguous, e.g. road signs in road-
works or in adjacent lanes.
RIf the radar sensors are dirty or obscured.
RWhen you drive on roads with steep uphill or
downhill gradients.
RIf there are narrow vehicles in front, such as
bicycles or motorcycles.
Activating and deactivating ECO Assist
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5Assistance
5Driving
#Activate or deactivate the function.
170 Driving and parking
Function of the route-based operating-mode strat-
egy (plug-in hybrid)
%The following function is country-dependent
and available only in conjunction with an inte-
grated navigation system.
The route-based operating-mode strategy is active
under the following conditions:
RDrive program n is selected .
RThe "route based" option (/ page 173) is
selected for drive program n in the
DYNAMIC SELECT menu.
RRoute guidance is active.
RThe state of charge of the high-voltage battery
is sucient.
If the function is active, data on the further course
of the route is evaluated. This includes e.g. road
type, speed limitations and altitude data.
The hybrid system then adapts the operating
strategy to the further course of the route:
RUse of electrical energy and the combustion
engine is adapted.
RThe state of charge of the high-voltage battery
is controlled accordingly.
RElectrical energy is reserved especially for
electric mode, e.g. urban route sections or
areas with low emission zones.
RThe vehicle automatically selects the operat-
ing mode.
DYNAMIC SELECT button
Function of the DYNAMIC SELECT button
*NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles
#Observe the notes in the Supplement.
You could otherwise fail to recognise
dangers.
%Depending on the engine and equipment, the
vehicle has dierent drive programs.
Use the DYNAMIC SELECT button to change
between the following drive programs:
The drive program selected will appear on the
driver's display.
= Individual
RIndividual settings (/ page 173)
RIndividual settings (plug-in hybrid)
(/ page 173)
C Sport
RMaximum output is available
RSporty driving
RSporty, but with an emphasis on stability
REnables a sporty driver to adopt a more active
driving style
RDriving with the combustion engine and rein-
forced boost eect (plug-in hybrid)
RDeactivation of the combustion engine when
stationary (plug-in hybrid)
RSuitable only for good road conditions, a dry
surface and a clear stretch of road
n Hybrid (plug-in hybrid)
RComfortable and economical driving
RBalance between traction and stability
RRecommended for all road conditions
Driving and parking 171
RFull development of all intelligent hybrid func-
tions
RAdjustable recuperation in overrun mode
RThe selection of the appropriate drive type by
the hybrid system depends on the driving con-
ditions and the distance
A Comfort
RComfortable and economical driving
RBalance between traction and stability
RRecommended for all road conditions
Î Electric (plug-in hybrid)
RElectric mode – driving without the combus-
tion engine is possible up to approximately
140 km/h
RAdjustable recuperation in overrun mode
RAdaptation of Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC for electric mode
RDepending on the equipment, the maximum
set speed for cruise control, the limiter and
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC can be limi-
ted to the maximum speed possible in electric
mode
RActivation of the combustion engine via the
point of resistance of the accelerator pedal
(kickdown)
o Hold battery (plug-in hybrid)
RPrioritises maintaining the state of charge of
the high-voltage battery, e.g. for subsequent
journeys in inner-city/low-emission zones
RThe selection of the appropriate drive type by
the hybrid system depends on the driving con-
ditions and the distance
RAdjustable recuperation in overrun mode
; Eco
RParticularly economical driving
RBalance between traction and stability
RRecommended for all road conditions
%Depending on the situation, cylinders can be
briey deactivated in the ; and A
drive programs, depending on the engine.
%The ESP® settings in the drive programs ;
and A are designed for stability. Therefore,
choose one of these drive programs espe-
cially when transporting roof loads, in trailer
operation and when the vehicle is fully loaded
or fully occupied.
Plug-in hybrid: This also applies for drive pro-
grams n, Î and o.
Depending on the drive program, the following
systems will change their characteristics:
RDrive
-Engine and transmission management
-Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
-Availability of Glide mode
RESP®
RVehicles with adaptive damping adjustment:
suspension
RSteering
172 Driving and parking
Selecting a drive program
#Press DYNAMIC SELECT button 1 repeatedly
until the selected drive program appears on
the driver's display.
or
#Press DYNAMIC SELECT button 1 and select
the drive program in the DYNAMIC SELECT
menu on the central display.
Conguring DYNAMIC SELECT in the multimedia
system
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5Vehicle
5DYNAMIC SELECT
Setting drive program I
#Select = Individual.
#Select and set a category.
Switching the reset display on/o
#Activate or deactivate Ask when starting.
%This function must be activated for each user
prole separately. Only when this function is
activated will the drive program and ECO
start/stop setting for the previous journey be
saved for the respective user prole.
Function on: the next time the vehicle is started a
prompt appears asking whether the last active
drive program should be restored. If the ECO
start/stop function was deactivated, an additional
prompt appears asking if the function should
remain deactivated.
%The prompt only appears if the previously
active settings deviate from the standard set-
tings.
Function o: the next time the vehicle is started
the A drive program is set automatically. The
ECO start/stop function is activated automati-
cally.
Conguring DYNAMIC SELECT in the MMS (plug-
in hybrid and electric vehicles)
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5Vehicle
5DYNAMIC SELECT
Setting drive program I
#Select = Individual.
#Select and set a category.
Setting the H drive program
#Select Hybrid.
#Select Route-based or Standard.
If route guidance is active and the Route-
based option has been activated, the electri-
Driving and parking 173
cal energy is distributed intelligently over the
entire route. In built-up areas, electric mode is
preferred, while on the motorway the combus-
tion engine is used.
With the Standard option, the vehicle drives in
its standard drive program (Î Electric or
n Hybrid). There is no distribution of elec-
trical energy over the entire route. The high-
voltage battery is exhausted and the vehicle is
then driven by the combustion engine.
Switching the reset display on/o
#Activate or deactivate Ask when starting.
%This function must be activated for each user
prole separately. The drive program for the
respective user prole of the last driver is only
stored if this function is activated.
Function on: the next time the vehicle is started a
prompt appears asking whether the last active
drive program should be restored.
%The prompt only appears if the previously
active settings deviate from the standard set-
tings.
Function o: if the Î drive program was the
last one active, and all requirements for the drive
program are fullled, this will be automatically
selected the next time the vehicle is started. If
another drive program was active, then the n
drive program is set automatically.
Function o: the next time the vehicle is started
the A drive program is set automatically.
Displaying vehicle data
Multimedia system:
4© 5Info
#Select Vehicle.
The vehicle data is displayed.
Displaying engine data
Multimedia system:
4© 5Info
#Select Engine.
The engine data is displayed.
%The actual (maximum) values that can be ach-
ieved for engine output and engine torque
may deviate from the certied values within
the country-specic guidelines for permissible
tolerances (basis: UN-ECE No. 85 or country-
specic guidelines).
Variables that can inuence this are, for
example:
RSea level
RFuel quality
ROutside temperature
ROperating temperature of the engine
Adjust your driving style accordingly.
The p warning lamp in the driver's display
is on until the engine has reached operating
temperature.
%The values displayed serve only as orienta-
tion. The values for engine output and engine
torque shown in the media display may devi-
ate from the actual values.
%The p warning lamp to show the power
output limitation aer starting the vehicle is
not available in all vehicle models.
174 Driving and parking
Calling up the fuel consumption indicator
Multimedia system:
4© 5Info
#Select Consumption.
The current and average fuel consumption will
be displayed.
Automatic transmission
DIRECT SELECT lever
Function of the DIRECT SELECT lever
&WARNING Risk of accident due to incor-
rect gearshiing
If the engine speed is higher than the idle
speed and you engage the transmission posi-
tion h or k, the vehicle may accelerate
sharply.
#If you engage the transmission position
h or k when the vehicle is at a stand-
still, always depress the brake pedal
rmly and do not accelerate at the same
time.
&WARNING Accident– and risk of injury
with unsupervised children in the vehicle
If you leave children unattended in the vehicle,
they can in particular
ROpen doors and thereby endanger other
persons or road users.
Rget out of the car and are hit by trac.
ROperate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, forexample.
In addition, the children could also set the
vehicle in motion, for exampleby:
Rreleasing the parking brake.
Rchange the gearbox setting.
Rstart the vehicle.
#Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
#When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
#Keep the key out of reach of children.
Use the DIRECT SELECT lever to switch the trans-
mission position. The current transmission posi-
tion will be shown on the driver's display.
jPark position
kReverse gear
iNeutral
hDrive position
Driving and parking 175
Engaging reverse gear R
#Depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT
SELECT lever upwards past the rst point of
resistance.
Engaging neutral N
#Depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT
SELECT lever up or down to the rst point of
resistance.
%To shi into neutral i with the vehicle
switched on, push the selector lever up or
down for several seconds to the rst point of
resistance.
Subsequently releasing the brake pedal will allow
you to move the vehicle freely, e.g. to push it or
tow it away.
Proceed as follows if you want the automatic
transmission to remain in neutral i, even if the
vehicle is switched o or the driver's door is
opened:
#Depress the brake pedal and engage neutral
i when the vehicle is at a standstill.
#Release the brake pedal.
#Switch o the vehicle.
The Risk of vehicle rolling away N activated man-
ually No automatic switch to P message appears
in the driver's display.
%If you then exit the vehicle leaving the key in
the vehicle, the automatic transmission
remains in neutral i.
The park position j is automatically re-engaged
as soon as one of the following conditions is met:
RYou switch to transmission position h or k.
RYou press the button j.
Engaging park position P
*NOTE Damage due to engaging park posi-
tion j while the vehicle is rolling
If you shi the transmission into park position
j while the vehicle is rolling, the transmis-
sion may be damaged.
#If the vehicle is rolling, do not open a
door.
#Only engage the park position j when
the vehicle is stationary.
#Observe the notes on parking the vehicle
(/ page 203).
#Depress the brake pedal until the vehicle
comes to a standstill.
#When the vehicle is stationary, press button
j.
When the transmission position display shows
j, the park position is engaged. If the trans-
mission position display j does not appear,
apply the parking brake and secure the vehicle
to prevent it from rolling away.
%Depending on the situation, it may take a
short time until j is engaged. Therefore,
always pay attention to the transmission posi-
tion display.
Park position j will be engaged automatically if
one of the following conditions is met:
RYou switch the stationary vehicle o in trans-
mission position h or k.
RYou open the driver's door when the vehicle is
stationary in transmission position h or k.
176 Driving and parking
RWhen the vehicle is rolling, you switch if o in
transmission position h or k and bring it to
a standstill.
RWhen the vehicle is rolling, you shi to trans-
mission position i, bring the vehicle to a
standstill and open the driver's door when the
vehicle is stationary.
REngaging park position j automatically is
required by the vehicle.
%To manoeuvre with an open driver's door,
open the driver's door while the vehicle is sta-
tionary and engage transmission position h
or k again.
%At very low outside temperatures below
approximately -20 °C, it may not be possible
to shi the transmission from j to another
transmission position when the vehicle is
switched o. If this is the case, change the
transmission position only while the vehicle is
switched on.
Engaging drive position D
#Depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT
SELECT lever down past the rst point of
resistance.
When the automatic transmission is in transmis-
sion position h, it will shi gears automatically.
This depends, among other things, on the follow-
ing factors:
RThe selected drive program
RThe position of the accelerator pedal
RThe driving speed
Problems with the transmission
The transmission has a faulty gear shi
Possible cause:
Rthe transmission is losing oil.
#Have the transmission checked at a qualied
specialist workshop immediately.
The acceleration characteristics get worse, and
the transmission no longer shis.
Possible cause:
Rthe transmission is in emergency operation
mode.
#Stop the vehicle in accordance with the trac
conditions.
#Shi the transmission to position j.
#Switch o the vehicle.
#Wait at least ten seconds.
#Start the vehicle again.
#Shi the transmission to position h.
#Have the transmission checked at a qualied
specialist workshop immediately.
Manual gearshiing
*NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles
#Observe the notes in the Supplement.
You could otherwise fail to recognise
dangers.
Driving and parking 177
%For plug-in hybrids, observe the information
regarding the regenerative brake system
(/ page 167).
When the automatic transmission is shied to
position h, you can manually shi it with the
steering wheel gearshi paddle. If permitted, the
automatic transmission will shi to a higher or
lower gear depending on the steering wheel gear-
shi paddle being pulled.
You have two options for manually shiing the
automatic transmission:
RTemporary setting
RPermanent setting
The gears will shi automatically when manual
shiing is deactivated.
Temporary setting:
#To activate: pull steering wheel gearshi pad-
dle 1 or 2.
Manual shiing will be activated for a short
time. The transmission position display will
show p and the current gear.
%How long manual shiing stays activated
depends on various factors.
Manual shiing can be deactivated automati-
cally in the following cases:
RWhen the drive program is changed
RWhen the vehicle is restarted
RWhen transmission position h is engaged
again
RDriving style
#To shi up: pull steering wheel gearshi pad-
dle 2.
#To shi down: pull steering wheel gearshi
paddle 1.
If you pull and hold steering wheel gearshi
paddle 1, the transmission will shi to the
lowest possible gear.
#To deactivate: pull and hold steering wheel
gearshi paddle 2.
The transmission position display will show
h.
%You can also activate or deactivate manual
shiing permanently in the multimedia sys-
tem.
Permanently activating or deactivating manual
gearshiing
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5Vehicle 5Driving
#Permanently switch the function on or o.
Gearshi recommendation
The gearshi recommendation assists you in
adopting an economical driving style.
178 Driving and parking
#If gearshi recommendation 1 appears next
to the transmission position display, shi to
the recommended gear.
Using kickdown
#Maximum acceleration: depress the accelera-
tor pedal beyond the point of resistance.
To protect against engine overrev, the automatic
transmission will shi up to the next gear when
maximum engine speed has been reached.
Glide mode function
*NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles
#Observe the notes in the Supplement.
You could otherwise fail to recognise
dangers.
With an anticipatory driving style, Glide mode
helps you to reduce fuel consumption.
Glide mode is characterised by the following:
RThe combustion engine is disconnected from
the drivetrain and continues to run in neutral.
RThe transmission position display h is shown
in green.
RVehicles with 48 V on-board electrical system:
The combustion engine can be switched o.
All of the vehicle functions remain active.
Glide mode will be activated if the following condi-
tions are met:
RDrive program ; is selected.
RThe speed is within a suitable range.
RThe road's course is suitable, e.g. no steep
uphill or downhill gradients or tight bends.
RThere is no trailer hitched up to the trailer
hitch, and no bicycle rack tted.
RYou do not depress the accelerator or brake
pedal (except for light brake applications).
%Glide mode can also be activated if you have
selected the "Eco" setting for the drive in the
drive program =.
Glide mode will be deactivated again if one of the
conditions is no longer met.
Vehicles with Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC:
When Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is active,
the glide mode function will not be available.
Glide mode can also be prevented by the following
parameters:
RIncline
RDownhill gradient
RTemperature
RHeight
Rspeed
ROperating status of the engine
Driving and parking 179
RTrac situation
%You can end glide mode by operating a steer-
ing wheel gearshi paddle (/ page 177).
Function of 4MATIC
4MATIC ensures that all four wheels are driven.
Together with ESP® and 4ETS, 4MATIC improves
the traction of your vehicle whenever a driven
wheel spins due to insucient traction.
If you fail to adapt your driving style, 4MATIC can
neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override
the laws of physics. 4MATIC cannot take account
of road, weather or trac conditions. 4MATIC is
only an aid. You are responsible especially for
maintaining a safe distance from the vehicle in
front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time
and for staying in lane.
%In wintry road conditions, the maximum eect
of 4MATIC can be achieved only if you use
winter tyres (M+S tyres), with snow chains if
necessary.
Refuelling
Refuelling the vehicle
&WARNING Risk of re or explosion from
fuel
Fuels are highly ammable.
#Fire, naked ames, smoking and creating
sparks must be avoided.
#Before refuelling, switch o the vehicle
and, if tted, the stationary heater and
keep switched o during lling.
&WARNING Risk of injury from fuels
Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to your
health.
#Do not swallow fuel or let it come into
contact with skin, eyes or clothing.
#Do not inhale fuel vapour.
#Keep children away from fuel.
#Keep doors and windows closed during
the refuelling process.
If you or other people come into contact with
fuel, observe the following:
#Immediately rinse fuel o your skin with
soap and water.
#If fuel comes into contact with your eyes,
immediately rinse them thoroughly with
clean water. Seek medical attention
immediately.
#If you swallow fuel, seek medical atten-
tion immediately. Do not induce vomit-
ing.
#Change immediately out of clothing that
has come into contact with fuel.
&WARNING Risk of re and explosion due
to electrostatic charge
Electrostatic charge can ignite fuel vapour.
#Before you open the fuel ller cap or
take hold of the pump nozzle, touch the
metallic vehicle body.
180 Driving and parking
#To avoid creating another electrostatic
charge, do not get into the vehicle again
during the refuelling process.
&WARNING Risk of re from fuel mixture
Vehicles with a diesel engine:
If you mix diesel fuel with petrol, the ash
point of the fuel mixture is lower than that of
pure diesel fuel.
While the vehicle is running, component parts
in the exhaust system may overheat without
warning.
#Never refuel using petrol.
#Never mix petrol with diesel fuel.
*NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel
Vehicles with a petrol engine:
Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could
result in damage to the fuel system, the
engine and the emission control system.
#Only refuel using unleaded, sulphur-free
spark-ignition engine fuel that conforms
to European EN 228, or an equivalent
specication.
Fuel of this specication may contain up to
10% ethanol. Your vehicle is suitable for use
with E10 fuel.
Never refuel with one of the following fuels:
RDiesel
RRegular petrol with an octane number
lower than 91 RON
RPetrol with more than 10% ethanol by vol-
ume, e.g. E15, E20, E85, E100
RPetrol with more than 3% methanol by vol-
ume, e.g. M15, M30
RPetrol with additives containing metal
If you have accidentally refuelled with the
wrong fuel:
#Do not switch on the vehicle.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
*NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel
Vehicles with a diesel engine:
Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could
result in damage to the fuel system, the
engine and the emission control system.
#Only refuel using sulphur-free diesel fuel
that conforms to European standard
EN 590, or an equivalent specication.
In countries without sulphur-free diesel
fuel, refuel using only low-sulphur diesel
fuel with a sulphur content less than
50 ppm.
Never refuel with one of the following fuels:
RPetrol
RMarine diesel
RHeating oil
RPure bio-diesel or vegetable oil
RParan or kerosene
If you have accidentally refuelled with the
wrong fuel:
Driving and parking 181
#Do not switch on the vehicle.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
*NOTE Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles
with a petrol engine
If you have accidentally refuelled with the
wrong fuel:
RDo not switch on the vehicle. Otherwise
fuel can enter the engine.
Even small amounts of the wrong fuel
could result in damage to the fuel system
and the engine. The repair costs are high.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
#Have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained
completely.
*NOTE Do not use petrol to refuel vehicles
with a diesel engine
If you have accidentally refuelled with the
wrong fuel:
RDo not switch on the vehicle. Otherwise,
fuel can enter the fuel system.
Even small amounts of the wrong fuel
could result in damage to the fuel system
and the engine. The repair costs are high.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
#Have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained
completely.
*NOTE Damage to the fuel system due to
overlling the fuel tank
#Only ll the fuel tank until the pump noz-
zle switches o.
If too much fuel has been added due, for
example, to a faulty lling pump:
#Do not switch on the vehicle.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
*NOTE Fuel may spray out when you
remove the fuel pump nozzle
#Only ll the fuel tank until the pump noz-
zle switches o.
Requirements
RThe vehicle is unlocked.
RPlug-in hybrid with petrol engine: The fuel tank
was vented before refuelling (/ page 184).
This function is country-dependent.
Observe the notes on service uids and fuel.
The recommended octane number for your vehi-
cle can be found on the information label in the
fuel ller ap.
182 Driving and parking
1Fuel ller ap
2Bracket for fuel ller cap
3Tyre pressure table
4Fuel type
5QR code for rescue card
%Plug-in hybrid with petrol engine: The fuel ller
ap opens automatically aer the fuel tank
has been vented (/ page 184).
#Press on the rear part of fuel ller ap 1.
#Turn the fuel ller cap anti-clockwise and
remove it.
#Insert fuel ller cap 2from above into
bracket.
#Completely insert the pump nozzle into the
tank ller neck, hook in place and refuel.
#Only ll the fuel tank until the pump nozzle
switches o.
%Vehicles with a diesel engine: The tank ller
neck is designed for refuelling at diesel lling
pumps.
Your vehicle is equipped with an incorrect fuel
protection system to prevent lling up with
the wrong fuel. This function may be deactiva-
ted in some countries due to local circum-
stances. For more information, consult a
Mercedes-Benz service centre.
%Vehicles with a diesel engine: Refuel with at
least 5 litres of diesel if the fuel tank has been
run dry completely.
%Vehicles with a diesel engine: Use a ller neck
with a large diameter for vehicles with a diesel
engine when topping up fuel from a fuel can.
Otherwise, the ller neck cannot be pushed
into the tank sha.
Your vehicle is equipped with an incorrect fuel
protection system to prevent lling up with
the wrong fuel. This function may be deactiva-
ted in some countries due to local circum-
stances. For more information, consult a
Mercedes-Benz service centre.
#Replace the cap on the ller neck and turn
clockwise until it engages audibly.
#Close fuel ller ap 1.
Driving and parking 183
Depressurising the fuel tank (plug-in hybrid with
petrol engine)
#Pull switch 1 once briey.
Indicator lamp 2 will ash and the Please
wait Depressurising fuel tank message will
appear on the driver's display.
When the fuel tank is depressurised, indicator
lamp 2 will light up continuously.
The Fuel tank is depressurised Ready for
refuelling message will appear on the driver's
display and the fuel ller ap will open auto-
matically.
%Depressurising the fuel tank may take several
minutes.
The fuel tank can be depressurised only if the
conditions described above are fullled. Other-
wise, drive the vehicle at least 0.5 km and repeat
the process.
%In the following situations, there is a malfunc-
tion:
RIndicator lamp 2 ashes initially and then
goes out.
RThe yellow ; engine diagnostics warn-
ing lamp lights up.
*NOTE Damage to the fuel ller ap when
opening it
If an attempt is made to open a fuel ller ap
that is not unlocked, the fuel ller ap or the
opening mechanism may be damaged.
#Only refuel when the fuel ller ap has
opened automatically.
AdBlue® (vehicles with a diesel engine only)
Notes on topping up AdBlue®
AdBlue® is a water-soluble uid for the NOx
exhaust gas aertreatment of diesel engines. In
order for the exhaust gas aertreatment to func-
tion properly, only use AdBlue® in accordance
with ISO 22241.
AdBlue® is characterised by the following:
Rnon-toxic
Rcolourless and odourless
Rnon-ammable
If you open the AdBlue® tank, small amounts of
ammonia vapour may be released. Only ll the
AdBlue® tank in well-ventilated areas.
Do not let AdBlue® come into contact with skin,
eyes or clothes. Keep AdBlue® away from chil-
dren.
184 Driving and parking
Do not ingest AdBlue®. If AdBlue® is swallowed,
immediately rinse your mouth out thoroughly.
Drink plenty of water. Seek medical attention at
once.
Observe the notes on operating uids
(/ page 398).
AdBlue® is available here:
RAdBlue® can be topped up by fast service at a
qualied specialist workshop, e.g. a
Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
RAdBlue® is available at many lling stations
from AdBlue® lling pumps.
RAlternatively, AdBlue® is available at qualied
specialist workshops, e.g. Mercedes-Benz
Service Centres, and at many lling stations in
AdBlue® rell canisters or AdBlue® rell bot-
tles.
%Ensure the connection between the rell con-
tainer and vehicle ller neck does not drip.
Topping up AdBlue®
*NOTE Engine damage due to AdBlue®
being in the fuel
#AdBlue® must not be used to ll the fuel
tank.
#Only use AdBlue® to ll the AdBlue®
tank.
#Do not overll the AdBlue® tank.
*NOTE Contamination of the vehicle inte-
rior due to AdBlue® leakage
#Aer topping up, carefully close the
AdBlue® rell container.
#Avoid carrying AdBlue® rell containers
permanently in the vehicle.
Requirements
RThe vehicle is unlocked.
The following messages appear in order in the
driver's display when the AdBlue® tank requires
relling:
RRefill AdBlue See Owner’s Manual. The
AdBlue® level has fallen into the reserve
range. Rell with at least 5 l of AdBlue®.
RTop up AdBlue Emergency op. in XXX km
See Owner's Manual. The low AdBlue® level
will lead to limited performance aer the
remaining distance displayed has been cov-
ered. Rell with at least 5 l of AdBlue®.
RTop up AdBlue XX,X l Emerg. op.: max. XXX
km/h Start not poss. in XXX km. The low
AdBlue® level will lead to an output restriction
from the speed displayed. Aer the remaining
distance displayed has been covered, it will no
longer be possible to start the vehicle. Rell at
least the indicated amount of AdBlue®.
RTop up AdBlue XX,X l Switch vehicle on, wait
60 sec. or engine start not poss.. The
AdBlue® tank is empty. You can no longer
start the vehicle. Rell at least the indicated
amount of AdBlue®. Switch on the vehicle and
Driving and parking 185
wait for approximately 60 seconds. Start the
vehicle.
You can see the AdBlue® range and level in the
Service menu in the driver's display.
%The AdBlue® range shown depends strongly
on the driving style and operating conditions.
The actual range can therefore dier from the
calculated range.
Opening the AdBlue® ller cap
#Press on the rear part of fuel ller ap 1.
#Turn AdBlue® ller cap 2 anti-clockwise and
remove it.
%You can also place the AdBlue® ller cap in
the fuel ller cap holder in the fuel ller ap
hinge arm.
Topping up AdBlue®
Mercedes-Benz recommends relling AdBlue® at
a lling pump. If no AdBlue® lling pump is availa-
ble, you can also top up AdBlue® using a canister.
#Screw on the fastener of AdBlue® rell canis-
ter 4.
186 Driving and parking
#Screw the disposable hose 3 onto the open-
ing of AdBlue® rell canister 4 until hand-
tight.
#Screw the disposable hose 3 onto the ller
neck of the vehicle until hand-tight.
#Li up and tip AdBlue® rell canister 4.
The lling process stops when the AdBlue®
tank is completely full.
The AdBlue® rell canister 4 can be removed
even if it has been only partially emptied.
#Unscrew and close the disposable hose 3
and AdBlue® rell canister 4 in reverse
order.
#Replace AdBlue® ller cap 2 and turn it
clockwise until it audibly engages.
#Close fuel ller ap 1.
#Switch on the vehicle for at least 60 seconds.
%If the vehicle could not be started because
the AdBlue® tank was empty, it can take up to
60 seconds for the rell to be detected.
#Start the vehicle.
%Avoid storing AdBlue® rell containers perma-
nently in the vehicle.
Charging the high-voltage battery (plug-in
hybrid)
Notes on charging the high-voltage battery
*NOTE High-voltage battery damage due to
leaving the vehicle idle for lengthy periods
of time
Lithium-ion batteries experience a natural self-
discharge.
Exhaustive discharging can therefore occur if
the vehicle is idle for several months. This can
damage the high-voltage battery.
#To avoid damage, please observe the fol-
lowing recommendations when handling
the high-voltage battery.
*NOTE Accelerated ageing of the high-volt-
age battery due to not observing the fol-
lowing recommendations
As a result of its basic characteristics, the
storage capacity of and the amount of energy
available from the high-voltage battery decrea-
ses over the course of its life. Due to this, both
the maximum electrical range that can be ach-
ieved by the vehicle and its maximum electri-
cal output can be impaired.
The following factors could accelerate the age-
ing of the high-voltage battery:
Ra high level of charge, especially if the
vehicle is idle for a lengthy period of time
Rfrequent rapid charging with direct current
(mode 4)
Rleaving the vehicle idle for lengthy periods
at high ambient temperatures
#To avoid accelerated ageing, please
observe the following recommendations
when handling the high-voltage battery.
Driving and parking 187
Recommendations when handling the high-voltage
battery:
ROnly charge the high-voltage battery with
direct current (mode 4) if necessary.
RIf leaving the vehicle idle for lengthy periods,
park up the vehicle with a high-voltage battery
charge level between 25% and 30%. Do not
keep the high-voltage battery continuously
connected to power supply equipment.
RIf leaving the vehicle idle for lengthy periods of
time avoid, if possible, high ambient tempera-
tures.
RCheck the high-voltage battery's charge level
every six weeks (/ page 202).
RCharge the high-voltage battery if the charge
level is below 15%.
RDo not disconnect the 12 V battery even if the
vehicle is le idle for a lengthy period. Other-
wise, the condition of the vehicle's high-volt-
age battery cannot be monitored.
RIf the high-voltage battery is only used with
low charge levels, fully charge the high-voltage
battery every six months.
Depending on the charging version, your vehicle is
equipped with one of the following vehicle sock-
ets:
RType 2 for charging with alternating current
(mode 2/3)
RCombo 2 for charging with alternating current
(mode 2/3) and charging with direct current
(mode 4)
Example: Combo 2 vehicle socket
1AC charging port (mode 2)
2Socket extension for charging with direct cur-
rent
188 Driving and parking
%When using a CCS (Combined Charging Sys-
tem) charging cable to charge with direct cur-
rent at a combo vehicle socket, both vehicle
socket connections 1 and 2 are used for
charging.
Charging options for the high-voltage battery
(mode 2, 3 or 4):
RCharging through recuperation while the vehi-
cle is in motion
RCharging with alternating current when sta-
tionary:
-at a mains socket (mode 2)
-at a wallbox or charging station (mode 3)
RDC charging when stationary (vehicles with
combo 2 vehicle sockets):
-at a rapid charging station (mode 4)
Depending on the country-specic vehicle equip-
ment and your vehicle's charging cable, single
phase AC charging is also possible.
Observe the dierent grid requirements of your
current location when charging. Only use charging
cables which conform to the grid requirements.
Consult a qualied electrician or your local grid
operator if you have any questions.
It is recommended that you charge the high-volt-
age battery at a wallbox or charging station due to
the improved charging performance and better
charging eciency oered.
System limits
The power output of the high-voltage battery may
be impaired by the following:
RHigh or low outside temperatures
RElectrical auxiliary consumers in the vehicle
being switched on, e.g. operating the air con-
ditioning system
RExtended periods without charging
The charging time of the high-voltage battery may
be increased by the following:
RHigh or low outside temperatures
RExtended periods without charging
RThe maximum available charge current of the
charging facility
Stowing the charging cable
Always stow the vehicle's charging cable in the
charging cable bag provided, and secure the
charging cable bag in the boot or load compart-
ment with the included retaining strap. Otherwise,
the charging cable bag with the charging cable is
not suciently secured.
Example: charging cable bag in the boot/load com-
partment
Driving and parking 189
As delivered, charging cable bag 1 with retaining
strap 2 is located in the boot or load compart-
ment. To secure the charging cable bag, the
retaining strap must be attached to tie-down eye
3. Do not use bag hooks to attach the retaining
strap.
#Feed the loop end of retaining strap 2
through tie-down eye 3 into the boot or load
compartment.
#Feed the end with the snap hook through the
loop of retaining strap 2.
#Tighten retaining strap 2 so that the knot
around tie-down eye 3 is tight and secure.
#Hook the snap hook of retaining strap 2 in a
tie-down eye of charging cable bag 1.
Notes on charging the high-voltage battery at the
mains socket (mode 2)
&DANGER Risk of fatal injury from incor-
rectly installed component parts
Connecting the charging cable to a mains
socket using incorrectly installed component
parts could cause a re or an electric shock,
for example.
#Only connect the charging cable to a
mains socket that:
RHas been properly installed and
RHas been inspected by a qualied electri-
cian
#For safety reasons, only use the charging
cable supplied with the vehicle or an
original Mercedes‑Benz charging cable.
#Purchase these parts at a Mercedes-
Benz Service Centre and obtain advice
there.
190 Driving and parking
Mercedes-Benz thoroughly tests these original
charging cables for their suitability for high-
voltage charging of your vehicle.
#Never use a damaged charging cable.
#Do not use:
RExtension cables
RExtension reels
RMultiple sockets
#Never use socket adapters to connect
the charging cable to the mains socket.
The only exception being if the adapter
has been tested and approved by the
manufacturer for charging the high-volt-
age battery of an electric vehicle.
#Observe the safety notes in the operat-
ing instructions for the socket adapter.
Only the following charging cables may be used:
RThe charging cable supplied with the vehicle.
RA charging cable that has been approved for
the vehicle.
The charging process can vary depending on the
power supply equipment. The charging times
when charging the high-voltage battery at the
mains socket are considerably longer than when
charging at a wallbox or charging station.
When doing so, always observe the local informa-
tion.
Do not leave the charging cable controls hanging
loose from a mains socket.
Do not li the controls by the following compo-
nent parts:
Rthe charging cable connector
Rthe mains plug
When charging, protect the charging cable control
element from excessive heat such as direct sun-
light. Otherwise, the charging process may be
cancelled.
Notes on charging the high-voltage battery at a
wallbox or charging station (mode 3)
&DANGER Risk of fatal injury from incor-
rectly installed component parts
Connecting the charging cable to a wallbox
using incorrectly installed component parts
could cause a re or an electric shock, for
example.
#Only connect the charging cable to a
wallbox that:
RHas been properly installed and
RHas been inspected by a qualied electri-
cian
#For safety reasons, only use charging
cables that have been tested and
approved by the manufacturer for charg-
ing the high-voltage battery in an electric
vehicle.
#Never use damaged charging cables.
#Do not extend the charging cable.
#Do not use adapters.
Driving and parking 191
#Observe the safety notes in the operat-
ing instructions for the wallbox.
If charging at a wallbox without pre-installed
cable, use the optionally available charging cable
for wallbox and charging station (mode 3). The
charging cable is stowed in a bag in the boot/
luggage compartment.
Only use charging cables that have been tested
and approved by the manufacturer for charging
the high-voltage battery in an electric vehicle.
&DANGER Risk of fatal injuries due to dam-
aged components
If you use a damaged component to connect
the vehicle to the charging station, this can
result in re or an electric shock, for example.
#Perform a visual inspection of the charg-
ing station for obvious defects, e.g. dam-
age to the housing or on the charging
cable connection.
#At charging stations without a pre-instal-
led cable, for safety reasons, only use
charging cables that have been tested
and approved by the manufacturer for
charging the high-voltage battery in an
electric vehicle.
#Do not use a damaged charging cable.
#Do not use an extension for the charging
cable.
#Do not use an adapter.
#Always observe the safety information on
the charging station.
Most charging stations must be activated before
the charging process, e.g. using an RFID card.
Observe the on-site operator's instructions for the
charging station.
The amount of energy dispensed for the charging
process, shown by the charging station, may be
higher than the amount of energy actually absor-
bed by the high-voltage battery. This is the result
of dierent levels of charging losses and is descri-
bed as recharge eciency. Charging losses occur,
for example, due to heat that builds up when the
vehicle is charging or from auxiliary consumers
that are switched on. Further information on
recharge eciency can be obtained at a qualied
specialist workshop.
Notes on charging the high-voltage battery at a
rapid charging station (mode 4)
&DANGER Risk of fatal injuries due to dam-
aged components
If you use a damaged component to connect
the vehicle to the charging station, this can
result in re or an electric shock, for example.
#Perform a visual inspection of the charg-
ing station for obvious defects, e.g. dam-
age to the housing or on the charging
cable connection.
#At charging stations without a pre-instal-
led cable, for safety reasons, only use
charging cables that have been tested
and approved by the manufacturer for
charging the high-voltage battery in an
electric vehicle.
#Do not use a damaged charging cable.
192 Driving and parking
#Do not use an extension for the charging
cable.
#Do not use an adapter.
#Always observe the safety information on
the charging station.
&DANGER Risk of fatal injuries when carry-
ing out maintenance work during the
charging process
During the charging process, the high-voltage
on-board electrical system is under high volt-
age.
#Do not perform any maintenance work
during the charging process.
Most charging stations must be activated before
the charging process, e.g. using an RFID card.
Observe the on-site operator's instructions for the
charging station.
The charging cable for the vehicle must not be
longer than 30 m due to the legal requirements in
some countries. This is to prevent the interfer-
ence of signals being received by radio communi-
cation devices in the vehicle or in close proximity
to the charging station. Be aware that parts of the
charging cable may be routed underground. If in
doubt, ask the charging station operator if this is
the case before charging the high-voltage battery.
The amount of energy dispensed for the charging
process, shown by the charging station, may be
higher than the amount of energy actually absor-
bed by the high-voltage battery. This is the result
of dierent levels of charging losses and is descri-
bed as recharge eciency. Charging losses occur,
for example, due to heat that builds up when the
vehicle is charging or from auxiliary consumers
that are switched on. Further information on
recharge eciency can be obtained at a qualied
specialist workshop.
Setting the maximum permissible charging cur-
rent for charging at a mains socket
*NOTE Overloading the mains socket due
to excessive charging current
If the charging current is too high, the fuse
could be tripped or the external mains supply
could overheat.
#Make sure that the external mains supply
has been designed to handle the set
charging current.
#If necessary, reduce the set charging
current or use a dierent mains socket.
#For safety reasons, only use the charging
cable supplied with the vehicle or an
original Mercedes-Benz charging cable.
Mercedes-Benz thoroughly tests these
original charging cables for their suitabil-
ity for high-voltage charging of your vehi-
cle. Purchase these parts at a Mercedes-
Benz Service Centre and obtain advice
there.
Driving and parking 193
Before charging at a mains socket, have the maxi-
mum permissible charging current for the relevant
mains socket or the building inspected by a quali-
ed electrician. The charging cable supplied is set
to a country-specic maximum charging current
value. When charging abroad, the maximum value
may exceed the permitted value for that country.
When abroad, observe the country-specic laws
when charging. If you have questions concerning
setting the charging current or if there is a mal-
function, please contact a qualied specialist
workshop.
Overview of the charging cable control panel
The charging cable control panel shows the cur-
rent status of the charging process.
1Supply voltage indicator
2Charging process indicator
3Temperature monitor indicator
4Safety system indicator
Supply voltage indicator 1
Display Meaning
Lights up white The supply voltage is
connected.
Charging process indicator 2
Display Meaning
Flashes green The high-voltage bat-
tery is charging.
Temperature control indicator 3
Display Meaning
Lights up red The green LED ashes
simultaneously: over-
temperature – the
charging performance
is reduced.
The green LED does
not ash: overtemper-
ature – the charging
process is stopped.
Flashes red Overtemperature at
the mains plug – the
charging process is
stopped.
194 Driving and parking
Safety system indicator 4
Display Meaning
Flashes red Charging cable mal-
function – cannot
carry out the charging
process, reset the
charging cable operat-
ing unit.
Lights up red White LED is o:
power supply malfunc-
tion – cannot carry
out the charging proc-
ess, replace the mains
socket.
White LED is on: vehi-
cle malfunction – can-
not carry out the
charging process,
reset the charging
cable operating unit.
When all four displays light up, the charging cable
operating unit performs a self-test.
If temperature monitor 3 indicates a malfunc-
tion, it may help to protect the charging cable
from direct sunlight.
To reset the charging cable operating unit: if
safety system 4 indicates a charging cable mal-
function or a vehicle malfunction, rst reset the
charging cable operating unit. To do this, discon-
nect the charging cable from the vehicle and from
the mains socket and wait for approximately ve
seconds. If the malfunction persists aer the
charging cable is reconnected, charging at the
mains socket is not possible. The charging cable
must be replaced or the vehicle plug must be
checked at a qualied specialist workshop,
depending on the indicator.
Functions of the indicator lamps on the vehicle
socket
The socket ap is centrally locked and unlocked
together with the vehicle.
Example: Combo 2 vehicle socket
1Socket lamp
2Charging process indicator lamp
3Locking status indicator lamp
Socket lamp 1 ashes or lights up as with indi-
cator lamps 2 and 3.
Driving and parking 195
Overview of the locking status
Locking sta-
tus 3
Display Meaning
% Lights up
whiteVehicle
socket
unlocked,
insert or
remove charg-
ing cable
% Flashes white Malfunction
during locking
or unlocking
Overview of the charging process status
Status of the
charging
process 2
Display Meaning
# Flashes
orange Connection is
being estab-
lished
# Flashes green Active energy
ow
Status of the
charging
process 2
Display Meaning
# Lights up
orange Interruption in
charging
# Lights up
green Charging
process com-
pleted
# Flashes red
(for approx.
90 s)
Vehicle mal-
function;
charging is
not possible
Starting the alternating current charging process
(mode 2/3)
&DANGER Risk of death when charging at a
damaged socket
The charging process uses high voltage.
If the charging cable, the vehicle socket or the
mains socket are damaged, you could receive
an electric shock.
#Only use an undamaged charging cable.
#Avoid mechanical damage such as crush-
ing, abrading or driving over the cable.
#Have a damaged vehicle socket replaced
at a qualied specialist workshop as
soon as possible.
#Never connect the charging cable to a
damaged vehicle socket.
*NOTE Damage due to overheating of
charging cable and charge port
During the charging process, the charging
cable and charge port can heat up within the
permissible limits.
The permissible limit values are inuenced by
the following factors:
Rthe power supply system and the charging
cable are not damaged
196 Driving and parking
Rthe instructions for handling the charging
cable and the control element on the
charging cable have been observed
#If the charging cable or charge port
becomes too hot, have the power supply
system checked.
*NOTE Damaged or dirty vehicle socket
when the socket ap is open
#Always keep the socket cover and the
socket ap closed when there is no
charging cable connected. This protects
the vehicle socket from dirt and damage.
#Make sure that the socket cover is
closed properly before closing the socket
ap. This can otherwise result in damage
which may prevent the socket ap from
being opened again.
*NOTE Damage to the vehicle socket or the
charging cable connector due to incorrect
handling
Do not use excessive force (maximum 300 N)
to insert the charging cable connector into the
vehicle socket to the stop. You may otherwise
damage the vehicle socket, the charging cable
connector or their contacts.
#If you feel there is increased resistance,
pull the charging cable connector out of
the socket and reinsert it.
Requirements
RThe transmission is in position j.
RThe vehicle is unlocked or the distance
between the key and the vehicle does not
exceed 1 m.
RThe vehicle is switched o. The õ display
in the driver's display is o.
RThe charging cable is not taut.
Depending on the charging equipment, your vehi-
cle is equipped with one of the following vehicle
sockets:
RType 2 for charging with alternating current
(mode 2/3)
RType Combo 2 for charging with alternating
current (mode 2/3) and charging with direct
current (mode 4)
Driving and parking 197
Example: Combo 2 vehicle socket
#Press the centre rear section of socket ap
1 and swing the socket ap forwards and
open.
The % indicator lamp 2 and status dis-
play 3 light up white.
%When the vehicle is switched on (the õ
display is lit in the driver's display), socket ap
1 cannot be opened.
#Press catch 7 to the le and fold open
socket cover 5.
%Vehicles with a vehicle socket combo require
only connection 8 for the charging cable
connector. Open only the upper part of socket
cover 5.
#To charge at a mains socket, insert the mains
plug into the mains socket of the external
power source as far as it will go.
#Insert the charging cable connector into vehi-
cle socket connection 8 to the stop. If the
wallbox/charging station is not equipped with
a charging cable, insert the plug of the vehi-
cle's charging cable into the wallbox/charging
station socket to the stop.
Make sure that the charging cable is not taut
when inserted.
The # indicator lamp 4 and status dis-
play 3 ash orange and, as soon as the high-
voltage battery is charged, green.
When the charging cable is connected to the vehi-
cle, the vehicle cannot be started or moved.
At the start of the charging process, the charge
level display is shown in the driver's display with a
charging prediction. The charging prediction
refers to the time at which the high-voltage bat-
tery will be fully charged.
%Depending on the temperature, the fan and
battery cooling system may audibly switch on
during the charging process.
%If the vehicle is idle for lengthy periods and
connected to the mains supply, the high-volt-
age battery will be recharged automatically as
needed or when electrical consumers are
activated (e.g. the pre-entry climate control).
%The vehicle is equipped with an electrical fuse
which protects it against overvoltage in the
mains supply. This electrical fuse may trip dur-
ing severe thunderstorms, for example, and
may cause the fuse in the building to trip or
may interrupt the charging process. These
functions protect the vehicle.
198 Driving and parking
Aer the fuse in the building is switched on
again, the charging process resumes automat-
ically. Following an interruption in the power
supply without the fuse in the building being
tripped, it may take up to ten minutes for
charging to resume automatically.
Ending the alternating current charging process
(mode 2/3)
Requirements
RThe distance between the key and the vehicle
does not exceed 1 m.
Example: Combo 2 vehicle socket
%Vehicles only equipped with a type 2 vehicle
socket for AC charging have no charging inter-
ruption button 2.
#Combo 2 vehicle socket: press charging inter-
ruption button 2.
The charging process is ended. The % indi-
cator lamp 1 lights up white. The vehicle
socket is unlocked.
#Type 2 vehicle socket: unlock the vehicle.
The charging process is ended. The % indi-
cator lamp 1 lights up white. The vehicle
socket is unlocked.
#Remove the charging cable connector from
the vehicle socket within 30 seconds.
Aer the 30 seconds have elapsed, the vehicle
socket will be locked again.
%If you cannot remove the charging cable con-
nector, repeat the unlocking procedure. If the
charging cable connector is still locked, con-
tact a qualied specialist workshop.
#Close the socket cover and the socket ap.
#Remove the charging cable connector from
the mains socket, or from the socket on the
wallbox/charging station, and stow the vehi-
cle's charging cable safely in the vehicle
(/ page 189).
Driving and parking 199
%Aer the charging cable connector has been
disconnected, the % indicator lamp 1 on
the vehicle socket remains lit for some time
before switching o.
Starting the direct current charging process
(mode 4)
&DANGER Risk of death when charging at a
damaged socket
The charging process uses high voltage.
If the charging cable, the vehicle socket or the
mains socket are damaged, you could receive
an electric shock.
#Only use an undamaged charging cable.
#Avoid mechanical damage such as crush-
ing, abrading or driving over the cable.
#Have a damaged vehicle socket replaced
at a qualied specialist workshop as
soon as possible.
#Never connect the charging cable to a
damaged vehicle socket.
*NOTE Damage due to overheating of
charging cable and charge port
During the charging process, the charging
cable and charge port can heat up within the
permissible limits.
The permissible limit values are inuenced by
the following factors:
Rthe power supply system and the charging
cable are not damaged
Rthe instructions for handling the charging
cable and the control element on the
charging cable have been observed
#If the charging cable or charge port
becomes too hot, have the power supply
system checked.
*NOTE Damaged or dirty vehicle socket
when the socket ap is open
#Always keep the socket cover and the
socket ap closed when there is no
charging cable connected. This protects
the vehicle socket from dirt and damage.
#Make sure that the socket cover is
closed properly before closing the socket
ap. This can otherwise result in damage
which may prevent the socket ap from
being opened again.
*NOTE Damage to the vehicle socket or the
charging cable connector due to incorrect
handling
Do not use excessive force (maximum 300 N)
to insert the charging cable connector into the
vehicle socket to the stop. You may otherwise
damage the vehicle socket, the charging cable
connector or their contacts.
#If you feel there is increased resistance,
pull the charging cable connector out of
the socket and reinsert it.
Requirements
RThe transmission is in position j.
RThe vehicle is unlocked or the distance
between the key and the vehicle does not
exceed 1 m.
200 Driving and parking
RThe vehicle is not switched on. The õ dis-
play in the driver's display is o.
RThe charging cable is not taut.
#Press the centre rear section of socket ap
1 and swing the socket ap forwards and
open.
The % indicator lamp 2 and status dis-
play 3 light up white.
%When the vehicle is switched on (the õ
display is lit in the driver's display), socket ap
1 cannot be opened.
#Press catch 7 to the le and fold open
socket cover 5.
%The CCS charging cable connector requires
connections 6 and 8. Therefore, it is nec-
essary to open both parts of socket cover 5.
#Insert the CCS charging cable connector into
the vehicle socket to the stop.
Make sure that the charging cable is not taut
when inserted.
The # indicator lamp 4 and status dis-
play 3 ash orange and, as soon as the high-
voltage battery is charged, green.
When the charging cable is connected to the vehi-
cle, the vehicle cannot be started or moved.
At the start of the charging process, the charge
level display is shown in the driver's display with a
charging prediction. The charging prediction
either refers to the predicted charge level at the
set departure time, or the time at which the high-
voltage battery will be fully charged.
%Depending on the temperature, the fan and
battery cooling system may audibly switch on
during the charging process.
%If the vehicle is idle for lengthy periods and
connected to the mains supply, the high-volt-
age battery will be recharged automatically as
needed or when electrical consumers are
activated (e.g. the pre-entry climate control).
Ending the direct current charging process (mode
4)
Requirements
RThe distance between the key and the vehicle
does not exceed 1 m.
Driving and parking 201
#Press charging interruption button 2.
The charging process is ended. The % indi-
cator lamp 1 lights up white. The vehicle
socket is unlocked.
#Remove the charging cable connector from
the vehicle socket.
%If you cannot remove the charging cable con-
nector, unlock the vehicle and repeat the pro-
cedure. If the charging cable connector is still
locked, contact a qualied specialist work-
shop.
#Close the socket cover and the socket ap.
%Aer the charging cable connector has been
disconnected, the le % indicator lamp 1
on the vehicle socket remains lit for some
time before switching o.
Function of the charge level display in the driver's
display
1Range at current charge level
2Current state of charge of the high-voltage
battery
3Maximum state of charge (depending on the
setting)
4Time remaining until completely charged (until
the selected maximum charge level is
reached)
5Dynamic charge level display
6Current charging capacity
%Specied remaining range 1 may vary due to
dierent factors, e.g. driving style or topogra-
phy.
When the vehicle is connected to the mains sup-
ply and is switched o, the driver's display shows
the charge level display for approximately two
minutes.
%The value of current charging capacity 6 can
dier from the display on the charging station.
202 Driving and parking
Parking
Parking the vehicle
&WARNING Risk of accident and injury
caused by an insuciently secured vehi-
cle rolling away
If the vehicle is not securely parked su-
ciently, it can roll away in an uncontrolled way
even at a slight downhill gradient.
#On uphill or downhill gradients, turn the
front wheels so that the vehicle rolls
towards the kerb if it starts moving.
#apply the parking brake.
#Switch the transmission to position j.
&WARNING Risk of re caused by hot
exhaust system parts
Flammable materials such as leaves, grass or
twigs may ignite.
#Park the vehicle so that no ammable
material can come into contact with hot
vehicle components.
#In particular, do not park on dry grass-
land or harvested grain elds.
&WARNING Accident– and risk of injury
with unsupervised children in the vehicle
If you leave children unattended in the vehicle,
they can in particular
ROpen doors and thereby endanger other
persons or road users.
Rget out of the car and are hit by trac.
ROperate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, forexample.
In addition, the children could also set the
vehicle in motion, for exampleby:
Rreleasing the parking brake.
Rchange the gearbox setting.
Rstart the vehicle.
#Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
#When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
#Keep the key out of reach of children.
*NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to it roll-
ing away
#Always secure the vehicle against rolling
away.
Driving and parking 203
#Bring the vehicle to a standstill by depressing
the brake pedal.
#On uphill or downhill gradients, turn the front
wheels so that the vehicle rolls towards the
kerb if it starts moving.
#Apply the electric parking brake.
#Engage transmission position j in a station-
ary vehicle with the brake pedal depressed
(/ page 176).
#Switch o the vehicle by pressing button 1.
#Release the service brake slowly.
#Get out of the vehicle and lock it.
%When you park the vehicle, you can still oper-
ate the side windows and the panoramic slid-
ing sunroof for approximately four minutes if
the driver's door is closed.
Automatic shut-o function of the vehicle
If you leave the engine running and leave the vehi-
cle, the driver's display will show the Vehicle is
ready to drive Shutdown occurs when locked or
automatically in XX mins display message.
The vehicle will then switch o automatically aer
20 minutes.
If you leave the engine running and remain in the
vehicle while it is in park position j , the Vehi-
cle is ready to drive Shutdown occurs when
locked or automatically in XX mins display mes-
sage will appear on the driver's display aer ten
minutes.
The vehicle will be switched o automatically aer
a further ten minutes.
%To avoid automatic switch-o, acknowledge
the message on the central display of the mul-
timedia system.
Garage door opener
Programming buttons for the garage door
opener
&DANGER Risk of fatal injuries due to
exhaust gases
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Breathing in
these exhaust gases is hazardous to health
and results in poisoning.
#Never leave the engine and, if present,
the stationary heater, running in an
enclosed space without sucient venti-
lation.
&WARNING Risk of injury by becoming
trapped when opening and closing a
garage door
When you operate or program a garage door
with an integrated garage door opener, per-
sons can become trapped or struck by the
garage door if they stand within its range of
movement.
#Always make sure that nobody is within
the range of the garage door's move-
ment.
Before programming the garage door opener, park
the vehicle outside the garage. Make sure that the
vehicle is switched on but not started.
204 Driving and parking
Requirements
RThe vehicle has been parked outside the
garage or outside the range of movement of
the door.
RThe vehicle is switched on.
RThe vehicle has not been started.
%The garage door opener function is always
available when the vehicle is switched on.
#Press and hold button 1, 2 or 3 that you
wish to program.
Indicator lamp 4 ashes yellow.
%It can take up to 20 seconds before the indi-
cator lamp ashes yellow.
#Release the previously pressed button.
Indicator lamp 4 continues to ash yellow.
#Point remote control 5 from a distance of
1 cm to 8 cm towards button 1, 2 or 3.
#Press and hold button 6 of remote control
5 until one of the following signals appears:
RIndicator lamp 4 lights up green continu-
ously. Programming is complete.
RIndicator lamp 4 ashes green. Program-
ming was successful. Additionally, syn-
chronisation of the rolling code with the
door system must be carried out.
#If indicator lamp 4 does not light up or ash
green: repeat the procedure.
#Release all of the buttons.
%The remote control for the door drive is not
included in the scope of delivery of the garage
door opener.
Synchronising the rolling code
Requirements
RThe door system uses a rolling code.
RThe vehicle must be within range of the garage
door or door drive.
RThe vehicle as well as persons and objects are
located outside the range of movement of the
door.
#Press the programming button on the door
drive unit.
Initiate the next step within approximately
30 seconds.
#Press previously programmed button 1, 2
or 3 repeatedly until the door closes.
When the door closes, programming is com-
pleted.
%Please also read the operating instructions for
the door drive.
Driving and parking 205
Troubleshooting when programming the remote
control
#Check if the transmitter frequency of remote
control 5 is supported.
#Replace the batteries in remote control 5.
#Hold remote control 5 at various angles from
a distance of 1 cm to 8 cm front of the inside
rearview mirror. You should test every position
for at least 25 seconds before trying another
position.
#Hold remote control 5 at the same angles at
various distances in front of the inside rear
view mirror. You should test every position for
at least 25 seconds before trying another
position.
#On remote controls that transmit only for a
limited period, press button 6 on remote
control 5 again before transmission ends.
#Angle the aerial line of the garage door opener
unit towards the remote control.
%It is possible that older garage doors cannot
be operated using the remote control in the
inside rearview mirror even aer you have
successfully performed the measures descri-
bed above. If this is the case, contact the
HomeLink® Hotline.
%Support and additional information on pro-
gramming:
Ron the HomeLink® Hotline on (0) 08000
466 354 65 or +49 (0) 6838 907-277
Ron the Internet at https://
www.homelink.com
Opening or closing the garage door
Requirements
RThe corresponding button is programmed to
operate the door.
#Press and hold buttons 1, 2 or 3 until the
door opens or closes.
#If the indicator lamp 4 ashes yellow aer
approx. 20 seconds: Press the previously
pressed button again and keep it pressed until
the door opens or closes.
Clearing the garage door opener memory
#Press and hold buttons 1 and 3.
Indicator lamp 4 lights up yellow.
#If indicator lamp 4 ashes green: release
buttons 1 and 3.
The entire memory has been deleted.
Electric parking brake
Function of the electric parking brake (applying
automatically)
&WARNING Accident– and risk of injury
with unsupervised children in the vehicle
If you leave children unattended in the vehicle,
they can in particular
ROpen doors and thereby endanger other
persons or road users.
Rget out of the car and are hit by trac.
ROperate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, forexample.
206 Driving and parking
In addition, the children could also set the
vehicle in motion, for exampleby:
Rreleasing the parking brake.
Rchange the gearbox setting.
Rstart the vehicle.
#Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
#When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.
#Keep the key out of reach of children.
The electric parking brake is applied if the trans-
mission is in position j and one of the following
conditions is fullled:
RThe vehicle is switched o.
RThe seat belt tongue is not inserted in the seat
belt buckle of the driver's seat and the driver's
door is opened.
%To prevent application: pull the handle of the
electric parking brake (/ page 208).
In the following situations, the electric parking
brake is also applied:
RThe HOLD function is keeping the vehicle sta-
tionary.
RActive Parking Assist is keeping the vehicle
stationary.
RActive Distance Assist DISTRONIC is bringing
the vehicle to a standstill.
RIn addition, one of the following conditions
must be fullled:
-The vehicle is switched o.
-The seat belt tongue is not inserted in the
seat belt buckle of the driver's seat and
the driver's door is opened.
-There is a system malfunction.
-The power supply is insucient.
-The vehicle is stationary for a lengthy
period.
When the electric parking brake is applied, the
red ! indicator lamp lights up in the driver's
display.
%The electric parking brake is not automatically
applied if the vehicle is switched o by the
ECO start/stop function.
Function of the electric parking brake (releas-
ing automatically)
The electric parking brake is released when the
following conditions are fullled:
RThe driver's door is closed.
RThe vehicle has been started.
RThe transmission is in position h or k and
you depress the accelerator pedal or you shi
from transmission position j to h or k
when on level ground.
RIf the transmission is in position k, the boot
lid must be closed.
RThe seat belt tongue is inserted into the seat
belt buckle of the driver's seat.
If the seat belt tongue is not inserted into the
seat belt buckle of the driver's seat, one of the
following conditions must be fullled:
-You shi from transmission position j.
or
Driving and parking 207
-You have previously driven at speeds
greater than 3 km/h.
When the electric parking brake is released, the
red ! indicator lamp in the driver's display
goes out.
Applying/releasing the electric parking brake
manually
Applying
#Push handle 1.
The red ! indicator lamp lights up in the
driver's display.
%The electric parking brake is only securely
applied if the red ! indicator lamp is lit
continuously.
Releasing
#Switch on the vehicle.
#Pull handle 1.
The red ! indicator lamp in the driver's
display goes out.
Emergency braking
#Press and hold handle 1.
As long as the vehicle is in motion, the
Release parking brake message is displayed
and the red ! indicator lamp ashes.
When the vehicle has been braked to a stand-
still, the electric parking brake is applied. The
red ! indicator lamp lights up in the driv-
er's display.
Information on collision detection on a parked
vehicle
If a collision is detected on the locked vehicle
when towing protection is switched on and colli-
sion detection is switched on, you will receive a
message in the multimedia system when the vehi-
cle is switched on.
You will receive information about the following
points:
RThe area of the vehicle that may have been
damaged.
RThe force of the impact.
The following situation can lead to inadvertent
activation:
RThe parked vehicle is moved, forexample, in a
two-storey garage.
%Deactivate tow-away protection in order to
prevent inadvertent activation. If you deacti-
vate tow-away protection, collision detection
will also be deactivated.
You can permanently deactivate collision
detection via the multimedia system
(/ page 209).
208 Driving and parking
System limits
Detection may be restricted in the following situa-
tions:
Rthe vehicle is damaged without impact,
forexample, if an outside mirror is torn o or
the paint is damaged by a key
Ran impact occurs at low speed
Rthe electric parking brake is not applied
%You are responsible for your vehicle. Convince
yourself that your vehicle is free of damage
and roadworthy.
Setting collision detection on a parked vehicle
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5Vehicle
5Open/close 5Vehicle protection
#Activate or deactivate the function via Colli-
sion notification.
%A maximum of three incidents can be regis-
tered. Up to 15 photos are taken for every
incident. In the event of another incident, the
photos of the rst incident will be overwritten
if they have not been deleted already.
Activating or deactivating the collision photos
function
Note possible legal restrictions in some countries
regarding automatic recording of the vehicle sur-
roundings.
#Activate or deactivate Collision photos.
Transferring the collision photos with the
Mercedes me App
#Select Upload collision photos.
#Select Upload automatically.
#Scan the generated QR code on the media
display with the Mercedes me App.
The encrypted collision photos will then be
uploaded to Mercedes me.
%Any device that can scan QR codes can be
used to view the collision photos in the
Mercedes me App.
Copying the collision photos to a USB ash drive
#Connect a USB ash drive .
#Select Manage collision photos.
#Select Copy (USB).
All collision photos are copied to the USB
ash drive.
%To ensure secure operation, only use with
FAT32 or exFAT formatted USB storage devi-
ces.
Deleting collision photos
#Select Manage collision photos.
#Select Delete.
All collision photos will be deleted.
Notes on parking up the vehicle
If you leave the vehicle parked up for longer than
six weeks, it may suer damage through disuse.
The 12 V battery may also be impaired or dam-
aged by heavy discharging.
Vehicles with automatic transmission: do not dis-
connect the 12 V battery even if the vehicle is le
idle for a lengthy period.
%Further information can be obtained at a
qualied specialist workshop.
Driving and parking 209
Standby mode (extension of the starter battery's
period out of use)
Standby mode function
%This function is not available for all models.
If standby mode is activated, energy loss will be
minimised during extended periods of non-opera-
tion.
Standby mode is characterised by the following:
RThe starter battery is preserved.
RThe maximum non-operational time appears
on the driver's display.
RThe connection to online services is interrup-
ted.
RThe ATA (anti-the alarm system) is not availa-
ble.
RThe interior protection and tow-away protec-
tion functions are not available.
RThe function for detecting collisions on a
parked vehicle is not available.
If the following conditions are fullled, standby
mode can be activated or deactivated using the
multimedia system:
RThe vehicle is switched on.
RThe vehicle has not been started.
Exceeding the vehicle's displayed non-operational
time may cause inconvenience; i.e. it cannot be
guaranteed that the starter battery will reliably
start the vehicle.
Charge the starter battery in the following situa-
tions:
RIf the vehicle's non-operational time needs to
be extended.
RIf the starter battery charge level is insucient
for standby mode.
%Standby mode is automatically deactivated
when the vehicle is switched on.
Activating/deactivating standby mode (parking
up the vehicle)
Requirements:
RThe power supply is switched on.
RThe vehicle is not switched on.
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5Vehicle
5Other functions
#Activate or deactivate Standby mode.
Driving and driving safety systems
Driving systems and your responsibility
Your vehicle is equipped with driving systems
which assist you in driving, parking and manoeu-
vring the vehicle. The driving systems are only
aids. They are not a substitute for you paying
attention to your surroundings and do not relieve
you of your responsibility pertaining to road trac
law. The driver is always responsible for maintain-
ing a safe distance to the vehicle in front, for vehi-
cle speed, for braking in good time and for staying
in lane. Pay attention to the trac conditions at
all times and intervene when necessary. Be aware
of the limitations regarding the safe use of these
systems.
210 Driving and parking
Driving systems can neither reduce the risk of
accident if you fail to adapt your driving style nor
override the laws of physics. They cannot always
take into account road, weather or trac condi-
tions.
%Some driving systems can regulate or limit the
speed to a previously set value. Draw atten-
tion to the stored speed when changing driv-
ers.
Information on vehicle sensors and cameras
Some driving and driving safety systems use cam-
eras as well as radar or ultrasonic sensors to
monitor the area in front of, behind or next to the
vehicle. 1Multifunction camera
2Cameras in the outside mirrors
3Front radar
4Front camera
5Corner radars
6Ultrasonic sensors
7Reversing camera
&WARNING Risk of accident due to restric-
ted detection performance of vehicle sen-
sors and cameras
If the area around vehicle sensors or cameras
is covered, damaged or dirty, certain driving
and safety systems cannot function correctly.
There is a risk of an accident.
#Keep the area around vehicle sensors or
cameras clear of any obstructions and
clean.
#Have damage to the bumper, radiator
grille or stone chipping in the area of the
front and rear windows repaired at a
qualied specialist workshop.
Particularly, keep the areas around the sensors
and cameras free of dirt, ice or slush
(/ page 341). The sensors and cameras must
not be covered and the detection ranges around
them must be kept free. Do not attach additional
licence plate brackets, advertisements, stickers,
foils or foils to protect against stone chippings in
the detection range of the sensors and cameras.
Driving and parking 211
Make sure that there are no overhanging loads
protruding into the detection range.
If there is damage to a bumper or the radiator
grille, or aer an impact, have the function of the
sensors checked at a qualied specialist work-
shop. Have damage or stone chipping in the area
of the cameras on the front and rear windows
repaired at a qualied specialist workshop.
Overview of driving systems and driving safety
systems
RABS (Anti-lock Braking System) (/ page 213)
RBAS (Brake Assist System) (/ page 213)
RESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
(/ page 213)
RESP® Crosswind Assist (/ page 214)
RESP® trailer stabilisation (/ page 215)
REBD (Electronic Brakeforce Distribution)
(/ page 215)
RSTEER CONTROL (/ page 215)
RHOLD function (/ page 216)
RHill Start Assist (/ page 217)
RAdaptive Brake Lights (/ page 217)
RStart-o assist (/ page 217)
RATTENTION ASSIST (/ page 218)
RCruise control (/ page 220)
RLimiter (/ page 220)
RTrac Sign Assist (/ page 240)
RSpeed Limit Assist (country-dependent)
(/ page 238)
RSuspension with adaptive damping adjustment
(/ page 248)
Driving Assistance Package
The following functions are part of the Driving
Assistance Package. Certain functions are only
available in some countries. Some functions are
also available without the Driving Assistance
Package, albeit with restricted functionality.
RActive Distance Assist DISTRONIC
(/ page 223)
RActive Speed Limit Assist (country-dependent)
(/ page 228)
RRoute-based speed adaptation (country-
dependent) (/ page 229)
RActive Brake Assist (/ page 233)
RActive Steering Assist (country-dependent)
(/ page 230)
RActive Emergency Stop Assist (country-
dependent) (/ page 232)
RBlind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist
with exit warning (/ page 243)
RActive Lane Keeping Assist (/ page 246)
Parking Package
RReversing camera (/ page 249)
R360° Camera (/ page 252)
RParking Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 257)
RActive Parking Assist (/ page 261)
212 Driving and parking
Functions of ABS
The Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) regulates the
brake pressure in critical driving situations:
RDuring braking, for instance, at maximum full-
stop braking or if there is insucient tyre trac-
tion, the wheels are prevented from locking.
RVehicle steerability while braking is ensured.
If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a
pulsing in the brake pedal. The pulsating brake
pedal can be an indication of hazardous road con-
ditions and can serve as a reminder to take extra
care while driving.
System limits
RABS is active from speeds of approx. 5 km/h.
RABS may be impaired or may not function if a
malfunction has occurred and the yellow !
ABS warning lamp lights up continuously aer
the vehicle is started.
Function of BAS
&WARNING Risk of an accident caused by a
malfunction in BAS (Brake Assist System)
If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance
in an emergency braking situation is
increased.
#Depress the brake pedal with full force in
emergency braking situations. ABS pre-
vents the wheels from locking.
The Brake Assist System (BAS) supports your
emergency braking situation with additional brake
force.
If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BAS is
activated:
RBAS automatically boosts the brake pressure.
RBAS can shorten the braking distance.
RABS prevents the wheels from locking.
The brakes will function as usual once you release
the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated.
Functions of ESP®
&WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® is
deactivated
If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® cannot carry out
vehicle stabilisation.
#ESP® should only be deactivated in the
following situations.
*NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles
#Observe the notes in the Supplement.
You could otherwise fail to recognise
dangers.
The Electronic Stability Program (ESP®) can moni-
tor and improve driving stability and traction in
the following situations within physical limits:
RWhen pulling away on wet or slippery carriage-
ways.
RWhen braking.
Driving and parking 213
If the vehicle deviates from the direction desired
by the driver, ESP® can stabilise the vehicle by
intervening in the following ways:
ROne or more wheels are braked.
RThe engine output is adapted according to the
situation.
ESP® is deactivated if the å ESP® OFF warn-
ing lamp lights up continuously in the driver's dis-
play.
Observe the following points when ESP® is deacti-
vated:
RDriving stability will no longer be improved.
RThe drive wheels could spin.
RETS/4ETS traction control is still active.
%When ESP® is deactivated, you are still assis-
ted by ESP® when braking.
If the ÷ ESP® warning lamp ashes in the driv-
er's display, one or several wheels has reached its
grip limit:
RAdapt your driving style to suit the current
road and weather conditions.
RDo not deactivate ESP®.
ROnly depress the accelerator pedal as far as is
necessary when pulling away.
Deactivate ESP® in the following situations to
improve traction:
RWhen using snow chains.
RIn deep snow.
ROn sand or gravel.
%Spinning the wheels results in a cutting
action, which enhances traction.
If the ÷ ESP® warning lamp lights up continu-
ously, ESP® is not available due to a malfunction.
Observe the following information:
RIndicator and warning lamps (/ page 482)
RDisplay messages (/ page 412)
ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System)
ETS/4ETS traction control is part of ESP® and
makes it possible to pull away and accelerate on a
slippery carriageway.
ETS/4ETS can improve the vehicle's traction by
intervening in the following ways:
RThe drive wheels are braked individually if they
spin.
RMore drive torque is transferred to the wheel
or wheels with traction.
Inuence of drive programs on ESP®
The drive programs enable ESP® to adapt to dif-
ferent weather and road conditions as well as the
driver's preferred driving style. Depending on the
selected drive program, the appropriate ESP®
mode will be activated. You can select the drive
programs using the DYNAMIC SELECT switch
(/ page 173).
Function of ESP® Crosswind Assist
ESP® Crosswind Assist detects sudden gusts of
side wind and helps the driver to keep the vehicle
in the lane:
RESP® Crosswind Assist is active at vehicle
speeds between approx. 80 km/h and
200 km/h when driving straight ahead or cor-
nering slightly.
214 Driving and parking
RThe vehicle is stabilised by means of individual
brake application on one side.
Function of ESP® trailer stabilisation
&WARNING Risk of accident in poor road
and weather conditions
In poor road and weather conditions, the
trailer stabilisation cannot prevent lurching of
the vehicle/trailer combination. Trailers with a
high centre of gravity may tip over before
ESP® detects this.
#Always adapt your driving style to suit
the current road and weather conditions.
When driving with a trailer, ESP® can stabilise
your vehicle if the trailer begins to swerve from
side to side:
RESP® trailer stabilisation is active above
speeds of 65 km/h.
RSlight swerving is reduced by means of a tar-
geted, individual brake application on one
side.
RIn the event of severe swerving, the operating
energy output is also reduced and all wheels
are braked.
ESP® trailer stabilisation may be impaired or may
not function if:
RThe trailer is not connected correctly or is not
detected properly by the vehicle.
Activating or deactivating ESP® (Electronic Stabil-
ity Program)
Multimedia system:
4© 5ß 5y
*NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles
#Observe the notes in the Supplement.
You could otherwise fail to recognise
dangers.
#Select ESP.
#Select On or Off.
ESP® is deactivated if the å ESP® OFF warn-
ing lamp lights up continuously in the driver's dis-
play.
Observe any information on warning lamps and
display messages which may be shown in the driv-
er's display.
Function of EBD
Electronic Brakeforce Distribution (EBD) is charac-
terised by the following:
RMonitoring and regulating the brake pressure
on the rear wheels.
RImproved driving stability when braking, espe-
cially on bends.
Function of STEER CONTROL
STEER CONTROL assists you by transmitting a
noticeable steering force to the steering wheel in
the direction required for vehicle stabilisation.
Driving and parking 215
This steering recommendation is given in the fol-
lowing situations:
Rboth right wheels or both le wheels are on a
wet or slippery road surface when you brake
Rthe vehicle starts to skid
System limits
STEER CONTROL may be impaired or may not
function in the following situations:
RESP® is deactivated.
RESP® is malfunctioning.
RThe steering is malfunctioning.
If ESP® is malfunctioning, you will be assisted fur-
ther by the electric power steering.
HOLD function
HOLD function
The HOLD function holds the vehicle at a stand-
still without requiring you to depress the brake
pedal, e.g. while waiting in trac.
The HOLD function is only an aid. The responsibil-
ity for the vehicle safely standing still remains with
the driver.
System limits
The HOLD function is only intended to provide
assistance when driving and is not a sucient
means of safeguarding the vehicle against rolling
away when stationary.
RThe incline must not be greater than 30%.
Activating/deactivating the HOLD function
&WARNING Risk of an accident due to the
HOLD function being active when you
leave the vehicle
If the vehicle is only braked with the HOLD
function it could, in the following situations,
roll away:
RIf there is a malfunction in the system or in
the power supply.
RIf the HOLD function is deactivated by
depressing the accelerator pedal or brake
pedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant.
#Always secure the vehicle against rolling
away before you leave it.
Requirements:
RThe vehicle is stationary.
RThe driver's door is closed or the seat belt on
the driver's side is fastened.
RThe vehicle has been started or has been
automatically switched o by the ECO start/
stop function.
RThe electric parking brake is released.
RActive Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deactiva-
ted.
RThe transmission is in position h, k or i.
Activating the HOLD function
#Depress the brake pedal, and aer a short
time quickly depress further until the ë
display appears in the driver's display.
#Release the brake pedal.
Deactivating the HOLD function
#Depress the accelerator pedal to pull away.
or
216 Driving and parking
#Depress the brake pedal until the ë display
disappears from the driver's display.
The HOLD function is deactivated in the following
situations:
RActive Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activa-
ted.
RThe transmission is shied to position j.
RThe vehicle is secured with the electric park-
ing brake.
In the following situations, the vehicle is held by
transmission position j and/or by the electric
parking brake:
RThe seat belt is unfastened and the driver's
door is opened.
RThe vehicle is switched o.
RThere is a system malfunction.
RThe power supply is insucient.
In addition, the Brake immediately message may
appear in the driver's display and a horn tone may
sound at regular intervals.
#Immediately depress the brake pedal rmly
until the warning message disappears.
The HOLD function is deactivated.
#Additionally secure the vehicle against rolling
away.
Function of Hill Start Assist
Hill Start Assist holds the vehicle for a short time
when pulling away on a hill under the following
conditions:
RThe transmission is in position h or k.
RThe electric parking brake is released.
This gives you enough time to move your foot
from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal and
depress it before the vehicle begins to roll away.
&WARNING Risk of accident and injury due
to the vehicle rolling away
Aer a short time, Hill Start Assist no longer
holds the vehicle.
#Swily move your foot from the brake
pedal to the accelerator pedal. Do not
leave the vehicle when it is being held by
Hill Start Assist.
Function of Adaptive Brake Lights
Adaptive Brake Lights warn following trac in an
emergency braking situation with the following
actions:
Rashing the brake lamps
Ractivating the hazard warning lights
(/ page 129)
If the vehicle is braked sharply from speeds above
50 km/h, the brake lamps ash rapidly. This pro-
vides trac travelling behind you with an even
more noticeable warning.
Start-o assist
Function of the start-o assist
The start-o assist enables optimal vehicle accel-
eration from a standstill. For this, a suitably high-
grip road surface is required, the tyres and vehicle
must also be in good condition.
Driving and parking 217
Do not activate the start-o assist on public
roads.
Be sure to observe the safety notes and informa-
tion on ESP® (/ page 213).
Activating the start-o assist
&WARNING Risk of skidding and having an
accident from wheels spinning
When you use start-o assist, individual
wheels could spin and you could lose control
of the vehicle.
If ESP® is deactivated, there is a risk of skid-
ding and accident!
#Make sure that no persons or obstacles
are in the close vicinity of your vehicle.
#Deactivating ESP® (/ page 215).
#Move the steering wheel to the straight-ahead
position.
#Depress the brake pedal rmly with your le
foot and keep it depressed.
#Engage the h drive position (/ page 177).
#Select the sportiest available drive program
B or C(/ page 173).
#Rapidly depress the accelerator pedal fully.
#Take your foot o the brake, but keep the
accelerator pedal depressed.
The vehicle pulls away at maximum accelera-
tion.
#Switch on ESP® once the acceleration proce-
dure is complete. ESP® will otherwise not be
able to stabilise the vehicle if the vehicle
starts to skid or a wheel starts to spin.
Cancelling the start-o assist
#Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
#Reactivate the ESP®.
ATTENTION ASSIST
Function of ATTENTION ASSIST
ATTENTION ASSIST assists you on long, monoto-
nous journeys, e.g. on motorways and trunk
roads. If indicators of fatigue or increasing lapses
in concentration on the part of the driver are
detected, the system suggests taking a break.
ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid. It cannot
always detect fatigue or lapses in concentration in
time. The system is not a substitute for a well-res-
ted and attentive driver. On long journeys, take
regular breaks in good time that allow for ade-
quate recuperation.
You can choose between two settings:
RStandard: normal system sensitivity.
RSensitive: higher system sensitivity. The driver
is warned earlier and the attention level detec-
ted by ATTENTION ASSIST is adapted accord-
ingly.
If drowsiness or increasing lapses in concentra-
tion are detected, the ATTENTION ASSIST: Take
a break! warning appears in the driver's display.
You can acknowledge the message and take a
break where necessary. If you do not take a break
and ATTENTION ASSIST continues to detect
increasing lapses in concentration, you will be
warned again aer a minimum of 15 minutes.
218 Driving and parking
The following information is displayed in the driv-
er's display:
RThe length of the journey since the last break
RThe attention level determined by ATTENTION
ASSIST.
The more segments 1 of the circle displayed,
the higher the detected attention level. Fewer seg-
ments 1 are displayed in the circle as the atten-
tion level decreases.
If ATTENTION ASSIST is unable to calculate the
attention level and cannot issue a warning, the
System suspended message appears.
If a warning is given in the driver's display, the
multimedia system oers to search for a rest
area. You can select a rest area and start naviga-
tion to this rest area.
When you restart the vehicle, ATTENTION ASSIST
is automatically switched on. The last selected
sensitivity level remains stored.
System limits
ATTENTION ASSIST is active in the 60 km/h to
200 km/h speed range.
If the system is not available due to an error, the
ATTENTION ASSIST warning light Û lights up
continuously in the driver display.
Particularly in the following situations, ATTENTION
ASSIST only functions in a restricted manner and
warnings may be delayed or not occur:
RIf you have been driving for less than approx-
imately 30 minutes.
RIf the road condition is poor (uneven road sur-
face or potholes).
RIf there is a strong side wind.
RIf you adopt a sporty driving style (high corner-
ing speeds or high rates of acceleration).
RIf the Steering Assist function of Active Dis-
tance Assist DISTRONIC is active.
RIf the clock is set to the incorrect time.
RIf you change lanes and vary your speed fre-
quently in active driving situations.
Also observe any information regarding display
messages that can be displayed in the driver's
display.
The ATTENTION ASSIST drowsiness or alertness
assessment is reset and restarted when continu-
ing the journey in the following situations:
RYou switch o the vehicle.
RIf you unfasten your seat belt and open the
driver's door (e.g. to change drivers or take a
break).
Setting ATTENTION ASSIST
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5Assistance
5Assistance 5ATTENTION ASSIST
Setting the sensitivity
#Select Z next to ATTENTION ASSIST.
Driving and parking 219
#Select Standard or Sensitive.
Cruise control and limiter
Function of cruise control
Cruise control regulates the speed to the value
selected by the driver.
If you accelerate to overtake, forexample, the
stored speed is not deleted. If you remove your
foot from the accelerator pedal aer overtaking,
cruise control will resume speed regulation back
to the stored speed.
You can store any speed above 20 km/h up to the
maximum design speed or up to the set winter
tyre limit.
Observe the notes on driving systems and your
responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise
dangers (/ page 210).
Mercedes‑AMG vehicles: cruise control is availa-
ble up to a maximum speed of 250 km/h.
Displays in the driver's display
Rh (grey): cruise control is selected but not
yet active, or temporarily passive.
Rh (green): cruise control is active.
A stored speed appears under the h display
and is indicated in the speedometer.
System limits
Cruise control may be unable to maintain the
stored speed on uphill gradients. The stored
speed is resumed when the gradient evens out.
Change into a lower gear in good time on long and
steep downhill gradients. Take particular note of
this when driving a laden vehicle. By doing so, you
will make use of the engine's braking eect. This
relieves the load on the brake system and pre-
vents the brakes from overheating and wearing
too quickly.
Do not use cruise control in the following situa-
tions:
Rin trac situations which require frequent
changes of speed, e.g. in heavy trac, on
winding roads
Ron slippery roads. Accelerating can cause the
drive wheels to lose traction and the vehicle
could then skid.
Rwhen visibility is poor
Function of the limiter
The limiter restricts the speed of the vehicle. To
reduce the speed to the set speed, the limiter
applies the brakes automatically.
You can limit the speed as follows:
RVariable: for a short-term speed restriction,
e.g. in built-up areas
RPermanent: for a longer-term speed restric-
tion, e.g. in winter tyre mode
You can store any speed above 20 km/h up to the
maximum design speed or up to the set winter
tyre limit. You can also perform settings while the
vehicle is stationary if the vehicle has been star-
ted.
Observe the notes on driving systems and your
responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise
dangers (/ page 210).
Mercedes‑AMG vehicles: the limiter is available
up to a maximum speed of 250 km/h.
Displays in the driver's display
RÈ (grey): variable limiter is selected but not
yet activated.
220 Driving and parking
RÈ (ashes grey): variable limiter is tempo-
rarily passive.
RÈ (green): variable limiter is activated.
A stored speed appears under the È display
and is indicated in the speedometer.
If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the
pressure point (kickdown), the variable limiter
switches to passive mode. The È passive
message appears in the driver's display and the
È display ashes.
The variable limiter is reactivated in the following
situations:
RIf the vehicle speed drops below the stored
speed.
RIf the stored speed is called up.
RIf you store a new speed.
Operating cruise control or the variable limiter
&WARNING Risk of accident due to stored
speed
If you call up the stored speed and this is
lower than your current speed, the vehicle
decelerates.
#Take into account the trac situation
before calling up the stored speed.
Requirements
Cruise control
RCruise control is selected.
RESP® must be activated, but not intervening.
RThe vehicle speed is at least 20 km/h.
RThe transmission is in position h.
Variable limiter
RThe variable limiter is selected.
Steering wheel control panel for cruise control and
variable limiter
JAdopts the stored/detected speed
±Deactivates cruise control/the variable lim-
iter
hSelects cruise control
ÈSelects the variable limiter
1Control panel to increase/decrease speed
Driving and parking 221
Operating cruise control and the variable limiter
#Press the corresponding button with only one
nger or swipe on the control panel.
Switching between cruise control and the varia-
ble limiter
#To select cruise control: pressh.
#To select the variable limiter: pressÈ.
%Vehicles with Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC: the variable limiter is selected by
a dierent button (/ page 226).
Activating cruise control or the variable limiter
#Press M or N on control panel 1.
The current vehicle speed is stored and the
vehicle maintains this speed (cruise control) or
does not exceed it (variable limiter).
or
#Press J.
The last stored speed is called up and the
vehicle maintains this speed (cruise control) or
does not exceed it (variable limiter).
If the last stored speed has previously been
deleted, the current vehicle speed is stored.
%When you switch o the vehicle, the last
speed stored is deleted.
When you activate cruise control or Active
Distance Assist DISTRONIC, the last speed
stored for the variable limiter is deleted.
Increasing/decreasing the stored speed
#To increase the stored speed: swipe upwards
from the bottom of control panel 1.
RThe stored speed is increased by 1 km/h.
#To decrease the stored speed: swipe down-
wards from the top of control panel 1.
RThe stored speed is decreased by 1 km/h.
or
#Briey press M or N on control panel
1.
The stored speed is increased or decreased to
the next increment of ten (e.g. to 50 km/h or
60 km/h).
or
#Press and hold M or N on control panel
1.
The stored speed is increased or decreased to
the next increment of ten and aerwards by
increments of 10 km/h.
or
#Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed.
#Press M on control panel 1.
%When the variable limiter is switched to pas-
sive mode, you cannot increase or decrease
its stored speed in increments of 1 km/h.
Adopting a detected speed
If cruise control/variable limiter is activated and
Trac Sign Assist has detected a speed restric-
tion sign with a maximum permissible speed and
this is displayed in the driver's display:
#Press J.
The maximum permissible speed shown by the
trac sign is stored and the vehicle maintains
or does not exceed this speed.
Deactivating cruise control or the variable limiter
#Press ±.
222 Driving and parking
%If you brake, deactivate ESP® or if ESP® inter-
venes, cruise control is deactivated. The varia-
ble limiter is not deactivated.
Information on the permanent limiter
If the vehicle should never exceed a specic
speed (e.g. for driving in winter tyre mode), you
can set this speed with the permanent limiter.
You do this by limiting the speed between
160 km/h and 240 km/h in the multimedia sys-
tem (/ page 223).
Shortly before the set speed is reached, it
appears in the driver's display. When you conrm
the message, display messages no longer appear
until you switch o the vehicle. The speed will
only be displayed again once the vehicle has been
restarted or if the set speed is changed.
The permanent limiter does not switch to passive
mode even during kickdown and the driven speed
remains below the set speed.
Setting the speed limit for winter tyres
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5Vehicle
5Winter tyre limit
#Activate or deactivate Winter tyre limit.
Setting a speed
#Select Winter tyre limit.
#Select a speed.
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
Function of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
DISTRONIC Active Distance Assist maintains the
set speed when driving freely. If vehicles are
detected ahead, the set distance is maintained, if
necessary until the vehicle comes to a standstill.
The vehicle accelerates or brakes depending on
the distance to the vehicle in front and the set
speed. The speed and distance to the vehicle in
front are set and saved using the steering wheel.
Available speed range:
RVehicles without Driving Assistance Package:
20 km/h - 160 km/h
RVehicles with Driving Assistance Package:
20 km/h - 210 km/h
Other features of Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC:
RAdjusts the driving style depending on the
selected drive program (fuel-saving, comforta-
ble or dynamic)
RInitiates acceleration to the stored speed if the
turn signal indicator is switched on to change
to the overtaking lane
RVehicles with Driving Assistance Package:
-Reacts to stationary vehicles detected in
urban speed ranges (except bicycles and
motorcycles)
-Takes one-sided overtaking restrictions
into account on motorways or on multi-
lane roads with separate carriageways
(country-dependent)
If the vehicle has been braked to a standstill on
multi-lane, separate carriageways by Active Dis-
tance Assist DISTRONIC, it can automatically fol-
low the vehicle in front when driving o again
depending on equipment. If a critical situation is
Driving and parking 223
detected when driving o, a visual and acoustic
warning is given indicating that the driver must
now take control of the vehicle. The vehicle is not
accelerated any further.
Observe the notes on driving systems and your
responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise
dangers (/ page 210).
Display in the driver's display in the Assistance
menu
1Vehicle in front
2Distance indicator
3Set specied distance
Vehicle detected in front 1 is highlighted in
green. It may also be in the lane to the le of your
vehicle in situations where it is not permitted to
overtake on the right,for example on motorways.
Permanent status display
Rç (grey): Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC selected but not yet active
Rç (green speedometer, grey vehicle):
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC active,
speed set
Rç (green): Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC active and vehicle detected
The stored speed is shown under the permanent
status display and highlighted on the speedome-
ter. When Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is
passive, the status display is greyed out.
If the speed of the vehicle in front or the speed
adjustment is less than the stored speed due to
the route event ahead, the segments in the
speedometer light up.
If you increase or decrease the set target dis-
tance, the display h appears briey.
%On motorways or high-speed major roads, the
green ç vehicle symbol is displayed cycli-
cally when the vehicle is ready to pull away.
%If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond
the setting of the Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC, the system is switched to passive
mode. The following message appears briey
in the driver's display ç suspended.
System limits
The system may be impaired or may not function
in the following situations,for example:
RIn snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, if there is glare,
in direct sunlight or in greatly varying light
conditions.
RThe windscreen in the area of the camera is
dirty, misted up, damaged or covered.
RIf the radar sensors are dirty or covered.
RIn multi-storey car parks or on roads with
steep uphill or downhill gradients.
RIf there are narrow vehicles in front, such as
bicycles or motorcycles.
224 Driving and parking
In addition, on slippery roads, braking or acceler-
ating can cause one or several wheels to lose
traction and the vehicle could then skid.
Do not use Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC in
these situations.
&WARNING Risk of accident from accelera-
tion or braking by Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC may accel-
erate or brake in the following cases, for
example:
RIf the vehicle pulls away using Active Dis-
tance Assist DISTRONIC.
RIf the stored speed is called up and is con-
siderably faster or slower than the cur-
rently driven speed.
RIf Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC no
longer detects a vehicle in front or does
not react to relevant objects.
#Always carefully observe the trac con-
ditions and be ready to brake at all
times.
#Take into account the trac situation
before calling up the stored speed.
&WARNING Risk of accident due to insu-
cient deceleration by Active Distance
Assist DISTRONIC
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC brakes your
vehicle with up to 50% of the possible deceler-
ation. If this deceleration is not sucient,
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC alerts you
with a visual and acoustic warning.
#Adjust your speed and maintain a suita-
ble distance from the vehicle in front.
#Brake the vehicle yourself and/or take
evasive action.
&WARNING Risk of accident if detection
function of Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC is impaired
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC does not
react or has a limited reaction:
Rwhen driving on a dierent lane or when
changing lanes
Rto pedestrians, animals, bicycles or sta-
tionary vehicles, or unexpected obstacles
Rto complex trac conditions
Rto oncoming vehicles and crossing trac
As a result, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
may neither give warnings nor intervene in
such situations.
#Always observe the trac conditions
carefully and react accordingly.
Driving and parking 225
Operating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
and the variable limiter
Requirements
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC:
RThe electric parking brake is released.
RESP® is activated and is not intervening.
RThe transmission is in position h.
RAll the doors are closed.
RCheck of the radar sensor system has been
successfully completed.
Variable limiter:
RThe variable limiter is selected.
JAdopts the stored/detected speed
±Deactivates Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC/ the variable limiter
1Increases/decreases the speed
KIncreases/decreases the specied distance
ISwitches between the variable limiter and
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
#To operate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
or the variable limiter: press the respective
button with only one nger or swipe on the
control panel.
Switches between the variable limiter and Active
Distance Assist DISTRONIC
#Press I.
Activating the variable limiter or Active Distance
Assist DISTRONIC
#To activate without a stored speed:
pressM, N or J. Active Distance
Assist DISTRONIC: remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal.
The current vehicle speed is stored and main-
tained (Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC) or
limited (variable limiter) by the vehicle.
or
#To activate with a stored speed: pressJ.
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC: remove
your foot from the accelerator pedal.
The last stored speed is called up and the
vehicle maintains this speed (Active Distance
226 Driving and parking
Assist DISTRONIC) or does not exceed it (vari-
able limiter).
If the stored speed has been deleted, the cur-
rent vehicle speed is stored.
%When you switch o the vehicle, the stored
speed is deleted. When you activate Active
Distance Assist DISTRONIC, the last speed
stored for the variable limiter is deleted.
Increasing or reducing the speed
#To increase the stored speed: swipe upwards
from the bottom of control panel 1.
RThe stored speed is increased by 1 km/h.
#To decrease the stored speed: swipe down-
wards from the top of control panel 1.
RThe stored speed is decreased by 1 km/h.
or
#Briey press M on the upper section or
N on the lower section of control panel
1.
The stored speed is increased or reduced by
10 km/h.
or
#Press and hold M on the upper section or
N on the lower section of control panel
1.
The stored speed is increased or reduced in
increments of 10 km/h.
or
#Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed.
#Press M on the upper section of control
panel 1.
Adopting the limit speed shown in the driver's dis-
play
#Activate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC or
the variable limiter: press M, N or
J.
#Accept the displayed speed limit: press J.
The limit speed displayed in the driver's dis-
play is adopted as the stored speed. The vehi-
cle adapts its speed to that of the vehicle in
front, but only up to the stored speed, or limits
its speed accordingly.
%A speed limit shown in the driver display is
only adopted while driving, not when station-
ary.
Pulling away with Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC
#Activate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
and remove your foot from the brake pedal.
#Press J.
or
#Depress the accelerator pedal briey and
rmly.
The functions of Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC continue to be carried out.
Reducing or increasing the specied distance
from the vehicle in front
#Press K.
The h display appears. The specied dis-
tance is reduced by one level.
If the lowest level is already selected, the
selection jumps to the highest level.
Driving and parking 227
Deactivating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC or
the variable limiter
&WARNING Risk of an accident due to
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC being
active when you leave the driver's seat
If you leave the driver's seat while the vehicle
is being braked by Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC only, the vehicle can roll away.
#Always deactivate Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC and secure the vehicle to
prevent it from rolling away before you
leave the driver's seat.
#Press ±.
%If you brake, deactivate ESP® or if ESP® inter-
venes, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is
deactivated. The variable limiter is not deacti-
vated.
Function of Active Speed Limit Assist
If a change in the speed limit of 20 km/h or more
is detected and automatic adoption of speed lim-
its is activated, the new speed limit is automati-
cally adopted as the stored speed (/ page 242).
The driven speed is adjusted when the vehicle is
level with the trac sign at the latest. In the case
of signs indicating entry into an urban area, the
speed is adapted according to the speed permit-
ted within the urban area. The speed limit display
in the driver's display is always updated when the
vehicle is level with the trac sign.
If there is no speed restriction on an unlimited
stretch of road (e.g. on a motorway), the recom-
mended speed is automatically adopted as the
stored speed. The system uses the speed stored
on an unlimited stretch of road as the recommen-
ded speed. If you do not alter the stored speed on
an unlimited stretch of road, the recommended
speed is 130 km/h.
If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC has been put
into passive mode by pressing the accelerator
pedal, only speed limits which are higher than the
set speed are adopted.
Observe the notes on driving systems and your
responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise
dangers (/ page 210).
System limits
The system limits of Trac Sign Assist apply to
the detection of trac signs (/ page 240).
Speed limits below 20 km/h are not automatically
adopted by the system as the stored speed. Tem-
porary speed restrictions (e.g. for a certain time
or due to weather conditions) cannot be properly
detected by the system. The maximum permissi-
ble speed applying to a vehicle with a trailer is not
detected by the system.
Adjust the speed in these situations.
&WARNING Risk of accident due to Active
Speed Limit Assist adapting the vehicle's
speed
The speed adopted by Active Speed Limit
Assist may be too high or incorrect in some
individual cases, such as:
Rat speed limits below 20 km/h
Rin wet conditions or in fog
Rwhen towing a trailer
228 Driving and parking
#Ensure that the driven speed complies
with trac regulations.
#Adjust the driving speed to suit current
trac and weather conditions.
Function of route-based speed adaptation
When Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activa-
ted, the vehicle speed will be adapted accordingly
to the route events ahead. Depending on the drive
program selected, the vehicle negotiates a route
event ahead in an economical, comfortable or
dynamic manner. When the route event has been
passed, the vehicle accelerates again to the
stored speed. The set distance to the vehicle in
front, vehicles detected ahead and speed restric-
tions ahead are taken into account.
You can activate and deactivate route-based
speed adaptation in the multimedia system
(/ page 230).
The following route events are taken into account:
RBends
RT-junctions, roundabouts and toll stations
RTurns and exits
RTrac jams ahead (only with Live Trac Infor-
mation )
%When the toll station is reached, Active Dis-
tance Assist DISTRONIC adopts the speed as
the stored speed.
Also, the speed is reduced if the turn signal indi-
cator to change lanes is switched on and one of
the following situations is detected:
RTurning at junctions
RDriving on slowing-down lanes
RDriving on lanes adjacent to slowing-down
lanes
The driver is responsible for choosing the right
speed and observing other road users. This
applies in particular to junctions, roundabouts and
trac lights, as route-based speed adaptation
does not brake the vehicle to a standstill.
When route guidance is active, the rst speed
adjustment is carried out automatically. If the turn
signal indicator is switched on, the selected route
is conrmed and further speed adjustment is acti-
vated.
Speed adaptation is cancelled in the following
cases:
RIf the turn signal indicator is switched o
before the route event.
RIf the driver depresses the accelerator or
brake pedal during the process.
System limits
Route-based speed adaptation does not take right
of way regulations into account. The driver is
responsible for complying with road trac regula-
tions and driving at a suitable speed.
The speed adaptation made by the system may
not always be suitable, particularly in the following
situations:
Rthe road's course not clearly visible
RRoad narrowing
Rvarying maximum permissible speeds in indi-
vidual lanes, forexample at toll stations
Rwet road surfaces, snow or ice
Rwhen towing a trailer
In these situations the driver must intervene
accordingly.
Driving and parking 229
&WARNING Risk of accident in spite of
route-based speed adaptation
Route-based speed adaptation can malfunc-
tion or be temporarily unavailable in the fol-
lowing situations:
RIf the driver does not follow the calculated
route
RIf map data is not up-to-date or available
RIn the event of roadworks
RIn bad weather or road conditions
RIf the accelerator pedal is depressed
RIn the event of electronically displayed
speed limitations
#Adapt the speed to the trac situation.
Setting Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC driv-
ing styles
Requirements
RActive Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activa-
ted.
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5Assistance
5Driving 5Active Distance Assist
Setting speed adaptation
#Select Adopt speed limit or Route-based
speed adapt..
When these functions are active, the vehicle
speed is adjusted depending on the route
events ahead.
%When one of the following systems is active,
the detected speed can be manually adopted
as the speed limit:
RActive Distance Assist DISTRONIC
RVariable limiter
%Further information on speed adaptation
(/ page 229).
Active Steering Assist
Function of Active Steering Assist
Active Steering Assist is only available up to a
speed of 210 km/h. The system helps you to stay
in the centre of the lane by means of moderate
steering interventions. Depending on the speed
driven, Active Steering Assist uses the vehicles
ahead and lane markings as a reference.
%Depending on the country, in the lower speed
range Active Steering Assist can use the sur-
rounding trac as a reference. If necessary,
Active Steering Assist can then also provide
assistance when driving outside the centre of
the lane, forexample, to form a rescue lane.
If the detection of lane markings and vehicles
ahead is impaired, Active Steering Assist switches
to passive mode. The system provides no support
in this case.
Status display of the active steering assistant
RØ (grey): activated and passive
RØ (green): activated and active
RØ (red): system limits detected
RØ (white, red hands): "hands on the steer-
ing wheel" prompt
230 Driving and parking
%During the transition from active to passive
status, the Ø symbol is shown as enlarged
and ashing. When the passive state is
reached, the symbol Ø is displayed in
grey.
%Depending on the selected vehicle settings,
Active Steering Assist may be unavailable.
Steering and touch detection
The driver is required to keep their hands on the
steering wheel at all times and be able to inter-
vene at any time to correct the course of the vehi-
cle and keep it in lane. The driver must expect a
change from active to passive mode or vice versa
at any time.
If the system detects that the driver has not
steered the vehicle for a considerable period of
time or has removed their hands from the steering
wheel, display 1 appears. If the driver still does
not steer the vehicle, a warning tone sounds in
addition to the visual warning message.
If the driver does not react to the warning for a
considerable period, the system can initiate an
emergency stop (/ page 232).
The warning does not occur or stops as soon as
the system detects that the driver is touching or
steering the steering wheel.
Touch detection may be limited or inoperative if
there is no direct contact between the hand and
the steering wheel, e.g.when wearing gloves or if
the steering wheel is tted with a cover.
If Active Steering Assist detects that a system
limit has been reached, a visual warning is issued
and a warning tone sounds.
Observe the notes on driving systems and your
responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise
dangers (/ page 210).
System limits
Active Steering Assist has a limited steering tor-
que for lateral guidance. In some cases, the steer-
ing intervention is not sucient to keep the vehi-
cle in the lane or to drive through exits.
The system may be impaired or may be inopera-
tive in the following instances:
RThere is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow, rain,
fog, heavy spray, greatly varying light condi-
tions or strong shadows on the carriageway.
RThere is glare, e.g. from oncoming trac,
direct sunlight or reections.
RInsucient road illumination.
RThe windscreen is dirty, misted up, damaged
or covered in the vicinity of the camera, e.g.
by a sticker.
RNo, or several, unclear lane markings are pres-
ent for one lane, or the markings change
quickly, forexample, in a construction area or
junctions.
RThe lane markings are worn away, dark or cov-
ered up, e.g. by dirt or snow.
Driving and parking 231
RIf the distance to the vehicle in front is too
short and thus the lane markings cannot be
detected.
RThe road is narrow and winding.
RThere are obstacles on the lane or projecting
out into the lane, suchas object markers.
The system does not provide assistance in the fol-
lowing conditions:
ROn tight bends and when turning.
RWhen crossing junctions.
RAt roundabouts or toll stations.
RWhen towing a trailer.
RWhen the tyre pressure is too low.
&WARNING Risk of accident if Active Steer-
ing Assist unexpectedly stops functioning
If the system limits of Active Steering Assist
are reached there is no guarantee that the
system will remain active or will keep the vehi-
cle in lane.
#Always keep your hands on the steering
wheel and observe the trac carefully.
#Always steer the vehicle paying attention
to trac conditions.
&WARNING Risk of accident if Active Steer-
ing Assist unexpectedly intervenes
The detection of lane markings and objects
may malfunction and cause unexpected steer-
ing interventions.
#Steer according to trac conditions.
Activating/deactivating Active Steering Assist
Requirements:
RESP® is activated, but is not intervening.
RActive Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activa-
ted.
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5Assistance
5Driving
#Activate or deactivate Active Steering Assist.
Function of Active Emergency Stop Assist
If the system detects that the driver has not
steered the vehicle for a considerable period of
time or has removed their hands from the steering
wheel, display 1 appears. If the driver still does
not steer the vehicle, or gives no conrmation to
the system, a warning tone sounds in addition to
the visual warning message.
If the driver still does not respond to the warning,
the message Beginning emergency stop appears
in the driver display. If the driver still does not
respond, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
reduces the speed. The vehicle is decelerated in
stages to a standstill.
232 Driving and parking
Depending on the country, at speeds below
60 km/h the hazard warning lights switch on
automatically.
When the vehicle is stationary, the following
actions are carried out:
RThe vehicle is secured with the electric park-
ing brake.
RActive Distance Assist DISTRONIC is ended.
RThe vehicle is unlocked.
RIf possible, an emergency call is placed to the
Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre.
The driver can cancel the deceleration at any time
by performing one of the following actions:
RSteering
RBraking or accelerating
RDeactivating Active Distance Assist
DISTRONIC
Active Brake Assist
Function of Active Brake Assist
Active Brake Assist consists of the following func-
tions:
RDistance warning function
RCollision warning
RAutonomous braking function
RSituation-dependent brake force boosting
RVehicles with Driving Assistance Package: Eva-
sive Steering Assist and cornering function
Active Brake Assist can help you to minimise the
risk of a collision with vehicles, cyclists or pedes-
trians or to reduce the eects of such a collision.
If Active Brake Assist has detected a risk of colli-
sion, a warning tone sounds and the L warn-
ing lamp lights up.
In the Assistance menu, an insucient distance
1 to the vehicle in front is displayed in red. If you
further reduce the distance, the vehicle in front is
also highlighted in red. When the system detects a
risk of collision, red radar waves 2 appear in
front of the vehicle.
Vehicles with PRE-SAFE®: depending on the coun-
try, an additional haptic warning occurs in the
form of slight, repeated tensioning of the seat
belt.
If you do not react to the warning, autonomous
braking can be initiated in critical situations.
In especially critical situations, Active Brake Assist
can initiate autonomous braking directly. In this
Driving and parking 233
case, the warning lamp and warning tone occur
simultaneously with the braking application.
If you apply the brake yourself in a critical situa-
tion or apply the brake during autonomous brak-
ing, situation-dependent brake force boosting
occurs. The brake pressure increases up to maxi-
mum full-stop braking if necessary.
Observe the notes on driving systems and your
responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise
dangers (/ page 210).
If autonomous braking or situation-dependent
brake force boosting has occurred, pop up 1
appears in the driver's display and then automati-
cally goes out aer a short time.
If the autonomous braking function or situation-
dependent brake force boosting is triggered, addi-
tional preventive measures for occupant protec-
tion (PRE-SAFE®) may also be initiated.
&WARNING Risk of an accident caused by
limited detection performance of Active
Brake Assist
Active Brake Assist cannot always clearly iden-
tify objects and complex trac situations.
In such cases, Active Brake Assist might:
RGive a warning or brake without reason
RNot give a warning or not brake
Active Brake Assist is only an aid. The driver is
responsible for maintaining a suciently safe
distance to the vehicle in front, vehicle speed
and for braking in good time.
#Always pay careful attention to the trac
situation; do not rely on Active Brake
Assist alone.
#Be prepared to brake or swerve if neces-
sary.
If Active Brake Assist is deactivated or the func-
tions are restricted, e.g. due to activation of
another driving system, the ê display message
appears in the driver's display.
If the system is unavailable due to dirty or dam-
aged sensors or due to a fault, or if the functions
are restricted, the Ó warning lamp appears in
the driver's display.
Also observe the system limits of Active Brake
Assist.
The individual subfunctions are available in vari-
ous speed ranges:
The distance warning function can issue a warn-
ing in the following situations:
RFrom approximately 30 km/h, if over several
seconds the distance maintained to the vehi-
cle travelling in front is insucient for the
driven speed, the L distance warning lamp
lights up in the driver's display.
RFrom approximately 7 km/h, if your vehicle is
critically close to a vehicle, cyclist or pedes-
trian, you will hear an intermittent warning
234 Driving and parking
tone and the L distance warning lamp
lights up in the driver's display.
Vehicles with PRE-SAFE®: depending on the
country, an additional haptic warning occurs
in the form of slight, repeated tensioning of
the seat belt.
Brake immediately or take evasive action, provi-
ded it is safe to do so and the trac situation
allows this.
Collision warning (vehicles without Driving Assis-
tance Package)
The collision warning can aid you in the following
situations with an intermittent warning tone and a
warning lamp:
RFrom approximately 7 km/h, if your vehicle is
critically close to a vehicle, cyclist or pedes-
trian, you will hear an intermittent warning
tone and the L distance warning lamp
lights up in the driver's display.
Vehicles with PRE-SAFE®: depending on the
country, an additional haptic warning occurs
in the form of slight, repeated tensioning of
the seat belt.
Rat speeds up to approximately 250 km/h
when approaching vehicles ahead
Rat speeds up to approximately 80 km/h when
approaching stationary vehicles, moving
pedestrians, and cyclists ahead
Rat speeds up to approximately 60 km/h when
approaching crossing cyclists
Collision warning (vehicles with Driving Assistance
Package)
The collision warning can aid you in the following
situations with an intermittent warning tone and a
warning lamp:
Rat speeds up to approximately 250 km/h
when approaching vehicles ahead
Rat speeds up to approximately 100 km/h
when approaching stationary vehicles
Rat speeds up to approximately 80 km/h when
approaching moving pedestrians and cyclists
ahead
Rat speeds up to approximately 70 km/h when
approaching stationary pedestrians, crossing
vehicles and stationary and crossing cyclists
Autonomous braking function (vehicles without
Driving Assistance Package)
If the vehicle is travelling at speeds above approx-
imately 7 km/h, the autonomous braking function
may intervene in the following situations:
Rat speeds up to approximately 200 km/h
when approaching vehicles ahead
Rat speeds up to approximately 80 km/h when
approaching cyclists ahead
Rat speeds up to approximately 60 km/h when
approaching moving pedestrians, crossing
cyclists, and stationary vehicles
Autonomous braking function (vehicles with Driv-
ing Assistance Package)
If the vehicle is travelling at speeds above approx-
imately 7 km/h, the autonomous braking function
may intervene in the following situations:
Rat speeds up to approximately 250 km/h
when approaching vehicles ahead
Rat speeds up to approximately 100 km/h
when approaching stationary vehicles
Rat speeds up to approximately 80 km/h when
approaching cyclists ahead
Driving and parking 235
Rat speeds up to approximately 70 km/h when
approaching stationary and moving pedes-
trians, crossing vehicles and stationary and
crossing cyclists
Situation-dependent brake force boosting (vehi-
cles without Driving Assistance Package)
Situation-dependent brake force boosting can
intervene from a speed of approximately 7 km/h
in the following situations:
Rat speeds up to approximately 250 km/h
when approaching vehicles ahead
Rat speeds up to approximately 80 km/h when
approaching stationary vehicles and cyclists
ahead
Rat speeds up to approximately 60 km/h when
approaching moving pedestrians and crossing
cyclists
Situation-dependent brake force boosting (vehi-
cles with Driving Assistance Package)
Situation-dependent brake force boosting can
intervene from a speed of approximately 7 km/h
in the following situations:
Rat speeds up to approximately 250 km/h
when approaching vehicles ahead
Rat speeds up to approximately 100 km/h
when approaching stationary vehicles
Rat speeds up to approximately 80 km/h when
approaching cyclists ahead
Rat speeds up to approximately 60 km/h when
approaching stationary and moving pedes-
trians, crossing vehicles, and stationary and
crossing cyclists
Cancelling a brake application of Active Brake
Assist
You can cancel a brake application of Active
Brake Assist at any time by:
Rsharply depressing the accelerator pedal or
with kickdown
Rreleasing the brake pedal
Active Brake Assist may cancel the brake applica-
tion when one of the following conditions is full-
led:
Ryou manoeuvre to avoid the obstacle
Rthere is no longer a risk of collision
Ran obstacle is no longer detected in front of
your vehicle
Evasive Steering Assist (only vehicles with Driving
Assistance Package)
Evasive Steering Assist has the following charac-
teristics:
RThe ability to detect stationary or moving
pedestrians.
RAssistance through power-assisted steering if
it detects a swerving manoeuvre.
RActivation by an abrupt steering movement
during a swerving manoeuvre.
RAssistance during swerving and straightening
of the vehicle.
RReaction from a speed of approximately
20 km/h up to a speed of approximately
70 km/h.
236 Driving and parking
You can prevent the assistance at any time by
actively steering.
Cornering function (only vehicles with Driving
Assistance Package)
If the system detects a risk of a collision with an
oncoming vehicle when turning across an oncom-
ing lane, autonomous braking can be initiated at
speeds below 15 km/h before you have le the
lane in which you are driving.
&WARNING Risk of accident despite Eva-
sive Steering Assist
Evasive Steering Assist cannot always recog-
nise objects or complex trac situations
clearly.
Moreover, the steering support provided by
Evasive Steering Assist is not sucient to
avoid a collision.
#Always pay careful attention to the trac
situation; do not rely on Evasive Steering
Assist alone.
#Be prepared to brake or swerve if neces-
sary.
#End the support by actively steering in
non-critical situations.
#Drive at an appropriate speed if there
are pedestrians close to the path of your
vehicle.
System limits
Full system performance is not available for a
short time aer switching on the vehicle or aer
driving o. Depending on the environmental con-
ditions, it may take a few minutes before full sys-
tem performance is available.
The system may be impaired or may not function,
particularly in the following situations:
RIn snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, if there is glare,
in direct sunlight or in greatly varying light
conditions.
RIf the sensors are dirty, misted up, damaged or
covered.
RIf the sensors are impaired due to interference
from other radar sources, e.g. strong radar
reections in multi-storey car parks.
RIf a loss of tyre pressure or a defective tyre
has been detected and displayed.
RIn complex trac situations where objects
cannot always be clearly identied.
RIf pedestrians or vehicles move quickly into
the sensor detection range.
RIf pedestrians are hidden by other objects.
RIf the typical outline of a pedestrian cannot be
distinguished from the background.
RIf a pedestrian is not detected as such, e.g.
due to special clothing or other objects.
RIf the driver's seat belt is not fastened.
ROn bends with a tight radius.
%The Active Brake Assist sensors adjust auto-
matically while a certain distance is being
driven aer the vehicle has been delivered.
Active Brake Assist is unavailable or only par-
tially available during the teach-in process.
Setting Active Brake Assist
Requirements:
RThe vehicle is switched on.
Driving and parking 237
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5Assistance
5Collision avoidance
#Activate or deactivate the function.
%It is recommended that you always leave
Active Brake Assist activated.
When Active Brake Assist is deactivated, the dis-
tance warning function, the collision warning, the
autonomous braking function and Evasive Steer-
ing Assist are deactivated.
%If Active Brake Assist is deactivated, the æ
symbol appears in the status bar of the driv-
er's display, and the system is reactivated the
next time the vehicle is started.
Setting the time of the warnings
#Select Z next to Active Brake Assist.
#Select Early, Medium or Late.
%If ATTENTION ASSIST has detected indica-
tions of fatigue or a microsleep, the system
can issue a warning earlier than the set time
(country-dependent). Further information
about ATTENTION ASSIST (/ page 218).
Speed Limit Assist
Function of Speed Limit Assist
%Speed Limit Assist uses OpenStreetMap data,
which is made available under the conditions
of the Open Database License (OBbL). For
more information, see: https://
www.osmfoundation.org/wiki/licence.
Speed Limit Assist detects speed limits with multi-
function camera and displays them in the driver's
display and optionally in the head-up display. The
camera also detects speed limits with a restric-
tion indicated by an additional sign (e.g. when
wet). The system detects stop signs, thereby pre-
venting the engine from being switched o by the
ECO start/stop function.
Observe the notes on driving systems and your
responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise
dangers (/ page 210).
Warning when the maximum permissible speed is
exceeded
The system can warn you if you unintentionally
exceed the maximum permissible speed. Depend-
ing on the country, you can set in the multimedia
system by how much the maximum permitted
speed may be exceeded before a warning is given.
You can specify whether the warning is to be just
a visual warning or an acoustic one as well.
Display in the driver's display
1Permissible speed
2Permissible speed when there is a restriction
3Additional sign with restriction
%Trac signs which have an impact on the
maximum permissible speed, e.g. signs indi-
cating the beginning or end of dual carriage-
ways, can also be detected.
238 Driving and parking
The system can show up to two trac signs in the
driver's display simultaneously. The system always
prioritises displaying speed limits. Up to one traf-
c sign with a maximum permissible speed can be
shown in the head-up display. If two speed signs
are shown in the driver's display, forexample when
speed limits are detected, the value of le-hand
speed limit 1 is transmitted to the limiter, cruise
control or Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC for
adoption and is shown in the head-up display.
If Speed Limit Assist cannot determine the cur-
rent maximum permissible speed (e.g. due to
missing signs), the following display appears in
the driver's display:
This is displayed continuously if the vehicle is in a
country where Speed Limit Assist is not suppor-
ted. Speed Limit Assist is not available in all coun-
tries.
%Please also note the information on the dis-
play messages (/ page 412).
System limits
The system may be impaired or may not function
in the following situations:
RIf there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insucient
illumination of the road, highly variable shade
conditions, rain, snow, fog or heavy spray.
RIf there is glare, e.g. from oncoming trac,
direct sunlight or reections.
RIf there is dirt on the windscreen in the vicinity
of the multifunction camera or if the camera is
misted up, damaged or obscured.
RIf the trac signs are hard to detect, e.g. due
to dirt, snow or insucient lighting, or
because they are obscured.
RIf you turn sharply when passing trac signs
outside the camera's eld of vision.
Setting Speed Limit Assist
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5Assistance
5Assistance 5Speed Limit Assist
Activating or deactivating the speed warning
%The speed warning is switched on by default
(depending on the country).
#Switch o Speed limit warning.
The speed warning remains o according to
country-specic legislation until the next time
the vehicle is switched on or o and the driv-
er's door is opened.
%The audible speed warning can also be
switched o and on via quick access, by
pressing and holding the mute button on the
steering wheel, by pressing the speed icon in
the status bar of the media display or via a
voice command (functions are available
depending on the country).
Change the type of speed warning
#Modify the warning on Visual or Visual & audi-
ble.
Driving and parking 239
Switching the advisory tone for a new speed limit
on or o
%The advisory tone for a new speed limit is
switched o at the factory.
The function determines whether each change of
the displayed speed in the driver's display is sup-
ported with a subtle, non-intrusive sound.
#Activate or deactivate the function.
%The availability of the function is dependent
on the country.
Setting the warning threshold
This value determines the speed at which a warn-
ing is issued when exceeded.
#Set the desired speed under Warning Thresh-
old.
%The availability of the function is subject to
country-specic legislation.
%When one of the following systems is active,
the detected speed can be manually adopted
as the speed limit:
RActive Distance Assist DISTRONIC
RCruise control
RVariable limiter
The availability of the function is subject to
country-specic legislation.
%Further information about Active Distance
Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 226).
Trac Sign Assist
Function of Trac Sign Assist
Trac Sign Assist detects trac signs with the
multifunction camera (/ page 211). It supports
you by showing detected speed limits and over-
taking bans in the driver display.
Observe the notes on driving systems and your
responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise
dangers (/ page 210).
Since Trac Sign Assist also uses the data stored
in the navigation system, it can update the display
in the following situations without detecting trac
signs.
If the system detects that you are driving onto a
section of road in the wrong direction of travel, it
triggers a warning.
The camera also detects trac signs with a
restriction indicated by an additional sign (e.g.
when wet). These are only displayed if a restric-
tion applies or if the system cannot clearly deter-
mine whether the restriction applies.
Warning when the maximum permissible speed is
exceeded
The system can warn you if you unintentionally
exceed the maximum permissible speed. Depend-
ing on the country, you can set in the multimedia
system by how much the maximum permitted
speed may be exceeded before a warning is given.
You can specify whether the warning is to be just
a visual warning or an acoustic one as well.
240 Driving and parking
Displays in the driver's display
1Permissible speed
2Permissible speed when there is a restriction
3Additional sign with restriction
The system can show up to two trac signs in the
driver's display simultaneously. The system always
prioritises displaying speed limits. Up to one traf-
c sign with a maximum permissible speed can be
shown in the head-up display. If two speed signs
are shown in the driver's display, forexample when
speed limits are detected, the value of le-hand
speed limit 1 is transmitted to the limiter, cruise
control or Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC for
adoption and is shown in the head-up display.
Trac Sign Assist also uses data from the digital
street map in the navigation system. When you
leave or enter a municipality or change roads, on
a motorway exit or slip road forexample, or aer
you turn at a junction, the display in the driver's
display can thus be updated without a trac sign
having been detected.
If Trac Sign Assist cannot determine the cur-
rently applicable maximum permissible speed
(e.g. due to missing signs), the following display
appears in the driver's display:
Trac Sign Assist is not available in all countries.
If the vehicle is in a country where Trac Sign
Assist is not supported, this is displayed continu-
ously.
Warning when approaching pedestrian crossings
The system can warn you if you approach a
pedestrian crossing with your vehicle. The ¯
Watch for pedestrians message appears in the
driver's display.
The warning occurs only if appropriate trac
signs or lane markings are detected and pedes-
trians are present in the danger zone.
System limits
The system may be impaired or inoperative, par-
ticularly in the following situations:
RIf there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insucient
illumination of the road, highly variable shade
conditions, rain, snow, fog or heavy spray.
RIf there is glare, e.g. from oncoming trac,
direct sunlight or reections.
RIf there is dirt on the windscreen in the vicinity
of the multifunction camera or if the camera is
misted up, damaged or obscured.
RIf the trac signs are hard to detect, e.g. due
to dirt, snow or insucient lighting, or
because they are obscured.
RIf the information on the navigation system's
digital map is incorrect or out of date.
RIf signs are ambiguous, e.g. road signs in road-
works or in adjacent lanes.
RIf you turn sharply when passing trac signs
outside the camera's eld of vision.
Driving and parking 241
Setting Trac Sign Assist
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5Assistance
5Assistance 5Traffic Sign Assist
Activating or deactivating the speed warning
%The speed warning is switched on by default
(depending on the country).
#Switch o Speed limit warning.
The speed warning remains o according to
country-specic legislation until the next time
the vehicle is switched on or o and the driv-
er's door is opened.
%The audible speed warning can also be
switched o and on via quick access, by
pressing and holding the mute button on the
steering wheel, by pressing the speed icon in
the status bar of the media display or via a
voice command (functions are available
depending on the country).
Change the type of speed warning
#Modify the warning on Visual or Visual & audi-
ble.
Setting the warning threshold
This value determines the speed at which a warn-
ing is issued when exceeded.
#Set the desired speed under Warning Thresh-
old.
%The availability of the function is subject to
country-specic legislation.
Switching the advisory tone for a new speed limit
on or o
%The advisory tone for a new speed limit is
switched o at the factory.
The function determines whether each change of
the displayed speed in the driver's display is sup-
ported with a subtle, non-intrusive sound.
#Activate or deactivate the function.
%The availability of the function is dependent
on the country.
Activating or deactivating further functions of Traf-
c Sign Assist
#Switch further warning contents on or o.
The available functions are switched on or o.
Set the type of warning for other functions
#Select Visual or Visual & audible.
Trac light view
Information about the trac light view
The trac light view supports the driver when
waiting in front of a red light by displaying the
camera image on the central display. The camera
image is displayed when the driver is the rst vehi-
cle in front of the red light and faded out when the
vehicle drives o.
Displaying trac light view
Requirements:
RThe Traffic light view option is switched on .
RA trac light view is available.
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5Assistance
5Assistance 5Traffic light view
%This function is not available in all countries.
242 Driving and parking
If the vehicle is in rst position at a trac light,
the camera image with trac light view is shown
on the central display.
When the vehicle pulls away, the camera image is
faded out.
#Activate D or deactivate E Traffic
light view.
Using other available functions
#Select Z.
#Select On request or Automatic.
If On request is set and a trac light view is
available, the Please tap here for traffic light
view. message is displayed. The camera image
is shown aer conrmation of the message.
When Automatic is set, the camera image is
automatically displayed when the trac light
view is available.
Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist with
exit warning
Function of Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind
Spot Assist with exit warning
Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist use
two lateral, rear-facing radar sensors to monitor
the area up to 40 m behind and 3 m next to your
vehicle.
If a vehicle is detected at speeds above approx-
imately 12 km/h and this vehicle subsequently
enters the monitoring range directly next to your
vehicle, the warning lamp in the outside mirror
lights up red.
Status display:
R¸ (grey): system is activated but inopera-
tive
R¸ (green): system is activated and opera-
tional
If a vehicle is detected close to your vehicle and
you switch on the turn signal indicator in the cor-
responding direction, a double warning tone
sounds and the red warning lamp in the outside
mirror ashes. If the turn signal indicator remains
switched on, all other detected vehicles are indi-
cated only by the ashing of the red warning
lamp.
If you overtake a vehicle quickly, no warning is
given.
&WARNING Risk of accident despite Active
Blind Spot Assist
Active Blind Spot Assist does not react to the
following:
Rif you overtake a vehicle too closely so that
it is in the blind spot area
Rif vehicles travelling at a much faster
speed approach and then overtake
Active Blind Spot Assist may not give warnings
or intervene in such situations.
#Always pay careful attention to the trac
situation and maintain a safe distance at
the side of the vehicle.
Observe the notes on driving systems and your
responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise
dangers (/ page 210).
Driving and parking 243
Exit warning
The exit warning is an additional function of Blind
Spot Assist and can warn vehicle occupants about
approaching vehicles when leaving the vehicle
when stationary.
&WARNING Risk of accident despite exit
warning
The exit warning neither reacts to stationary
objects nor to persons or road users
approaching you at a greatly diering speed.
The exit warning cannot warn drivers in these
situations.
#Always pay particular attention to the
trac situation when opening the doors
and make sure there is sucient clear-
ance.
If there is a vehicle in the monitoring range, this is
indicated in the outside mirror. If a vehicle occu-
pant opens the door on the side with the warning,
a warning tone sounds and the warning lamp in
the outside mirror starts to ash.
This additional function is only available when
Blind Spot Assist is active. When the exit warning
is activated, it can warn vehicle occupants for up
to three minutes aer switching the vehicle o.
The exit warning is no longer available once the
warning lamp in the outside mirror ashes three
times.
The exit warning is only an aid and not a substi-
tute for the attention of vehicle occupants. The
responsibility for opening and closing the doors
and for leaving the vehicle remains with the vehi-
cle occupants.
System limits
Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist may
be limited in the following situations, in particular:
Rif there is dirt on the sensors or the sensors
are obscured
Rin poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or
snow
Rif there are narrow vehicles, e.g. bicycles or
motorbikes
Rif the road has very wide or narrow lanes
Rif vehicles are not driving in the middle of their
lane
Warnings may be issued in error when driving
close to crash barriers or similar continuous lane
borders. Always make sure that there is sucient
distance to the side for other trac or obstacles.
Warnings may be interrupted when driving along-
side long vehicles, for example lorries, for a pro-
longed time.
Blind Spot Assist is not operational when reverse
gear is engaged.
Blind Spot Assist and the exit warning are not
operational when a trailer is coupled to the vehi-
cle and the electrical connection has been cor-
rectly established.
The exit warning may be limited in the following
situations:
Rwhen the sensors are covered by adjacent
vehicles in narrow parking spaces
Rwhen people approach the vehicle
Rin the event of stationary or slowly moving
objects
244 Driving and parking
Function of brake application (Active Blind Spot
Assist)
If Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of a side
impact in the monitoring range, a course-correct-
ing brake application is carried out. This is
designed to help you avoid a collision.
The course-correcting brake application is availa-
ble in the speed range between approximately
30 km/h and 200 km/h.
&WARNING Risk of accident despite brake
application of Active Blind Spot Assist
A course-correcting brake application cannot
always prevent a collision.
#Always steer, brake or accelerate your-
self, especially if Active Blind Spot Assist
warns you or makes a course-correcting
brake application.
#Always maintain a safe distance at the
sides.
If a course-correcting brake application occurs,
the red warning lamp ashes in the outside mirror
and a warning tone sounds. In addition, a display
1 indicating the danger of a side collision
appears in the driver's display.
In rare cases, the system may make an inappro-
priate brake application. This brake application
may be interrupted at any time if you steer slightly
in the opposite direction or accelerate.
System limits
Note the system limitations of Active Blind Spot
Assist; you may otherwise not recognise the dan-
gers (/ page 243).
Either a course-correcting brake application
appropriate to the driving situation, or none at all,
may occur in the following situations:
RVehicles or obstacles, e.g. crash barriers, are
located on both sides of your vehicle.
RA vehicle approaches too closely on the side.
RYou have adopted a sporty driving style with
high cornering speeds.
RYou brake or accelerate signicantly.
RA driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP®
or Active Brake Assist.
RESP® is deactivated.
RA loss of tyre pressure or a defective tyre is
detected.
RYou are driving with a trailer and the electrical
connection to the trailer hitch has been cor-
rectly established.
Driving and parking 245
Activating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist or
Active Blind Spot Assist
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5Assistance
5Collision avoidance
#Activate or deactivate Active Blind Spot
Assist.
Active Lane Keeping Assist
Function of Active Lane Keeping Assist
Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in
front of your vehicle by means of the multifunction
camera (/ page 211) and can warn you before
you leave your lane unintentionally. The system
can guide you back into your lane through a
course-correcting steering intervention and addi-
tionally warns you with vibration pulses in the
steering wheel. Active Lane Keeping Assist is
available in the speed range between approx-
imately 60 km/h and 210 km/h.
The system can intervene in the following situa-
tions:
RActive Lane Keeping Assist detects a lane
marking.
ROne of your front wheels goes over a lane
marking.
If you activate the turn signal indicator, a steering
intervention does not occur on the corresponding
side.
If you leave the lane without activating the turn
signal indicator, but danger of a collision with a
moving obstacle is detected in your lane, a steer-
ing intervention does not occur.
Vehicles with Blind Spot Assist or Driving Assis-
tance Package: if the system detects an obstacle,
such as another vehicle in the adjacent lane, a
steering intervention will occur regardless of the
turn signal indicator.
Display 1 will appear in the driver's display and a
warning tone will sound in the following situations:
RA steering intervention by Active Lane Keeping
Assist lasts longer than approximately ten sec-
onds.
RThe system carries out two or more steering
interventions within approximately three
minutes without any steering intervention from
the driver.
In the Active Lane Keeping Assist settings, you
can set the sensitivity of the system and set the
level of support. Additionally, you can set whether
the system should react to discontinuous lane
246 Driving and parking
markings or only continuous lane markings
(/ page 248).
Status displays for Active Lane Keeping Assist
ïWhite: Active Lane Keeping Assist is deac-
tivated.
If ESP® is deactivated or a tire pressure
loss warning is displayed, Active Lane
Keeping Assist is automatically deactiva-
ted.
ïYellow: there is a malfunction. Please also
observe the display messages.
ðGrey: Active Lane Keeping Assist is activa-
ted, but not operating.
ðGreen: Active Lane Keeping Assist is acti-
vated and operating.
ðRed: Active Lane Keeping Assist has gui-
ded you back into your lane with a course-
correcting steering intervention. The status
display will ash if there is also a haptic
warning in the steering wheel. The lane
marking is shown in red only on the side
for which there is a warning.
Active Lane Change Assist display in the "Assis-
tance" menu
If the front wheel of the vehicle drives over a
detected lane marking, this will be highlighted red
in the Assistance menu in the driver's display.
System limits
In the following situations, a lane-correcting steer-
ing intervention may not occur but rather a warn-
ing may be given on the steering wheel, depend-
ing on the situation:
RYou clearly and actively steer, brake or accel-
erate.
RIf a driving safety system intervenes, such as
ESP®, Active Brake Assist or Active Blind Spot
Assist.
RYou have adopted a sporty driving style with
high cornering speeds or high rates of acceler-
ation.
RIf transport equipment, for example a trailer or
bicycle rack, is attached to the trailer hitch
and the electrical connection has been cor-
rectly established.
The system may be impaired or may not function
particularly in the following situations:
RIf there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insucient
illumination of the road, highly variable shade
conditions, rain, snow, fog or heavy spray.
RIf there is glare, e.g. from oncoming trac, the
sun or reections.
RIf there is dirt on the windscreen in the vicinity
of the multifunction camera or if the camera is
misted up, damaged or obscured.
RIf there is dirt on the bumper in the area of the
radar sensors, or if they are damaged or cov-
ered.
Driving and parking 247
RIf there are no lane markings, or several
unclear lane markings are present for one
lane, e.g. around roadworks.
RIf the lane markings are worn, dark or cov-
ered.
RIf the distance to the vehicle in front is too
short and thus the lane markings cannot be
detected.
RIf the lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes
branch o, cross one another or merge.
RIf the carriageway is very narrow and winding.
Observe the notes on driving systems and your
responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise
dangers (/ page 210).
Activating/deactivating Active Lane Keeping
Assist
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5Assistance
5Collision avoidance
5Active Lane Keeping Assist
#Activate or deactivate the function.
Alternatively, Active Lane Keeping Assist can be
activated and deactivated via the y quick vehi-
cle access.
%Aer starting the vehicle, the settings are
country-specic.
Setting Active Lane Keeping Assist
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5Assistance
5Collision avoidance
5Active Lane Keeping Assist
Setting the sensitivity
#Select Z.
#Select Early, Med. or Late.
The last selected setting will be adopted the next
time the vehicle is started.
%The standard setting for this function is
dependent on the country.
Activating or deactivating assistance on discontin-
uous lane markings
#Select Advanced support.
The last selected setting will be adopted the next
time the vehicle is started.
%The standard setting for this function is coun-
try-specic.
%This function must be activated in vehicles
without Driving Assistance Package, so that
Emergency Stop Assist is fully available.
Further information on Emergency Stop Assist
(/ page 232)
Function of adaptive damping adjustment
Suspension with adaptive damping adjustment
continuously adjusts the characteristics of the
suspension dampers to the current operating and
driving conditions.
The damping is set individually for each wheel and
is aected by the following factors:
Rthe road surface conditions
Rvehicle load
Rthe drive program selected
Rthe driving style
248 Driving and parking
The drive program can be adjusted using the
DYNAMIC SELECT switch.
Reversing camera
Function of the reversing camera
The reversing camera is only an aid. It is not a
substitute for your attention to the surroundings.
The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and park-
ing remains with you. Make sure that there are no
persons, animals or objects etc., in the manoeu-
vring area while manoeuvring and parking.
%The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a
mirror image, as in the inside rear view mirror.
Vehicles without Parking Package
The following camera views are available in the
multimedia system:
Standard view
1Guide lines at a distance of approximately
0.5 m, 1.0 m, 1.5 m and 3.0 m from the rear
area
2Lane marking the course the tyres will take
with the current steering angle (dynamic)
3Driven surface depending on the current
steering angle (dynamic)
4Guide line at a distance of approximately
0.3 m from the rear area
Wide-angle view
Trailer view
5Yellow guide line, locating aid
Driving and parking 249
6Red guide line at a distance of approximately
0.3 m from the ball head of the trailer hitch
7Ball head of the trailer hitch
Pedestrian braking function
%This function is only available in vehicles with-
out the Parking Package. Vehicles with the
Parking Package are equipped with manoeu-
vring assistant functions (/ page 265).
The pedestrian braking function can prevent colli-
sions with pedestrians when the vehicle is revers-
ing at slow speeds. If the reversing camera
detects a person in the vehicle path, the vehicle
can be braked to a standstill.
The pedestrian braking function can intervene
under the following conditions:
RThe vehicle is reversing at a speed below
15 km/h.
RThe camera image is shown in the central dis-
play.
If automatic braking is triggered, the following
symbol appears in red in the camera image:
In addition, the message º Pedestrian!
Deact. emerg. braking: press here appears.
The driver can close or ignore this message.
Pedestrian braking then remains active. When the
driver taps the message, pedestrian braking is
momentarily disabled.
In the following cases, the pedestrian braking
function is activated again:
RThe vehicle travels forward at over 16 km/h.
RThe vehicle is switched o and on again.
%If the function is not available or disabled, the
same icon º appears in gray in the cam-
era image.
The pedestrian braking function is only an aid. It is
not a substitute for your attention to the surround-
ings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and
parking remains with you. Make sure that no per-
sons, animals or objects etc. are in the manoeu-
vring range.
&WARNING Risk of accident caused by limi-
ted detection of the pedestrian braking
function
The pedestrian braking function cannot always
clearly detect people. Other obstacles are not
detected by the function.
In these cases, the function may brake unnec-
essarily or not brake at all.
#Always pay careful attention to the trac
situation; do not rely on the pedestrian
braking function alone.
#Be ready to brake.
In the following situations, the pedestrian braking
function is not available:
Ron inclines
RIf transport equipment, forexample a trailer or
bicycle rack, is attached to the trailer hitch
and the electrical connection has been cor-
rectly established.
Rif the reversing camera is not operational
250 Driving and parking
%Please also note the system limits of the
reversing camera at the end of the section.
Vehicles with Parking Package
Menu Camera views
1Lane marking the course the tyres will take
with the current steering angle (dynamic)
2Driven surface depending on the current
steering angle (dynamic)
3Menu Parking Assistance
4Reversing camera with top view
5Wide-angle view
6Trailer view
7Activating/deactivating Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC (/ page 260)
8Guide line at a distance of approximately
0.3 m from the rear area
9Guide lines at a distance of approximately
0.5 m, 1.0 m, 1.5 m and 3.0 m from the rear
area
AWarning display of Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC (/ page 257)
%When Active Parking Assist is active, lanes 1
are displayed in green (/ page 261).
Wide-angle view
Trailer view
BYellow guide line, locating aid
CRed guide line at a distance of approximately
0.3 m from the ball head of the trailer hitch
DBall head of the trailer hitch
System limits
If the system is not ready for operation, the Sys-
tem inoperative message appears in the central
display.
The reversing camera will not function or will only
partially function in the following situations:
RYou are driving forwards at a speed greater
than approximately 16 km/h.
Driving and parking 251
RThe boot lid is open.
RThe weather conditions are poor, e.g. heavy
rain, snow, fog, storm or spray.
RThe light conditions are poor, e.g. at night or if
light is shining into the camera.
RThe camera lens is obstructed, dirty or misted
up. Observe the notes on cleaning the revers-
ing camera (/ page 341).
RThe camera or rear of your vehicle is dam-
aged. In this case, have the camera and its
position and setting checked at a qualied
specialist workshop.
RThe detection range is limited by additional
vehicle attachments at the rear, suchas a
licence plate bracket or bicycle rack.
Also observe the information on vehicle sensors
and cameras (/ page 211).
%Do not use the reversing camera in these
types of situations. You could otherwise injure
others or collide with objects when parking
the vehicle.
%The contrast of the display may be impaired
by direct sunlight or by other light sources,
e.g. when driving out of a garage. In this case,
pay particular attention.
%Have the display repaired or replaced if,
forexample, pixel errors considerably restrict
its use.
360° Camera
Function of the 360° Camera
The 360° Camera is a system that consists of
four cameras which cover the immediate sur-
roundings of the vehicle. The cameras assist you
when you are parking, forexample, or at exits with
reduced visibility.
The 360° Camera includes the following cameras
and evaluates their images:
RReversing camera
RFront camera
RTwo side cameras in the outside mirrors
The cameras are only an aid and may show a dis-
torted view of obstacles, show them incorrectly or
not show them at all. They are not a substitute for
your attention to the surroundings. The responsi-
bility for safe manoeuvring and parking remains
with you. Make sure that there are no persons,
animals or objects etc., in the manoeuvring area
while manoeuvring and parking.
Menu overview Camera views
1Menu Parking Assistance
2Top view with image from the front camera
3Panorama View
4Top view with image from the reversing cam-
era
53D view, le-hand side of the vehicle
63D view, right-hand side of the vehicle
73D auto view
252 Driving and parking
8Trailer View (depending on equipment)
9Activating/deactivating Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC (/ page 260)
ATo set the GPS activation point
%In all views, the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
warning display is shown (/ page 257).
Function of the guide lines
1Guide lines at a distance of approximately
0.5 m, 1.0 m, 1.5 m and 3.0 m Distance from
the rear area
2Lane marking the course the tyres will take
with the current steering angle (dynamic)
3Driven surface depending on the current
steering angle (dynamic)
4Guide line at a distance of approximately
0.3 m from the rear area
%When Active Parking Assist is active, lanes
and guide lines are displayed in green instead
of yellow (/ page 261).
Top view with image from the front or reversing
camera
1Warning display of Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC (/ page 257)
2Your vehicle from above
3Lane indicating the route the vehicle will take
at the current steering angle
Driving and parking 253
3D view, le/right-hand side of the vehicle
*NOTE Risk of accident due to objects
being severely distorted in the display or
not displayed at all
Due to the projection of the cameras, objects
in the 3D views may be severely distorted
when displayed or not displayed at all.
#Make sure that there are no persons,
animals or objects etc. in the manoeu-
vring area while manoeuvring and park-
ing.
In the 3D view, le-/right-hand side of the vehi-
cle, the virtual camera moves to the respective
side of the vehicle 2. When you change the
transmission position, the view is automatically
adapted. In addition, Top View 1 is displayed
with the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC warning indi-
cator.
3D auto view
%The area behind the vehicle is not displayed
as a mirror image as is usual in the 3D views.
1Display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
(/ page 257)
2Guide lines
In the 3D auto view, the virtual camera moves to
the standard perspective, facing forward from the
rear above the roof. The view changes automati-
cally when approaching obstacles.
If you touch the touchscreen, the view changes to
3D view with free rotation. You can turn, tilt and
zoom the views by touch.
Wide-angle view
1Display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
(/ page 257)
2Top view with image from the reversing cam-
era
3Wide-angle view
254 Driving and parking
If the Top View with image of the rear camera is
displayed, switch to the Wide Angle View with the
icon 2 indented to the le. When the wide-angle
view is displayed, switch back to the respective
top view.
Trailer view
%In trailer mode, the guide lines are shown at
the level of the trailer hitch.
If you select trailer view and no trailer is coupled
to the vehicle, the following display appears:
Trailer view: locating aid
1To switch between standard and trailer view
2Yellow locating aid
3Ball head of the trailer hitch
4Red guide line at a distance of approximately
0.3 m from the ball head of the trailer hitch
When the electrical connection is established
between the vehicle and the trailer, the display
changes to the side camera view.
Trailer view: side view of the mirror cameras
1To switch between standard and trailer view
System limits
If the system is not ready for operation, the Sys-
tem inoperative message appears in the central
display.
The 360° Camera will not function or will only
partially function in the following situations:
RYou are driving forwards at a speed greater
than approximately 16 km/h.
RThe doors are open.
RAn outside mirror is not completely folded out.
RThe boot lid is open.
RThe weather conditions are poor, e.g. heavy
rain, snow, fog, storm or spray.
RThe light conditions are poor, e.g. at night or if
light is shining into the camera.
RThe camera lens is obstructed, dirty or misted
up.
RIf cameras or vehicle components in which the
cameras are tted are damaged. In this event,
have the cameras, their positions and their
setting checked at a qualied specialist work-
shop.
%Do not use the 360° Camera under such cir-
cumstances. You could otherwise injure oth-
ers or collide with objects when parking the
vehicle.
Driving and parking 255
For technical reasons, the standard height of the
vehicle may be altered if the vehicle is carrying a
heavy load and can result in inaccuracies in the
guide lines and in the display of the generated
images.
The eld of vision and other functions of the cam-
era system may be restricted due to additional
attachments on the vehicle (e.g. licence plate
bracket, bicycle rack).
%The contrast of the display may be impaired
by abrupt, direct sunlight or by other light
sources, e.g. when driving out of a garage. In
this case, pay particular attention.
%Have the display repaired or replaced if,
forexample, pixel errors considerably restrict
its use.
See the notes on cleaning the 360° Camera
(/ page 341).
Calling up the 360° Camera views using the
button
#Press button 1.
#Select Camera views menu.
#Select the desired view in the multimedia sys-
tem (/ page 252).
Selecting a view for the 360° Camera (reverse
gear)
Requirements
RThe Activation in R setting is activated in the
multimedia system (/ page 256).
#Engage reverse gear.
#Select the desired view in the multimedia sys-
tem (/ page 252).
Setting the reversing camera or 360° Camera
The reversing camera is only an aid. It is not a
substitute for your attention to the surroundings.
The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and park-
ing remains with you. Make sure that no persons,
animals or objects etc. are in the manoeuvring
range. Pay attention to your surroundings and be
ready to brake at all times.
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5Assistance
5Camera
#Activate or deactivate Activation in R.
%The settings for deactivating the reversing
camera are not available in every country.
256 Driving and parking
Opening the camera cover
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5Assistance
5Camera
#Select Open camera cover.
%The camera cover closes automatically aer
some time or aer the vehicle is switched on
or o.
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
Function of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is an electronic park-
ing assistance system which monitors the area
surrounding your vehicle and shows you the dis-
tance between the vehicle and a detected obsta-
cle visually and audibly.
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is
not a substitute for your attention to the surround-
ings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and
parking remains with you. Make sure that there
are no persons, animals or objects in the manoeu-
vring area while manoeuvring and parking in/exit-
ing parking spaces.
The passive side impact protection also warns you
of obstacles to the side. During the parking proce-
dure or manoeuvring, objects are detected as the
vehicle drives past. If you steer in the direction of
a detected obstacle and there is a risk of a lateral
collision, a warning is issued. In order for an
object on the side to be detected, the sensors in
the front and rear bumper must rst detect the
object while you are driving past it.
In order for front or rear obstacles to the side to
be displayed, the vehicle must rst travel a dis-
tance of at least half a vehicle length. Once the
vehicle has travelled one vehicle length, obstacles
on all sides can be shown.
Displays in the driver's display
Vehicles with 360° Camera
Vehicles without 360° Camera
Driving and parking 257
As soon as Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is ready
for display, the respective areas of the display are
shown in blue.
1Front and rear display ready
2All-round display ready
3Obstacles detected at the front le and on
the right-hand side
The colour of the display changes depending on
the distance to the detected obstacle:
RBlue: > 1 m (no obstacles detected)
RYellow: approximately 1 m - 0.7 m
ROrange: approximately 0.7 m - 0.4 m
RRed: <0.4 m
Vehicles with 360° Camera: the boundary line
shis dynamically depending on the position and
distance of the obstacles detected.
Depending on the distance to the obstacle detec-
ted, an intermittent warning tone also sounds. You
can set the timing of the warnings in the multime-
dia system(/ page 260)
Standard setting:
RFront and sides: < 0.4 m
RRear: < 1 m
Warn early all-round:
RFront: < 1 m
RSides: < 0.7 m
RRear: < 1 m
A continuous warning tone sounds from a dis-
tance of approximately 0.2 m, regardless of the
selected setting.
Vehicles with 360° Camera
Vehicles without 360° Camera
If an obstacle is detected in the travel path and
the menu Camera & parking is not open in the
driver display, the pop-up window appears 1:
Rvehicles without Active Parking Assist: at
speeds below 12 km/h
Rvehicles with Active Parking Assist: at speeds
below 18 km/h
258 Driving and parking
Optionally, obstacles detected by Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC from a distance of approximately
1.0 m in front 2 and 0.7 m on the side 3 can
also be displayed in the head-up display.
System limits
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC does not necessarily
take into account the following obstacles:
RObstacles below the detection range, e.g. per-
sons, animals or objects.
RObstacles above the detection range, e.g.
overhanging loads, overhangs or loading
ramps of lorries.
RPedestrians or animals approaching the vehi-
cle from the side.
RObjects placed next to the vehicle
Obstacles on the sides are not shown in the fol-
lowing situations, for example:
RYou park the vehicle and switch it o.
RYou open the doors.
Aer an engine start, obstacles must be detected
again by driving past them before a warning can
be issued.
Observe the information on vehicle sensors and
cameras. Otherwise, the system cannot function
properly (/ page 211).
Vehicles with trailer hitch: Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC is deactivated for the rear zone
when you establish an electrical connection
between your vehicle and a trailer.
Problems with Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
1Vehicles with 360° Camera
2Vehicles without 360° Camera
If the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC display lights
up red for approximately three seconds then goes
out, and the é symbol appears, the system
may have been deactivated due to signal interfer-
ence. Start the vehicle again and check if Parking
Assist PARKTRONIC is working at a dierent loca-
tion.
Driving and parking 259
If the é symbol appears and a warning tone
sounds, it may be due to one of the following cau-
ses:
RThe sensors are dirty: clean the sensors and
observe the notes on care of vehicle parts
(/ page 341).
RParking Assist PARKTRONIC has been deacti-
vated due to a malfunction: restart the vehi-
cle. If the problem persists, consult a qualied
specialist workshop.
Activating/deactivating Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC
*NOTE Risk of an accident from objects at
close range
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC may not detect
certain objects at close range.
#When parking or manoeuvring the vehi-
cle, pay particular attention to any
objects which are above or below the
sensors, e.g. owerpots or drawbars.
The vehicle or other objects could other-
wise be damaged.
Requirements:
RThe camera menu is open.
ROr: Active Parking Assist is active.
ROr: the PARKTRONIC pop-up window appears.
#Press = in the central display.
If the indicator lamp is lit, Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC is active. If the indicator lamp does
not light up or the symbol é is displayed,
PARKTRONIC Parking Assist is not active.
%Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is automatically
activated when the vehicle is started.
Alternatively, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC can be
activated or deactivated in the quick access
menu.
Setting the warning tones of Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5Assistance
5Parking
Adjusting warning tones
#Select Set warning tones.
#Set the desired level under Volume or Tone
pitch.
Activating/deactivating audio fadeout
#Audio fadeout select and Audio fade for
warnings switch on or o.
The volume of the currently playing media
source is reduced during a Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC warning tone.
or
#Audio fadeout select and Audio fadeout in
trans. position R switch on or o.
The volume of the currently playing media
source is reduced when reverse gear is
engaged.
Setting the time of the warnings
#Select Time of warning.
#Activate or deactivate Side warning.
#Set the desired warning time for Front or
Rear.
260 Driving and parking
Active Parking Assist
Function of Active Parking Assist
Active Parking Assist is an electronic parking
assistance system, which uses ultrasound with
the assistance of the reversing camera and 360°
Camera. When you are driving forwards up to
approximately 35 km/h, the system automatically
measures parking spaces on both sides of the
vehicle.
Active Parking Assist oers the following func-
tions:
Vehicles with reversing camera
RParking in parking spaces parallel to the road
Vehicles with 360° Camera
RParking in parking spaces parallel to the road
RParking in parking spaces perpendicular to the
road (optionally either forwards or reverse)
RParking in parking spaces that can only be
detected as such due to markings (forexample
at the roadside)
RExiting parking spaces if you have parked
using Active Parking Assist
As soon as all requirements are met for searching
for parking spaces, the Ç Instrument Display.
When the Active Parking Assist has detected park-
ing spaces, the È display appears in the
Instrument Display. The arrows show on which
side of the road detected parking spaces are loca-
ted. They are then shown in the media display.
Vehicles with reversing camera: the parking space
can be selected as desired. The vehicle is parked
in reverse.
Vehicles with 360° Camera: the parking space
can be selected as desired. Depending on the
location of the parking space, the parking direc-
tion (rearwards or forwards) can also be selected
as desired.
When Active Parking Assist is activated, the turn
signal indicators are activated based on the calcu-
lated path of your vehicle.
The parking procedure is assisted by accelerating,
braking, steering and gear changes.
Active Parking Assist is only an aid. It is not a sub-
stitute for your attention to the surroundings. The
responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking
remains with you. Make sure that no persons, ani-
mals or objects etc. are in the manoeuvring
range.
Active Parking Assist will be cancelled in the fol-
lowing situations:
RParking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated.
RYou begin steering.
RYou apply the electric parking brake.
RYou engage transmission position j.
RESP® intervenes.
RYou open the doors or the boot lid while driv-
ing.
System limits
If the exterior lighting is faulty, the active parking
assistant may be out of function, depending on
the defect.
Also observe the system limits of the following
systems:
RReversing camera (/ page 249)
R360° Camera (/ page 252)
Objects located above or below the detection
range of the sensors, e.g. overhanging loads,
Driving and parking 261
overhangs or loading ramps of goods vehicles, or
the borders of parking spaces, are not detected
during measurement of the parking space. These
are also then not taken into account when calcu-
lating the parking procedure. In some circumstan-
ces, Active Parking Assist may therefore guide
you into the parking space incorrectly.
&WARNING Risk of accident due to objects
located above or below the detection
range of Active Parking Assist
If there are objects above or below the detec-
tion range, the following situations may arise:
RActive Parking Assist may steer too early.
RThe vehicle may not stop in front of these
objects.
There is a danger of collision!
#In these situations, do not use Active
Parking Assist.
Extreme weather conditions, suchas snow or
heavy rain, may lead to a parking space being
measured inaccurately. Parking spaces that are
partially occupied by trailer drawbars might not be
identied as such or be measured incorrectly.
Only use Active Parking Assist on level, high-grip
ground.
Do not use Active Parking Assist in the following
situations:
RIn extreme weather conditions suchas ice,
packed snow or in heavy rain.
RWhen transporting a load that protrudes
beyond the vehicle.
ROn steep uphill or downhill gradients of more
than approximately 15 %.
RWhen snow chains are tted.
RWhen a trailer or bicycle rack is attached.
RDirectly aer a tyre change or when spare
tyres are tted.
RIf the tyre pressure is too low or too high.
RIf the suspension is out of alignment, e.g. aer
bottoming out on a kerb.
Active Parking Assist may also display parking
spaces that are not suitable for parking, suchas:
RParking spaces where parking is prohibited.
RParking spaces on unsuitable surfaces.
Parking with Active Parking Assist
%Depending on the vehicle's equipment, button
1 may also be located at a dierent position
in the centre console.
#Press button1.
262 Driving and parking
#Select 2 Parking Assistance menu.
Parking spaces 3 detected by the system are
shown in the central display.
When the vehicle is stationary, indicated vehicle
path 4 into currently selected parking space 5
also appears.
#If a parking space is displayed: stop the vehi-
cle.
#If necessary, select another parking space.
#Vehicles with 360° Camera: to change the
parking direction, tap the selected parking
space again.
#To start the parking procedure: press button
1 again.
The vehicle drives into the selected parking
space.
The turn signal indicator is switched on automati-
cally when the parking procedure begins. You are
responsible for selecting the turn signal indicator
in accordance with the trac conditions. If neces-
sary, select the turn signal indicator accordingly.
&WARNING Risk of accident due to vehicle
swinging out while parking or pulling out
of a parking space
While parking or exiting a parking space, the
vehicle swings out and can drive onto areas of
the oncoming lane.
This could cause you to collide with objects or
other road users.
#Pay attention to objects and other road
users.
#Where necessary, stop the vehicle or
cancel the parking procedure with Active
Parking Assist.
On completion of the parking procedure, the
Active Parking Assist finished display message
appears.
#Secure the vehicle against rolling away. When
required by legal requirements or local condi-
tions: turn the wheels towards the kerb.
Driving and parking 263
%You can stop the vehicle and change the
transmission position during the parking pro-
cedure. The system then calculates a new
vehicle path. If no new vehicle path is availa-
ble, the transmission position can be changed
again, or the process can be cancelled.
Exiting a parking space with Active Parking
Assist
Requirements
RThe vehicle has been parked with Active Park-
ing Assist.
#Start the vehicle.
#Press button1.
#Select Parking Assistance 2 menu.
#If necessary, change direction of exit 3.
#To start exiting the parking space: press but-
ton 1 again.
#If necessary, change the gearbox setting.
Observe any messages displayed in the driv-
er's display and central display.
The vehicle moves out of the parking space.
The turn signal indicator is automatically switched
on when exiting a parking space begins and
switched o when it is completed. You are
responsible for selecting the turn signal indicator
in accordance with the trac conditions. If neces-
sary, select the turn signal indicator accordingly.
Aer the parking space has been exited, a warn-
ing tone and the Ø Active Parking Assist fin-
ished, take control of vehicle message prompt
you to take control of the vehicle. You have to
accelerate, brake, steer and change gear yourself
again.
If you do not react to the prompt to take control
of the vehicle, the system will brake the vehicle to
a standstill.
Pausing Active Parking Assist
You can interrupt the parking or exiting procedure
of Active Parking Assist by performing one of the
following actions, forexample:
#Depress the brake pedal.
#Open the front passenger door, a rear door,
the boot or the bonnet.
#Apply the electric parking brake or activating
the HOLD function.
#To resume the parking or exiting procedure:
gently depress the accelerator pedal.
%If the electric parking brake was applied
before Active Parking Assist was activated,
depress the accelerator pedal lightly to start
the parking or exiting procedure.
Check the area around your vehicle again before
resuming a paused parking procedure. Make sure
that persons, animals or objects are no longer in
the manoeuvring range. Also observe the system
limitations of Active Parking Assist.
264 Driving and parking
Automatic braking function of Active Parking
Assist
Persons or objects detected in the manoeuvring
range could cause the vehicle to brake sharply
and interrupt the parking or exiting procedure.
The vehicle will then be held at a standstill. If you
depress the accelerator pedal, the parking or exit-
ing procedure is resumed.
Check the area around your vehicle again before
resuming the parking or exiting procedure. Make
sure that persons, animals or objects are no lon-
ger in the manoeuvring range. Also observe the
system limitations of Active Parking Assist.
Manoeuvring assistant
Function of Drive Away Assist
Drive Away Assist can reduce the severity of an
impact when pulling away. If an obstacle is detec-
ted in the direction of travel, the vehicle's speed
is briey reduced to approx. 2 km/h. If a critical
situation is detected, the É symbol appears in
the Central display.
Drive Away Assist can be switched o or on in the
menu Manoeuvring assistance.
%You can cancel an intervention by Drive Away
Assist at any time by deactivating Parking
Assist PARKTRONIC .
&WARNING Risk of accident caused by limi-
ted detection performance of Drive Away
Assist
Drive Away Assist cannot always clearly iden-
tify objects and trac situations.
#Always pay careful attention to the trac
situation; do not rely on Drive Away
Assist alone.
#Be prepared to brake or swerve as nec-
essary, provided the trac situation per-
mits and that it is safe to take evasive
action.
Drive Away Assist is only an aid. It is not a substi-
tute for your attention to the surroundings. The
responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking
remains with you. Make sure that no persons, ani-
mals or objects etc. are in the manoeuvring
range.
A risk of collision may occur in the following situa-
tions, forexample:
RIf the accelerator and brake pedals are inter-
changed.
RIf an incorrect transmission position is
engaged.
Drive Away Assist is active under the following
conditions:
RIf Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is activated.
RIf you shi the transmission position to k or
h when the vehicle is stationary.
RIf the detected obstacle is less than approx.
1.0 m away.
RIf the manoeuvring assistance function is acti-
vated in the multimedia system.
System limits
The performance of Drive Away Assist is limited
on inclines.
When driving with a trailer, Drive Away Assist is
not available.
%Also observe the system limits of Parking
Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 257).
Driving and parking 265
Function of Cross Trac Alert
%Cross Trac Alert is only available for vehicles
with Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot
Assist.
Cross Trac Alert can warn drivers of any cross-
ing trac when reversing and manoeuvring out of
a parking space. The radar sensors in the bumper
also monitor the area adjacent to the vehicle. If a
critical situation is detected, the L symbol
appears in the Central display and the vehicle can
be braked automatically.
If the radar sensors are obstructed by vehicles or
other objects, detection is not possible.
Depending on the country, the cross trac alert
can be switched o or on in the menu Manoeu-
vring assistance (/ page 267).
Cross Trac Alert is active under the following
conditions:
Rif the vehicle is reversing at a walking pace.
Rmanoeuvring assistance is activated
(/ page 267).
%Also observe the instructions on Blind Spot
Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist
(/ page 243).
System limits
Cross Trac Alert is not available on inclines.
Cross Trac Alert is not available when driving
with a trailer.
Manoeuvring brake function
The manoeuvring brake function can prevent colli-
sions with pedestrians when the vehicle is revers-
ing at slow speeds. If the reversing camera
detects a person in the vehicle path, the vehicle
can be braked to a standstill.
The manoeuvring brake function can intervene
under the following conditions:
RThe vehicle is reversing at a speed slower than
10 km/h.
RThe camera image is shown in the central dis-
play (/ page 256).
You can activate and deactivate the manoeuvring
brake Manoeuvring assistance function in the
menu (/ page 267).
If the manoeuvring brake function is triggered, the
following symbol appears in red in the selected
view in the Camera & parkingmenu:
%If the manoeuvring brake function is not avail-
able, the same symbol appears in grey.
The manoeuvring brake function is only an aid. It
is not a substitute for your attention to the sur-
roundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring
and parking remains with you. Make sure that no
persons, animals or objects etc. are in the
manoeuvring range.
&WARNING Risk of accident caused by limi-
ted detection by the manoeuvring brake
function
The manoeuvring brake function cannot
always clearly detect people. Other obstacles
are not detected by the function.
In these cases, the function may brake unnec-
essarily or not brake at all.
266 Driving and parking
#Always pay careful attention to the trac
situation; do not rely on the manoeuvring
brake function alone.
#Be ready to brake.
System limits
Observe the system limits of the following func-
tions:
RActive Parking Assist (/ page 261)
R360° Camera (/ page 252)
RReversing camera (/ page 249)
The manoeuvring brake function is not available in
the following situations:
Ron inclines
RIf transport equipment, forexample a trailer or
bicycle rack, is attached to the trailer hitch
and the electrical connection has been cor-
rectly established.
Activating/deactivating manoeuvring assis-
tance
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5Assistance
5Parking
%This function is available on demand
(/ page 22).
#Select Manoeuvring assistance.
#Activate or deactivate the desired manoeu-
vring assistance.
Trailer hitch
Notes on trailer operation
*NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles
#Observe the notes in the Supplement.
You could otherwise fail to recognise
dangers.
*NOTE The operating permit may be invali-
dated due to the illegal installation of
trailer hitches
The installation – including retrotting – of a
non-folding or non-removable trailer hitch that
even partially conceals the license plate or the
lighting system is prohibited.
#Observe the applicable legal regulations
for the installation of trailer hitches.
&WARNING Risk of accident due to car/
trailer combination swerving
If you drive too fast in trailer operation, the
car/trailer combination may start to swerve.
This could cause you to lose control of the
car/trailer combination. The car/trailer com-
bination may even overturn.
#Under no circumstances should you try
to straighten the car/trailer combination
by increasing your speed.
#Reduce the speed and do not counter-
steer.
Driving and parking 267
#Brake if necessary.
*NOTE Damage to the engine due to over-
heating
#If you have a trailer hitch retrotted,
modications to the engine cooling sys-
tem may be necessary depending on the
vehicle type.
If you have a trailer tow hitch retrotted,
observe the fastening points on the vehicle
frame.
Retrotting a trailer hitch is permissible only if a
trailer load is specied in your vehicle documents.
If this is not the case, the vehicle is not approved
for trailer operation.
Further information can be obtained at a qualied
specialist workshop.
Observe the following notes on the tongue weight:
RDo not use a tongue weight that exceeds or
falls below the permissible tongue weight
RUse a tongue weight as close as possible to
the maximum tongue weight
Do not exceed the following values:
RPermissible towing capacity
RPermissible rear axle load of the towing vehi-
cle
RPermissible gross weight of the towing vehicle
RPermissible gross weight of the trailer
RMaximum permissible speed of the trailer
Ensure the following before starting a journey:
RThe tyre pressure on the rear axle of the tow-
ing vehicle is set for a maximum load
RThe lighting of the connected trailer is opera-
tional
RVehicles without LED headlamps or MULTI-
BEAM LED headlamps: the headlamps have
been set correctly
In the event of increased rear axle load, the car/
trailer combination must not exceed a maximum
speed of 100 km/h for reasons concerning the
operating permit. This also applies in countries in
which the permissible maximum speed for car/
trailer combinations is above 100 km/h.
Folding the ball neck out and in
&WARNING Risk of accident due to the ball
neck not being engaged
If the ball neck is not engaged, the trailer may
come loose.
#Always engage the ball neck as descri-
bed.
&WARNING Risk of injury from ball neck
swinging outwards
The ball neck may swing outwards when
unlocking or when it has not been properly
engaged.
There is a risk of injury within the ball neck's
range of movement!
#Unlock the ball neck only when its range
of movement is unobstructed.
#Always be sure the ball neck is engaged
when folding inwards.
268 Driving and parking
*NOTE Increased risk of damage to prop-
erty due to folded-out ball neck
#When the trailer is not coupled or the
bicycle rack is attached, fold in the ball
neck or, in the case of a fully electric
trailer hitch, retract the ball neck.
*NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to incor-
rect use of the trailer hitch
If a trailer hitch is used to recover the vehicle,
the vehicle or the trailer hitch itself may be
damaged in the process.
#Use the trailer hitch only for pulling a
trailer or attaching approved carrier sys-
tems (e.g. a bicycle rack).
Exception: Since vehicles with a trailer
hitch do not have a xture for a towing
eye at the rear, towing or tow-starting is
permitted.
#When towing or tow-starting with the
trailer hitch, observe the information in
the section "Fitting and removing the
towing eye."
Folding the ball neck out
#Secure the vehicle against rolling away.
#Keep the swivel range clear.
#Remove the trailer cable or adapter plug.
#Pull switch 2 until the ball neck unlocks.
The ball neck will fold out from under the rear
bumper.
Indicator lamp 1 will ash.
#Pull the ball neck in the direction of the arrow
until it engages audibly in a vertical position.
Indicator lamp 1 on the ball neck release
switch will go out.
If the ball neck is not securely locked in place,
the message Trailer coupling Check lock will
appear on the driver's display.
#Remove the cover cap from the ball head and
store it in a safe place.
Driving and parking 269
Make sure that the ball on the ball neck is clean.
Check that it is either greased or dry (grease-
free), depending on the instructions for the trailer.
Folding the ball neck in
#Pull switch 2 until the ball neck unlocks.
The ball neck will fold up under the rear
bumper.
Indicator lamp 1 will ash.
#Push the ball neck in the direction of the
arrow until it engages audibly behind the
bumper.
Indicator lamp 1 will go out and the message
on the driver display will disappear.
Observe the information about the displays on the
driver's display:
RIndicator and warning lamps (/ page 482)
RDisplay messages (/ page 412)
Coupling up/uncoupling a trailer
The trailer will be correctly detected by the vehi-
cle only if the following conditions are met:
RThe ball neck is extended and engaged in a
securely locked position.
Trailers with a 7-pin plug can be connected to the
vehicle with the following adapters:
RAdapter plug
RAdapter cable
The trailer will be correctly detected by the vehi-
cle only if the following conditions are met:
RThe trailer is connected correctly.
RThe trailer lighting system is in working order.
A correctly connected trailer inuences, among
other things, the functions of the following sys-
tems:
RESP® trailer stabilisation
RActive Lane Keeping Assist
RParking Assist PARKTRONIC
RActive Parking Assist
RBlind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist
RDrive Away Assist
RCross trac warning
RManoeuvring brake function
RReversing camera
R360° camera
Coupling up a trailer
*NOTE Damage to the starter battery due
to full discharge
Charging the trailer battery using the power
supply of the trailer can damage the starter
battery.
#Do not use the vehicle's power supply to
charge the trailer battery.
#Secure the vehicle against rolling away.
#Remove the cover cap from the ball head and
store it in a safe place.
#Position the trailer on a level surface behind
the vehicle and couple it up to the vehicle.
270 Driving and parking
#Open the socket cap.
#Insert the plug with lug 1 into groove 3 on
the socket.
#Turn bayonet coupling 2 to the right as far as
it will go.
#Let the cap engage.
#Secure the cable to the trailer with cable ties
(only if you are using an adapter cable).
#Make sure that the cable is always slack for
ease of movement during cornering.
In the following circumstances, a message may
appear on the driver's display even if the trailer
has been connected correctly:
RLEDs have been installed in the trailer lighting
system.
RThe current has fallen below the trailer lighting
system's minimum current (50 mA).
%Accessories can be connected to the perma-
nent power supply up to 180 W and to the
power supply that is switched on via the igni-
tion lock.
Uncoupling a trailer
&WARNING Risk of being crushed and
becoming trapped when uncoupling a
trailer
When uncoupling a trailer with an engaged
inertia-activated brake, your hand may
become trapped between the vehicle and the
trailer drawbar.
#Do not uncouple trailers with an engaged
overrun brake.
*NOTE Damage during uncoupling with an
engaged overrun brake
The vehicle may be damaged if you uncouple
with an engaged overrun brake.
#Do not uncouple trailers with an engaged
overrun brake.
#Secure the trailer against rolling away.
#Disconnect the electrical connection between
the vehicle and the trailer.
#Uncouple the trailer.
#Place the cover cap on the ball head.
%Trailers with LED lighting: aer uncoupling the
trailer, switch the vehicle on and then o
again.
Driving and parking 271
Bicycle rack function
&WARNING Risk of an accident if the bicy-
cle rack is used incorrectly
The bicycle rack may become detached from
the vehicle in the following cases:
Rthe permissible load capacity of the trailer
hitch is exceeded.
Rthe bicycle rack is used incorrectly.
Rthe bicycle rack is secured to the ball neck
beneath the ball head.
Observe the following for your own safety and
that of other road users:
Ralways adhere to the permissible load
capacity of the trailer hitch.
Ralways observe the permissible rear axle
load of the towing vehicle.
Ruse the bicycle rack only to transport bicy-
cles.
Ralways properly secure the bicycle rack by
attaching it to the ball head.
Ruse only bicycle racks approved by
Mercedes-Benz.
Ralways observe the bicycle rack operating
instructions.
*NOTE Damage to or breakage of the trailer
hitch due to unsuitable or improperly used
bicycle rack.
#Only use bicycle racks approved by
Mercedes-Benz properly as described
below.
*NOTE Increased risk of damage to prop-
erty due to folded-out ball neck
#When the trailer is not coupled or the
bicycle rack is attached, fold in the ball
neck or, in the case of a fully electric
trailer hitch, retract the ball neck.
*NOTE The operating permit may be invali-
dated due to the illegal installation of
trailer hitches
The installation – including retrotting – of a
non-folding or non-removable trailer hitch that
even partially conceals the license plate or the
lighting system is prohibited.
#Observe the applicable legal regulations
for the installation of trailer hitches.
272 Driving and parking
Depending on the bicycle rack's design, up to
three bicycles can be transported on the bicycle
rack.
When mounted by attaching to ball head 1, the
maximum load capacity is 75 kg.
The maximum load capacity is calculated from the
weight of the bicycle rack and the bicycle rack
load.
Observe the notes on driving with a roof load,
trailer or fully laden vehicle (/ page 160).
When using a bicycle rack, set the tyre pressure
for increased load on the rear axle of the vehicle.
Further information on the tyre pressure can be
found in the tyre pressure table (/ page 373).
Notes on loading
The larger the distance between the load's centre
of gravity and the ball head, the greater the load
on the trailer hitch.
Therefore, observe the following notes:
Rmount heavy bicycles as close to the vehicle
as possible
Ralways distribute the load on the bicycle rack
as evenly as possible across the vehicle's lon-
gitudinal axis
Mercedes-Benz recommends removing all detach-
able parts from bicycles (e.g. baskets, child seats,
rechargeable batteries) before loading them onto
the bicycle rack. This will improve the aerody-
namic resistance and centre of gravity of the bicy-
cle rack.
Always secure the bicycles to prevent them from
moving around and check them at regular inter-
vals to ensure that they are secure.
Do not use tarpaulins or other covers. The driving
characteristics and rear view may be impaired. In
addition, aerodynamic resistance and the load on
the trailer hitch will increase.
Load distribution on the bicycle rack
1Vertical distance between centre of gravity
and ball head
2Horizontal distance between centre of gravity
and ball head
3The centre of gravity is on the vehicle's centre
axis
Driving and parking 273
Observe the following information when you are
loading the bicycle rack with up to three bicycles:
Loading the bicycle rack
Total weight
of bicycle
rack and load
Max. distance
1
Max. distance
2
Up to 75 kg 420 mm 300 mm
Vehicle towing instructions
The vehicle is not suitable for the use of tow bar
systems that are used for at towing or dinghy
towing, for example. Attaching and using tow bar
systems may result in damage to the vehicle.
When you are towing a vehicle with tow bar sys-
tems, safe driving characteristics cannot be guar-
anteed for the towing vehicle or the towed vehicle.
The vehicle-trailer combination may swerve from
side to side.
Observe the following information:
RPermitted towing methods (/ page 361)
RPlug-in hybrid: permitted towing methods
(/ page 362)
RThe notes on towing the vehicle with both
axles on the ground (/ page 363)
274 Driving and parking
Notes on the driver's display
&WARNING Risk of accident if the driver
display fails
If the driver display has failed or is malfunc-
tioning, function restrictions in systems rele-
vant to safety cannot be detected.
The operating safety of your vehicle may be
impaired.
#Drive on carefully.
#Have the vehicle checked immediately at
a qualied specialist workshop.
*NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles
#Observe the notes in the Supplement.
You could otherwise fail to recognise
dangers.
If the operating safety of your vehicle is impaired,
park the vehicle immediately and safely. Contact a
qualied specialist workshop.
The driver's display shows basic information such
as speed, engine speed, fuel level, coolant tem-
perature as well as indicator and warning lamps.
Additional functions available include the follow-
ing:
RDierent menus, e.g. for assistance and navi-
gation
RStatus displays for the driving systems
RDisplay messages
RInformation on speed, Consumption and
range
RPower meter level and state of charge of the
high-voltage battery
RIndicator and warning lamps
Some menu content and settings can be custom-
ised.
Operating the driver's display
&WARNING Risk of distraction from infor-
mation systems and communications
equipment
If you operate information systems and com-
munication devices integrated in the vehicle
when driving, you could be distracted from the
trac situation. This could also cause you to
lose control of the vehicle.
#Only operate this equipment when the
trac situation permits.
#If you cannot be sure of this, stop the
vehicle whilst paying attention to road
and trac conditions and operate the
equipment with the vehicle stationary.
Observe the legal requirements for the country in
which you are currently driving when operating
the driver's display.
Driver's display 275
Scrolling on the menu bar
1Back button
2Main menu button
3Touch Control
The content on the driver's display is controlled
using the control elements on the le side of the
steering wheel. You can use Touch Control 3 to
navigate vertically and horizontally by swiping with
one nger. Conrm your selection by pressing the
Touch Control.
%To operate Touch Control 3 in the most
eective way, use the tip of your thumb if pos-
sible. You can also set the sensitivity of the
Touch Control on the central display .
#Briey press main menu button 2.
#Select a menu by swiping to the le or right
on Touch Control 3.
#To conrm: press Touch Control 3.
Driver display menus
Notes on menus on the driver's display
&WARNING Risk of distraction from infor-
mation systems and communications
equipment
If you operate information systems and com-
munication devices integrated in the vehicle
when driving, you could be distracted from the
trac situation. This could also cause you to
lose control of the vehicle.
#Only operate this equipment when the
trac situation permits.
#If you cannot be sure of this, stop the
vehicle whilst paying attention to road
and trac conditions and operate the
equipment with the vehicle stationary.
Observe the legal requirements for the country in
which you are currently driving when operating
the driver's display.
The following menus can be called up via the
menu bar on the driver's display:
RUnderstated
RSport
RClassic
RNavigation
RAssistance
RService
On some of these menus, you can choose
between dierent display content on the centre
display area.
276 Driver's display
On most of the menus, you can use Options to
congure further settings for the menu-specic
display content.
You can nd further information about the possi-
ble settings and selections on the menus in the
Digital Owner's Manual.
Calling up displays on the Sport menu
Driver's display:
4Sport
The Sport menu displays information about the
engine data, the setup and the temperature of the
vehicle.
#To call up the menu: swipe to the le or right
on the le-hand Touch Control.
1Current torque
2Temperature (transmission oil temperature,
engine oil temperature, coolant temperature)
3Current power output
4Setup (drive position, transmission position,
AMG DYNAMICS, suspension tuning, exhaust
system, ESP®)
5Engine speed
%Depending on the vehicle equipment, AMG-
specic content regarding temperature, setup
and engine data will be displayed. The set-
tings for the setup display content can be
congured either via the buttons on the multi-
function steering wheel or via the MBUX mul-
timedia system . You can also activate or
deactivate ESP® using the steering-wheel but-
ton or via the MBUX multimedia system .
Calling up displays on the Sport menu (plug-in
hybrid)
Driver's display:
4Sport
The Sport menu provides additional information
about the operating energy as well as the recuper-
ated output of the vehicle.
%When you call up the Sport menu on the
menu bar of the driver's display, the menu
colour setting will automatically be applied to
the MBUX multimedia system.
#To call up the menu: press the le-hand Touch
Control.
Driver's display 277
1Display range of recuperated power (recuper-
ation)
2Display range of the output
3Additional display range of the output
Head-up display
Function of the head-up display
The head-up display projects various content into
the driver's eld of vision, for example.
You can use the head-up display menu bar to
select various contexts, e.g.:
RMinimal
RSport
RStandard
RECO display (depending on model and equip-
ment) (/ page 165)
RSettings
RHead-up display on/o
The following image shows an example of the
head-up display. You can choose what content is
displayed (/ page 278).
System limits
Visibility is particularly inuenced by the following
conditions:
RSeat position
RImage position setting
RLight conditions
RWet road surfaces
RObjects on the display cover
RPolarisation in sunglasses
Operating the head-up display
Selecting display content of the head-up display
via the menu bar of the driver's display
#Press the ò main menu button on the le.
#To select the menu bar of the head-up dis-
play: swipe upwards on the le-hand Touch
Control.
Switching between display content on the head-
up display
#Swipe to the le or right on the le-hand
Touch Control.
A preview of the selected display content will
appear on the head-up display.
278 Driver's display
#To conrm: press the a button.
Switching back to the driver's display
#Press the G or ò button.
Setting the position and brightness
#Swipe to the le or right on the le-hand
Touch Control and select Settings on the
menu bar of the head-up display.
#Press the le-hand Touch Control.
The current position and brightness settings
will be displayed as graphics on the head-up
display as well as on the driver's display.
#To adjust the position: swipe upwards or
downwards on the le-hand Touch Control.
#To adjust the brightness: swipe to the le or
right on the le-hand Touch Control.
The settings congured for position and
brightness will be saved automatically.
#Press the G or a button to exit the set-
tings.
Switching the head-up display on/o
Driver's display:
4©
Switching on
#Swipe upwards on the le-hand Touch Con-
trol.
#Press the le-hand Touch Control a.
Switching o
#Swipe upwards on the le-hand Touch Con-
trol.
#Swipe on the le-hand Touch Control and
select Head-up display.
#Press the le-hand Touch Control a.
Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical system
%Mercedes-AMG vehicles: this function is not
available for the A45 models.
1Electric drive support
2Recuperation behaviour of the electric motor
%Due to various system limits, the values dis-
played may temporarily dier slightly from the
actual value.
Driver's display 279
Function of the power meter
1Start of the POWER display range
2End of the POWER display range
3Current state of charge of the high-voltage
battery
4Maximum recuperated energy
5Start of the display range of recuperated
energy
The power meter has the following functions:
RIn electric mode, the area 12 shows
what percentage of the electrical drive is cur-
rently being used. The combustion engine is
switched on at 100%. In boost mode, the elec-
trical power assistance of the drive is dis-
played.
RThe area 45 shows the recuperation and
charging behaviour using the combustion
engine.
%Due to various system limits, the displayed
value 4 may temporarily dier slightly from
the actual value.
Overview of status displays on the driver's dis-
play
The status displays for the driving and driving
safety systems can be found in display sections
1 to 4.
YPedestrian detection (only on assistant dis-
play)
ÇActive Parking Assist is available
(/ page 262)
ÈActive Parking Assist has recognised a
parking space (/ page 262)
éParking Assist PARKTRONIC deactivated
(/ page 260)
280 Driver's display
hCruise control (/ page 220)
ÈLimiter (/ page 220)
çActive Distance Assist DISTRONIC
(/ page 223)
ÒSpecied distance for Active Distance
Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 223)
æActive Brake Assist switched o
(/ page 237)
ÄActive Brake Assist impaired or not func-
tioning (/ page 237)
ØActive Steering Assist (/ page 230)
ðActive Lane Keeping Assist (/ page 246)
ZActive Blind Spot Assist (only on assistant
display) (/ page 245)
õPlug‑in hybrid operation activated
°Haptic accelerator pedal
(/ page 169, 166)
òSound generator inoperative (/ page 426)
èECO start/stop function (/ page 163)
ëHOLD function (/ page 216)
_Adaptive Highbeam Assist (/ page 131)
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus
(/ page 132)
ðMaximum permissible speed exceeded (for
certain countries only)
¬Active Stop-and-Go Assist
ÒSlippery road surface warning
Vehicles with Speed Limit Assist: detected
instructions and trac signs (/ page 238)
Vehicles with Trac Sign Assist: detected instruc-
tions and trac signs (/ page 240)
Driver's display 281
Overview and operation
Notes on the MBUX multimedia system
&WARNING Risk of distraction from infor-
mation systems and communications
equipment
If you operate information systems and com-
munication devices integrated in the vehicle
when driving, you could be distracted from the
trac situation. This could also cause you to
lose control of the vehicle.
#Only operate this equipment when the
trac situation permits.
#If you cannot be sure of this, stop the
vehicle whilst paying attention to road
and trac conditions and operate the
equipment with the vehicle stationary.
You must observe the legal requirements for the
country in which you are currently driving when
operating the multimedia system.
Depending on the equipment, the scope of func-
tion and product designation of your MBUX multi-
media system may dier from the description and
images in this Owner's Manual. For example,
route guidance with augmented reality is not avail-
able in all equipment variants.
Overview of the MBUX multimedia system
1Touch Control and control panel for the MBUX
multimedia system
MBUX stands for Mercedes-Benz User Experi-
ence.
• Operating Touch Control
2Media display with touch functionality
• Home screen overview
282 MBUX multimedia system
• Operating the touchscreen
3ú Fingerprint sensor
4Controller
Press and hold: switches the MBUX multime-
dia system or media display on or o
Press briey: switches the mute function
on/o
Turn: adjusts the volume
Further operating options:
RConducting a dialogue with the MBUX voice
assistant.
ROperating functions contact-free with the
MBUX Interior Assistant.
%You can nd further information about opera-
tion as well as about applications and serv-
ices in the Digital Owner's Manual.
Anti-the protection
This device is equipped with technical provisions
to protect it against the. More detailed informa-
tion about anti-the protection can be obtained at
a qualied specialist workshop.
Home screen overview
1On the home screen: displays the rst three
applications
In other displays: calls up the home screen
2Calls up user prole settings and switches
user
3Uses the global search
4Calls up the Control Centre: pull the bar down
5Calls up favourites
6Displays in the status line
7Calls up an application
8Quick-access to application
9Index points for selected display area
ACalls up the air conditioning menu
The following functions are called up in the Con-
trol Centre:
RNotications Centre
RFavourites
RVehicle quick-access
Function of the MBUX voice assistant
&WARNING Risk of distraction from infor-
mation systems and communications
equipment
If you operate information systems and com-
munication devices integrated in the vehicle
when driving, you could be distracted from the
trac situation. This could also cause you to
lose control of the vehicle.
MBUX multimedia system 283
#Only operate this equipment when the
trac situation permits.
#If you cannot be sure of this, stop the
vehicle whilst paying attention to road
and trac conditions and operate the
equipment with the vehicle stationary.
For your own safety, always observe the following
points when operating mobile communications
equipment and especially your voice control sys-
tem:
RObserve the legal requirements for the coun-
try in which you are driving.
RIf you use the voice control system in an emer-
gency your voice can change and your tele-
phone call, e.g. an emergency call, can
thereby be delayed.
RFamiliarise yourself with the voice control sys-
tem functions before starting the journey.
Using the MBUX voice assistant, vehicle functions
and various areas of the MBUX multimedia system
can be operated by voice input. The MBUX voice
assistant is operational approximately half a
minute aer switching on the vehicle and can be
operated from all seats. Further information and
examples of voice commands can be found in the
Digital Owner's Manual.
You can use the MBUX voice assistant to operate
the following functions depending on the vehicle
equipment:
RTelephone
RText message and e-mail
RNavigation
RRadio and media
RVehicle functions
ROnline functions
Full functionality of the voice control system is
only available for you with activation of online
voice control.
Conducting a dialogue
Starting a dialogue
#Say "Hey Mercedes" to activate the MBUX
voice assistant. Voice activation must be
switched on in the multimedia system.
or
#Press the £ button on the multifunction
steering wheel.
A blue line appears in the MBUX multimedia
system. The dialogue can be started.
For the dialogue with the MBUX voice assistant,
you can use complete sentences of colloquial lan-
guage as voice commands. Voice activation can
also be directly combined with a voice command,
e.g. "Hey Mercedes, how fast can I drive?"
Calling up help
#For information about the MBUX voice assis-
tant: say "Hey Mercedes, what can you do?"
#Digital Owner's Manual: "Show me the Own-
er's Manual". The full extent of the Digital
Owner's Manual is available when the vehicle
is stationary.
Operating functions (examples)
#To operate the navigation: "Search for an
Asian restaurant, but not Japanese, in South
Manhattan."
#To operate the phone: "Call my father."
284 MBUX multimedia system
#To change the system language to English
(short command): "Change language to Eng-
lish".
#To operate the radio: "Show me the list of
radio stations."
#To operate media: "Switch on random play-
back."
#To operate vehicle functions: "Switch the
seat heating to level 2."
#To operate online functions: "What's the time
in Sydney?"
#To ask a question about the vehicle: "Do I
have Blind Spot Assist?"
Information on users, suggestions and favourites
&WARNING Risk of becoming trapped dur-
ing adjustment of the driver's seat aer
calling up a driver prole
Selecting a user prole may trigger an adjust-
ment of the driver's seat to the position saved
under the user prole. You or other vehicle
occupants could be injured in the process.
#Make sure that when the position of driv-
er's seat is being adjusted using the mul-
timedia system, no people or body parts
are in the seat's range of movement.
If there is a risk of someone becoming trap-
ped, immediately stop the adjustment process
by:
#a) Pressing the warning message on the
central display.
or
#b) Pressing a position button of the
memory function or a seat adjustment
switch in the driver's door.
The adjustment process is stopped.
The driver's seat is equipped with an anti-entrap-
ment feature.
If the driver's door is open, the driver's seat will
not be set aer calling up the driver's prole.
User proles and user-specic content
Prerequisites for the vehicle owner:
RYou have a Mercedes me user account.
RYou have a Mercedes me PIN.
RYou have agreed to the terms of use.
RThe vehicle is linked to a Mercedes me user
account.
%If one of the pre-requisites listed is missing or
if no user prole has been selected, the data
described in the following section will be
saved in the vehicle as the standard setting.
Standard settings can be changed by all vehi-
cle users.
User proles save personal settings. If the vehicle
is used by several people, a person can change
their prole settings without changing the settings
of other users.
You can individualise a user prole in the vehicle
using the set-up assistant or using the settings in
your user prole. Some settings, e.g. the
Mercedes me PIN and a prole photo are made in
the Mercedes me App or in the Mercedes me Por-
tal.
User-specic content and applications with per-
sonal data are protected by dierent levels of
security. To access protected content, the
MBUX multimedia system 285
Mercedes me PIN and, depending on the vehicle
equipment, biometric sensors can be used.
%The security level is set by the multimedia sys-
tem and calculated from the combination of
all sensor inputs. Some security levels cannot
be turned o.
%When a user prole is activated, the following
personalised comfort systems, for example,
can be adjusted or their settings loaded:
RSeat
RAmbient light
ROutside mirrors
RBlinds
RClimate control settings
If the user prole is activated when driving,
the driver's seat position will not be adjusted.
Depending on the vehicle equipment you can, as
a user, save the following settings, for example:
RDriver's seat, steering wheel and mirror set-
tings
RClimate control
RAmbient lighting
RRadio (including station list)
RSuggestions and favourites
Suggestions
The vehicle can learn the habits of the driver. It
then makes suggestions regarding navigation des-
tinations, phone numbers and music preferences.
The requirements for that are the selection of a
user, your consent to the recording of data and
sucient collected data.
Favourites
Favourites oer you quick access to frequently
used applications. 100 favourites are available in
total.
Conguring users, suggestions and favourites
Requirements
RTo use the set-up assistant: the vehicle is sta-
tionary.
Multimedia system:
4© 5f 5Change user
Adding a user
#Select f Add user .
A QR code is loaded.
#Scan the displayed QR code with the
Mercedes me App or any QR code scanner on
a mobile device. If the Mercedes me App is
not yet installed on your mobile device, you
will be directed to the store of your mobile
device.
#Follow the directions in the app.
The vehicle is connected with your Mercedes
me user account. This automatically creates
your user prole in the vehicle.
If only your user prole is available, it will be
loaded automatically.
If more than one user prole is available, you
will be directed to the user selection.
When the vehicle is stationary, the set-up
assistant starts automatically aer user selec-
tion.
286 MBUX multimedia system
Protecting user-specic content and applications
If you add a new user, access protection is
already activated for the user prole. The
Mercedes me PIN and, depending on the vehicle
equipment, biometric sensors are available for
access. Biometric sensors in the vehicle must be
taught in. The authentication process then takes
all taught-in and available sensors into account.
The following user-specic content and applica-
tions are protected, for example:
RUser selection and user prole settings
RBiometric sensors
The teaching-in of biometric sensors is protec-
ted.
RSuggestions
The data and determination of the most prob-
able navigation destinations, media sources,
radio stations, contacts and messages are
protected.
RENERGIZING COACH
The recorded health data and their evaluation
are protected.
RMercedes me connect store
The purchase of services is protected.
#Switch Protect content on or o.
#Switch Access protection on or o.
%When access protection is switched o, your
user prole can be viewed from any seat and
changes can be made.
%Access protection is switched on or o on a
vehicle-specic basis.
Teaching in, editing and deleting biometric data
The biometric data models are saved in the sen-
sors in the vehicle. If recognition has been taught-
in, this sensor serves as a contributory factor for
authentication on the multimedia system.
#Select Protect content.
#Select Facial recognition, Fingerprint recogni-
tion or Voice recognition.
%If necessary, authenticate yourself on the mul-
timedia system.
Authenticating using face recognition
#Close the driver's door or fasten the driver's
seat belt.
#Look at the driver's display for about ve sec-
onds.
Your face is scanned. A message in the driv-
er's display shows whether facial recognition
was successful or not. You can unlock your
user prole and protected applications with
the facial scan.
Authenticating using ngerprints
#Place and li your nger several times on the
ngerprint sensor in the centre console
(/ page 282).
The nger is scanned. If the scanning proce-
dure is successful, a message appears on the
media display. You can unlock your user pro-
le and protected applications with your nger
print.
Authenticating using voice recognition
#Speak the sentence shown on the media dis-
play and follow the voice assistant's instruc-
tions.
If the voice recognition was successful, a mes-
sage appears on the media display. You can
unlock your user prole.
MBUX multimedia system 287
%Avoid background or disturbing noises during
voice recognition.
Deleting biometric data
#Tap on E , for example, behind Facial rec-
ognition.
#Select Yes.
Teaching in the vehicle key for prole selection
#Select Protect content.
#Select Key recognition.
#Have the key ready and follow the set-up
assistant's prompts.
The user prole is linked to the selected key. If
you open the vehicle with the key, the light,
mirror and seat settings for your user prole
are pre-activated. The key you are currently
using for unlocking is used.
The key is only stored for the driver and for
one user prole.
Selecting a user
%When you call up your driver prole, the driv-
er's seat and the steering wheel can be set.
You can cancel the setting process with the
following actions:
RTap on the Tap here to cancel. message
on the media display.
RPress one of the seat operating buttons in
the driver's door.
#Select Change user.
#Select a user.
#When requested to do so, authenticate with
the Mercedes me PIN or a taught-in biometric
characteristic.
The user prole is loaded and activated.
%If you select Continue without selecting user,
no specic settings for the user prole are
loaded.
Conguring and deleting suggestions
#Select ©.
#Select Settings.
#Select System.
#Select Suggestions.
#Select Z.
#Switch the options on or o individually.
If an option is switched on and sucient data
has been gathered, personalised suggestions
based on your user behaviour will be oered
to you on the zero layer. These are, for exam-
ple, navigation destinations visited, phone
numbers dialled as well as suggestions based
on your music preferences.
#To delete collected suggestions: select Î.
#Select Yes.
The suggestions are reset.
Adding favourites from categories
#Select ©.
#Select ß.
#Select r.
#Select W Create new favourite.
#Select the category.
#Select a favourite.
288 MBUX multimedia system
System settings
Overview of the system settings menu
In the system settings menu, you can make set-
tings in the following menus and control ele-
ments:
RDisplay:
-Display brightness
RControl elements:
-Keyboard language and handwriting recog-
nition
-Sensitivity of the Touch Control
RMBUX Voice Assistant
RMBUX Interior Assistant
RSound:
-Entertainment
-Navigation and trac announcements
-Telephone
-Voice amplication
RData protection
RConnectivity:
-Wi-Fi, Bluetooth®, NFC
RTime & date
RLanguage
RUnits for distance
RSystem PIN
RSuggestions
RSoware update
RSystem reset
Overview of soware updates
Important soware updates may be necessary for
the security of your multimedia system's data.
Install these updates, or else the security of your
multimedia system cannot be ensured.
The multimedia system displays a corresponding
message when a soware update is available.
If the Automatic online update option is active,
soware updates are downloaded automatically. If
the option is deactivated, you will be informed of
new soware updates once. The soware updates
are available for downloading for a limited period
of time.
Carrying out a soware update:
RYou can start soware updates via the com-
munication module.
RYou can start soware updates via a Wi-Fi hot-
spot.
RYou can start map updates from an external
medium.
%Online soware updates cannot be performed
via external Wi-Fi hotspots that are encrypted
via TKIP.
%If the Wi-Fi hotspot requires logging in via the
browser, once the connection is successfully
established the browser will open in order to
start the update. Follow the instructions in the
browser in order to start the download.
%To complete soware updates via the commu-
nication module, the vehicle must be connec-
ted with the Internet and a Mercedes me user
account.
%To complete soware updates via Wi-Fi, the
vehicle must be connected to an external Wi-
Fi hotspot.
MBUX multimedia system 289
A soware update consists of three steps:
RDownloading or copying of the data required
for installation
RInstallation of the downloaded soware
update
RActivation of the downloaded soware update
%It may be necessary to restart the MBUX mul-
timedia system aer completion of a soware
update.
%While some soware updates are being down-
loaded, the multimedia system cannot be
operated and the vehicle functions may be
restricted.
%Some soware updates require a safe vehicle
status for the installation to be completed.
They can only be carried out in a safely
parked vehicle with the vehicle switched o.
For soware updates requiring a safe vehicle sta-
tus: when the last installation step is reached, a
message appears on the media display aer the
vehicle is switched o. Follow the step-by-step
instructions on the media display to complete the
installation.
There are soware updates that can only be
installed when the vehicle is safely parked, there
are no more people in the vehicle and the vehicle
is locked.
Availability of the driver's and media display
During the installation of soware updates, it is
not possible to use the vehicle, media display and
driver's display. You may receive the following dis-
play message when an installation is running:
%The display message does not appear every
time a soware update is installed.
In rare cases, an error can occur during the instal-
lation. The multimedia system automatically
attempts to restore the previous version.
If it is not possible to restore the previous version,
the display message shown above appears every
time the vehicle is started.
Failure of the driver's display
If the driver's display fails or there is a malfunc-
tion, you may not recognise limitations in the
functions of systems relevant to safety or the
speed display, for example. The operating safety
of the vehicle may be impaired. Drive on carefully
and have the vehicle checked at a qualied spe-
cialist workshop immediately (/ page 431).
Further information about soware updates can
be found at https://me.secure.mercedes-
benz.com
Failure of the media display
If the media display fails or the display message
shown above is shown continuously, several sys-
tems such as the reversing camera, Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC or climate control are no longer
available. Drive on carefully and consult a special-
ist workshop as soon as possible.
290 MBUX multimedia system
Setting up a Wi-Fi hotspot
Requirements:
RThe Wi-Fi function is activated on the multime-
dia system and the communication device to
be connected.
RThe communication device to be connected
supports at least one of the types of connec-
tion described.
The connection types shown depend on the
device to be connected. The function must be
supported by the multimedia system and by
the device to be connected. The type of con-
nection established must be selected on the
multimedia system and on the device to be
connected.
%Some functions may rst need to be activated
on the communication device being connec-
ted. More detailed information can be found
in the manufacturer's operating instructions.
%The use of the vehicle data tari by external
devices is not available in all countries.
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5System
5Internet and Bluetooth
%The availability of the functions is dependent
on the country.
#Select Wi-Fi.
The controller is to the right: Wi-Fi is switched
on.
When the Wi-Fi function is switched on, you can
connect the multimedia system with external hot-
spots or make it available as a hotspot for external
devices.
When the Wi-Fi function is switched o, it is not
possible to establish a hotspot connection.
%Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can
purchase a data package directly from a
mobile phone network provider via the
Mercedes me Store. To be able to use the
data package, you conclude a separate con-
tract with a mobile phone network provider
via the Mercedes me Store, which can be ter-
minated at any time and for which there are
no costs. This contract is a prerequisite for
using the services from the previously pur-
chased package. The availability of this option
is dependent on the country. If the data pack-
age option is not available or can be upgra-
ded, you can purchase data volume directly
from the mobile phone network provider for a
fee.
%The use of the vehicle data tari by external
devices is not available in all countries.
Using the multimedia system as a Wi-Fi hotspot
#Select MBUX hotspot.
#Select one of the following connection
options.
Connecting using a QR code
Requirement: an app for scanning the QR code is
installed on the device being connected.
Alternatively: the device being connected has an
integrated QR code scanner (see manufacturer's
operating instructions).
#Scan the QR code shown.
The Wi-Fi connection is established.
MBUX multimedia system 291
Connecting using NFC
#Activate NFC on the device to be connected.
#When the NFC icon is displayed in the MBUX
hotspot menu, hold the device to be connec-
ted to the NFC interface.
#Follow the instructions on the device.
The Wi-Fi connection is established.
Connecting using a security key
#Select the vehicle from the device to be con-
nected. The vehicle is displayed with the
MBUX XXXXX network name.
#Enter the security key which is shown in the
media display on the device to be connected.
#Conrm the entry.
Generating a new security key
#Select the Generate new security key option
in the MBUX hotspot menu.
#Conrm the prompt with Yes.
A new security key is generated.
A connection will be established with the newly
created security key.
%When a new security key is generated, all
existing Wi-Fi connections are then discon-
nected. If the Wi-Fi connections are being re-
established, the new security key must be
entered.
Using a mobile communication device as a Wi-Fi
hotspot (tethering)
%This function is country-dependent.
#Select the Manage Internet access option in
the Internet and Bluetooth menu.
%The Wi-Fi function on the mobile phone and
Internet access via Wi-Fi must be activated
(see the manufacturer's operating instruc-
tions).
#Select Search for access.
#Select the network.
#Log in to the Wi-Fi network.
or
#Select the mobile phone with the ö Wi-Fi
symbol.
%With external Wi-Fi hotspots, which are
encrypted via TKIP, online soware updates
cannot be carried out via the external Wi-Fi
hotspot.
System language
Notes on the system language
This function allows you to determine the lan-
guage for the menu displays and the navigation
announcements. The selected language aects
the characters available for entry. The navigation
announcements are not available in all languages.
If a language is not available, the navigation
announcements will be in English.
Setting the language
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5System
5Language
Setting the system language
A list of the available system languages is shown.
#Select a language.
The system language is switched to the selec-
ted language.
292 MBUX multimedia system
Resetting the multimedia system (reset function)
&WARNING Risk of accident due to failure
of central display functions
While the multimedia system is reset, its func-
tions, such as the reversing camera, are not
available.
#Only reset the multimedia system when
the vehicle is stationary.
Requirements
RThe vehicle is switched on.
RSome settings can only be reset when the
vehicle is stationary.
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5System 5Reset
When resetting the system, personal data and set-
tings are deleted, for example:
RConnected devices
RIndividual user proles
RBiometric data
RVehicles with rear telephony: handset connec-
tion
%The data used and saved in the multimedia
system by the driver assistance systems is
deleted.
%Vehicles with rear telephony: The handset
must be in the cradle while the system is
reset.
#Select Reset.
A query appears asking if the system should
really be reset.
#Select Yes.
The multimedia system is reset to the factory
settings. The multimedia system is restarted
aer the system reset.
%Due to data protection, as well as the function
of individual driving systems and driving safety
systems, it is a requirement to carry out a
complete system reset before selling the vehi-
cle or transferring it to a third party, or aer
use as a hire car.
Plug-in hybrid settings
Conguring the charging settings
Multimedia system:
4© 5Hybrid 5Charging
Setting the charging program
#Select Home, Work or Standard.
Unlocking the charging cable (mode 3 or 4)
When the function is active, the charging cable is
unlocked when the maximum charge level is
reached.
#Select Home or Work.
#Activate or deactivate Unlock charging cable.
Activating or deactivating location-based charging
#Select Charging program, home or Charging
program, work.
#Activate or deactivate Select based on loca-
tion.
When the function is activated, the vehicle's cur-
rent position is saved as one of the selected
options. When the address is reached again, a
MBUX multimedia system 293
brief query appears as to whether the respective
charging program should be selected.
Setting the departure time
The set departure times are used for the pre-entry
climate control of the vehicle.
#Select Next departure time.
The following charging times can be selected:
Rindividual charging times
Ra Week profile
Setting an individual departure time
#Select Add new timeand set the time.
or
#Select ´ and adapt an existing departure
time.
Setting the repeat days
#Select Add new timeand set the time.
#Mark the relevant weekdays for which the
departure time will apply and conrm with
a.
or
#Select ´ and edit existing repeat days.
Setting the maximum charge level
#Select Maximum charge state.
#Set the desired percentage.
The high-voltage battery is charged up to the
set percentage as a maximum.
%The percentage can be set in increments of
10%.
%As soon as the full charge level is reached, a
notication is shown in the media display that
the charging process is completed and the
journey may be continued.
Calling up the energy ow display
Multimedia system:
4© 5Info
#Select Energy flow.
The energy ow in the vehicle will be dis-
played.
Information on the status of the hybrid system
and the current state of charge of the high-voltage
battery will be displayed in addition to the energy
ow.
Functions of the energy ow display
The active components of the hybrid system are
highlighted on the energy ow display. The energy
ow between the individual components is shown
in colour.
The energy ow is shown in dierent colours
depending on the operating status:
RWhite: constant energy ow
RRed: high energy ow (boost eect)
RGreen: low-emission energy ow in the case of
recuperation, electric mode and charging the
high-voltage battery
Navigation and trac
Notes on navigation
Route guidance with augmented reality
&WARNING Risk of accident and injury as a
result of distraction, incorrect depiction or
wrong interpretation of the display
The camera image of the augmented reality
display is not suitable as a guide for driving.
294 MBUX multimedia system
#Always keep an eye on the actual trac
situation.
#Avoid extended observation of the cam-
era image.
&WARNING Risk of accident and injury due
to imprecise positioning of additional
information
The additional information from the augmen-
ted reality display may be inaccurate and is
not a substitute for observing and assessing
the actual driving situation.
#Always keep an eye on the actual trac
situation when carrying out all driving
manoeuvres.
Switching navigation on
Multimedia system:
4©
#Alternatively, press the © button on the
steering wheel on the right .
The zero layer with the digital map is dis-
played.
Navigation overview
Digital map
1Navigation module (reduced view)
Route guidance active:
The navigation module shows the information
relevant to the route in the zoomed-out view,
e.g. the destination or a trac delay
£ Ends the current route guidance
MBUX multimedia system 295
Tapping opens the navigation module and dis-
plays the route overview
2Map orientation Ä and set map type
3Calls up the telephone menu
4Current vehicle position (vehicle symbol or
arrow)
5Calls up Entertainment applications
6Elevation and map scale
7Navigation window shows the next driving
manoeuvre (zoomed out view) or the route
monitor (zoomed in view)
Route guidance active: route monitor shows,
e.g. route sections, upcoming driving
manoeuvres with lane recommendations, des-
tination, trac delays, 3D images at motor-
way exits, online content
Pressing 2 several times changes the map orien-
tation in this order:
R2D and to the north
R2D and direction of travel
R3D and direction of travel
RMap with complete route
%If the map is moved, the map switches
between 3D direction of travel and 2D north
orientation.
The following map types 2 are available:
RDaytime display
RNight-time display
RSatellite map
%If you notice a problem with the digital map
you can report this under https://
mapfeedback.here.com/#/report.
Navigation module (expanded view)
Example: route guidance is active
1Enters an address or POI
2Destination and time of arrival
beneath that the current distance to the des-
tination and the chequered ag
3Alternative routes
4Searches for a parking space
5Switches trac information display on or o
6Makes settings for View, Messages & tones
and Route
296 MBUX multimedia system
Destination entry
Requirements:
RFor the online search:
-There is an Internet connection.
-Mercedes me connect is available.
-You have set up a user account in the
Mercedes me Portal.
-The vehicle is connected with the user
account and you have accepted the terms
of use.
-Further information can be found at:
https://www.mercedes.me
-The service is available and has been acti-
vated.
%If Online Search is not available, the search is
performed using the data of the digital map.
Multimedia system:
4© 5ª
Example: entering a POI or address
1Input line with current entry
2Deletes an entry
3Selects previous destinations
4Displays and selects additional destination
searches
5Adopts the search result in the input line and
continues the search
6Search result
7Deletes the last character entered
8Hides the keypad
9Switches to handwriting recognition
ASets the written language
BSwitches to digits and special characters
CSwitches to upper-case or lower-case letters
If available, selecting the p symbol starts the
MBUX voice assistant.
#Enter the destination in 1. The entries can
be made in any order.
The search results are displayed in a list.
%Online search results for POIs may contain
additional information, for example opening
times and ratings. The information is provided
by an online map service.
This online function is not available in all
countries.
%You can enter a destination as a three-word
address from what3words.
MBUX multimedia system 297
This option is not available in all countries.
#Hide the keyboard with a.
#Select the destination in the list.
The following menu shows the selected desti-
nation with the address information and a cor-
responding map section.
The menu enables the route to be calculated.
%Observe the notes on the MBUX multimedia
system (/ page 282).
Calculating a route and using settings for route
guidance
Example: detailed display
1Calls up alternative routes
2Calculates the route and starts route guid-
ance
3Selects a point of interest in the vicinity of the
destination
4Destination address
Aer selection of a destination the route is be cal-
culated.
#Select one of the options.
Calling up alternative routes
#Select Routes.
#Select an alternative route.
Starting route guidance
#Select ¥ Let's go!.
Calling up the detailed display with destination
address
#Pull the bar above 2 upwards.
Depending on the destination selection and
availability, online content, for example ratings
and weather information, is shown.
If the destination is in a dierent time zone, a
message is displayed.
#To share a destination: select Ç Share.
This option allows you to scan the displayed
QR code.
#To save a destination as a favourite: select
ß Favourite and then an option.
#To call up an Internet address: if a web
address is available, select www.
298 MBUX multimedia system
#To call the destination: if a telephone number
is available, select Call.
Searching for POIs in the vicinity of the destina-
tion shown
#Select In the vicinity.
#Search using categories, enter a search entry
or search for a personal POI .
Selecting a route type
#In the navigation module (expanded view),
select Z (/ page 295).
#Select Route.
The route is calculated as a fast route with a
short journey time. Trailer mode is available if
a trailer has been coupled with the vehicle. If
available, you can select online routes. Trac
announcements for the route are taken into
account via Dynamic route guidance r.
%Trailer mode and online routes are not availa-
ble in all countries and for all vehicles.
Calculating alternative routes
#In the navigation module (expanded view),
select Z.
#Select View.
#Activate Overview of route after start.
Alternative routes are calculated for every
route.
Selecting alternative routes
%If Overview of route after start has been
switched on and a route has been calculated,
the function is available.
#In the navigation module (expanded view),
select Other routes.
#When the alternative routes have been calcu-
lated, display the route in the navigation win-
dow by swiping to the right or le.
#Select Start.
Activating a commuter route
%A user prole has been created and Allow
destination suggestions has been activated in
the user options (/ page 286). Route guid-
ance is not active.
#In the navigation module (expanded view),
select Z.
#Select Route.
#Activate Activate commuter route.
The navigation system automatically detects
that the vehicle is on a commuter route.
For the daily commuter route, trac events on
the route are also reported when driving with-
out active route guidance.
#To select or delete a commuter route:
selectStart or ¨.
Avoiding or using route sections, e.g. motorways
or ferries
#In the navigation module (expanded view),
select Z.
#Select Route.
#Select Avoid options.
#Activate or deactivate the avoid option.
Activating route guidance with augmented reality
#In the navigation module (expanded view),
select Z.
#Select View.
#Select Augmented reality video.
MBUX multimedia system 299
#Activate or deactivate Augmented reality
video.
The camera's video image is shown on the
central display before a turning manoeuvre.
The video image includes additional informa-
tion.
Showing property information for route guidance
with augmented reality
Route guidance with augmented reality is activa-
ted.
#In the navigation module (expanded view),
select Z.
#Select View.
#Select Augmented reality video.
#Activate Street names and House numbers.
During route guidance, the activated options
are shown as additional information in the
camera image.
Using map functions
Multimedia system:
4©
Increasing map scale
#When the map is shown, tap twice quickly with
one nger on the media display.
or
#Move two ngers apart on the media display.
Decreasing map scale
#Tap with two ngers on the media display.
or
#Move two ngers together on the media dis-
play.
Moving the map
#When the map is displayed, swipe in any direc-
tion with one nger on the media display.
#To reset the map to the current vehicle posi-
tion: select \ Centre .
Selecting map orientation
#Tap repeatedly on the Ä compass symbol
on the map.
The map orientations changes in this order:
RThe 2D map view is displayed so that north
is always at the top.
RThe 2D map view is aligned to the direc-
tion of travel.
RThe 3D map view is aligned to the direc-
tion of travel.
RThe map shows the complete route.
Using services
Requirements:
RThere is an Internet connection.
RMercedes me connect is available.
RYou have set up a user account in the
Mercedes me Portal.
RThe vehicle is connected to a user account
and you have accepted the conditions of use
for the service.
300 MBUX multimedia system
Further information can be found at: https://
www.mercedes.me
RThe service is available and has been activa-
ted.
Multimedia system:
4©
Showing trac information
#In the navigation module (expanded view),
select Z (/ page 295).
#Select View.
#Traffic .
#Activate Traffic incidents and Free-flowing
traffic.
Trac incidents, for example roadworks, local
area reports (e.g. fog) and warning messages,
are shown on the route.
The trac delay is displayed for the current
route. The smallest value for the display for
trac delays is a minute.
Displaying hazard warnings
If hazard warnings are available these can be
shown as symbols on the map. The display
depends on the settings for the Traffic incidents
option.
#In the navigation module (expanded view),
select Z (/ page 295).
#Activate or deactivate Traffic incidents.
If the option is activated, all of the symbols are
shown.
If the option is deactivated, the symbols are
only shown when there is a hazard warning.
The following hazards may be shown on the
map:
RAccidents and breakdowns
RSlippery roads, fog, crosswinds and heavy
rain
RHazards reported manually
RVehicle with active hazard warning light
RRoadworks
RAdditional hazards (if available)
Displaying online map contents
#In the navigation module (expanded view),
select Z.
#Select View.
#Switch on an online service, e.g. Weather.
Current weather information is displayed on
the navigation map, e.g. temperature or cloud
cover.
The service information is not shown in all
map scales, e.g. weather symbols.
Parking service
*NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to not
observing the maximum permitted head-
room clearance
If the vehicle height is greater than the maxi-
mum permitted headroom clearance, the roof
and other parts of the vehicle may be dam-
aged.
#Observe the signposted headroom clear-
ance.
#If the vehicle height is greater than the
permitted headroom clearance, do not
enter.
#Observe the changed vehicle height with
add-on roof equipment.
MBUX multimedia system 301
*NOTE Vehicle damage due to failure to
observe local information and parking
conditions
The data is based on the information provided
by the respective service providers.
Mercedes-Benz does not guarantee the accu-
racy of the information provided in relation to
the car park or parking area.
#Always observe the local information and
conditions.
%This service is not available in all countries.
#In the navigation module (expanded view),
select Z and switch on Parking.
#Tap on j the map.
or
#In the route overview, select j Parking
spaces.
#Select the search position and search lter,
e.g. Near destination and Multi-storey car
parks.
The map shows car parks suited to the selec-
ted settings.
#Select a parking option.
The map shows the parking options in the
vicinity.
The following information is displayed (if avail-
able):
RDestination address, distance from current
vehicle position and arrival time
RInformation on the multi-storey car
park/car park
For example, opening times, parking
charges, current occupancy, maximum
parking time, maximum access height.
The maximum access height shown by the
parking service does not replace the need
for observation of the actual circumstan-
ces.
RAvailable payment options (Mercedes pay,
coins, bank notes, cards)
RDetails on parking taris
RNumber of available parking spaces
RPayment method (e.g. at parking meters)
RServices/facilities at the parking option
RTelephone number
#Calculate the route (/ page 298).
Notes on the dashcam
*NOTE Risk of legal consequences due to
violation of legal regulations and data pro-
tection provisions
You are legally responsible for operation and
use of the dashcam functions.
The legal requirements relating to operation
and use of the dashcam can vary depending
on the country in which the dashcam is oper-
ated.
This function is not permitted in all countries.
#Before using the dashcam, read up on
the content of the legal regulations, in
302 MBUX multimedia system
particular the data protection require-
ments in the respective country of use.
#Observe the legal regulations, in particu-
lar the data protection requirements.
%Observe the following notes for safe opera-
tion:
ROnly use FAT32 or exFAT formatted USB
storage media.
RUse USB-IF certied USB storage media.
The USB-IF is a non-prot society and
stands for USB Implementers Forum.
Based on the USB specication, the USB-
IF certies e.g. USB versions, correspond-
ing cables and plugs as well as methods
for supplying energy via the USB interface.
RFrequent and continuous high-speed over-
writing can damage the USB storage
media. Mercedes-Benz recommends a
high-quality external SSD drive.
The abbreviation SSD stands for solid-
state drive.
%The le size and therefore the duration of sin-
gle recording is limited by the limitations of
the USB ash drive format. So FAT32 format-
ted USB ash drives do not allow les larger
than 4 GB, for example.
When the le size is reached, the recording
stops and you receive a notication.
%The following functions are available in the
Gallery app:
RSwitching write protection on or o
RDeleting video les
Selecting a USB device for a video recording with
the dashcam
Requirements
RAt least one USB device is connected with the
multimedia system .
Multimedia system:
4© 5Apps 5Dashcam
#Select the USB symbol.
#Select the USB device.
%When USB devices contain multiple partitions,
recorded video les are not always displayed
in the recording list.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use
USB devices with one partition.
Starting or stopping video recording with the
dashcam
Requirements:
RFor recording and saving a video le: a USB
device is connected with the multimedia sys-
tem .
RThe ignition is switched on.
Multimedia system:
4© 5Apps 5Dashcam
#If several USB devices are connected with the
multimedia system, select a USB device
(/ page 303).
If no USB device is selected, a selection is
made automatically when recording starts.
MBUX multimedia system 303
#To select a recording mode: select Loop
recording or Individual recording.
Loop recording records several short video
les. When the memory is full, recording is
continued automatically. In doing so, other
les will be overwritten starting with the oldest
le.
Individual recording stops recording when the
memory limit is reached. An individual record-
ing is automatically protected against being
overwritten.
#To start: select Start recording.
The length of the recording is shown. The
Please do not remove the storage medium.
message appears. The video le is stored on
the USB device.
#To end: select End recording.
%In some countries, geo-coordinates (longitude
and latitude) are shown in the video image.
For technical reasons, the geo-coordinates
may show greater inaccuracies.
A report may appear in the following cases:
RIndividual recording: the memory is full or
there are only a few minutes recording time
available. The video recording stops or will be
stopped imminently.
Change the USB device or delete a video le.
RThe camera is not functional, the Camera
unavailable message appears.
Have the camera checked in a Mercedes-Benz
service centre.
RIf the country border indication has been
switched on .
Telephone
Telephony
Notes on telephony
&WARNING Risk of distraction from operat-
ing integrated communication equipment
while the vehicle is in motion
If you operate communication equipment inte-
grated in the vehicle when driving, you could
be distracted from the trac situation. This
could also cause you to lose control of the
vehicle.
#Only operate this equipment when the
trac situation permits.
#If you cannot be sure of this, stop the
vehicle whilst paying attention to road
and trac conditions and operate the
equipment with the vehicle stationary.
&WARNING Risk of accident from operating
mobile communication equipment while
the vehicle is in motion
Mobile communication devices distract the
driver from the trac situation. This can also
cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
#As a driver, only operate mobile commu-
nication devices when the vehicle is sta-
tionary.
#As a vehicle occupant, use mobile com-
munication devices only in the designa-
ted area, e.g. in the rear passenger com-
partment.
You must observe the legal requirements for the
country in which you are currently driving when
304 MBUX multimedia system
operating the multimedia system and mobile com-
munication equipment in the vehicle.
&WARNING Risk of injury due to objects
being stowed incorrectly
If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed
incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around
and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup
holders, open stowage spaces and mobile
phone receptacles cannot always retain all
objects within.
There is a risk of injury, particularly in the
event of sudden braking or a sudden change
in direction.
#Always stow objects so that they cannot
be thrown around in such situations.
#Always make sure that objects do not
protrude from stowage spaces, luggage
nets or stowage nets.
#Close the lockable stowage spaces
before starting a journey.
#Always stow and secure heavy, hard,
pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky
objects in the boot/load compartment.
Observe the additional information on stowing
mobile communications devices correctly:
RLoading the vehicle (/ page 114)
Bluetooth® connection:
The menu view and the available functions in the
telephone menu are in part dependent on the
Bluetooth® prole of the connected mobile
phone. If the mobile phone supports all the fol-
lowing Bluetooth® proles, the full range of fea-
tures is available:
RPBAP (Phone Book Access Prole)
-The contacts on the mobile phone are
shown automatically on the multimedia
system.
RMAP (Message Access Prole)
-The mobile phone message functions can
be used on the multimedia system.
RHFP (hands-free prole)
-Wireless telephony is available on the mul-
timedia system.
RSAP (SIM Access Prole)
-The car telephone has access to the SIM
card data and dials into the mobile phone
network via the exterior aerial.
Irrespective of this, Bluetooth® audio functionality
can by used with any mobile radio unit.
For information on the range of functions of the
mobile radio unit to be connected, see the manu-
facturer's operating instructions.
Network connection:
The following cases can lead to the call being dis-
connected while the vehicle is in motion:
RYou switch into a transmission/reception sta-
tion, in which no communication channel is
free.
RThe SIM card used is not compatible with the
network available
RA mobile phone with "Twincard" is logged into
the network with the second SIM card at the
same time
MBUX multimedia system 305
The multimedia system supports calls in HD
Voice® for improved speech quality. A require-
ment for this is that the mobile phone and the
mobile phone network provider of the person you
are calling support HD Voice®.
Depending on the quality of the connection, the
voice quality may uctuate.
Further information can be obtained from a
Mercedes-Benz service centre or at: https://
www.mercedes-benz.com/connect
Telephone menu overview
1Bluetooth® device name of the currently con-
nected mobile phone/of the mobile phone
2Bluetooth® device name of the currently con-
nected mobile phone/of the mobile phone
(two phone mode)
3Signal strength of the mobile phone network
4Battery status of the connected mobile phone
5Options
6Messages
7Calls up devices
8Numerical pad
9Starts contact search
Telephony operating modes overview
Depending on your equipment, the following tel-
ephony operating modes are available:
RA mobile phone is connected to the multime-
dia system via Bluetooth®.
RTwo mobile phones are connected with the
multimedia system via Bluetooth® (two phone
mode).
-You can use all the functions of the multi-
media system with both mobile phones.
Connecting a mobile phone
Requirements:
RBluetooth® is activated on the mobile phone
(see the manufacturer's operating instruc-
tions).
RBluetooth® is activated on the multimedia sys-
tem.
306 MBUX multimedia system
Multimedia system:
4© 5Phone 5Z 5Devices
5Devices
Searching for a mobile phone
#Select Connect new device.
Connecting a mobile phone
#Select a mobile phone.
A code is displayed in the multimedia system
and on the mobile phone.
#If both codes match, conrm the code on the
mobile phone.
Functions in the telephony menu
In the telephony menu you have the following
functions, for example:
RMaking calls, e.g.:
-R Accepting a call
-k End call
-Answering a call with a message
-i Conference
-Accepting or rejecting a waiting call
RManaging contacts, e.g.:
-Downloading mobile phone contacts
-Managing the format of a contact's name
-Deleting favourites
RReceiving and sending messages, e.g.:
-Using the read-aloud function
-Dictating a new message
Mercedes me Apps
Mercedes me calls
Making a call via the overhead control panel
%Mercedes me calls are not possible in every
country. Find out at a Mercedes-Benz service
centre if these functions are available in your
country.
1me button for service or information calls
2SOS button cover
3SOS button (emergency call system)
Making a Mercedes me call
#Press me button 1.
MBUX multimedia system 307
Making an emergency call
#To open the cover of SOS button 2 , press it
briey.
#Press and hold SOS button 3 for at least one
second.
If a Mercedes me call is active, an emergency call
can still be triggered. This has priority over all
other active calls.
Information about the Mercedes me call using
the me button
A call to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre has
been initiated via the me button in the overhead
control panel or the multimedia system
(/ page 307).
Using the voice dialogue system you access the
desired service:
RAccident and Breakdown Management
RMercedes-Benz Customer Centre for general
information about the vehicle
You can nd information on the following topics:
RActivation of Mercedes me connect
ROperating the vehicle
RNearest Mercedes-Benz service centre
ROther products and services from Mercedes-
Benz
Data is transferred during the connection to the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre (/ page 310).
Calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre
using the multimedia system
Requirements:
RAccess to a GSM network is available.
RThe contract partner's GSM network coverage
is available in the respective region.
RThe vehicle must be switched on so that vehi-
cle data can be transferred automatically.
Multimedia system:
4© 5Phone 5©
#Call Mercedes me connect.
Aer conrmation, the multimedia system
sends the required vehicle data. The data
transfer is shown in the display.
Then you can select a service and be connected
to a specialist at the Mercedes-Benz Customer
Centre.
Calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre
aer automatic accident or breakdown detection
Requirements:
RThe vehicle has detected an accident or break-
down situation.
RThe vehicle is stationary.
RThe hazard warning lights are switched on.
%This function is not available in all countries.
The vehicle can detect accident or breakdown sit-
uations under certain circumstances.
Requirements for collision detection in the con-
text of accident management:
RThe vehicle is equipped with an anti-the
alarm system (ATA) (code 551).
RThe vehicle is equipped with the interior pro-
tection (code 882).
RThe vehicle is equipped with the Anti-The
Protection Package (code P54).
308 MBUX multimedia system
RThe collision detection service with the noti-
cation has been activated on Mercedes me
connect.
If a collision is detected when the tow-away pro-
tection is primed on a locked vehicle, you will
receive a notication in the multimedia system
when you switch the vehicle on.
Find out at a Mercedes-Benz service centre if this
functions is available in your country.
In the event an accident or breakdown is detec-
ted, the emergency guide shows safety notes in
the multimedia system display. This may take a
few seconds.
%The availability of collision detection depends
on the vehicle.
Aer quitting the emergency guide display on the
multimedia system, a prompt appears asking
whether you would like to get support from the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre.
#Select Call.
RAer your agreement, or if the Mercedes
me connect service "Accident and Break-
down Management" is active, the vehicle
data is transferred automatically
(/ page 312).
RThe Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre
takes your call and organises the break-
down and accident assistance.
You may be charged for these services.
%Depending on the severity of the accident, an
automatic emergency call can be initiated.
This has priority over all other active calls
(/ page 318).
%In addition, if the Mercedes me connect
service "Telediagnostics" is active, a similar
prompt can appear aer a delay in the event
of a breakdown. If you are already in contact
with the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre or
have already received support, this prompt
can be ignored or declined.
%If you answer the prompt for support from the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre with Call
later, the message will be hidden and appear
again later.
The prompt triggered by the Mercedes me
connect service "Telediagnostics", can either
be conrmed or declined. Aer being
declined, this will not be shown again.
Arranging a service appointment via a
Mercedes me call
If you have activated the maintenance manage-
ment service, relevant vehicle data is transferred
automatically to the Mercedes-Benz Customer
Centre. You will then receive individual recom-
mendations regarding the maintenance of your
vehicle.
Regardless of whether you have consented to the
maintenance management service, the multime-
dia system reminds you aer a certain amount of
time that a service is due. A prompt appears ask-
ing if you would like to make an appointment.
#To arrange a service appointment: select Call.
Aer your agreement, the vehicle data is
transferred and the Mercedes-Benz customer
centre takes your preferred appointment date.
The information is then sent to your desired
service outlet.
This will contact you to conrm the appoint-
ment and if necessary consult about the
details.
MBUX multimedia system 309
%If you select Call later aer the service mes-
sage appears, the message is hidden and
reappears at a later time.
Giving consent to data transfer during a
Mercedes me call
Requirements
RThere is an active Mercedes me call via the
multimedia system or the me button in the
overhead control panel (/ page 307).
%The prompt to conrm data transfer does not
appear in all countries.
If the Accident and Breakdown Management serv-
ices are not activated on Mercedes me, the Do
you want to transfer your vehicle data and the
vehicle's position to the Mercedes-Benz Cus-
tomer Centre to improve the processing of your
request? message is shown.
%The exact phrase may dier depending on the
multimedia system installed.
#Select Yes.
RThe relevant vehicle data is sent automati-
cally (/ page 310).
or
#Select No and conrm.
ROnly call control data is transmitted
(/ page 310).
More information on Mercedes me: https://
www.mercedes.me
Data transferred during a Mercedes me call
If you initiate a service call using Mercedes me,
data is transferred to enable targeted advice and
an ecient service.
The following requirements must be fullled for
the transfer of the data:
RThe vehicle is switched on.
RThe required data transfer technology is sup-
ported by the mobile phone network provider.
RThe quality of the mobile connection is su-
cient.
Multi-stage transfer depends on the following fac-
tors:
RReason for the initiation of the call
RThe available mobile phone transmission tech-
nology.
RThe activated Mercedes me connect services.
RThe service selected in the voice control sys-
tem.
%A prompt for consent to the data transfer only
occurs if the corresponding Mercedes me
connect service is not activated.
%The scope of the data transmitted depends on
the vehicle model and equipment. For techni-
cal reasons, not all data is available at all
times.
Data transfer if Mercedes me connect services
are not activated
If no Mercedes me connect services are activated
and the data protection prompt has been con-
rmed the following data is transmitted:
RVehicle identication number
RTime of the call
RReason for the initiation of the call
RConrmation of the data protection prompt
RCountry indicator of the vehicle
RSet language for the multimedia system
310 MBUX multimedia system
RTelephone number of the communication plat-
form installed in the vehicle
If a call is made for a service appointment via the
service reminder, the following data is also trans-
mitted:
RCurrent mileage and maintenance data
If a call is made aer automatic accident or break-
down detection using the multimedia system, the
following data is also transmitted:
RCurrent mileage and maintenance data
RCurrent vehicle location
If Accident and Breakdown Management is called
via the voice control system and no service has
been activated, but the data protection query has
been conrmed, the following data can also be
called up from the vehicle by the Mercedes-Benz
Customer Centre:
RCurrent vehicle location
If the data protection prompt has been rejected,
the following data is transmitted to enable targe-
ted advice and an ecient service:
RReason for the initiation of the call
RRejection of the data protection prompt
RCountry indicator of the vehicle
RSet language for the multimedia system
RTelephone number of the communication plat-
form installed in the vehicle
Data transfer if Mercedes me connect services
are activated
Only if the respective service is activated will
additional incident-specic data be transmitted in
the second stage to enable an optimal service.
An overview of the data transferred is contained
in the data protection information for the
Mercedes me connect services. You can nd
these in your Mercedes me user account.
Data processing
The data transmitted within the scope of the call
is deleted from the processing system aer the
call is nished, in so far as this data is not being
used for other activated Mercedes me connect
services.
The incident-specic data is processed and stored
in the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre and, if
required to process the incident, forwarded to the
service partner authorised by the Mercedes-Benz
Customer Centre. Take note of the data protec-
tion information on the Mercedes me Internet
page https://www.mercedes.me or in the recor-
ded message immediately aer calling the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre.
%The recorded message is not available in
every country.
Mercedes me connect
Information on Mercedes me connect
%Mercedes me connect or individual Mercedes
me connect services are not available in every
country. Find out at a Mercedes-Benz service
centre if these functions are available in your
country.
Mercedes me connect consists of multiple serv-
ices.
MBUX multimedia system 311
You can use the following services via the multi-
media system and the overhead control panel, for
example:
RAccident and Breakdown Management (me
button or situation-dependent display in the
multimedia system)
RMercedes-Benz Emergency Call System (auto-
matic emergency call and SOS button)
The Mercedes me connect Accident and Break-
down Management and the Mercedes-Benz emer-
gency call centre are available to you around the
clock.
The me button and the SOS button can be found
on the vehicle's overhead control panel
(/ page 307).
You can also call the Mercedes-Benz Customer
Centre using the multimedia system
(/ page 308).
Please note that Mercedes me connect is a
Mercedes-Benz service. In emergencies, rst call
the national emergency services using the stand-
ard national emergency service telephone num-
bers. In emergencies, you can also use the
Mercedes-Benz emergency call system
(/ page 318).
Please note the Mercedes me connect terms of
use and the data protection information for
Mercedes me connect. You can nd these in your
Mercedes me user account.
Information on Mercedes me connect Accident
and Breakdown Management
%Accident and Breakdown Management is not
available in every country. Contact a
Mercedes-Benz service centre to nd out
whether this function is available in your coun-
try.
The Accident and Breakdown Management can
include the following functions:
RSupplement to the Mercedes-Benz emergency
call system (/ page 318)
If necessary, the contact person at the
Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre for-
wards the call to Mercedes me connect Acci-
dent and Breakdown Management. Forward-
ing the call is however not possible in all coun-
tries.
RBreakdown assistance by a technician on
location and/or the towing away of the vehicle
to the nearest Mercedes-Benz service centre
You may be charged for these services.
RAddition to the emergency guide aer auto-
matic accident or breakdown detection
(/ page 308)
In the event of a breakdown or accident, fur-
ther vehicle data is sent which enables optimal
support by the Mercedes-Benz Customer
Centre and the authorised service partner or
breakdown assistance.
RAddition to the Mercedes me connect service
Telediagnostics
With the Telediagnostics function, specic
wear and failure reports are recorded by the
service provider, in so far as these can be
clearly interpreted and are available through
the monitoring of components that are subject
to diagnostics.
If your vehicle detects a breakdown or threat
of a breakdown, you may be prompted via the
multimedia system to contact the Mercedes-
Benz Customer Centre for further help. This
312 MBUX multimedia system
prompt in the multimedia system only appears
when the vehicle is stationary.
%These services are subject to technical
restrictions such as the mobile phone cover-
age, mobile network quality and the ability of
the processing systems to interpret the trans-
ferred data. In some circumstances, this can
result in delays or the failure of the informa-
tion to appear in the multimedia system.
Please note that the service and breakdown call is
a Mercedes-Benz service. In emergencies, be
sure to contact the usual national emergency
number rst or use the Mercedes-Benz emer-
gency call system (/ page 316).
More information about Mercedes me connect
services can be obtained in the Mercedes me Por-
tal: https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com
Data transferred during Mercedes me connect
call services
The data transferred during a Mercedes me con-
nect call depends on:
RThe reason for initiation of the call
RThe service that is selected in the voice con-
trol system
RThe activated Mercedes me connect services
You can nd out which data is transferred when
using the services in the currently valid Mercedes
me connect terms of use and the data protection
information for Mercedes me connect. You can
nd these in your Mercedes me user account.
Overview of the Mercedes me & Apps menu
When you log in with a user account to the
Mercedes me Portal, then services and oers
from Mercedes-Benz will be available to you.
For more information consult a Mercedes-Benz
service centre or visit the Mercedes me Portal:
https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com
%Make sure you always keep the Mercedes me
Apps updated.
You can call up the menu using Apps in the multi-
media system.
In the Apps menu, the following options can be
available:
RConnecting the vehicle with the Mercedes me
user account
RDeleting a connection between a user account
Mercedes me and the vehicle
RCalling up the Mercedes me services
RCalling up apps such as In-Car Oce or the
web browser depending on availability
Overview of In-Car Oce
Using In-Car Oce, you can connect your online
services with the multimedia system.
Requirements for In-Car Oce:
RThe In-Car Oce service is activated in your
Mercedes me user account.
RYou have a Mercedes me user account.
RYou have set a Mercedes me PIN.
RYou have synchronised your Mercedes me
user account in the vehicle and via Mercedes
me.
MBUX multimedia system 313
RYou have a user account with an online
service, e.g. with Oce 365 or Gmail, and
have connected the user account with In-Car
Oce.
Alternatively you can link this user account
from the multimedia system to your Mercedes
me user account. You will be oered a QR
code that will take you to the website from
which you can make the link.
In-Car Oce functions
RDisplay pending appointments in the calendar
-Reading out calendar entries
-Calling (requirement being that a tele-
phone is connected and a telephone num-
ber is saved)
-Navigating to appointments (requirement
being that the appointment contains a nav-
igable destination)
-Deleting a calendar entry
RDisplay and selection of tasks and calls to
complete
-Reading aloud
-Calling (requirement being that a tele-
phone is connected and a telephone num-
ber is saved)
-Deleting
RMarking entry in Tasks & calls as completed
O
RManaging e-mails
-Showing or reading e-mails
-Writing, answering and forwarding e-mails
%Alternatively, you can record text contents for
your e-mail via the MBUX voice assistant or
via the dictation function.
Further information on the MBUX voice assis-
tant (/ page 283).
%The Zero Layer displays notications or
reminders from In-Car Oce, such as birth-
days or calls due .
%You can start the In-Car Oce function using
the Apps menu. Please note that certain func-
tions are only available when the vehicle is
stationary.
Web browser overview
1Previous website
2Next website
3Update
4URL
5Adds/removes bookmarks
6Options
7Settings
%Under Ä you have the following options:
RTabs
RBookmarks & history
RReading mode
314 MBUX multimedia system
RShare link
RShare content
RRequest mobile website
%Websites cannot be shown while the vehicle is
in motion.
Overview of Smartphone Integration
With Smartphone Integration, you can use certain
functions on your mobile phone via the multime-
dia system display.
Only one mobile phone at a time can be connec-
ted via Smartphone Integration to the multimedia
system. Also for use with two phone mode with
Smartphone Integration, only one additional
mobile phone can be connected using Bluetooth®
with the multimedia system.
The full range of functions for Smartphone Inte-
gration is only possible with an internet connec-
tion. The appropriate application must be down-
loaded on the mobile phone to use Smartphone
Integration. The mobile phone must be switched
on and connected to the multimedia system via
the USB port using a suitable cable.
Apps for Smartphone Integration:
RApple CarPlay® (wireless connection via Blue-
tooth® also possible)
RAndroid Auto (wireless connection via Blue-
tooth® also possible)
%For safety reasons, the rst activation of
Apple CarPlay® or Android Auto on the multi-
media system must be carried out when the
vehicle is stationary with the parking brake.
You can start Smartphone Integration using the
Devices menu.
You can end Smartphone Integration via the Devi-
ces or by disconnecting the connecting cable
between the mobile phone and multimedia sys-
tem.
%Mercedes-Benz recommends disconnecting
the connection via the device manager or the
connecting cable only when the vehicle is sta-
tionary.
Overview of transferred vehicle data
When using Smartphone Integration, certain vehi-
cle data is transferred to the mobile phone. This
enables you to get the best out of selected mobile
phone services. Vehicle data is not directly acces-
sible.
The following system information is transmitted:
RSoware release of the multimedia system
RSystem ID (anonymised)
The transfer of this data is used to optimise com-
munication between the vehicle and the mobile
phone.
To do this, and to assign several vehicles to the
mobile phone, a vehicle identier is randomly gen-
erated.
This has no connection to the vehicle identica-
tion number (VIN) and is deleted when the multi-
media system is reset (/ page 293).
The following driving status data is transmitted:
RTransmission position engaged
RDistinction between parked, standstill, rolling
and driving
RDay/night mode of the driver's display
RDrive type
MBUX multimedia system 315
The transfer of this data is used to alter how con-
tent is displayed to correspond to the driving sit-
uation.
The following position data is transmitted:
RCoordinates
RSpeed
RCompass direction
RAcceleration direction
The mobile phone uses this data to improve the
accuracy of navigation, for example, when driving
through a tunnel.
Mercedes-Benz emergency call system
Information on available emergency call systems
Two types of emergency call system are available
to you in the vehicle:
RMercedes-Benz emergency call system
R112 emergency call system (EU eCall)
The Mercedes-Benz Emergency Call System is not
available in all countries. You can nd more infor-
mation on the regional availability of the
Mercedes-Benz emergency call system at:
https://www.mercedes-benz-mobile.com/extra/
ecall/
The following applies for both emergency call sys-
tems:
RThe transfer of specic data is required for the
intended function of both emergency call sys-
tems. This will be explained in the "Data trans-
fer" section (/ page 319).
RBoth emergency call systems are included as
standard equipment in your vehicle and are
activated at the factory.
RThe use of both emergency call systems is
exempt from charges.
RBoth emergency call systems only function in
areas in which the mobile phone network pro-
viders oer mobile phone coverage.
For both systems, insucient network cover-
age from the mobile phone network providers
can result in an emergency call not being
transmitted.
316 MBUX multimedia system
Dierences between the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system and the 112 emergency call system (EU eCall)
Mercedes-Benz emergency call system 112 emergency call system (EU eCall)
RThe Mercedes-Benz emergency call system is permanently logged in to
the mobile phone network.
RAutomatic and manual Mercedes-Benz emergency calls are transmitted
to a Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre.
In the event that the emergency call centre of the Mercedes-Benz emer-
gency call system cannot be reached (e.g. due to a lack of network cov-
erage), the 112 emergency call is carried out automatically.
RIf you decide on the 112 emergency call system (EU eCall) only, then the
system only logs in to the mobile phone network aer the triggering of a
manual or automatic emergency call.
RThe 112 emergency call system (EU eCall) transmits automatic and
manual emergency calls directly to public coordination centres.
%The 112 emergency call system (EU eCall) in
your vehicle meets the delegated regulation
EU 2017/79. Proper and full functionality of
the 112 emergency call system (EU eCall)
depends on circumstances beyond the inu-
ence of Mercedes-Benz AG. This includes
mobile network coverage and the technical
infrastructure of the public reception centres
in the respective countries.
%Please observe that in the event of a repair
genuine Mercedes-Benz batteries must be
used which have been certied pursuant to
the delegated regulation EU 2017/79 (Appen-
dix I). Other manufacturers are also permitted
provided their batteries are certied accord-
ing to the delegated regulation EU 2017/79.
There is the option of deactivating the Mercedes-
Benz emergency call system and using only the
112 emergency call system (EU eCall). Contact
address for carrying out deactivation of the
Mercedes-Benz emergency call system are the
local dealers.
Mercedes-Benz recommends the activation of the
Mercedes-Benz emergency call system for the fol-
lowing reasons:
RIn emergency situations when abroad, you can
also get support in a language you speak.
RSeveral transmission technologies are used to
accelerate the transfer of the accident data
and improve reliability of the transmission.
RThe Mercedes-Benz emergency call system is
permanently logged in to the mobile phone
network, which ensures faster placement of
MBUX multimedia system 317
the emergency call and faster transfer of the
accident data.
Measures for rescue, recovery or towing away
can then be initiated in quickly.
RWith a Mercedes-Benz emergency call, the
accident data is only transferred to the public
coordination centre with the approval of the
customer.
In the event of an automatically triggered
emergency call in which there is no voice con-
tact, the accident data is transmitted immedi-
ately to the public emergency call centre.
RIf the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre is
not available, the 112 emergency call is car-
ried out automatically.
Overview of emergency call systems
Both the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system
as well as the 112 emergency call system (EU
eCall) can help to reduce the time between an
accident and the arrival of emergency services at
the site of the accident. They help locate an acci-
dent site in places that are dicult to access.
Both emergency call systems can initiate an emer-
gency call automatically (/ page 318) or man-
ually (/ page 319).
Only make emergency calls if you or others are in
need of rescue. Do not make an emergency call in
the event of a breakdown or a similar situation.
Indicators in the displays
The following messages appear on the central dis-
play or the media display of both emergency call
systems:
RSOS NOT READY: the vehicle is not switched
on or the emergency call system is malfunc-
tioning. This does not necessarily indicate
complete failure of the emergency call system.
Emergency calls can still be transmitted.
The display only refers to the vehicle and does
not take account of the availability of mobile
phone networks and the Mercedes-Benz emer-
gency call centre.
The functional readiness of the emergency call
system on the vehicle can be seen when the
SOS NOT READY display disappears once the
vehicle is switched on.
RG: the icon appears in the display during
an active emergency call.
%If there is a malfunction of the emergency call
system, the loudspeakers, microphone, airbag
or the SOS button, for example, are faulty.
You can recognise a fault in the emergency
call system by the following displays:
RA corresponding message will also appear
in the driver's display.
RThe SOS button lights up red continuously.
Triggering an automatic emergency call
Requirements:
RThe vehicle is switched on.
RThe starter battery is suciently charged.
Both the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system
as well as the 112 emergency call system (EU
eCall) automatically initiate an emergency call:
RAer activation of the restraint systems such
as airbags or seat belt tensioners aer an
accident
318 MBUX multimedia system
The emergency call has been made:
RA voice connection is established with the
emergency call centre.
RA message with accident data is transmitted
to the emergency call centre.
The SOS button in the overhead control panel
ashes until the emergency call is nished.
If no connection can be made to the public emer-
gency services, a corresponding message
appears in the display.
#Dial the emergency number 112 or the appro-
priate local emergency call number on your
mobile phone.
If an emergency call has been initiated:
RRemain in the vehicle if the road and trac
conditions permit you to do so until a voice
connection is established with the emergency
call centre.
ROn the basis of the call, the emergency call
centre decides whether it is necessary to call
rescue teams and/or the police to the acci-
dent site.
RIf no vehicle occupant answers, an ambulance
is sent to the vehicle immediately.
Triggering a manual emergency call
#To use the SOS button in the overhead con-
trol panel: press the SOS button at least one
second long (/ page 307).
or
#To use voice control: use the voice commands
of the MBUX voice assistant.
The emergency call has been made:
RA voice connection is established with an
emergency call centre.
RRemain in the vehicle if the road and trac
conditions permit you to do so until a voice
connection is established with the emergency
call centre.
ROn the basis of the call, the emergency call
centre decides whether it is necessary to call
rescue teams and the police to the accident
site.
RA message with accident data is transmitted
to the emergency call centre.
If no connection can be made to the public emer-
gency services, a corresponding message
appears in the display.
#Dial the emergency number 112 or the appro-
priate local emergency call number on your
mobile phone.
Emergency call system data transfer
For both the Mercedes-Benz emergency call sys-
tem as well as the 112 emergency call system (EU
eCall) data is transferred to the Mercedes-Benz
emergency call centre or the public emergency
services call centre.
Depending on the emergency call system
(/ page 316) activated dierent data is transmit-
ted to the appropriate emergency call centre.
MBUX multimedia system 319
Transmitted data according to activated emergency call system:
Mercedes-Benz emergency call 112 emergency call
RPosition data of the vehicle
RPosition data on the route (a few 100 m before the incident)
RDirection of travel
RVehicle identication number
RDrive type of the vehicle (e.g. petrol, diesel, CNG, LPG, electric or hydro-
gen)
RNumber of people detected in the vehicle
RWhether the emergency call was initiated manually or automatically
RTime of the accident
RLanguage setting on the multimedia system
RWhether Mercedes me connect is available or not
This is a requirement for the option of forwarding the call to the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre if necessary.
RPosition data of the vehicle
RPosition data on the route (a few 100 m before the incident)
RDirection of travel
RVehicle identication number
RDrive type of the vehicle (e.g. petrol, diesel, CNG, LPG, electric or hydro-
gen)
RNumber of people detected in the vehicle
RWhether the emergency call was initiated manually or automatically
RTime of the accident
%If only the 112 emergency call system (EU
eCall) is activated in the vehicle, the accident
data is transmitted directly to the public
emergency call centre.
320 MBUX multimedia system
For accident clarication purposes, the following
measures can be taken up to an hour aer the
emergency call has been initiated:
RThe current vehicle position can be deter-
mined.
RA voice connection to the vehicle occupants
can be established.
REmergency call data can be called up.
%For Russia: various functions, e.g. receiving
trac information, cannot be performed for
up to two hours aer sending an emergency
call.
Self diagnosis function of the emergency call sys-
tem
Your vehicle checks the functionality of the emer-
gency call system every time the vehicle is
switched on. During this time, the SOS button
lights up red continuously for ve seconds. In the
event of a system failure, you will be informed via
a text message on the driver's display and the red
SOS NOT READY indicator on the central display
or media display.
Please, make sure, that during 30 seconds aer
switching vehicle ON the red indicator SOS NOT
READY in the upper right corner of display is
switched OFF, this means the emergency call sys-
tem passed diagnostics successfully.
Starting/ending ERA-GLONASS test mode
Requirements:
RThe starter battery is suciently charged.
RThe vehicle is switched on.
RThe vehicle has been stationary for at least
one minute.
%The test mode is currently available in the fol-
lowing countries, for example:
RRussia
RBelarus
RKazakhstan
RArmenia
RKyrgyzstan
#To start the test mode: press and hold the
~ button on the multifunction steering
wheel for at least ve seconds.
The test mode is started and automatically
ends aer the language test has been per-
formed.
#To stop manual test mode: switch o the vehi-
cle.
The test mode is ended.
Information on data processing
Processing of personal data via the Mercedes-
Benz emergency call system
All processing of personal data via the Mercedes-
Benz emergency call system corresponds with the
specications in the EU Regulation 2016/679 "on
the protection of natural entities with regard to
the processing of personal data (GDPR)".
The data is solely used by the Mercedes-Benz
emergency call system for rescue and recovery in
the event of an accident.
The owner of a vehicle, that is equipped with a
Mercedes-Benz emergency call system in addition
to the 112 emergency call system (EU eCall), has
MBUX multimedia system 321
the right to use the 112 emergency call system
instead of the Mercedes-Benz emergency call sys-
tem.
Contact address for carrying out deactivation of
the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system are
the local dealers.
Processing of personal data via the 112 emer-
gency call system (EU eCall)
All processing of personal data via the 112 emer-
gency call system (EU eCall) corresponds with the
specications in the EU Regulation 2016/679 "on
the protection of natural entities with regard to
the processing of personal data (GDPR)" and is
based particularly on the necessity of upholding
the vital interests of the aected person in
accordance with Article 6, Clause 1, Letter d of
the GDPR.
The processing of this type of data is strictly limi-
ted to the purpose of operating the emergency
calls to the standard European emergency call
number 112.
Data recipient
The recipients of data that is processed using the
112 emergency call system (EU eCall) are the rel-
evant emergency call inquiry terminals that are
specied to rst receive and handle emergency
calls to the standard European emergency call
number 112 by the respective country authorities
in whose territory you are located.
Arrangements for data processing
Both emergency call systems are designed so that
the following requirements are fullled:
RThe data contained in the system memory is
not accessible outside the system prior to the
initiation of an emergency call.
RBoth emergency call systems cannot be
traced and there is no continuous tracking in
normal operation.
RThe data in the system's internal memory is
automatically and continuously deleted.
RThe location data of the vehicle is continu-
ously overwritten in the system's internal
memory, so that no more than the last three
current locations required for the normal func-
tion of the system are available.
RThe record of the activity data of both emer-
gency call systems is only kept for as long as
is required to full the purpose of handling the
emergency call, and under no circumstances
for more than 13 hours aer the time that an
emergency call is initiated.
Rights of persons aected by the data processing
The person aected by the data processing (the
vehicle owner) has the right to access the data
and if applicable can demand the correction, dele-
tion or barring of data that aects him or her and
that the processing of which does not correspond
with the GDPR regulations. Each correction, dele-
tion or barring carried out according to this regu-
lation must be shared with the third party to
which the data has been transmitted, provided
this does not prove to be infeasible and does not
incur disproportionate expenditure.
The person aected by the data processing has
the right to complain to the appropriate data pro-
tection authority should they be of the opinion
that their rights have been infringed by the pro-
cessing of their personal data.
Responsible contact point for the processing of
access rights: Konzernbeauragter für den Daten-
322 MBUX multimedia system
schutz, Mercedes-Benz AG, HPC G353, D-70546
Stuttgart, Germany
Radio & media
Overview of the symbols and functions in the media menu
Symbol Designation Function
6Play Select to start or continue playback.
8Rest Select to pause the playback.
:Repeat a track Select to repeat the current track or the active playlist.
RSelect once: the active playlist is repeated.
RSelect twice: the current track is repeated.
RSelect three times: the function is deactivated.
9Random playback Select to play back the tracks in random order.
û/üSkip forwards/back Select to skip to the next or to the previous track.
ÄAdditional options Select to show additional options.
MBUX multimedia system 323
Symbol Designation Function
5Categories Select to show or search through available categories (e.g. playback lists, albums,
artists, etc.).
ªSearch Select to search in the active menu. You can search for artists, genres or moods, for
example.
ZSettings Select to make settings.
©Home Select to return to the home screen.
jMessaging Select to call up messaging.
2Full screen Select to switch to full screen mode.
The following functions and settings are available
in the media menu:
RConnecting external data storage media with
the multimedia system (e.g. using USB or
Bluetooth®)
RPlaying back audio or video les
RStreaming online music
324 MBUX multimedia system
Overview of the symbols and functions in the radio menu
Symbol Designation Function
©Home Select to return to the home screen.
jMessaging Select to call up messaging.
û/üSkip forwards/back Select to skip to the next or to the previous station.
ZSettings Select to have further options shown.
The setting options are country-dependent.
ÄAdditional options Select to show additional options.
.Trac information service Select to switch on the trac information service.
When the trac information service is switched on, . is blue.
4Station list Select to have the station list shown.
ªSearch Select to search in the active menu. You can search for artists, genres or moods, for
example.
MBUX multimedia system 325
Additional functions of TuneIn Radio
%A relatively large volume of data can be trans-
mitted when using TuneIn Radio.
Symbol Designation Function
ZSettings The following additional settings are available in
the TuneIn Radio menu:
RSelecting stream
RLogging on to or out of the TuneIn account
ßFavourites Select during playback to save the station cur-
rently set as a favourite.
6/8Play/Pause Select to start, stop or continue playback.
4Browse Select to choose a category and then a radio sta-
tion.
Depending on the frequency band selected, dier-
ent functions are available to you.
Select the desired frequency band in the radio
menu head runner.
Calling up TuneIn Radio
Requirements
RThere is a user account at https://
www.mercedes.me.
RThe vehicle is linked to the Mercedes me user
account.
RThe TuneIn Radio service is activated in the
Mercedes me portal.
RThe data volume is available.
326 MBUX multimedia system
Depending on the country, data volume may
need to be purchased.
RA fast Internet connection for data transmis-
sion free of interference.
%Data volume can be purchased directly from
a mobile phone network provider via the
Mercedes me Portal.
%The functions and services are country-
dependent. For more information, consult a
Mercedes-Benz service centre.
Multimedia system:
4© 5Radio
#Select TuneIn Radio.
The TuneIn menu appears. The last station set
starts playing.
%The connection quality depends on the local
mobile phone reception.
Sound settings
Overview of functions in the sound menu
The setting options and functions available
depend on the sound system tted. You can nd
out which sound system is tted in your vehicle in
the Digital Owner's Manual.
Standard sound system
The following functions are available:
REqualiser
-Treble, mid-range and bass
RBalance and fader
RVolume
-Automatic adjustment
MBUX multimedia system 327
ASSYST PLUS service interval display
Function of the ASSYST PLUS service interval dis-
play
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display on the
driver's display provides information on the
remaining time or distance before the next
service due date.
You can hide this service display using the back
button G on the steering wheel.
Depending on how the vehicle is used, the
ASSYST PLUS service interval display may shorten
the service interval, e.g. in the following cases:
RMainly short-distance driving
RWhen the engine is oen le idling for long
periods
RIn the event of frequent cold start phases
RVehicles with diesel particulate lters: in the
event of frequently interrupted regeneration of
the diesel particulate lter
Mercedes-Benz recommends avoiding such oper-
ating conditions.
You can obtain information concerning the servic-
ing of your vehicle from a qualied specialist
workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.
Displaying the service due date
Driver's display:
4Service
The next service due date is displayed.
#To exit the display: press the back button
G on the steering wheel.
Bear in mind the following related topic:
ROperating the driver's display (/ page 275).
Information on regular maintenance work
*NOTE Premature wear through failure to
observe service due dates
Maintenance work which is not carried out at
the right time or incompletely can lead to
increased wear and damage to the vehicle.
#Adhere to the prescribed service inter-
vals.
#Always have the prescribed maintenance
work carried out at a qualied specialist
workshop.
Notes on special service requirements
The prescribed service interval is based on nor-
mal operation of the vehicle. Have the mainte-
nance work carried out more oen than prescri-
bed if operating conditions are dicult or the
vehicle is subject to increased stress.
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display is only
an aid. It is the responsibility of the driver of the
vehicle to have maintenance work carried out
more oen than prescribed due to actual operat-
ing conditions and/or stresses.
Examples of arduous operating conditions:
RRegular city driving with frequent intermediate
stops
RMainly short-distance driving
328 Maintenance and care
RFrequent operation in mountainous terrain or
on poor road surfaces
RWhen the engine is oen le idling for long
periods
ROperation in particularly dusty conditions
and/or if air-recirculation mode is frequently
used
In these or similar operating conditions, have the
interior air lter, air lter, engine oil and oil lter,
for example, changed more frequently. Check the
tyres more frequently if the vehicle is operated
under increased stress. Further information can
be obtained at a qualied specialist workshop.
Battery disconnection periods
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display can cal-
culate the service due date only when the battery
is connected.
#Display and note down the service due date
on the driver display before disconnecting the
battery (/ page 328).
Maintenance Management
Notes about Maintenance Management
If the Maintenance Management service is activa-
ted, relevant data is automatically transferred to
the Mercedes-Benz customer centre.
The customer centre transmits the data to the
service partner that you have entered on the
Mercedes me website at: http://
www.mercedes.me. You will then receive individ-
ual recommendations regarding the maintenance
of your vehicle.
%The calculation of the optimal transmission
time of the maintenance request to the
service partner is subject to technical limita-
tions that may cause the maintenance recom-
mendation to be perceived as too early or too
late or not to be made at all. In this case, you
can conveniently arrange a maintenance
appointment with the customer centre via the
maintenance reminder in the multimedia sys-
tem.
%Maintenance Management and the mainte-
nance reminder in the multimedia system are
not available in every country. Contact a
Mercedes-Benz service centre to nd out
whether this function is available in your coun-
try.
Data transferred when using Maintenance Man-
agement
When the service is activated, relevant data is
automatically transferred to determine the
required scope of maintenance as well as fault
detection and fault rectication.
Details on data transfer can be found in the data
protection information for the Mercedes me con-
nect services. These can be found at: https://
www.mercedes.me under "My Mercedes me
account", "Terms of use".
%Maintenance Management and the mainte-
nance reminder in the multimedia system are
not available in every country.
Telediagnostics
Notes about Telediagnostics
%This service is not available in all countries.
Maintenance and care 329
The vehicle can detect if certain wear parts need
to be replaced or if malfunctions have occurred in
vehicle systems. If the Telediagnostics service is
activated, relevant data is automatically transmit-
ted to the manufacturer. If fault conditions are
detected by the vehicle system self-diagnosis, the
system transmits recommendations for action to
the Mercedes-Benz customer centre depending
on the fault detected. The customer centre trans-
mits the data to the service partner that you have
entered on the Mercedes me website at: http://
www.mercedes.me.
For selected faults, the notication that a mal-
function has been detected may appear in the
multimedia system with a request to contact the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre. From this mes-
sage, a call can be made directly to the customer
centre for assistance.
%The transmission of a notication to the multi-
media system depends on the country, vehi-
cle model and equipment and requires a fast
data connection, over which the service pro-
vider has no inuence.
%Reliable fault detection is subject to technical
limitations. Therefore, only a limited selection
of faults can be detected and recommenda-
tions for action transmitted to the customer
centre and the service partners. Mercedes-
Benz AG is continuously working on the
expansion of this service. The fault detection
depends on the country, vehicle model and
equipment.
Data transferred when using Telediagnostics
When the service is activated, relevant data is
automatically transferred to determine the
required scope of maintenance as well as fault
detection and fault rectication.
Details on data transfer can be found in the data
protection information for the Mercedes me con-
nect services. These can be found at: https://
www.mercedes.me under "My Mercedes me
account", "Terms of use".
%The scope of the data transmitted depends on
the vehicle model and equipment. For techni-
cal reasons, not all data is available at all
times.
Engine compartment
Active bonnet (pedestrian protection)
Operation of the active bonnet (pedestrian pro-
tection)
In certain accident situations, the actuation of the
active bonnet reduces the risk of injury to pedes-
trians. The rear area of the bonnet is raised by
approximately 70 mm.
For the drive to the workshop, reset the actuated
active bonnet yourself (/ page 330).
Aer the active bonnet has been actuated, pedes-
trian protection may be limited.
Have the full functionality of the active bonnet
restored in a qualied specialist workshop.
Resetting the active bonnet
&WARNING Risk of burns from hot compo-
nent parts in the engine compartment
Certain component parts in the engine com-
partment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the
cooler and parts of the exhaust system.
330 Maintenance and care
#Allow the engine to cool down and only
touch component parts described in the
following.
#With your hand at, push down active bonnet
1 in the area around the hinges on both
sides (arrows).
In doing so, the actuator is depressurised and
you may hear a hissing sound.
The engine bonnet must engage in position.
#If the active bonnet can be raised slightly at
the rear in the area of the hinges, repeat the
step until it engages correctly.
Opening and closing the bonnet
&DANGER Risk of fatal injuries when carry-
ing out maintenance work during the
charging process
During the charging process, the high-voltage
on-board electrical system is under high volt-
age.
#Do not perform any maintenance work
during the charging process.
&WARNING Risk of accident due to driving
with the bonnet unlocked
The bonnet may open and block your view.
#Never release the bonnet when driving.
#Before every trip, ensure that the engine
bonnet is locked.
&WARNING Risk of accident and injury
when opening and closing the bonnet
The bonnet may suddenly drop into the end
position.
There is a risk of injury for anyone in the
engine bonnet's range of movement.
#Do not open or close the bonnet if there
is a person in the bonnet's range of
movement.
&WARNING Risk of burns when opening the
bonnet
If you open the bonnet in the event of an over-
heated engine or re in the engine compart-
ment, the following situations may occur:
RYou may come into contact with hot gases.
RYou may come into contact with other
escaping hot operating uids.
#Before opening the bonnet, allow the
engine to cool down.
#In the event of a re in the engine com-
partment, keep the bonnet closed and
call the re service.
Maintenance and care 331
&WARNING Risk of injury due to moving
parts
Components in the engine compartment may
continue to run or start unexpectedly even
when the drive system is switched o.
Observe the following if you must open the
bonnet:
#Switch o the vehicle.
#Never touch the danger zones surround-
ing moving components, e.g. the rotation
area of the fan.
#Remove jewellery and watches.
#Keep items of clothing and hair away
from moving parts.
&WARNING Risk of injury from touching
components under voltage
The ignition system and the fuel injection sys-
tem operate at high voltage. You could receive
an electric shock.
#Never touch ignition system or fuel injec-
tion system components when the vehi-
cle is switched on.
The live components include the following, for
example:
RIgnition coils
RFuel injectors
RElectric lines to the ignition coils and the fuel
injectors
&WARNING Risk of burns from hot compo-
nent parts in the engine compartment
Certain component parts in the engine com-
partment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the
cooler and parts of the exhaust system.
#Allow the engine to cool down and only
touch component parts described in the
following.
&WARNING Risk of injury from using the
windscreen wipers when the bonnet is
open
If the windscreen wipers start moving when
the bonnet is open, you could be trapped by
the wiper linkage.
#Always switch o the windscreen wipers
and the vehicle rst if you need to open
the bonnet.
332 Maintenance and care
Opening the bonnet
#To release the bonnet, pull on handle 1.
#Push yellow handle 2 of the bonnet catch to
the le as far as it will go (palm downwards).
Li the bonnet until it is automatically raised
by the pneumatic spring.
Closing the bonnet
#Lower the bonnet and let it drop from a height
of approximately 20 cm.
#If the bonnet can still be lied slightly, open
the bonnet again and close it with a little force
until it engages correctly.
Engine oil
Checking the engine oil level using the driver's
display
Requirements
RThe engine has been warmed up.
RThe vehicle is parked on a level surface.
RThe engine is running at idle speed.
RThe bonnet is closed.
Determining the engine oil level can take up to
30 minutes with a normal driving style and even
longer with an active driving style.
Driver's display:
4Service
The engine oil level is shown.
Maintenance and care 333
One of the following messages will appear on the
driver's display:
REngine oil level Measuring now…: the engine
oil level cannot be determined yet.
#Repeat the request aer a maximum of
30 minutes' driving.
REngine oil level OK and the bar display for
indicating the engine oil level on the driver's
display is green and is between "min" and
"max": the engine oil level is correct.
REngine oil level Top up 1,0 l and the bar dis-
play for indicating the engine oil level on the
driver's display is yellow and is below "min":
#Add 1 l of engine oil.
REngine oil level Reduce and the bar display for
indicating the engine oil level on the driver's
display is yellow and is above "max":
#Drain o any excess engine oil that has been
added. To do so, consult a qualied specialist
workshop.
RFor engine oil level, switch on vehicle
#Switch on the vehicle to check the engine oil
level.
REngine oil level System inoperative: The oil
level sensor is defective or not connected.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
REngine oil level System currently inoperative
#Close the bonnet.
Topping up engine oil
&WARNING Risk of burns from hot compo-
nent parts in the engine compartment
Certain component parts in the engine com-
partment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the
cooler and parts of the exhaust system.
#Allow the engine to cool down and only
touch component parts described in the
following.
&WARNING Risk of re and injury from
engine oil
If engine oil comes into contact with hot com-
ponent parts in the engine compartment, it
may ignite.
#Make sure that no engine oil is spilled
next to the ller opening.
#Allow the engine to cool o and thor-
oughly clean the engine oil from compo-
nent parts before starting the vehicle.
*NOTE Engine damage caused by an incor-
rect oil lter, incorrect oil or additives
#Do not use engine oils or oil lters which
do not correspond to the specications
explicitly prescribed for the service inter-
vals.
#Follow the instructions on the service
interval display for changing the engine
oil and observe the prescribed change
intervals.
#Do not use additives.
334 Maintenance and care
*NOTE Damage caused by topping up too
much engine oil
Too much engine oil can damage the engine or
the catalytic converter.
#Have excess engine oil removed at a
qualied specialist workshop.
%Depending on driving style, the vehicle con-
sumes up to 0.8 litres of oil per 1000 km. The
oil consumption may also be higher than this
when the vehicle is new or if you frequently
drive at high engine speeds.
#Turn cap 1 anti-clockwise and remove it.
#Top up the engine oil.
#Replace cap 1 and turn it clockwise until it
engages.
#Check the oil level again (/ page 333).
Checking the coolant level
&WARNING Risk of scalding from hot cool-
ant
If you open the cap, you could be scalded.
#Let the motor cool down before opening
the cap.
#When opening the cap, wear protective
gloves and safety glasses.
#Open the cap slowly to release pressure.
&WARNING Risk of burns from hot compo-
nent parts in the engine compartment
Certain component parts in the engine com-
partment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the
cooler and parts of the exhaust system.
#Allow the engine to cool down and only
touch component parts described in the
following.
Maintenance and care 335
#Park the vehicle on a level surface.
#Check the coolant temperature display on the
driver's display.
The coolant temperature must be below 40°C.
#Slowly turn cap 1 anti-clockwise to release
overpressure.
#Continue turning cap 1 anti-clockwise and
remove it.
The coolant level is correct in the following cases:
RIf the engine is cold, the coolant is up to
marker bar 2.
RIf the engine is warm, the coolant is up to
1.5 cm over marker bar 2.
#If necessary, rell with coolant that has been
approved for Mercedes-Benz.
%Further information on coolant (/ page 405).
Topping up the windscreen washer system
&WARNING Risk of burns from hot compo-
nent parts in the engine compartment
Certain component parts in the engine com-
partment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the
cooler and parts of the exhaust system.
#Allow the engine to cool down and only
touch component parts described in the
following.
&WARNING ‑ Risk of re and injury due to
windscreen washer concentrate
Windscreen washer concentrate is highly am-
mable. It could ignite if it comes into contact
with hot engine component parts or the
exhaust system.
#Make sure that no windscreen washer
concentrate spills out next to the ller
opening.
336 Maintenance and care
#Remove cap 1 by the tab.
#Top up the washer uid.
%Further information about the windscreen
washer uid (/ page 406)
Keeping the air/water duct free
#Keep the area between the bonnet and the
windscreen free of deposits, e.g. ice, snow or
leaves.
Cleaning and care
Information on washing the vehicle in a car wash
&WARNING Risk of an accident due to
reduced braking power aer washing the
vehicle
Braking eciency is reduced aer washing the
vehicle.
#Aer the vehicle has been washed, brake
carefully while paying attention to the
trac conditions until braking power has
been fully restored.
*NOTE Damage from automatic braking
If one of the following functions is activated,
the vehicle will brake automatically in certain
situations:
RActive Brake Assist
RActive Distance Assist DISTRONIC
RHOLD function
RActive Parking Assist
To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate
these systems in the following or similar situa-
tions:
#When towing.
#In a car wash.
*NOTE Damage due to unsuitable car wash
#Before driving into a car wash make sure
that the car wash is suitable for the vehi-
cle dimensions.
Maintenance and care 337
#Ensure there is sucient ground clear-
ance between the underbody and the
guide rails of the car wash.
#Ensure that the clearance width of the
car wash, in particular the width of the
guide rails, is sucient.
To avoid damage to your vehicle when using a car
wash, ensure the following beforehand:
RActive Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deactiva-
ted.
RThe HOLD function is switched o.
RThe 360° camera or the reversing camera is
switched o.
RThe side windows and sliding sunroof are com-
pletely closed.
RThe blower for the ventilation and heating is
switched o.
RThe windscreen wiper switch is in position g.
RThe key is at a minimum distance of 3 m away
from the vehicle. Otherwise, the boot lid could
open unintentionally.
RFor car washes with a conveyor system:
-Neutral i is engaged.
-For vehicles with automatic transmission:
If you leave the vehicle while it is being
washed, make sure the key is located in
the vehicle. Park position j will other-
wise be engaged automatically.
%If, aer the car wash, you remove the wax
from the windscreen and wiper rubbers, this
will prevent smearing and reduce wiper noise.
Automatic car wash mode
In car wash mode, the vehicle is prepared for driv-
ing into an automatic car wash. Car wash mode
can be activated at a speed of up to 20 km/h
(/ page 339).
The following settings are adjusted when car wash
mode is activated:
RThe outside mirrors will be folded in.
RTo prevent the windscreen washer system
from starting up automatically, the rain sensor
will be deactivated.
RThe rear window wiper will be deactivated.
RThe windows and the sliding sunroof will be
closed, if necessary.
RThe air conditioning system will be set to air-
recirculation mode.
RParking Assist PARKTRONIC will be deactiva-
ted.
RVehicles with 360° camera: The front image
will be activated aer approximately eight sec-
onds.
If one of the settings cannot be selected, this will
be shown by the % symbol next to the respec-
tive setting.
Above a speed of 20 km/h, car wash mode will
be deactivated automatically.
The following settings will be reset when car wash
mode is deactivated:
RThe outside mirrors will be folded out.
RThe rain sensor will be activated.
RThe rear window wiper will be activated.
RThe air conditioning system will be set to fresh
air mode.
RParking Assist PARKTRONIC will be reset to
the previously selected setting.
338 Maintenance and care
RThe windows and the sliding sunroof will
remain closed.
RVehicles with 360° camera: The front image
will be deactivated at speeds above 18 km/h.
Activating/deactivating car wash mode
Requirements
RThe vehicle is stationary.
RThe vehicle is switched on.
Multimedia system:
4© 5Settings 5Vehicle 5Driving
Activating car wash mode
#Select Car wash mode.
#Select Activate.
If one of the settings cannot be selected, this is
shown by a % next to the respective setting.
%For an overview of the settings made when
activating car wash mode (/ page 337).
Deactivating car wash mode
#Select Switch off.
The settings for car wash mode are reset.
%Car wash mode is automatically deactivated
as soon as a speed of 20 km/h is exceeded.
Information on using a high-pressure cleaner
&WARNING Risk of an accident when using
high-pressure cleaners with round-spray
nozzles
The water jet can cause externally invisible
damage.
Components damaged in this way may unex-
pectedly fail.
#Do not use a high-pressure cleaner with
round-spray nozzles.
#Have damaged tyres or chassis parts
replaced immediately.
To avoid damage to your vehicle, observe the fol-
lowing when using a high-pressure cleaner:
RThe key is at a minimum distance of 3 m away
from the vehicle. Otherwise, the boot lid could
open unintentionally.
RMaintain a distance of at least 30 cm to the
vehicle.
RVehicles with decorative lms: Parts of your
vehicle are covered with a decorative lm.
Maintain a distance of at least 70 cm between
the lm-covered parts of the vehicle and the
nozzle of the high-pressure cleaner. Move the
high-pressure cleaner nozzle around whilst
cleaning. The water temperature of the high-
pressure cleaner must not exceed 60°C.
RObserve the information on the correct dis-
tance in the equipment manufacturer's oper-
ating instructions.
RDo not direct the nozzle of the high-pressure
cleaner directly at sensitive parts, e.g. tyres,
gaps, electrical components, batteries, illumi-
nants or louvres.
Maintenance and care 339
Washing the vehicle by hand
*NOTE Engine damage due to water ingress
#Take care not to point the water jet
directly towards the air inlet grille below
the bonnet.
Observe the relevant legal requirements (e.g. in
some countries, washing by hand is permitted
only in specially designated wash bays).
#Use a mild cleaning agent (e.g. car shampoo).
#Wash the vehicle with lukewarm water using a
so car sponge. When doing so, do not
expose the vehicle to direct sunlight.
#Carefully hose the vehicle o with water and
dry using a chamois.
%Observe the notes on the care of car parts
(/ page 341).
Notes on paintwork/matt nish paintwork care
To avoid damaging the paintwork and interfering
with the driving assistance systems, please
observe the following notes:
Paint
RInsect remains: Soak with insect remover and
rinse o the treated areas aerwards.
RBird droppings: Soak with water and rinse o
aerwards.
RTree resin, oils, fuels and greases: remove by
rubbing gently with a cloth soaked in petro-
leum ether or lighter uid.
RCoolant and brake uid: remove with a damp
cloth and clean water.
RTar stains: use tar remover.
RWax: use silicone remover.
RDo not attach stickers, lms or similar materi-
als. Only have lm attached to the bumper at
a qualied specialist workshop.
RRemove dirt immediately, where possible.
Matt nish
ROnly use care products approved for
Mercedes-Benz.
RDo not attach stickers, lms or similar materi-
als. Only have lm attached to the bumper at
a qualied specialist workshop.
RDo not polish the vehicle and light-alloy
wheels.
ROnly use car washes that correspond to the
latest engineering standards.
RDo not use car wash programmes with a nal
hot wax treatment.
RDo not use paint cleaners, bung or polishing
products, gloss preservers, e.g. wax.
In the event of paintwork damage:
RAlways have paintwork repairs carried out at a
qualied specialist workshop.
RMake sure the radar sensors function
(/ page 211).
Notes on cleaning decorative lms
Observe the "Notes on paintwork/matt nish
paintwork care" (/ page 340). They also apply to
matt decorative lms.
Observe the notes on cleaning decorative lms to
avoid damage.
340 Maintenance and care
Cleaning
RFor cleaning, use plenty of water and a mild
cleaning agent without additives or abrasive
substances (e.g. a car shampoo approved for
Mercedes-Benz).
RRemove dirt as soon as possible. Avoid rub-
bing too hard in order not to damage the dec-
orative lm irreparably.
RIf there is dirt on the nish or if the decorative
lm is dull: use the paint cleaner recommen-
ded and approved for Mercedes-Benz.
RInsect remains: soak with insect remover and
rinse o the treated areas aerwards.
RBird droppings: soak with water and rinse o
aerwards.
RTo prevent water stains, dry a lm-wrapped
vehicle with a so, absorbent cloth aer every
car wash.
Avoiding damage to the decorative lm
RThe service life and colouring of decorative
lms are impaired by:
-Sunlight
-Temperature (e.g. hot air blower)
-Weather conditions
-Stone chippings and dirt
-Chemical cleaning agents
-Oily products
RDo not use polish on matt decorative lm. Pol-
ishing will have the eect of shining the lm-
wrapped surface.
RDo not treat matt or structured decorative
lms with wax. Permanent stains may occur.
Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas aected by
corrosion and damage caused by incorrect care
cannot always be completely repaired. In this
case, contact a qualied specialist workshop.
You can obtain more information on care and
cleaning agents from the manufacturer.
In the case of lm-wrapped surfaces, visual dier-
ences may occur between the surfaces that were
not protected by a decorative lm aer a decora-
tive lm has been removed.
%Have work or repairs to decorative lms car-
ried out at a qualied specialist workshop
(e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre).
Notes on care of car parts
&WARNING Risk of entrapment if the wind-
screen wipers are switched on while the
windscreen is being cleaned
If the windscreen wipers are set in motion
while you are cleaning the windscreen or
wiper blades, you can be trapped by the wiper
arm.
#Always switch o the windscreen wipers
and the vehicle before cleaning the wind-
screen or wiper blades.
To avoid damage to the vehicle, observe the notes
on cleaning and care of the following car parts:
Wheels and rims
RUse water and acid-free alloy wheel cleaners.
RDo not use acidic alloy wheel cleaners to
remove brake dust. This could damage wheel
bolts and brake components.
RTo avoid corrosion of the brake discs and
pads, drive the vehicle for a few minutes aer
cleaning before parking it. The brake discs and
pads will warm up and dry out.
Maintenance and care 341
Windows
*NOTE Damage to electronic components
due to excess uids
When cleaning the windows from the inside,
uids such as cleaning agents or water may
run down and get behind trim parts of the
vehicle interior and cause damage to elec-
tronic components.
#Use cleaning agents as sparingly as pos-
sible.
#Immediately absorb any excess uids.
RClean the windows inside and outside with a
damp cloth and with a cleaning agent recom-
mended for Mercedes-Benz.
RDo not use dry cloths or abrasive or solvent-
based cleaning agents to clean the insides of
windows.
%Aer changing the wiper blades or treating
the vehicle with wax, clean the windscreen
thoroughly with cleaning agents recommen-
ded for Mercedes-Benz. Failure to observe the
application instructions may result in damage,
smear marks or dazzling spots.
%Remove external fogging or dirt on the wind-
screen in front of the multifunction camera.
Otherwise, driving systems and driving safety
systems may be impaired or unavailable
(/ page 211).
Wiper blades
RMove the wiper arms into the replacement
position (/ page 138).
RWith the wiper arms folded out, clean the
wiper blades with a damp cloth.
%Make sure that the wiper blades are coated.
The coating may leave residue on a cloth. Do
not rub the wiper blades excessively or clean
them too oen.
Exterior lighting
RClean the lenses with a wet sponge and mild
cleaning agent (e.g. car shampoo).
RUse only cleaning agents or cleaning cloths
that are suitable for plastic lenses.
Vehicle socket (high-voltage battery)
RUse clean water and a so cloth to clean the
vehicle socket.
RDo not use high-pressure cleaners or cleaning
agents such as soap.
Sensors
RClean the sensors in the front and rear bump-
ers with a so cloth and car shampoo
(/ page 211).
RWhen using a high-pressure cleaner, maintain
a minimum distance of 30 cm.
Reversing camera and 360° camera
ROpen the camera cover with the multimedia
system (/ page 257).
RUse clean water and a so cloth to clean the
camera lens.
RDo not use a high-pressure cleaner.
Trailer hitch
RObserve the notes on care in the trailer hitch
manufacturer's operator manual.
RDo not clean the ball neck with a high-pres-
sure cleaner or solvent.
342 Maintenance and care
RRemove traces of rust on the ball (e.g. using a
wire brush).
RRemove dirt with a lint-free cloth.
RAer cleaning, lightly oil or grease the ball
head.
%Before using trailers with anti-torsional cou-
pling, observe the manufacturer's operator
manual.
Notes on care of the interior
&WARNING Risk of injury from plastic parts
breaking o aer the use of solvent-based
care products
Care and cleaning products containing sol-
vents can cause surfaces in the cockpit to
become porous. When the airbags are
deployed, plastic parts may break away.
#Do not use any care or cleaning products
containing solvents to clean the cockpit.
&WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injuries
from bleached seat belts
Bleaching or dyeing seat belts can severely
weaken them.
This can, for example, cause seat belts to tear
or fail in an accident.
#Never bleach or dye seat belts.
To avoid damage to the vehicle, observe the fol-
lowing notes on cleaning and care:
Seat belts
RClean with lukewarm soapy water.
RDo not use chemical cleaning agents.
RDo not dry by heating them to over 80°C or
exposing them to direct sunlight.
Display
RSwitch o the display and let it cool down.
RClean the surface carefully with a microbre
cloth and a suitable display care product (TFT-
LCD).
RDo not use any other agents.
Head-up display
RClean with a so, non-static, lint-free cloth.
RDo not use cleaning agents.
Plastic trim
RClean with a damp microbre cloth.
RFor heavy soiling: use a cleaning agent recom-
mended for Mercedes-Benz.
RDo not attach stickers, lms or similar materi-
als.
RDo not allow cosmetics, insect repellent or
sun cream to come into contact with the plas-
tic trim.
Real wood and trim elements
RClean with a microbre cloth.
RBlack piano-lacquer look: clean with a damp
cloth and soapy water.
RFor heavy soiling: use a cleaning agent recom-
mended for Mercedes-Benz.
RDo not use solvent-based cleaning agents, pol-
ishes or waxes.
Roof lining
RClean with a brush or dry shampoo.
Maintenance and care 343
Carpet
RUse a carpet and textile cleaning agent recom-
mended for Mercedes-Benz.
Steering wheel made of genuine leather or DINA-
MICA
*NOTE Damage caused by wrong cleaners
#Do not use solvent-based cleaning
agents such as tar remover or wheel
cleaner; neither should you use polishes
or waxes. Otherwise you may damage
the nish.
RClean with a damp cloth and 1% soapy water
solution and then wipe with a dry cloth.
RFor heavy soiling: use a cleaning agent recom-
mended for Mercedes-Benz.
RLeather care: use a leather care agent that
has been recommended for Mercedes-Benz.
RDo not allow the leather to become too damp.
RDo not use a microbre cloth.
%Leather is a natural product. It exhibits natural
surface properties such as dierences in
structure, marks caused by growth and injury
or subtle colour dierences. These surface
properties are characteristics of leather and
not material faults. Leather is also subject to
a natural ageing process during which the sur-
face properties change.
Genuine leather seat covers
RVacuum up dirt such as crumbs or dust and
then clean the seat covers with a damp cotton
cloth and wipe down with a dry cloth. Regu-
larly clean the seat covers.
RFor heavy soiling: use a leather care agent rec-
ommended for Mercedes-Benz aercare.
RLeather care: use a leather care agent that
has been recommended for Mercedes-Benz.
RDo not use a microbre cloth.
RDo not allow the leather to become too damp.
RDo not use oil-based cleaning and care prod-
ucts.
%Leather is a natural product. It exhibits natural
surface properties such as dierences in
structure, marks caused by growth and injury
or subtle colour dierences. These surface
properties are characteristics of leather and
not material faults. Leather is also subject to
a natural ageing process during which the sur-
face properties change.
Waves or wrinkling in the seat cover may
occur due to the stress on the seat; this is
caused by the natural leather material.
Regular cleaning and care of the leather
reduces soiling, wear marks and ageing dam-
age and thus signicantly extends its life
span. Clothing that can leave stains (e.g.
jeans) may discolour the leather.
DINAMICA seat covers
RVacuum up dirt such as crumbs or dust and
then use a damp cloth to clean.
RDo not use a microbre cloth.
Imitation leather seat covers
RVacuum up dirt such as crumbs or dust and
then use a damp cotton cloth and a 1% soap
solution to clean the entire seat cover. Do not
spot clean.
RUse cleaning and care products recommen-
ded for Mercedes-Benz.
RDo not use a microbre cloth.
344 Maintenance and care
RDo not use oil-based cleaning and care prod-
ucts.
Fabric seat covers
RVacuum up dirt such as crumbs or dust and
then use a damp microbre cloth and a 1%
soap solution to clean the entire seat cover.
Do not spot clean.
RUse cleaning and care products recommen-
ded for Mercedes-Benz.
RDo not use oil-based cleaning and care prod-
ucts.
Maintenance and care 345
Emergency
Removing the safety vest
The safety vest is located in the door compart-
ment of the driver's door when delivered.
#Pull out the safety vest bag by the loop.
#Open the safety vest bag and pull out the
safety vest.
%There are also safety vest compartments in
the door shelves of the front passenger door
and the rear doors in which safety vests can
be stored.
1Maximum number of washes
2Maximum wash temperature
3Do not bleach
4Do not iron
5Do not tumble dry
6Do not dry clean
7Class 2 safety vest
The requirements dened by the legal standard
are only fullled if the safety vest is the correct
size and is fully closed.
Replace the safety vest in the following cases:
RThe reective strips are damaged or dirty
RThe maximum permissible number of washes
is exceeded
RThe uorescence property decreases, e.g. due
to permanent exposure to sunlight.
Dispose of the safety vest in an environmentally
friendly manner:
RPlease contact your local waste disposal com-
pany.
Warning triangle
Removing the warning triangle
#Push both sides of warning triangle holder 1
in the direction of the arrow and open it.
#Remove warning triangle 2.
346 Breakdown assistance
Setting up the warning triangle
#Fold side reectors 1 upwards to form a tri-
angle and attach at the top using upper press-
stud 2.
#Fold legs 3 down and out to the side.
First-aid kit (so sided) overview Removing the re extinguisher
&WARNING Risk of accident due to an
incorrectly secured re extinguisher in the
driver's footwell
A re extinguisher may impede pedal travel or
block a depressed pedal.
This jeopardises the operating and road safety
of the vehicle.
The re extinguisher can be ung around and
injure the driver or other vehicle occupants.
#Always store and secure the re extin-
guisher in the bracket.
#Do not remove the re extinguisher while
driving.
Breakdown assistance 347
#Le-hand drive vehicle: pull tab 1 upwards.
#Right-hand drive vehicle: pull tab 1 down-
wards.
#Remove re extinguisher 2.
Flat tyre
Notes on at tyres
&WARNING Risk of accident due to a at
tyre
A at tyre severely aects the driving charac-
teristics as well as the steering and braking of
the vehicle.
Tyres without run-at characteristics:
#Do not drive with a at tyre.
#Change the at tyre immediately with an
emergency spare wheel or spare wheel.
Alternatively, consult a qualied special-
ist workshop.
Tyres with run-at characteristics:
#Observe the information and warning
notes on MOExtended tyres (run-at
tyres).
In the event of a at tyre, the following options are
available depending on your vehicle's equipment:
RVehicles with MOExtended tyres: it is possible
to continue the journey for a short period of
time. Make sure you observe the notes on
MOExtended tyres (run-at tyres)
(/ page 348).
RVehicles with a TIREFIT kit: you can seal the
tyre so that it is possible to continue the jour-
ney for a short period of time. To do this, use
the TIREFIT kit (/ page 350).
RVehicles with Mercedes me connect: you can
make a call for breakdown assistance via the
overhead control panel in the case of a break-
down (/ page 307).
RAll vehicles: change the wheel (/ page 381).
Notes on MOExtended tyres (run-at tyres)
&WARNING Risk of accident when driving in
limp-home mode
Driving in emergency mode impairs the han-
dling characteristics of the vehicle.
#Do not exceed the permissible maximum
speed of the MOExtended tyres.
#Avoid any abrupt steering and driving
manoeuvres as well as driving over
obstacles (kerbs, pot holes, o-road).
This applies, in particular, to a loaded
vehicle.
#Stop driving in the emergency mode if
you notice:
Rbanging noise
348 Breakdown assistance
Rvehicle vibration
Rsmoke which smells like rubber
Rcontinuous ESP® intervention
Rcracks in the tyre sidewalls
#Aer driving in emergency mode, have
the rims checked by a qualied specialist
workshop with regard to their further
use.
#The defective tyre must be replaced in
every case.
With MOExtended tyres (run-at tyres), you can
continue to drive your vehicle even if there is a
total loss of pressure in one or more tyres. How-
ever, the tyre aected must not show any clearly
visible damage.
You can recognise MOExtended tyres by the
MOExtended marking which appears on the side
wall of the tyre.
Vehicles with tyre pressure loss warning system:
MOExtended tyres may only be used in conjunc-
tion with an activated tyre pressure loss warning
system.
Vehicles with tyre pressure monitoring system:
MOExtended tyres may only be used in conjunc-
tion with an activated tyre pressure monitoring
system.
If a pressure loss warning message appears in the
driver's display, proceed as follows:
RCheck the tyre for damage.
RIf driving on, observe the following notes.
Driving distance possible in emergency mode
aer the pressure loss warning:
Load condition Driving distance possi-
ble in emergency mode
Partially laden 80 km
Fully laden 30 km
The driving distance possible in emergency mode
may vary depending on the driving style. Observe
the maximum permissible speed of 80 km/h.
If a tyre has gone at and cannot be replaced with
an MOExtended tyre, you can use a standard tyre
as a temporary measure.
TIREFIT kit storage location
The TIREFIT kit is located under the boot oor.
1Tyre sealant bottle
2Tyre ination compressor
Depending on the model, the TIREFIT kit may also
be located in other places under the boot oor.
%You can nd information on the power cate-
gory (LK) and/or electrical data on the back
of the tyre ination compressor:
RLK2 – 12 V/15 A, 180 W, 0.8 kg
Breakdown assistance 349
At a distance of approximately 1 m to the tyre
ination compressor and approximately 1.6 m
above the ground, the following sound pres-
sure levels apply:
REmissions sound pressure level
LPA 83 dB (A)
RSound power level LWA 91 dB (A)
The tyre ination compressor is maintenance-
free. If there is a malfunction, please contact
a qualied specialist workshop.
Storage location of the TIREFIT kit (plug-in hybrid)
The TIREFIT kit is located under the boot oor.
1Tyre sealant bottle
2Tyre ination compressor
%You can nd information on the power cate-
gory (LK) and/or electrical data on the back
of the tyre ination compressor:
RLK2 – 12 V/15 A, 180 W, 0.8 kg
At a distance of approximately 1 m to the tyre
ination compressor and approximately 1.6 m
above the ground, the following sound pres-
sure levels apply:
REmission sound pressure level LPA
83 dB(A)
RSound power level LWA 91 dB(A)
The tyre ination compressor is maintenance-
free. If there is a malfunction, please contact
a qualied specialist workshop.
Using the TIREFIT kit
Requirements
RTyre sealant bottle and tyre inator compres-
sor are ready for use (/ page 349, 350).
RTIREFIT sticker is present.
RGloves are present.
You can use TIREFIT tyre sealant to seal perfora-
tion damage of up to 4 mm, particularly those in
the tyre contact surface. You can use TIREFIT in
outside temperatures down to -20 °C.
&WARNING Risk of accident when using
tyre sealant
The tyre sealant may be unable to seal the
tyre properly, especially in the following cases:
350 Breakdown assistance
Rthere are large cuts or punctures in the
tyre (larger than damage previously men-
tioned)
Rthe wheel rims have been damaged
Raer journeys with very low tyre pressure
or with at tyres
#Do not continue driving.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
&WARNING Risk of injury and poisoning
from tyre sealant
Tyre sealant is hazardous to health and causes
irritation. Do not allow it to come into contact
with your skin, eyes or clothing, and do not
swallow it. Do not inhale any vapours. Keep
the tyre sealant away from children.
Observe the following if you come into contact
with the tyre sealant:
#Rinse o the tyre sealant from your skin
using water immediately.
#If tyre sealant gets into your eyes, thor-
oughly rinse them using clean water
immediately.
#If tyre sealant has been swallowed, thor-
oughly rinse out your mouth immediately
and drink plenty of water. Do not induce
vomiting and seek medical attention
immediately.
#Change out of clothing which has come
into contact with tyre sealant immedi-
ately.
#If an allergic reaction occurs, seek medi-
cal attention immediately.
*NOTE Overheating due to the tyre ination
compressor running too long
#Do not run the tyre ination compressor
for longer than ten minutes without inter-
ruption.
Comply with the manufacturer's safety notes on
the sticker on the tyre sealant bottle.
Have the tyre sealant bottle replaced in a qualied
specialist workshop every ve years.
#Do not remove any foreign objects which have
entered the tyre.
#Remove sticker 1 from the tyre ination
compressor housing and ax it to the instru-
ment cluster within the driver's eld of vision.
Breakdown assistance 351
#Remove sticker 2 from the tyre sealant bot-
tle and ax it near the valve on the wheel with
the defective tyre.
#Pull plug 7 with the cable and ller hose 3
out of the tyre ination compressor housing.
#Insert tyre sealant bottle 9 in socket 6 of
the tyre ination compressor in such a way
that the red arrow on tyre sealant bottle 9
matches the red arrow on the tyre ination
compressor.
#Turn tyre sealant bottle 9 a quarter turn
clockwise.
#Insert the plug of ller hose 3 in socket 5
of tyre sealant bottle 9.
#Turn ller hose 3 a quarter turn clockwise.
#Remove the valve cap from valve A on the
faulty tyre.
#Screw union nut 4 of ller hose3 onto the
A valve.
#Insert plug 7 into a 12‑V‑socket in your vehi-
cle.
#Turn the key to position 1 in the ignition lock.
352 Breakdown assistance
#Press on and o switch 8 on the tyre ina-
tion compressor.
The tyre ination compressor is switched on.
The tyre is inated. First, tyre sealant is pum-
ped into the tyre. The pressure may briey rise
to approximately 500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi).
Do not switch o the tyre ination compressor
during this phase!
#Let the tyre ination compressor run for a
maximum of ten minutes.
The tyre should then have attained a tyre pres-
sure of at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi).
If tyre sealant leaks out, make sure you clean the
aected area as quickly as possible. It is prefera-
ble to use clean water.
If you get tyre sealant on your clothing, have it
cleaned as soon as possible with perchloroethy-
lene.
If, aer ten minutes, a tyre pressure of 200 kPa
(2.0 bar/29 psi) has not been attained:
#Switch o the tyre ination compressor.
#Unscrew the lling hose from the valve of the
defective tyre.
Please note that tyre sealant may leak out when
unscrewing the lling hose.
#Drive forwards or in reverse very slowly for
approximately 10 m.
#Pump up the tyre again.
Aer a maximum of ten minutes the tyre pres-
sure must be at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/
29 psi).
&WARNING Risk of accident due to the
specied tyre pressure not being attained
If the specied tyre pressure is not attained
aer the specied time, the tyre is too badly
damaged. The tyre sealant cannot repair the
tyre in this instance.
The braking and driving characteristics may be
greatly impaired.
#Do not continue driving.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
*NOTE Staining from leaking tyre sealant
Aer use, excess tyre sealant may leak out
from the lling hose.
#Therefore, place the lling hose in the
plastic bag that contained the TIREFIT
kit.
If, aer ten minutes, a tyre pressure of 200 kPa
(2.0 bar/29 psi) has been attained:
#Switch o the tyre ination compressor.
#Unscrew the lling hose from the valve of the
defective tyre.
Please note that tyre sealant may leak out when
unscrewing the lling hose.
&WARNING Risk of accident from driving
with sealed tyres
A tyre temporarily sealed with tyre sealant
impairs the handling characteristics and is not
suitable for higher speeds.
Breakdown assistance 353
#Adapt your driving style accordingly and
drive carefully.
#Do not exceed the maximum speed limit
with a tyre that has been repaired using
tyre sealant.
#Observe the maximum permissible speed of
80 km/h for a tyre sealed with tyre sealant.
#The sticker with details of the maximum per-
missible speed must be axed to the instru-
ment cluster where it can be easily seen by
the driver.
*NOTE Staining from leaking tyre sealant
Aer use, excess tyre sealant may leak out
from the lling hose.
#Therefore, place the lling hose in the
plastic bag that contained the TIREFIT
kit.
+ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental
pollution caused by environmentally irre-
sponsible disposal
Tyre sealant contains pollutants.
#Have the tyre sealant bottle disposed of
professionally, e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz
Service Centre.
#Stow the tyre sealant bottle, the tyre ination
compressor and the warning triangle.
#Pull away immediately.
#Stop driving aer approximately ten minutes
and check the tyre pressure using the tyre
ination compressor.
The tyre pressure must now be at least
130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi).
&WARNING Risk of accident due to the
specied tyre pressure not being attained
If the specied tyre pressure is not reached,
the tyre is too badly damaged. The tyre seal-
ant cannot repair the tyre in this instance.
The braking and driving characteristics may be
greatly impaired.
#Do not continue driving.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
Countries that have Mercedes-Benz Service24h:
you will nd a sticker with the telephone number,
e.g. on the B‑pillar on the driver's side.
#Correct the tyre pressure if it is still at least
130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). See the tyre pres-
sure table on the fuel ller ap for values.
Increasing the tyre pressure
#Switch on the tyre ination compressor.
Decreasing the tyre pressure
#Remove the tyre sealant bottle from the tyre
ination compressor.
#Insert the ller hose in the socket of the tyre
ination compressor and turn it a quarter turn
clockwise.
354 Breakdown assistance
#Press pressure release button C next to
manometer B.
When the tyre pressure is correct
#Unscrew the lling hose from the valve of the
sealed tyre.
#Screw the valve cap onto the valve of the
sealed tyre.
#Stow the tyre sealant bottle and the tyre ina-
tion compressor.
#Drive to the nearest qualied specialist work-
shop and have the tyre, tyre sealant bottle and
lling hose replaced there.
Battery (vehicle)
Notes on the 12 V battery
&WARNING Risk of explosion due to elec-
trostatic charge
Electrostatic charge can ignite the highly
explosive gas mixture in the battery.
#To discharge any electrostatic charge
that may have built up, touch the metal
vehicle body before handling the battery.
The highly ammable gas mixture is created while
the battery is charging and during starting assis-
tance.
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends
that you only use batteries which have been tes-
ted and approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-
Benz.
&WARNING Danger of chemical burns from
the battery acid
Battery acid is caustic.
#Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or
clothing.
#Do not lean over the battery.
#Do not inhale battery gases.
#Keep children away from the battery.
#Immediately rinse battery acid o thor-
oughly with plenty of clean water and
seek medical attention immediately.
+ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental
damage due to improper disposal of bat-
teries
Batteries contain pollutants. It is illegal
to dispose of them with the household rub-
bish.
#
Dispose of batteries in an
environmentally responsible manner.
Take discharged batteries to a qualied
Breakdown assistance 355
specialist workshop or to a collection
point for used batteries.
If you have to disconnect the 12 V battery, con-
tact a qualied specialist workshop.
Comply with safety notes and take protective
measures when handling batteries.
Risk of explosion.
Fire, naked ames and smoking are
prohibited when handling the battery.
Avoid creating sparks.
Electrolyte or battery acid is corrosive.
Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or
clothing. Wear suitable protective
clothing, in particular gloves, an apron
and a face mask. Immediately rinse
electrolyte or acid splashes o with
clean water. Consult a doctor immedi-
ately.
Wear safety glasses.
Keep children away.
Observe this Owner's Manual.
If you do not intend to use the vehicle over an
extended period of time:
RActivate standby mode.
RConnect the battery to a battery charger
approved by Mercedes-Benz.
RConsult a qualied specialist workshop to dis-
connect the battery.
Notes on the 48 V battery
&WARNING Risk of an accident due to work
carried out incorrectly on the battery
Work carried out incorrectly on the battery
can, for example, lead to a short circuit. This
can restrict functions relevant for safety sys-
tems and impair the operating safety of your
vehicle.
You could lose control of the vehicle in the fol-
lowing situations in particular:
Rwhen braking
Rin the event of abrupt steering manoeuvres
and/or when the vehicle's speed is not
adapted to the road conditions
#In the event of a short circuit or a similar
incident, contact a qualied specialist
workshop immediately.
#Do not drive on.
#Always have work on the battery carried
out at a qualied specialist workshop.
RFurther information on ABS (/ page 213)
356 Breakdown assistance
RFurther information on ESP®(/ page 213)
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends
that you only use batteries which have been
approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.
+ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental
damage due to improper disposal of bat-
teries
Batteries contain pollutants. It is
illegal to dispose of them with the household
rubbish.
#
Dispose of batteries in an environ-
mentally responsible manner. Take dis-
charged batteries to a qualied specialist
workshop or to a collection point for
used batteries.
If you have to disconnect the 48 V battery, con-
tact a qualied specialist workshop.
Comply with safety notes and take protective
measures when handling batteries.
Risk of explosion if the 48 V battery is
used improperly.
The surface of the 48 V battery may be
hot.
Fire, naked ames and smoking are pro-
hibited when handling the battery. Avoid
creating sparks.
Electrolyte or battery acid is corrosive.
Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or cloth-
ing. Wear suitable protective clothing, in
particular gloves, an apron and a face
mask. Immediately rinse o splashes of
electrolyte or acid with plenty of clean
water. Consult a doctor immediately.
Do not place heavy objects on the surface
of the battery or use the battery to sup-
port a person in any way.
Do not perform any work on the battery.
Always have any work on the battery car-
ried out at a qualied specialist workshop.
Do not disconnect the battery yourself.
Do not remove the battery yourself. Do
not attempt to open the battery.
Keep children away.
Wear safety glasses.
Observe this Owner's Manual.
Observe the following if you do not intend to use
the vehicle over an extended period of time:
RNon-plug-in hybrid: switch to standby mode
(/ page 210).
Notes on the high-voltage battery
&DANGER Risk of re and explosion from
excessive internal pressure of the high-
voltage battery
In the event of a vehicle re, ammable gas
can escape and ignite.
Breakdown assistance 357
#Stop the charging process immediately
in case of unusual odours, smoke or
burn marks.
#Leave the danger zone immediately.
Secure the danger zone at a sucient
distance.
#Call the re service.
Observe the notes on charging the high-voltage
battery (/ page 187).
Risk of explosion.
Fire, naked ames and smoking are pro-
hibited when handling the battery. Avoid
creating sparks.
Electrolyte or battery acid is corrosive.
Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or cloth-
ing. Wear suitable protective clothing, in
particular gloves, an apron and a face
mask. Immediately rinse electrolyte or
acid splashes o with clean water. Consult
a doctor immediately.
Wear safety glasses.
Keep children away.
Observe this Owner's Manual.
Notes on starting assistance and charging the 12
V battery
When charging the battery and during starting
assistance, always use the jump-start connection
point in the engine compartment.
*NOTE Damage to the battery due to over-
voltage
When charging using a battery charger without
a maximum charging voltage, the battery or
the on-board electronics may be damaged.
#Only use battery chargers with a maxi-
mum charging voltage of 14.8 V.
&WARNING Risk of explosion due to the
ignition of hydrogen gas
If there is a short circuit or sparks are created,
there is a danger of hydrogen gas igniting
when you charge the battery.
#Make sure that the POSITIVE terminal of
a connected battery does not come into
contact with vehicle parts.
#Never place metal objects or tools on a
battery.
#When connecting and disconnecting the
battery, always observe the sequence of
battery terminals described.
#During starting assistance, always take
care to connect only battery terminals of
identical polarity.
#During starting assistance, observe the
sequence described for connecting and
disconnecting the jump leads.
#Do not connect or disconnect the bat-
tery terminals with the engine running.
358 Breakdown assistance
&WARNING Risk of explosion due to explo-
sive mixture of gases
An explosive mixture of gases can escape
from the battery during charging and starting
assistance.
#Fire, naked ames, smoking and creating
sparks must be avoided.
#Make sure there is adequate ventilation.
#Do not stand over the battery.
&WARNING Risk of explosion from a frozen
battery
A discharged battery may freeze at tempera-
tures slightly above or below freezing point.
During starting assistance or battery charging,
battery gas can be released.
#Always allow a battery to thaw before
charging it or performing starting assis-
tance.
If the indicator/warning lamps in the instrument
cluster do not light up at low temperatures, it is
very likely that the discharged battery has frozen.
In this case you may neither jump-start the vehi-
cle nor charge the battery.
The service life of a battery that has been thawed
may be dramatically shortened. The starting char-
acteristics may be impaired, especially at low
temperatures.
It is recommended that you have a thawed battery
checked at a qualied specialist workshop.
*NOTE Damage caused by numerous or
extended attempts to start the engine
Numerous or extended attempts to start the
engine may damage the catalytic converter
due to non-combusted fuel.
#Avoid numerous and extended attempts
to start the engine.
Observe the following points during starting assis-
tance and when charging the battery:
ROnly use undamaged jump lead/charging
cables with a sucient cross-section and
insulated terminal clamps.
RNon-insulated parts of the terminal clamps
must not come into contact with other metal
parts while the jump lead/charging cable is
connected to the battery/jump-start connec-
tion point.
RThe jump lead/charging cable must not come
into contact with any parts which may move
when the engine is running.
RAlways make sure that neither you nor the bat-
tery is electrostatically charged.
RKeep away from re and naked ames.
RDo not lean over the battery.
Observe the additional following points when
charging the battery:
ROnly use battery chargers tested and
approved for Mercedes-Benz.
RRead the battery charger's operating instruc-
tions before charging the battery.
Observe the additional following points during
starting assistance:
RFor starting assistance, only use batteries with
a nominal voltage of 12 V.
RThe vehicles must not touch.
Breakdown assistance 359
RPetrol engine: only accept starting assistance
if the engine and exhaust system are cold.
Starting assistance and charging the 12 V battery
Requirements
Plug-in hybrid: in order to start, the vehicle
requires a sucient charge level of the high-volt-
age battery as well as a sucient power output of
the 12 V on-board electrical system.
RThe vehicle is secured with the electric park-
ing brake.
RAutomatic transmission: the transmission is in
position j.
RThe vehicle and all electrical consumers are
switched o.
RThe bonnet is open.
#Slide cover 1 of positive contact 2 on the
jump-starting connection point in the direction
of the arrow.
#Connect positive contact 2 on your vehicle
to the positive terminal of the donor battery
using the jump lead/charging cable. Always
begin with positive contact 2 on your own
vehicle rst.
#During starting assistance: start the engine of
the donor vehicle and run at idle speed.
#Connect the negative terminal of the donor
battery and earth point 3 of your own vehicle
by using the jump lead/charging cable. Begin
with the donor battery rst.
#During starting assistance: start the engine of
your own vehicle.
#During the charging process: start the charg-
ing process.
#During starting assistance: let the engines run
for several minutes.
#During starting assistance: before disconnect-
ing the jump lead, switch on an electrical con-
sumer on your own vehicle, e.g. the rear win-
dow heater or lighting.
When the starting assistance/charging process is
complete:
#First, remove the jump lead/charging cable
from earth point 3 and the negative terminal
of the donor battery, then from positive con-
tact 2 and the positive terminal of the donor
360 Breakdown assistance
battery. Begin each time with the contacts on
your own vehicle rst.
#Aer removing the jump lead/charging cable,
close cover 1 of positive contact 2.
Plug-in hybrid: if your vehicle has been started
with starting assistance, it may not be possible to
use the electric drive for approximately 30
minutes.
Further information can be obtained at a qualied
specialist workshop.
Replacing the 12 V battery
#Observe the notes on the 12 V battery
(/ page 355).
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the
12 V battery replaced at a qualied specialist
workshop, e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz Service
Centre.
Observe the following notes if you want to replace
the battery yourself:
RAlways replace a faulty battery with a battery
which meets the specic vehicle require-
ments.
The vehicle is equipped with a eece battery.
Full vehicle functionality is only guaranteed
with a eece battery. For safety reasons,
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only
use batteries which have been tested and
approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.
RUse detachable parts such as vent hoses,
elbow ttings or terminal covers from the bat-
tery which is to be replaced.
RMake sure that the vent hose is always con-
nected to the original opening on the side of
the battery.
Fit any existing or supplied cell caps.
Otherwise, gases or battery acid could
escape.
RMake sure that detachable parts are recon-
nected in the same way.
Tow-starting or towing away
Overview of permissible towing methods (not
plug-in hybrid)
Mercedes-Benz recommends transporting your
vehicle in the case of a breakdown, rather than
towing it away.
For towing with both axles on the ground, use a
tow rope or tow rod. Do not use tow bar systems.
&WARNING Risk of accident when towing
with steering wheel lock
If the steering wheel lock is engaged, you will
not be able to steer the vehicle.
#When towing with a tow rope or tow bar,
always switch on the vehicle.
*NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to tow-
ing away incorrectly
#Observe the instructions and notes on
towing away.
Breakdown assistance 361
Permitted towing methods
Vehicle equipment/towing method
Both axles on the ground Front axle raised Rear axle raised
Vehicles with manual transmission Yes, for a maximum of 50 km at
50 km/h Yes, for a maximum of 50 km at
50 km/h Yes, for a maximum of 50 km at
50 km/h
Vehicles with automatic transmis-
sion Yes, for a maximum of 50 km at
50 km/h Yes, for a maximum of 50 km at
50 km/h Yes, for a maximum of 50 km at
50 km/h
4MATIC vehicles Yes, for a maximum of 50 km at
50 km/h No No
Towing with a raised axle: towing should be per-
formed by a towing company.
Overview of permitted towing methods (plug-in
hybrid)
Mercedes-Benz recommends transporting your
vehicle in the case of a breakdown, rather than
towing it away.
For towing, use a tow rope or tow bar with both
axles on the ground. Do not use tow bar systems.
*NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to tow-
ing away incorrectly
#Observe the instructions and notes on
towing away.
Observe the information on towing and transport-
ing the vehicle in the vehicle Owner's Manual.
362 Breakdown assistance
Permitted towing methods
Vehicle equipment/towing method
Both axles on the ground Front axle raised Rear axle raised
Plug-in hybrid vehicles Yes, maximum 50 km at 50 km/h Yes, maximum 50 km at 50 km/h Yes, maximum 50 km at 50 km/h
The steering wheel must be xed in
the centre position with a steering
wheel lock.
In the following situations, only transporting the
vehicle is permitted:
Rthe multifunction display is not working
or
Rthe á Towing not permitted See Owner's
Manual display message appears
Exception: if the vehicle is located in a danger
zone, it can be recovered from the danger zone
despite the display message or the display not
working.
It must not be towed further than 50 m with both
axles on the ground. A towing speed of 10 km/h
must not be exceeded. Beyond these limits, only
transporting is permitted.
Towing the vehicle with both axles on the ground
#Observe the notes on the permitted towing
methods.
#Make sure that the battery is connected and
charged.
Observe the following points when the battery is
discharged:
RThe vehicle cannot be started.
RThe electric parking brake cannot be released
or applied.
RVehicles with automatic transmission: the
transmission cannot be shied to position i
or j.
Breakdown assistance 363
%Vehicles with automatic transmission: if the
transmission cannot be shied to position i
or if the display does not show anything,
transport the vehicle (/ page 365). A towing
vehicle with liing equipment is required for
vehicle transportation.
*NOTE Damage due to towing away at
excessively high speeds or over long dis-
tances
The drivetrain could be damaged when towing
at excessively high speeds or over long distan-
ces.
#A towing speed of 50 km/h must not be
exceeded.
#A towing distance of 50 km must not be
exceeded.
&WARNING Risk of accident when towing a
vehicle which is too heavy
If the vehicle to be tow-started or towed away
is heavier than the permissible gross mass of
your vehicle, the following situations can
occur:
Rthe towing eye may become detached.
Rthe vehicle/trailer combination may
swerve or overturn.
#Before tow-starting or towing away,
check if the vehicle to be tow-started or
towed away exceeds the permissible
gross mass.
If a vehicle has to be tow-started or towed away,
its permissible gross mass must not exceed the
permissible gross mass of the towing vehicle.
#Information on the permissible gross mass of
the vehicle can be found on the vehicle identi-
cation plate (/ page 396).
#Vehicles with automatic transmission: do not
open the driver's door or front-passenger
door; the transmission otherwise automati-
cally shis to position j.
#Fit the towing eye (/ page 366).
#Fasten the towing device.
*NOTE Damage due to incorrect connec-
tion of the tow bar
#Only connect the tow rope or tow bar to
the towing eyes.
#Deactivate the automatic locking mechanism
(/ page 83).
#Do not activate the HOLD function.
#Deactivate tow-away protection (/ page 97).
#Deactivate Active Brake Assist (/ page 237).
#Vehicles with automatic transmission: shi to
position i.
#Release the electric parking brake.
#Switch on the vehicle; the steering wheel lock
may otherwise engage.
364 Breakdown assistance
&WARNING Risk of accident due to limited
safety-related functions during the towing
process
Safety-related functions are limited or no lon-
ger available in the following situations:
Rthe vehicle is switched o.
Rthe brake system or power steering system
is malfunctioning.
Rthe energy supply or the on-board electri-
cal system is malfunctioning.
When your vehicle is towed away, signicantly
more eort may be required to steer and
brake than is normally required.
#Use a tow bar.
#Make sure that the steering wheel can
move freely before towing the vehicle
away.
*NOTE Damage due to excessive tractive
power
If you pull away sharply, the tractive power
may be too high and the vehicles could be
damaged.
#Pull away slowly and smoothly.
Loading the vehicle for transport
Hybrid vehicles: Transport of vehicles should only
be carried out by professional towing companies.
#Observe the notes on towing away
(/ page 363).
#Connect the towing device to the towing eye
in order to load the vehicle.
%You can also attach the tow bar to the trailer
hitch.
#Vehicles with automatic transmission: shi the
automatic transmission to position i.
%Vehicles with automatic transmission: the
automatic transmission may be locked in posi-
tion j in the event of damage to the electri-
cal system. To shi to i, provide the on-
board electrical system with power
(/ page 360).
#Load the vehicle onto the transporter.
#Vehicles with automatic transmission: shi the
automatic transmission to position j.
#Use the electric parking brake to secure the
vehicle against rolling away.
#Only secure the vehicle by the wheels.
Vehicles with adaptive damping adjustment
&WARNING Risk of an accident when trans-
porting vehicles with adaptive damping
adjustment
When transporting vehicles with adaptive
damping adjustment, the vehicle/trailer com-
bination may begin to rock and start to skid.
#Load the vehicle correctly onto the
transporter.
#Secure the vehicle on all four wheels
with suitable tensioning straps.
Breakdown assistance 365
*NOTE Damage to the vehicle from secur-
ing it incorrectly
#Aer loading, the vehicle must be
secured on all four wheels. Otherwise,
the vehicle could be damaged.
#A minimum distance of 20 cm upwards
and 10 cm downwards must be kept to
the transport platform.
#Secure the vehicle on all four wheels aer
loading.
4MATIC vehicles/vehicles with automatic trans-
mission
#Make sure that the front and rear axles come
to rest on the same transportation vehicle.
*NOTE Damage to the drive train due to
incorrect positioning of the vehicle
#Do not position the vehicle above the
connection point of the transport vehi-
cle.
Towing eye storage location
Towing eye 1 is located under the boot oor.
%Depending on the vehicle version, the towing
eye is in a dierent position in the boot.
Fitting and removing the towing eye
#Press the mark on cover 1 inwards and
remove.
#Screw in the towing eye clockwise as far as it
will go and tighten.
366 Breakdown assistance
Vehicles with a trailer hitch: vehicles with a trailer
hitch do not have a rear bracket for the towing
eye. Fasten the tow bar to the trailer hitch.
#Aer removing the towing eye, secure the
cover 1 in the bumper.
*NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to incor-
rect use of the towing eye or trailer hitch
When a towing eye or trailer hitch is used to
recover a vehicle, the vehicle may be damaged
in the process.
#Only use the towing eye or trailer hitch to
tow away or tow start the vehicle.
#Do not use the towing eye or trailer hitch
to tow the vehicle during recovery.
Tow-starting the vehicle
Vehicles with automatic transmission
*NOTE Damage to the automatic transmis-
sion due to tow-starting
The automatic transmission may be damaged
in the process of tow-starting vehicles with
automatic transmission.
#Vehicles with automatic transmission
must not be tow-started.
#Vehicles with an automatic transmission must
not be tow-started.
Electrical fuses
Notes on electrical fuses
&WARNING Risk of accident and injury due
to overloaded lines
If you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or if
you replace it with a fuse with a higher amper-
age, the electric line could be overloaded.
This could result in a re.
#Always replace faulty fuses with speci-
ed new fuses containing the correct
amperage.
*NOTE Damage due to incorrect fuses
Using incorrect fuses can result in damage to
electrical components or systems or their
functions being considerably restricted.
#Use only fuses approved for Mercedes-
Benz with the respective specied fuse
rating.
Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of the
same rating, which you can recognise by the col-
our and the label. The fuse ratings and further
information to be observed can be found in the
fuse assignment diagram.
Fuse assignment diagram: on the fuse box in the
engine compartment (/ page 368).
Breakdown assistance 367
*NOTE Damage or malfunctions caused by
moisture
Moisture may cause damage to the electrical
system or cause it to malfunction.
#When the fuse box is open, make sure
that no moisture can enter the fuse box.
#When closing the fuse box, make sure
that the seal of the lid is positioned cor-
rectly on the fuse box.
If the newly inserted fuse also blows, have the
cause traced and rectied at a qualied specialist
workshop.
Ensure the following before replacing a fuse:
RThe vehicle is secured against rolling away.
RAll electrical consumers are switched o.
RThe vehicle is switched o.
The electrical fuses are located in various fuse
boxes:
RFuse box in the engine compartment on the
le-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed in
the direction of travel (/ page 368)
RFuse box in the front passenger footwell
(/ page 369)
RFuse box in the centre of the boot
(/ page 370)
Opening and closing the fuse box in the engine
compartment
Requirements:
RA dry cloth and a screwdriver are available.
Observe the notes on electrical fuses
(/ page 367).
Open
&WARNING Risk of injury from using the
windscreen wipers when the bonnet is
open
If the windscreen wipers start moving when
the bonnet is open, you could be trapped by
the wiper linkage.
#Always switch o the windscreen wipers
and vehicle before opening the engine
bonnet.
#Open the bonnet.
#Remove any existing moisture from the fuse
box using a dry cloth.
#Loosen screws 1.
#Press clamps 2 and li the fuse box lid up
and out.
368 Breakdown assistance
The fuse assignment diagram is in a recess on the
side of the fuse box.
Closing
#Check whether the seal is positioned correctly
in the lid.
#Place the lid on the fuse box.
#Make sure that clamps 2 engage.
#Tighten screws 1.
#Close the bonnet.
Opening and closing the fuse box in the front
passenger footwell
Observe the notes on electrical fuses
(/ page 367).
Opening
#Li carpet 1 in the direction of the arrow.
#Loosen screws 2 and remove the fuse box
lid from the top.
Closing
#Place the lid on the fuse box.
#Tighten screws 2.
#Fold back the carpet.
Breakdown assistance 369
Opening and closing the fuse box in the boot
Observe the notes on electrical fuses
(/ page 367).
#Open the boot oor .
Fuse box 1 is located in the centre underneath
the boot oor.
370 Breakdown assistance
Notes on noise or unusual handling characteris-
tics
Make sure there are no vibrations, noises or
unusual handling characteristics when the vehicle
is in motion. This may indicate that the wheels or
tyres are damaged. Hidden tyre damage could
also be causing the unusual handling characteris-
tics.
If you suspect that a tyre is defective, reduce your
speed immediately and have the tyres and wheels
checked at a qualied specialist workshop.
Notes on regularly inspecting wheels and tyres
&WARNING Risk of injury due to damaged
tyres
Damaged tyres can cause tyre pressure loss.
#Check the tyres regularly for signs of
damage and replace any damaged tyres
immediately.
&WARNING Risk of aquaplaning due to
insucient tyre tread
Insucient tyre tread will result in reduced
tyre grip.
The risk of aquaplaning is increased on wet
roads, especially when the speed of the vehi-
cle is not adapted to suit the conditions.
#Thus, you should regularly check the
tread depth and the condition of the
tread across the entire width of all tyres.
Minimum tread depth for:
RSummer tyres: 3 mm
RM+S tyres: 4 mm
#For safety reasons, replace the tyres
before the legally-prescribed limit for the
minimum tread depth is reached.
Carry out the following checks on all wheels regu-
larly, at least once a month or as required, for
example, prior to a long journey or driving o-
road:
RCheck the tyre pressure (/ page 372).
RVisually inspect wheels and tyres for damage.
RCheck the valve caps.
RVisual check of the tyre tread depth and the
tyre contact surface across the entire width.
The minimum tread depth for summer tyres is
3 mm and for winter tyres 4 mm.
Notes on snow chains
&WARNING Risk of accident due to incor-
rectly tted snow chains
If you have tted snow chains to the rear
wheels, they may drag against the vehicle
body or chassis components.
#Never t snow chains on the rear
wheels.
#Only t snow chains on the front wheels
in pairs.
Wheels and tyres 371
*NOTE Damage to vehicle body or suspen-
sion components caused by tted snow
chains
On 4MATIC vehicles, if you t snow chains on
the rear wheels, you can damage vehicle body
or suspension components.
#On 4MATIC vehicles, only t snow chains
on the front wheels.
Observe the following notes when using snow
chains:
RSnow chains are only permissible for certain
wheel/tyre combinations. You can obtain
information about this from a Mercedes-Benz
Service Centre.
RFor safety reasons, only use snow chains that
have been specically approved for your vehi-
cle by Mercedes-Benz, or snow chains with
the same quality standard.
RIf snow chains are tted, the maximum per-
missible speed is 50 km/h.
RVehicles with Active Parking Assist: do not use
Active Parking Assist when snow chains are
tted.
%You can permanently limit the maximum
speed for driving with winter tyres
(/ page 223).
%You can deactivate ESP® to pull away
(/ page 215). This allows the wheels to spin,
achieving an increased driving force.
Tyre pressure
Notes on tyre pressure
&WARNING Risk of accident due to insu-
cient or excessive tyre pressure
Underinated or overinated tyres pose in par-
ticular the following risks:
RThe tyres can burst.
RThe tyres can wear excessively and/or
unevenly.
RThe driving characteristics as well as the
steering and braking characteristics may
be greatly impaired.
#Comply with the recommended tyre
pressure and check the tyre pressure of
all tyres, including the spare wheel, regu-
larly:
Rmonthly
Rwhen the load changes
Rbefore embarking on a longer journey
Rif operating conditions change, e.g. o-
road driving
#Adjust the tyre pressure, if necessary.
Tyre pressure which is too high or too low can:
RShorten the service life of the tyres.
RCause increased tyre damage.
RAdversely aect driving characteristics and
thus driving safety, e.g. due to aquaplaning.
372 Wheels and tyres
&WARNING Risk of accident due to repea-
ted pressure drop in the tyres
The wheels, valves or tyres could be damaged.
Too low a tyre pressure can lead to the tyres
bursting.
#Examine the tyres for foreign objects.
#Check whether the tyre has a puncture
or the valve has a leak.
#If you are unable to rectify the damage,
contact a qualied specialist workshop.
Information on the recommended tyre pressure
for the vehicle's factory-tted tyres can be found
on the tyre pressure table on the inside of the fuel
ller ap (/ page 373).
Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the tyre
pressure. The outer appearance of a tyre does not
permit any reliable conclusion about the tyre pres-
sure.
Only correct tyre pressures when the tyres are
cold. Conditions for cold tyres:
RThe vehicle has been parked with the tyres out
of direct sunlight for at least three hours.
RThe vehicle has travelled less than 1.6 km.
The vehicle's tyres heat up when driving. As the
temperature of the tyres increases, so too does
the tyre pressure.
Vehicles with a tyre pressure monitoring system:
you can also see the tyre pressure in the driver's
display (/ page 374).
Notes on trailer operation
Always inate the rear axle tyres to the recom-
mended tyre pressures on the tyre pressure table
for increased load.
Tyre pressure table
The tyre pressure table is on the inside of the fuel
ller ap. The tyre pressure table shows the recommended
tyre pressure for all tyres approved for this vehi-
cle. The recommended tyre pressures apply for
cold tyres under various operating conditions, i.e.
loading and/or speed of the vehicle.
If one or more tyre sizes precede a tyre pressure,
the following tyre pressure information is only
valid for those tyre sizes and their respective load
condition.
Wheels and tyres 373
If the preceding tyre sizes are complemented by
the + symbol, the tyre pressure information
following shows alternative tyre pressures. Fuel
consumption may then increase slightly.
The load conditions "partially laden" and "fully
laden" are dened in the table for dierent num-
bers of passengers and amounts of luggage. The
actual number of seats may dier from this.
Tyre pressure monitoring system
Function of the tyre pressure monitoring sys-
tem
The system checks the tyre pressure and the tyre
temperature of the tyres tted to the vehicle by
means of a tyre pressure sensor.
The tyre pressure and the tyre temperature
appear in the driver's display.
If there is a substantial pressure loss or if the tyre
temperature is excessive, you will be warned with
display messages (/ page 472) or the h
warning lamp in the driver's display
(/ page 498).
The tyre pressure monitoring system is only an
aid. It is the driver's responsibility to set the tyre
pressure to the recommended cold tyre pressure
suitable for the operating situation.
In most cases, the tyre pressure monitoring sys-
tem will automatically update the new reference
values aer you have changed the tyre pressure.
You can, however, also update the reference val-
ues by restarting the tyre pressure monitoring
system manually (/ page 375).
System limits
The system may be impaired or may not function
particularly in the following situations:
Rincorrect reference values were taught in
Rsudden pressure loss caused by a foreign
object penetrating the tyre, for example
Rthere is a malfunction caused by another radio
signal source
Checking the tyre pressure with the tyre pres-
sure monitoring system
Requirements:
RThe vehicle is switched on.
Driver's display:
4© 5Service
#Press a to conrm.
One of the following displays appears:
RCurrent tyre pressure of each wheel:
RTyre pressures will be displayed after a few
minutes of driving: current values are not yet
known to the system. The pressure/tempera-
ture values of each tyre are displayed as soon
as they are known to the system.
RTyre pressure monitor active: the teach-in
process of the system is not yet complete. The
tyre pressures are already being monitored.
374 Wheels and tyres
#Compare the current tyre pressure with the
recommended tyre pressure for the current
operating condition (/ page 373). Addition-
ally, observe the notes on cold tyres
(/ page 372).
%The values displayed in the driver's display
may deviate from those of the tyre pressure
gauge as they refer to sea level. At high eleva-
tions, the tyre pressure values indicated by a
tyre pressure gauge are higher than those
shown in the driver's display.
Bear in mind the following related topic:
RNotes on tyre pressure (/ page 372)
Restarting the tyre pressure monitoring system
Requirements:
RThe recommended tyre pressure is correctly
set for the respective operating status on each
of the four wheels (/ page 372).
Restart the tyre pressure monitoring system in the
following situations:
RThe tyre pressure has changed.
RThe wheels or tyres have been changed or
newly tted.
Driver's display:
4© 5Service
#Select Tyre pressure and conrm with a.
#Swipe downwards on Touch Control on the
steering wheel.
The Use current tyre pressures as new refer-
ence values? message is shown in the driver's
display.
#Select Yes and conrm the restart with a.
The Tyre pressure monitor restarted message
is shown in the driver's display.
Current warning messages are deleted and
the yellow h warning lamp goes out.
Aer you have been driving for a few minutes,
the system checks whether the current tyre
pressures are within the specied range. The
current tyre pressures are then accepted as
reference values and monitored.
If the tyre pressure levels are not within the
specied range, the Please correct tyre pres-
sure message appears.
Bear in mind the following related topic:
RNotes on tyre pressure (/ page 372)
Tyre pressure loss warning system
Function of the tyre pressure loss warning sys-
tem
The tyre pressure loss warning system warns the
driver by means of display messages when there
is a severe tyre pressure loss.
System limits
The system may be impaired or may not function
particularly in the following situations:
Rincorrect reference values were taught in
Rsudden pressure loss caused by a foreign
object penetrating the tyre, for example
Ran even pressure loss on more than one tyre
occurs
The system has a restricted or delayed function
particularly in the following situations:
Rpoor ground conditions, e.g. snow or gravel
Rdriving with snow chains
Wheels and tyres 375
Rwhen adopting a very sporty driving style with
high cornering speeds or sudden acceleration
Rdriving with a very heavy or large trailer
Rdriving with a high load
The tyre pressure loss warning system is only an
aid. It is the driver's responsibility to set the tyre
pressure to the recommended cold tyre pressure
suitable for the operating situation and to check
it.
Be sure to also observe the following further rela-
ted subjects:
RNotes on tyre pressure (/ page 372)
RDisplay messages about the tyres
(/ page 472)
Restarting the tyre pressure loss warning sys-
tem
Requirements:
RThe recommended tyre pressure is correctly
set for the respective operating condition on
each of the four wheels (/ page 372).
Restart the tyre pressure loss warning system in
the following situations:
RThe tyre pressure has changed.
RThe wheels or tyres have been changed or
newly tted.
Driver's display:
4© 5Service
#Select Tyre pressure and conrm with a.
The Run Flat Indicator active message is
shown in the driver's display.
#To initiate a restart, press a on the steer-
ing wheel.
The Are the current pressure values OK?
message is shown in the driver's display.
#Select Yes.
#To conrm restart, press a on the steering
wheel.
The Run Flat Indicator restarted message is
shown in the driver's display.
Be sure to also observe the following further rela-
ted subjects:
RNotes on tyre pressure (/ page 372)
Wheel change
Notes on selecting, tting and replacing tyres
*NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles
#Observe the notes in the Supplement.
You could otherwise fail to recognise
dangers.
&WARNING Risk of accident due to incor-
rect wheel and tyre dimensions
If wheels and tyres of the wrong size are tted,
the service brakes or components in the brake
system and in the wheel suspension may be
damaged.
#Always replace wheels and tyres with
those that full the specications of the
original part.
For wheels, pay attention to the following:
RDesignation
RType
376 Wheels and tyres
For tyres, pay attention to the following:
RDesignation
RManufacturer
RType
&WARNING Risk of injury through exceed-
ing the specied tyre load-bearing capa-
city or the permissible speed rating
Exceeding the load-bearing capacity of the
tyres can lead to tyre damage and could cause
the tyres to explode.
#Therefore, only use tyre types and sizes
approved for your vehicle model.
#Observe the tyre load-bearing capacity
rating and speed rating required for your
vehicle.
*NOTE Vehicle and tyre damage caused by
non-approved tyre types and sizes
For safety reasons, only use tyres, wheels and
accessories which have been specially
approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle.
These tyres are specially adapted to the active
safety systems, such as ABS, ESP® and
4MATIC, and marked as follows:
RMO = Mercedes-Benz Original
RMOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended
(run-at tyres only for certain wheels)
RMO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only cer-
tain AMG tyres)
Otherwise, certain properties, such as han-
dling characteristics, vehicle noise emissions,
consumption, etc. could be adversely aec-
ted. Furthermore, other tyre sizes could result
in the tyres rubbing against the body and axle
components when loaded. This could result in
damage to the tyre or the vehicle.
Only use tyres, wheels and accessories that
have been checked and recommended by
Mercedes-Benz.
*NOTE Risk to driving safety from retrea-
ded tyres
Retreaded tyres are neither tested nor recom-
mended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous
damage cannot always be detected on retrea-
ded tyres.
For this reason driving safety cannot be guar-
anteed.
#Do not use used tyres if you have no
information about their previous usage.
*NOTE Possible wheel and tyre damage
when driving over obstacles
Large wheels have a smaller section width. As
the section width decreases, the risk of
wheels and tyres being damaged when driving
over obstacles increases.
Wheels and tyres 377
#Avoid obstacles or drive especially care-
fully.
#Reduce your speed when driving over
kerbs, speed bumps, manhole covers
and potholes.
#Avoid particularly high kerbs.
*NOTE Possible wheel and tyre damage
when parking on kerbs or in potholes
Parking on kerbs or in potholes can damage
the wheels and tyres.
#Only park on level surfaces if possible.
#Avoid kerbs and potholes when parking.
*NOTE Damage to electronic component
parts due to the use of tyre-tting tools
Vehicles with tyre pressure monitoring sys-
tem: there are electronic component parts in
the wheel.
If tyre-tting tools are positioned in the area of
the valve, the electronic components could be
damaged.
#Tyre-tting tools should not be applied in
the area of the valve.
#Always have tyres changed at a qualied
specialist workshop.
*NOTE Damage to summer tyres at low
ambient temperatures
At low ambient temperatures, tears could form
when driving with summer tyres, causing per-
manent damage to the tyre.
#At temperatures below 7 °C use i
M+S tyres.
Accessory parts which are not approved for your
vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or which are not used
correctly, can impair the operating safety.
Before purchasing and using non-approved acces-
sories, visit a qualied specialist workshop and
enquire about:
RSuitability
RLegal stipulations
RFactory recommendations
&WARNING Risk of accident with high per-
formance tyres
The special tyre tread in combination with the
optimised tyre compound means that the risk
of skidding and hydroplaning on wet roads is
increased.
In addition, the tyre grip is greatly reduced at
a low outside temperature and tyre running
temperature.
#Switch on the ESP® and adapt your driv-
ing style accordingly.
#Use i M+S tyres at outside tempera-
tures of less than 10 °C.
#Only use the tyres for their intended pur-
pose.
Observe the following when selecting, tting and
replacing tyres:
RCountry-specic requirements for tyre
approval that dene a specic tyre type for
your vehicle.
378 Wheels and tyres
RFurthermore, the use of certain tyre types in
certain regions and areas of operation can be
highly benecial.
ROnly use tyres and wheels of the same type
(summer tyres, winter tyres, MOExtended
tyres) and the same make.
ROnly t wheels of the same size on one axle
(le and right).
It is only permissible to t a dierent wheel
size in the event of a at tyre in order to drive
to the specialist workshop.
RDo not make any modications to the brake
system, the wheels or the tyres.
The use of shims or brake dust shields is not
permitted and may invalidate the vehicle's
general operating permit.
RVehicles with a tyre pressure monitoring sys-
tem: all tted wheels must be equipped with
functioning sensors for the tyre pressure mon-
itoring system.
RAt temperatures below 7 °C use winter tyres
or all-season tyres marked i M+S for all
wheels.
Winter tyres provide the best possible grip in
wintry road conditions.
RFor M+S tyres, only use tyres with the same
tread.
RObserve the maximum permissible speed for
the M+S tyres tted.
If the tyre's maximum speed is below that of
the vehicle, this must be indicated by an
appropriate label in the driver's eld of vision.
RRun in new tyres at moderate speeds for the
rst 100 km.
RReplace the tyres aer six years at the latest,
regardless of wear.
RWhen replacing with tyres that do not feature
run-at characteristics: vehicles with
MOExtended tyres are not equipped with a
TIREFIT kit at the factory. Equip the vehicle
with a TIREFIT kit aer replacing with tyres
that do not feature run-at characteristics,
e.g. winter tyres.
%You can permanently limit the maximum
speed for driving with winter tyres
(/ page 223).
For more information on wheels and tyres, con-
tact a qualied specialist workshop.
Be sure to also observe the following further rela-
ted subjects:
RNotes on tyre pressure (/ page 372)
RTyre pressure table (/ page 373)
RNotes on the emergency spare wheel
(/ page 386)
Notes on interchanging wheels
&WARNING Risk of injury through dierent
wheel sizes
Interchanging the front and rear wheels can
severely impair the driving characteristics.
The disk brakes or wheel suspension compo-
nents may also be damaged.
#Only interchange the front and rear
wheels if the wheels and tyres have the
same dimensions.
Wheels and tyres 379
Interchanging the front and rear wheels if the
wheels or tyres have dierent dimensions can
render the general operating permit invalid.
Observe the instructions and safety notes on
"Changing a wheel" (/ page 376)
The wear patterns on the front and rear wheels
dier:
Rfront wheels wear more on the tyre shoulder
Rrear wheels wear more in the centre of the
tyre
Do not drive with tyres that have too little tread
depth. This signicantly reduces traction on wet
roads (aquaplaning).
On vehicles with the same front and rear wheel
size, you can interchange the wheels every
5,000 to 10,000 km, depending on the wear.
Ensure the direction of rotation is maintained for
the wheels.
Notes on storing wheels
When storing wheels, observe the following notes:
RAer removing wheels, store them in a cool,
dry and preferably dark place.
RProtect the tyres from contact with oil, grease
or fuel.
Overview of the tyre-change tool kit
*NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles
#Observe the notes in the Supplement.
You could otherwise fail to recognise
dangers.
Apart from some country-specic variants, vehi-
cles are not equipped with a tyre-change tool kit.
Consult a qualied specialist workshop to nd out
which wheel change tools are necessary and
approved for changing the wheel on your vehicle.
You require the following tools, forexample, to
change a wheel:
RJack
RChock
RWheel wrench
RCentring pin
%The jack weighs approximately 3.4 kg.
The maximum load capacity of the jack can
be found on the sticker axed to the jack.
The jack is maintenance-free. If there is a
malfunction, please contact a qualied spe-
cialist workshop.
The tyre-change tool kit is located in tool bag 1
in the boot.
%Depending on the vehicle equipment, the tool
bag may be located at other positions in the
boot.
%When stowing the tool bag, make sure that it
is adequately secured.
380 Wheels and tyres
The tool bag contains:
RJack
RGloves
RWheel wrench
RCentring pin
RFolding chock
RRatchet for jack
Preparing the vehicle for a wheel change
Requirements
RThe vehicle is not on a slope.
RThe vehicle is on solid, non-slippery and level
ground.
RThe required tyre-change tool kit is available.
%If your vehicle is not equipped with the tyre-
change tool kit, consult a qualied specialist
workshop to nd out about suitable tools.
#Apply the electric parking brake manually.
#Move the front wheels to the straight-ahead
position.
#Shi the transmission to position j.
#Switch o the vehicle.
#Make sure that the vehicle cannot be started.
#Place chocks or other suitable items under the
front and rear of the wheel that is diagonally
opposite the wheel you wish to change.
#If necessary, remove the wheel trim/hub caps
(/ page 381).
#Raise the vehicle (/ page 382).
Removing and tting the wheel trim/hub caps
Requirements
RThe vehicle is prepared for a wheel change
(/ page 381).
Plastic hub cap
To remove:
#Turn the centre cover of the hub cap anti-
clockwise and remove the hub cap.
To t:
#Make sure that the centre cover of the hub
cap is turned anti-clockwise.
#Position the hub cap and turn the centre cover
clockwise until the hub cap engages physically
and audibly.
Wheels and tyres 381
Aluminium hub cap
To remove:
#Position socket 2 from the tyre-change tool
kit on hub cap 1.
#Position wheel spanner 3 on socket 2.
#Using wheel spanner 3, turn hub cap 1
anti-clockwise and remove it.
To t:
#Follow the instructions above in reverse order.
%Specied tightening torque: 25 Nm.
Raising the vehicle when changing a wheel
Requirements:
RThere are no persons in the vehicle.
RThe vehicle has been prepared for a wheel
change (/ page 381).
RThe wheel trims and hub caps have been
removed (/ page 381).
Important notes on using the jack:
RUse only a vehicle-specic jack that has been
approved by Mercedes-Benz to raise the vehi-
cle.
RThe jack is only designed for raising and hold-
ing the vehicle for a short time while a wheel
is being changed and not for maintenance
work under the vehicle.
RThe jack must be placed on a rm, at and
non-slip surface. If necessary, use a large, at,
load-bearing, non-slip underlay.
RThe foot of the jack must be positioned verti-
cally under the jack support point.
Rules of conduct when the vehicle is raised:
RNever place your hands or feet under the vehi-
cle.
RNever lie under the vehicle.
382 Wheels and tyres
RDo not start the vehicle and do not release the
electric parking brake.
RDo not open or close any doors or the boot
lid.
#Using the wheel wrench, loosen the wheel
bolts on the wheel you wish to change by
about one full turn. Do not unscrew the
screws completely.
Position of the jack support points
*NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles
#Observe the notes in the Supplement.
You could otherwise fail to recognise
dangers.
&WARNING Risk of injury from incorrect
positioning of the jack
If you do not position the jack correctly at the
appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the
jack could tip with the vehicle raised.
#Only position the jack at the appropriate
jacking point of the vehicle. The base of
the jack must be positioned vertically
under the jacking point of the vehicle.
*NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to the
jack
If you do not position the jack at the jack sup-
port points provided for this purpose, you
could damage your vehicle.
#Only position the jack at the jack sup-
port points provided for this purpose.
#Take the ratchet out of the tyre-change tool kit
and place it on the hexagon nut of the jack so
that the letters "AUF" are visible.
Wheels and tyres 383
#Position support 2 of jack 4 on jack sup-
port point 1.
%If there is a total loss of pressure in a tyre, it
may be possible that the jack cannot be posi-
tioned at jack support point 1. In this case,
unload the vehicle.
#Turn ratchet 3 clockwise until support 2
sits completely on jack support point 1 and
the base of the jack lies evenly on the ground.
#Turn ratchet 3 until the tyre is raised a maxi-
mum of 3 cm from the ground.
#Loosen and remove the wheel (/ page 384).
Removing a wheel
Requirements
RThe vehicle is raised (/ page 382).
*NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles
#Observe the notes in the Supplement.
You could otherwise fail to recognise
dangers.
When changing a wheel, avoid applying any force
to the brake disks, as this could impair the level of
comfort when braking.
*NOTE Damage to threading from dirt on
wheel bolts
#Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on a
dirty surface.
#Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt com-
pletely.
#Screw centring pin 1 into the thread instead
of the wheel bolt.
#Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts com-
pletely.
#Remove the wheel and, if necessary, store it in
the boot.
384 Wheels and tyres
#Notes on removing an emergency spare wheel
(/ page 386).
Fitting a new wheel
Requirements:
RThe wheel to be changed is removed and the
centring pin is screwed in (/ page 384).
*NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles
#Observe the notes in the Supplement.
You could otherwise fail to recognise
dangers.
&WARNING Risk of accident from losing a
wheel
Oiled or greased wheel bolts can cause the
wheel bolts to come loose, as too can dam-
aged wheel bolts or wheel hub threads.
#Never oil or grease the threads.
#In the event of damage to the threads,
contact a qualied specialist workshop
immediately.
#Have the damaged wheel bolts or dam-
aged hub threads replaced.
#Do not continue driving.
#Observe the information on the choice of tyres
(/ page 376).
For tyres with a specied direction of rotation, an
arrow on the side wall of the tyre indicates the
correct direction of rotation. Observe the direc-
tion of rotation when tting.
#Slide the wheel to be mounted onto the cen-
tring pin and push it on.
#Observe the notes on tting an emergency
spare wheel (/ page 386).
&WARNING Risk of injury from tightening
wheel bolts and nuts
If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts
when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip.
#Only tighten wheel bolts or wheel nuts
when the vehicle is on the ground.
#Observe the instructions and safety notes on
"Changing a wheel" (/ page 376).
#For safety reasons, only use wheel bolts which
have been approved by Mercedes-Benz and
for the wheel in question.
#Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal
pattern in the order indicated until they are
nger-tight.
#Unscrew and remove the centring pin.
#Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is nger-
tight.
#Lower the vehicle (/ page 385).
Lowering the vehicle aer a wheel change
Requirements
RThe new wheel has been tted (/ page 385).
#To lower the vehicle: place the ratchet onto
the hexagon nut of the jack so that the letters
"AB" are visible and turn anti-clockwise.
Wheels and tyres 385
#Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal
pattern in the order indicated 1 to 5 with
an initial maximum force of 80 Nm.
#Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal
pattern in the order indicated 1 to 5 with
the specied tightening torque of 130 Nm.
&WARNING Risk of accident due to incor-
rect tightening torque
The wheels could come loose if the wheel
bolts or wheel nuts are not tightened to the
prescribed torque.
#Ensure that the wheel bolts or wheel
nuts are tightened to the prescribed
tightening torque.
#If you are not sure, do not move the vehi-
cle. Contact a qualied specialist work-
shop and have the tightening torque
checked immediately.
#Check the tyre pressure of the newly tted
wheel and adjust it if necessary.
%The following does not apply if the new wheel
is an emergency spare wheel.
#Vehicles with a tyre pressure loss warning sys-
tem: restart the tyre pressure loss warning
system (/ page 376).
#Vehicles with a tyre pressure monitoring sys-
tem: restart the tyre pressure monitoring sys-
tem (/ page 375).
Emergency spare wheel
Notes on the emergency spare wheel
&WARNING Risk of accident caused by
incorrect wheel and tyre dimensions
The wheel or tyre size and the tyre type of the
emergency spare wheel or spare wheel and
the wheel to be replaced may dier. The emer-
gency spare wheel or spare wheel can signi-
cantly impair driving characteristics of the
vehicle.
To prevent hazardous situations:
#Drive carefully.
#Never t more than one emergency
spare wheel or spare wheel that diers
in size.
#Only use an emergency spare wheel or
spare wheel briey.
#Do not deactivate ESP®.
#Have the emergency spare wheel or
spare wheel of a dierent size replaced
at the nearest qualied specialist work-
386 Wheels and tyres
shop. The new wheel must have the cor-
rect dimensions.
%The emergency spare wheel is secured in the
emergency spare wheel bag in the boot.
Observe the following notes on removing an emer-
gency spare wheel:
RBefore stowing the emergency spare wheel,
make sure there is no air le in the tyre.
If necessary, allow the air to escape.
RTo release air from the tyre: remove the valve
cap of the tyre.
RPress down the metal insert in the valve using
a pointed object, e.g. a pen.
RScrew the valve cap onto the valve.
Observe the following notes on tting an emer-
gency spare wheel:
RThe maximum permissible speed with an
emergency spare wheel tted is 80 km/h.
RDo not t the emergency spare wheel with
snow chains.
RReplace the emergency spare wheel aer six
years at the latest, regardless of wear.
RUse the wheel bolts that are included with the
emergency spare wheel.
RCheck the tyre pressure of the emergency
spare wheel tted. Correct the pressure as
necessary.
%The specied tyre pressure is stated on the
label of the emergency spare wheel.
%Vehicles with a tyre pressure loss warning
system: if an emergency spare wheel is tted,
the tyre pressure loss warning system cannot
function reliably. Only restart the system
again when the emergency spare wheel has
been replaced with a new wheel.
Vehicles with a tyre pressure monitoring sys-
tem: if an emergency spare wheel is tted, the
tyre pressure monitoring system cannot func-
tion reliably. For a few minutes aer an emer-
gency spare wheel is tted, the system may
still display the tyre pressure of the removed
wheel. Only restart the system again when the
emergency spare wheel has been replaced
with a new wheel.
Be sure to also observe the following further rela-
ted subjects:
RNotes on tyre pressure (/ page 372)
RTyre pressure table (/ page 373)
RNotes on tting tyres (/ page 376)
RFitting an emergency spare wheel
(/ page 381)
Inating the emergency spare wheel
*NOTE Overheating due to the tyre ination
compressor running too long
#Do not run the tyre ination compressor
for longer than ten minutes without inter-
ruption.
Requirements:
RThe emergency spare wheel has been tted
correctly. (/ page 381)
%Comply with the manufacturer's safety notes
on the sticker of the emergency spare wheel
and on the tyre ination compressor.
Wheels and tyres 387
#Remove the sticker with the label 80 km/h
from the tyre ination compressor housing
and ax it to the instrument cluster within the
driver's eld of vision.
#Remove the tyre ination compressor from the
stowage well under the boot oor
(/ page 349, 350).
#Pull ller hose 1 and plug 3 out of the tyre
ination compressor housing.
#Insert plug 7 of ller hose 1 in the socket
on the tyre ination compressor and then turn
it until plug 7 engages.
#Unscrew the cap from the valve on the emer-
gency spare wheel.
#Screw union nut 2 of ller hose 1 onto the
valve.
#Make sure on and o switch 4 of the tyre
ination compressor is set to 0.
#Insert plug 3 in a socket in your vehicle.
R12 V socket (/ page 121)
RObserve the notes on sockets (/ page 121).
#Press the start/stop button once to switch on
the power supply (/ page 156).
#Press On/O switch 4 on the tyre ination
compressor to I.
The tyre ination compressor is switched on.
The tyre is inated. The tyre pressure is shown
on manometer 5.
#Pump the tyre to the specied tyre pressure.
%The specied tyre pressure is stated on the
label of the emergency spare wheel.
#When the specied tyre pressure has been
reached, press on and o switch 4 on the
tyre ination compressor to 0.
The tyre ination compressor is switched o.
#Press the start/stop button to switch o the
power supply.
#If the tyre pressure is higher than the specied
pressure, press pressure release valve button
6 until the correct tyre pressure has been
reached.
#Unscrew union nut 2 of ller hose 1 from
the valve.
#Screw the valve cap of the emergency spare
wheel onto the valve again.
#Stow ller hose 1 and plug 3 in the lower
section of the tyre ination compressor hous-
ing.
#Stow the tyre ination compressor in the vehi-
cle.
388 Wheels and tyres
Notes on technical data
*NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles
#Observe the notes in the Supplement.
You could otherwise fail to recognise
dangers.
The technical data was determined in accordance
with EU Directives. The data stated only applies to
vehicles with standard equipment. You can obtain
further information from a Mercedes-Benz Service
Centre.
Only for certain countries: you can nd vehicle-
specic vehicle data in the COC documents (CER-
TIFICATE OF CONFORMITY). These documents
are supplied when the vehicle is delivered.
On-board electronics
Notes on tampering with the engine electronics
*NOTE Premature wear through improper
maintenance
Improper maintenance may cause vehicle
components to wear more quickly and the
vehicle's operating permit may be invalidated.
#Always have work on the engine elec-
tronics and related components carried
out at a qualied specialist workshop.
Two-way radios
Notes on tting two-way radios
&WARNING Risk of accident due to
improper work on two-way radios
If two-way radios are manipulated or retrot-
ted incorrectly, the electromagnetic radiation
from the two-way radios can interfere with the
vehicle electronics and jeopardise the operat-
ing safety of the vehicle.
#You should have all work on electrical
and electronic components carried out
at a qualied specialist workshop.
&WARNING Risk of accident due to
improper operation of two-way radios
If you use two-way radios in the vehicle
improperly, their electromagnetic radiation
can disrupt the vehicle's electronics. This is
the case in the following situations, in particu-
lar:
RThe two-way radio is not connected to an
exterior aerial.
RThe exterior aerial is tted incorrectly or is
not a low-reection aerial.
This could jeopardise the operating safety of
the vehicle.
#Have the low-reection exterior aerial t-
ted at a qualied specialist workshop.
#When operating two-way radios in the
vehicle, always connect them to the low-
reection exterior aerial.
Technical data 389
*NOTE Invalidation of the operating permit
due to failure to comply with the instruc-
tions for installation and use
The operating permit may be invalidated if the
instructions for installation and use of two-way
radios are not observed.
#Only use approved frequency bands.
#Observe the maximum permissible out-
put power in these frequency bands.
#Only use approved aerial positions.
1Front roof area
2Rear roof area
3Rear wings
4Boot lid
On vehicles with a panorama sliding sunroof, it is
not permitted to t an aerial to the front or rear
roof area.
On the rear wings, it is recommended that you t
the aerial on the side of the vehicle closest to the
centre of the road.
Use Technical Specication ISO/TS 21609 (Road
Vehicles – "EMC guidelines for installation of
aermarket radio frequency transmitting equip-
ment") when retrotting two-way radios. Comply
with the legal requirements for detachable parts.
If your vehicle has pre-installation for two-way
radio equipment, use the power supply and aerial
connectors provided in the pre-installation.
Observe the manufacturer's supplements when
tting.
Two-way radio transmission output
The maximum transmission output (PEAK) at the
base of the aerial must not exceed the values in
the following table.
390 Technical data
Frequency band and maximum transmission out-
put
Frequency band Maximum transmis-
sion output
Short wave
3 - 54 MHz
100 W
4‑m‑ frequency band
74 - 88 MHz
30 W
2‑m‑ frequency band
144 - 174 MHz
50 W
Terrestrial Trunked
Radio (TETRA)
380 - 460 MHz
10 W
70‑cm‑ frequency
band
420 - 450 MHz
35 W
Two-way radio
(2G/3G/4G) 10 W
The following can be used in the vehicle without
restrictions:
Rtwo-way radios with a maximum transmission
output of up to 100 mW
RRF transmitters with transmitter frequencies in
the 380 - 410 MHz frequency band and a
maximum transmission output of up to 2 W
(TETRA)
Rmobile phones (2G/3G/4G)
There are no restrictions when positioning the
aerial on the outside of the vehicle for the follow-
ing frequency bands:
RTerrestrial Trunked Radio (TETRA)
R70‑cm‑ frequency band
R2G/3G/4G
Notes on pyrotechnical vehicle components
Registration information on pyrotechnic actuators
Manufacturer information:
Autoliv NCS Pyrotechnie et Technologies, Rue de
la Cartoucherie, 95470 Survilliers, France
Registration number:
2806 – P1 – 004163
Model designation:
PSS-1, PSS-2, PSS-3, PSS-4, PSS-6, PSS-6 Gen.1,
PSS-6 Gen.2
Technical data 391
Regulatory radio information
Specic information on wireless applications in
accordance with 2014/53/EU
Besides the typical frequencies for mobile com-
munication cars by Mercedes-Benz make use of
the following automotive radio applications.
Type of wireless applications and specications in accordance with 2014/53/EU
Technology Frequency range Transmission output/magnetic eld strength
Remote Keyless Entry 20 kHz (9–90 kHz) ≤ 72 dBμA/m at 10m
Wireless Power Transmission 105 kHz (90–119 kHz) ≤ 42 dBμA/m at 10m
Remote Keyless Entry 120 kHz (119–135 kHz) ≤ 42 dBμA/m at 10m
Wireless Power Transmission 127 kHz (119–135 kHz) ≤ 66 dBμA/m at 10m with the magnetic eld
strength level decreasing 3dB/octave above 119
kHz
Near-eld communication 13.553–13.567 MHz ≤ 42 dBμA/m at 10m
Remote Keyless Entry, Garage Door Opener, Tire
Pressure Monitoring 433 MHz (433.05–434.79 MHz) ≤ 10 mW ERP
392 Technical data
Technology Frequency range Transmission output/magnetic eld strength
Block Heater Remote Control, Garage Door
Opener 868 MHz (868.0–868.6 MHz) ≤ 25 mW ERP
Block Heater Remote Control, Garage Door
Opener 869 MHz (868.7–869.2 MHz) ≤ 25 mW ERP
Bluetooth, Kleer, RLAN, wireless Headphones 2.4 GHz ISM band (2400–2483.5 MHz) ≤ 100 mW EIRP
RLAN 5.1 GHz UNII-1 (5150–5250 MHz) ≤ 25 mW EIRP
Interior Monitoring Radar, RLAN 5.8 GHz UNII-3 (5725–5875 MHz) ≤ 25 mW EIRP
Remote Keyless Entry 7.25 GHz UWB (6.0–8.5 GHz) ≤ -41.3 dBm/MHz EIRP mean ≤ 0 dBm/MHz
EIRP peak
76 GHz radar 76–77 GHz ≤ 55 dBm peak EIRP
Carsharing Module NFC:
13.553–13.567 MHz
Bluetooth®:
2402–2480 MHz
NFC:
≤ 42 dBμA/m at 10 m
Bluetooth®:
≤ +4 dBm (class 2)
Technical data 393
Technology Frequency range Transmission output/magnetic eld strength
Rear Seat Entertainment System Bluetooth®:
2400–2483.5 MHz
WLAN 2.4 GHZ:
2400–2483.5 MHz
WLAN 5 GHz:
5150–5250 MHz
5725–5875 MHz
Bluetooth®:
-0.8 dBm
WLAN 2.4 GHZ:
14.5 dBm
WLAN 5 GHz:
20.5 dBm
13.3 dBm
Two-way radio (Tel7 telephone control unit) E-GSM (900 MHz)
GSM (1800 MHz)
+33 dBm
+30 dBm
UMTS (Band I, III, VIII) +24 dBm (+1/-3 dB)
LTE (Band 1, 3, 7, 8, 20, 28) +23 dBm (±2 dB)
HERMES (Hardware for Enhanced Remote, Mobi-
lity & Emergency Services) WLAN (2400-2483.5 MHz)
WLAN (5736-5833 MHz)
< 20 dBm
< 14 dBm
394 Technical data
Technology Frequency range Transmission output/magnetic eld strength
GSM (E-GSM 900, Class 4)
GSM (E-GSM 1800, Class 1)
GSM (E-GSM 900 8-PSK, Class E2)
GSM (E-GSM 1800 8-PSK, Class E2)
< +33 dBm (±2 dB)
< +30 dBm (±2 dB)
< +27 dBm (±3 dB)
< +26 dBm (± 3 dB/-4 dB)
UMTS (2100 WCDMA FDD B1, Class 3) < +24 dBm (±1 dB/-3 dB)
LTE (FDD B I, B III, B38, B39, B40, B41, Class 3) < +23 dBm (±2 dB)
GPS (1575.42 MHz +/- 2 MHz) Receiving only
RAMSES (Router And Mobile SErviceS) GSM (E-GSM 850 / E-GSM 900, Class 4)
GSM (E-GSM 1800 / E-GSM 1900, Class 4)
< +32.5 dBm (±1 dB)
< +29.5 dBm (±1 dB)
UMTS (WCDMA FDD I, II, III, IV, V, VIII, XIX, Class
3) < +23.5 dBm (±1 dB)
LTE (FDD B1, B2, B3, B4, B5, B7, B8, B9, B18,
B19, B21, B28, Class 3) < +23 dBm (±1 dB)
LTE (TDD B38, B40, B41, Class 3) < +23 dBm (±1 dB)
GNSS (1559–1610 MHz) Receiving only
Technical data 395
Regulatory radio identiers and specic notes
Manufacturer information about radio-based vehi-
cle components can be found using the key
phrase "Regulatory radio information" in the Digi-
tal Owner's Manual in the vehicle, on the internet
and in the app.
Information about the specic absorption rate
(SAR)
Information about the specic absorption rate
(SAR) can be found using the key phrase "Regula-
tory radio information" in the Digital Owner's Man-
ual in the vehicle, on the internet and in the app.
Importer information for regulatory radio compo-
nents
Importer information about radio-based vehicle
components can be found using the key phrase
"Regulatory radio information" in the Digital Own-
er's Manual in the vehicle, on the internet and in
the app.
Vehicle identication plate, VIN and engine num-
ber overview
Vehicle identication plate
Vehicle identication plate (example: Kuwait)
1Vehicle manufacturer
2Place of manufacture
3Manufacturing date
4Vehicle model
5VIN
396 Technical data
Vehicle identication plate (example: all other
countries)
1Vehicle manufacturer
2EU general operating permit number (only for
certain countries)
3VIN (vehicle identication number)
4Maximum permissible gross vehicle weight
(kg)
5Maximum permissible gross weight of vehicle
combination (kg) (only for specic countries)
6Maximum permissible front axle load (kg)
7Maximum permissible rear axle load (kg)
8Paint code
%The data shown in the illustration is example
data.
VIN and engine number
1Engine number stamped into the crankcase
2VIN (vehicle identication number) stamped
into the crossmember
3VIN (vehicle identication number) as a label
at the lower edge of the windscreen
Only for certain countries: the VIN as a label at
the lower edge of windscreen 3 is only available
in some countries. Further information can be
obtained at a qualied specialist workshop.
Technical data 397
Operating uids
Notes on operating uids
*NOTE Mercedes-AMG vehicles
#Observe the notes in the Supplement.
You could otherwise fail to recognise
dangers.
&WARNING Risk of injury due to harmful
operating uids
Operating uids can be toxic.
#When using, storing and disposing of
operating uids, observe the imprints on
the respective original containers.
#Always keep operating uids in the
sealed original container.
#Always keep children away from operat-
ing uids.
+ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Pollution of the
environment due to irresponsible disposal
of operating uids
Incorrect disposal of operating uids can
cause considerable damage to the environ-
ment.
#Dispose of operating uids in an environ-
mentally responsible manner.
Operating uids include the following:
Rfuels
RDeNOx agent AdBlue® for exhaust gas aer-
treatment
Rlubricants
RCoolant
RBrake uid
Rwindscreen washer uid
Rclimate control system refrigerant
Only use products approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Damage caused by the use of products that have
not been approved is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz warranty or goodwill gestures.
The operating uids approved by Mercedes-Benz
can be identied by the following inscriptions on
the container:
RMB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51)
RMB-Approval (e.g. MB-Approval 229.51)
Further information on approved operating uids:
Rin the Mercedes-Benz Specications for Oper-
ating Fluids by entering the designation
-At https://operatinguids.mercedes-
benz.com
RAt a qualied specialist workshop
&WARNING Risk of re or explosion from
fuel
Fuels are highly ammable.
#Fire, naked ames, smoking and creating
sparks must be avoided.
#Before and during refuelling, switch o
the vehicle and, if tted, the stationary
heater.
398 Technical data
&WARNING Risk of injury from fuels
Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to your
health.
#Do not swallow fuel or let it come into
contact with skin, eyes or clothing.
#Do not inhale fuel vapour.
#Keep children away from fuel.
#Keep doors and windows closed during
the refuelling process.
If you or other people come into contact with
fuel, observe the following:
#Immediately rinse fuel o your skin with
soap and water.
#If fuel comes into contact with your eyes,
immediately rinse them thoroughly with
clean water. Seek medical attention
immediately.
#If you swallow fuel, seek medical atten-
tion immediately. Do not induce vomit-
ing.
#Change immediately out of clothing that
has come into contact with fuel.
Flexible-fuel vehicles can be refuelled with the fol-
lowing fuel types:
Runleaded petrol
RE85 fuel
Ra mixture of E85 fuel and unleaded petrol
Flexible-fuel vehicles can be identied by the
Ethanol up to E85 sticker on the inside of the fuel
ller ap.
Depending on the country, the fuels you can use
in your vehicle may dier from the information in
the Owner's Manual. The fuels that have been
approved for your vehicle can be found on the
instruction label on the inside of the fuel ller ap.
Fuel
Information on fuel quality for vehicles with pet-
rol engines
Note the instructions about operating uids
(/ page 398).
*NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel
Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could
result in damage to the fuel system, the
engine and the emission control system.
#Only refuel using unleaded, sulphur-free
spark-ignition engine fuel that conforms
to European EN 228, or an equivalent
specication.
Fuel of this specication may contain up to
10% ethanol by volume. Your vehicle is suita-
ble for use with E10 fuel.
#See the information label in fuel ller ap
for other compatible fuels .
Never refuel with one of the following fuels:
RDiesel
RRegular petrol with an octane number
lower than 91 RON
RPetrol with more than 3% methanol by vol-
ume, e.g. M15, M30
RPetrol with additives containing metal
Technical data 399
If you have accidentally refuelled with the
wrong fuel:
#Do not switch on the vehicle.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
The following compatibility indications for fuel
apply to your vehicle:
1For petrol with a maximum of 5% ethanol by
volume
2For petrol with a maximum of 10% ethanol by
volume
The compatibility indications for fuel on the vehi-
cle according to European standard EN 16942
can be found on the information label on the fuel
ller ap or on the fuel dispenser or pump nozzle
suitable for your vehicle throughout Europe.
If the available fuel is not suciently low in sul-
phur, it may produce unpleasant odours.
The recommended octane number for your vehi-
cle can be found on the information label on the
fuel ller ap.
If the recommended fuel is not available, you may
also temporarily use regular unleaded petrol with
an octane number of at least 91 RON. This may
reduce engine output and increase fuel consump-
tion.
Never refuel using petrol with an even lower RON.
Further information on fuel can be obtained at a
lling station or a qualied specialist workshop.
Information on additives in petrol (vehicles with
petrol engine)
Observe the notes on operating uids
(/ page 398).
*NOTE Damage from use of unsuitable
additives
Even small amounts of the wrong additive may
lead to malfunctions occurring.
#Only add cleaning additives recommen-
ded by Mercedes-Benz to the fuel.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use brand-
name fuels with additives.
In some countries, the fuel available may not have
sucient additives. Deposits could build up in the
fuel injection system as a result. In this case, in
consultation with a qualied specialist workshop
(e.g. a Mercedes-Benz service centre), mix the
fuel with the cleaning additive recommended by
Mercedes-Benz. Observe the notes and mixing
ratios indicated on the tank.
Information on fuel quality for vehicles with a
diesel engine
General notes
Observe the notes on operating uids
(/ page 398).
400 Technical data
&WARNING Risk of re from fuel mixture
If you mix diesel fuel with petrol, the ash
point of the fuel mixture is lower than that of
pure diesel fuel.
#Never refuel using petrol in diesel
engines.
#Never mix petrol with diesel fuel.
*NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel
Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could
result in damage to the fuel system, the
engine and the emission control system.
Vehicles with a diesel particulate lter:
#Only refuel using sulphur-free diesel fuel
that conforms to European standard
EN 590, or an equivalent specication.
In countries without sulphur-free diesel
fuel, refuel using only low-sulphur diesel
fuel with a sulphur content less than
50 ppm.
Vehicle without diesel particulate lter:
#Only refuel using diesel fuel with a sul-
phur content less than 500 ppm.
Never refuel with one of the following fuels:
RPetrol
RMarine diesel
RHeating oil
RPure fatty acid methyl ester or vegetable
oil
RParan or kerosene
If you have accidentally refuelled with the
wrong fuel:
#Do not switch on the vehicle.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
The following compatibility indications for fuel
apply to your vehicle:
1For diesel fuel with a maximum of 7% fatty
acid methyl ester by volume (bio-diesel)
2For diesel fuel with a maximum of 10% fatty
acid methyl ester by volume (bio-diesel)
According to European standard EN 16942 you
can nd the compatibility indications at the fol-
lowing locations:
ROn the vehicle on the information label on the
fuel ller ap (/ page 180)
ROn the fuel dispenser or pump nozzle suitable
for your vehicle throughout Europe
Technical data 401
Information on low outside temperatures
Refuel your vehicle with as much winter diesel fuel
as possible at the beginning of winter.
Before changing over to winter diesel fuel, the fuel
tank should be empty, if possible. When rst refu-
elling with winter diesel fuel, keep the fuel level
low, e.g. to reserve level. The fuel tank can be l-
led as usual when next refuelling.
Further information on fuel can be obtained at a
lling station or a qualied specialist workshop.
Tank content and fuel reserve
Not for plug-in hybrid:
The total capacity of the fuel tank may vary,
depending on the vehicle equipment.
Total fuel tank capacity
Model
A 220 d
A 220 4MATIC
A 250 4MATIC
51.0 litres
All other models 43.0 litres
Fuel tank reserve
Model
All models 5.0 litres
Total fuel tank capacity (plug-in hybrid)
Model
A 250 e 35.0 litres
Fuel tank reserve (plug-in hybrid)
Model
A 250 e 5.0 litres
AdBlue® (vehicles with a diesel engine only)
Notes on AdBlue®
Observe the notes on operating uids
(/ page 398).
AdBlue® is a water-soluble uid for the NOx
exhaust gas aertreatment of diesel engines.
It may be improper or punishable in some coun-
tries to operate a vehicle that uses no AdBlue® or
one that does not comply with the specications
of this Owner's Manual.
*NOTE Malfunctions due to the dilution of
AdBlue® or the use of additive-enhanced
AdBlue®
The function of the NOx exhaust gas aer-
treatment can be impaired by the use of
unsuitable denoxication agents.
#Only use AdBlue® in accordance with
ISO 22241.
#Do not dilute AdBlue® with water.
#Do not use additive-enhanced AdBlue®.
*NOTE Damage and malfunctions due to
impurities in AdBlue®
Consequences of impurities in AdBlue®:
Rincreased emission values
Rdamage to the catalytic converter
RNOx exhaust gas aertreatment malfunc-
tions
402 Technical data
#Avoid impurities in AdBlue®.
AdBlue® residues crystallise aer a period of
time, and contaminate the surfaces with which
they come into contact. Clean the dirty surfaces
with water as soon as possible.
When you open the AdBlue® tank, small amounts
of ammonia vapour may escape. Do not inhale
any ammonia vapours that may be released. Only
ll the AdBlue® tank in well-ventilated areas.
AdBlue® lling capacity and consumption
Total capacity of AdBlue® tank
Model Total capacity
All models 23.8 litres
AdBlue® consumption
The average AdBlue® consumption is between 1%
and 5% of fuel consumption. Like fuel consump-
tion, AdBlue® consumption is highly dependent
upon driving style and operating conditions. For
this reason, your vehicle's actual consumption g-
ures in day-to-day operating conditions may dier
from the average consumption gures calculated.
The frequency at which you will have to top up
AdBlue® will also vary. Have the AdBlue® supply
checked at a qualied specialist workshop before
making journeys outside Europe. Before a longer
stay outside Europe, consult a qualied specialist
workshop.
AdBlue® ll level and range
The AdBlue® ll level and range can be displayed
via the on-board computer. The AdBlue® range
shown depends strongly on the driving style and
operating conditions. The actual range may there-
fore deviate from the range currently displayed on
the on-board computer. The information supplied
in the Owner's Manual regarding the reserve
quantity at the rst display warning and the mini-
mum top-up quantity when the fuel tank is empty
is also to be understood as guide values.
Engine oil
Notes on engine oil
Observe the notes on operating uids
(/ page 398).
*NOTE Engine damage caused by an incor-
rect oil lter, incorrect oil or additives
#Do not use engine oils or oil lters other
than those which meet the specications
necessary for the prescribed service
intervals.
#Do not alter the engine oil or oil lter in
order to achieve longer change intervals
than prescribed.
#Do not use additives.
#Have the engine oil changed aer the
prescribed intervals.
Technical data 403
Mercedes-Benz recommends having the oil
changed at a qualied specialist workshop.
Only use engine oils approved for your vehicle by
Mercedes-Benz.
Engine oil quality and lling capacity
Not for plug-in hybrid:
Engine oil specication (petrol engines)
Model MB-Freigabe or MB-
Approval
A 180
A 200
229.71, 229.72,
229.811)
All other models 229.71, 229.721)
1) Recommended for the lowest possible fuel consumption (lowest
SAE viscosity class in each case; observe possible restrictions of
the approved SAE viscosity classes)
Engine oil specication (diesel engines)
Model MB-Freigabe or MB-
Approval
All models 229.52, 229.61,
229.71, 229.721)
1) Recommended for the lowest possible fuel consumption (lowest
SAE viscosity class in each case; observe possible restrictions of
the approved SAE viscosity classes)
To achieve the lowest possible fuel consumption,
it is recommended to use the engine oil specica-
tions marked in the table with the lowest SAE vis-
cosity class. Observe any possible restrictions of
the approved SAE viscosity classes.
%If the engine oils listed in the table are not
available, you may add a maximum of 1.0 litre
of the following engine oils once only.
Vehicles with petrol engines: MB-Freigabe or
MB-Approval 229.51, 229.52, 229.61 or
ACEA C5
Vehicles with diesel engines: ACEA C3
Not for plug-in hybrid:
Engine oil lling capacity
Model Capacity
A 180
A 200
5.1 litres
A 220 4MATIC
A 250 4MATIC
5.0 litres
All other models 6.8 litres
The specied lling capacity refers to an oil
change with the oil lter.
Engine oil specication (plug-in hybrid)
Model MB-Freigabe or MB-
Approval
A 250 e 229.71, 229.72,
229.811)
1) Recommended for the lowest possible fuel consumption (lowest
SAE viscosity class in each case; observe possible restrictions of
the approved SAE viscosity classes)
404 Technical data
To achieve the lowest possible fuel consumption,
it is recommended to use the engine oil specica-
tions marked in the table with the lowest SAE vis-
cosity class. Observe any possible restrictions of
the approved SAE viscosity classes.
%If the engine oils listed in the table are not
available, you may add a maximum of 1.0 l of
engine oils with MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval
229.51, 229.52, 229.61 or ACEA C5 once
only.
Engine oil lling capacity (plug-in hybrid)
Model Capacity
A 250 e 4.5 litres
The specied lling capacity refers to an oil
change with the oil lter.
Notes on brake uid
Observe the notes on operating uids
(/ page 398).
&WARNING Risk of an accident due to
vapour pockets forming in the brake sys-
tem
The brake uid constantly absorbs moisture
from the air. This lowers the boiling point of
the brake uid. If the boiling point is too low,
vapour pockets may form in the brake system
when the brakes are applied hard.
This impairs the braking eect.
#Have the brake uid renewed at the
specied intervals.
Have the brake uid regularly replaced at a quali-
ed specialist workshop.
Only use a brake uid approved by Mercedes-
Benz according to MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval
331.0.
Coolant
Notes on coolant
Observe the notes on operating uids
(/ page 398).
&WARNING Risk of re‑ and injury from
antifreeze
If antifreeze comes into contact with hot com-
ponent parts in the engine compartment, it
may ignite.
#Allow the engine to cool down before
you top up the antifreeze.
#Make sure that no antifreeze spills out
next to the ller opening.
#Thoroughly clean the antifreeze from
component parts before starting the
vehicle.
*NOTE Damage caused by incorrect cool-
ant
#Only use coolant that has been premixed
with the required antifreeze protection.
Information on coolant is available at the fol-
lowing locations:
RIn the Mercedes-Benz Specication for
Operating Fluids 320.1
Technical data 405
-At https://operatinguids.mercedes-
benz.com
RAt a qualied specialist workshop
*NOTE Overheating at high outside temper-
atures
If an inappropriate coolant is used, the cooling
system is not suciently protected against
overheating and corrosion at high outside
temperatures.
#Only use coolant approved for
Mercedes-Benz.
#Observe the instructions in the
Mercedes-Benz Specications for Oper-
ating Fluids 320.1.
Have the coolant regularly replaced at a qualied
specialist workshop.
Proportion of antifreeze concentrate in the cool-
ing system:
RA minimum of 50% (antifreeze protection down
to about -37°C)
RA maximum of 55% (antifreeze protection
down to -45°C)
Notes on windscreen washer uid
Observe the notes on operating uids
(/ page 398).
&WARNING ‑ Risk of re and injury due to
windscreen washer concentrate
Windscreen washer concentrate is highly am-
mable. It could ignite if it comes into contact
with hot engine component parts or the
exhaust system.
#Make sure that no windscreen washer
concentrate spills out next to the ller
opening.
*NOTE Damage to the exterior lighting due
to unsuitable windscreen washer uid
Unsuitable windscreen washer uids may
damage the plastic surface of the exterior
lighting.
#Only use windscreen washer uids which
are also suitable for use on plastic surfa-
ces, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB WinterFit.
*NOTE Blocked spray nozzles caused by
mixing windscreen washer uids
#Do not mix MB SummerFit and MB Win-
terFit with other windscreen washer u-
ids.
Do not use distilled or de-ionised water. Other-
wise, the ll level sensor may be triggered errone-
ously.
Recommended windscreen washer uid:
Rabove freezing point: e.g. MB SummerFit
Rbelow freezing point: e.g. MB WinterFit
For the correct mixing ratio, refer to the informa-
tion on the antifreeze container.
Mix washer uid with windscreen washer uid all
year round.
406 Technical data
Vehicle data
Vehicle dimensions
The heights specied may vary as a result of the
following factors:
RTyres
RLoad
RCondition of the suspension
ROptional equipment
Not for plug-in hybrid:
Vehicle height
Models
A 200 d
A 220 4MATIC
A 250 4MATIC
1451 mm
All other models 1446 mm
Vehicle dimensions
All models
Vehicle length 4458 mm
Vehicle width includ-
ing exterior mirrors 1992 mm
Vehicle width exclud-
ing exterior mirrors 1796 mm
Wheelbase 2729 mm
Vehicle dimensions (plug-in hybrid)
A 250 e
Vehicle length 4458 mm
Vehicle width includ-
ing exterior mirrors 1992 mm
Vehicle width exclud-
ing exterior mirrors 1796 mm
Vehicle height 1458 mm
Wheelbase 2729 mm
Weights and loads
Please observe the following notes for the speci-
ed vehicle data:
RItems of optional equipment increase the unla-
den weight and reduce the payload.
RVehicle-specic weight information can be
found on the vehicle identication plate
(/ page 396).
Roof load
Model Maximum roof load
All models 75 kg
Maximum design speeds
The maximum design speed can dier from the
stated gures in practice. It depends on the oper-
ating conditions, the optional equipment and the
size of the tyres.
Not for Mercedes-AMG vehicles:
Missing values were not available at the time of
going to press.
Technical data 407
Maximum design speed
Model
All models
High-voltage battery (plug-in hybrid)
Notes on the power supply for vehicles with high-
voltage battery
In accordance with European standard
EN 17186:2019, vehicle identiers are located on
the vehicle in the following places:
ROn the inside of the socket ap
ROn the charging cable connector
In addition, charging stations in European coun-
tries are equipped with energy supply identiers.
You can recharge your vehicle at charging stations
whose charging station identier corresponds to
the vehicle identier.
For further information on charging the high-volt-
age battery, refer to the "Charging the high-volt-
age battery" section(/ page 187).
1Supply type: AC
Standard: EN 62196-2
Design: type 2
Plug type: charging cable socket and vehicle
plug
Voltage range: 480 V RMS
2Supply type: DC
Standard: EN 62196-3
Design: FF
Plug type: charging cable socket and vehicle
plug
Voltage range: 50 V to 500 V
3Supply type: DC
Standard: EN 62196-3
Design: FF
Plug type: charging cable socket and vehicle
plug
Voltage range: 200 V to 920 V
Missing values were not available at the time of
going to press.
Energy content and charging times
A 250 e
Type Lithium-ion
Maximum energy con-
tent 15.6 kWh
Range in all-electric
mode
Charging time – mode
4
with 22 kW charging
capacity
Approx. 25 min
408 Technical data
A 250 e
Charging time – mode
3
with 11 kW charging
capacity
Approx. 1 h 15 min
Charging time – mode
3
with 3.7 kW charging
capacity1)
Approx. 3 h 30 min
Charging time – mode
2
with 1.8 kW charging
capacity
Approx. 7 h 30 min
1) Charging possible with a capacity of 7.4 kW (single-phase) with a
current of 32 A, results in extended charging time.
–Mode 2 – charging time and mode 3 charging
time apply to AC charging from 0 % to 100 % of
the usable energy content. Charging time –mode
4 applies to DC charging from 10 % to 80 % of the
usable energy content.
The time taken to charge the battery depends on
the state of charge of the battery, the ambient
temperature and the charging capacity of the bat-
tery. The charging capacity, in turn, depends on
the supply voltage, the current intensity and the
type of power supply.
The nominal voltage range for your vehicle can be
found on the information label in the socket cover
(/ page 187).
Trailer hitch
General notes on the trailer hitch
Modications to the cooling system may be nec-
essary, depending on the vehicle model. The ret-
rotting of a trailer hitch is only permissible if a
towing capacity is specied in your vehicle docu-
ments.
Further information can be obtained at a qualied
specialist workshop.
Mounting dimensions of the trailer hitch
1Fastening points
2Overhang dimension
3Rear axle centre line
Technical data 409
The overhang dimension and fastening points are
valid for a trailer hitch installed at the factory.
Overhang dimension length
Model 2 Overhang dimen-
sion
All models 1013 mm
Towing capacity
%The drawbar load is not included in the towing
capacity.
The values for the trailer load, braked trailer
apply with a minimum start-o climbing ability
of 12 %.
Not for plug-in hybrid:
Missing values were not available at the time of
going to press.
Towing capacity, braked
Model
A 180
A 180 d
1400 kg
A 220 4MATIC
A 250 4MATIC
1800 kg
All other models 1600 kg
Towing capacity, unbraked
Model
A 180
A 200
All other models 750 kg
Towing capacity, braked (plug-in hybrid)
Model
A 250 e 1600 kg
Towing capacity, unbraked (plug-in hybrid)
Model
A 250 e 750 kg
Maximum tongue weight ‑and load capacity
*NOTE Damage caused by the trailer com-
ing loose
If the tongue weight used is too low, the trailer
may come loose.
#The tongue weight must not be below
50 kg.
#Use a tongue weight that is as close as
possible to the maximum permissible
tongue weight.
*NOTE Damage caused by the bicycle rack
coming loose
When using a bicycle rack, both the maximal
tongue weight and the maximal load capacity
should be observed.
410 Technical data
#Do not exceed the permissible load
capacity.
Observe the additional notes on load capacity
(/ page 272).
Tongue weight
Model Maximum tongue
weight
All models 80 kg
Load capacity
All models Maximum load
When attaching the
bicycle carrier to the
ball head
up to 75 kg
Permissible rear axle load (trailer operation)
Not for plug-in hybrid:
Missing values were not available at the time of
going to press.
Axle load when towing trailer
Model Axle load
A 180
A 180 d 1020 kg
A 200 1010 kg
A 200 d
A 220 d
1035 kg
A 220 4MATIC
A 250 4MATIC 1045 kg
Missing values were not available at the time of
going to press.
Axle load when towing trailer (plug-in hybrid)
Model Axle load
A 250 e
Technical data 411
Display messages
Introduction
Information about display messages
Display messages appear on the driver's display.
Display messages with graphical symbols are sim-
plied in the Owner's Manual and may dier from
the symbols on the driver's display. The driver's
display shows high-priority display messages in
red. Certain display messages are accompanied
by a warning tone.
Please act in accordance with the display mes-
sages and follow the additional notes in the Own-
er's Manual.
For some display messages, symbols will also be
shown:
RÕ Further information
R¨ Hide display message
With the le-hand Touch Control, you can select
the respective symbol by swiping to the le or
right. Pressing Õ displays further information on
the central display. Press the ¨ symbol to hide
the display message.
Display messages to be acknowledged can be hid-
den by pressing the back button G or with the
le-hand Touch Control. The display messages will
then be stored in the message memory.
Rectify the cause of a display message as quickly
as possible.
High-priority display messages cannot be hidden.
The driver's display will show these display mes-
sages continuously until the cause of the display
message has been rectied.
Calling up saved display messages
Driver's display:
4Service
The Message memory: XXmessage appears on
the driver's display.
#Scroll through the display messages by swip-
ing upwards or downwards on the le-hand
Touch Control.
#To exit the display: press the G back but-
ton.
412 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Occupant safety
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
6
Restraint system malfunc-
tion Consult workshop
* The restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 41).
&WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system
Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as intended in an accident.
#Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualied specialist workshop.
Plug-in hybrid:
&DANGER Risk of fatal injuries due to restraint system malfunctions
Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident. In
the event of an accident, the high-voltage on-board electrical system may not be deactivated as intended.
You may suer an electric shock if you touch the damaged components of the high-voltage on-board electrical
system.
#Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualied specialist workshop.
#Aer an accident, switch o the vehicle immediately.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 413
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
6
Front left malfunction Con-
sult workshop (example)
* The restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 41).
&WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system
Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as intended in an accident.
#Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualied specialist workshop.
Plug-in hybrid:
&DANGER Risk of fatal injuries due to restraint system malfunctions
Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident. In
the event of an accident, the high-voltage on-board electrical system may not be deactivated as intended.
You may suer an electric shock if you touch the damaged components of the high-voltage on-board electrical
system.
#Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualied specialist workshop.
#Aer an accident, switch o the vehicle immediately.
414 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
6
Left window airbag mal-
function Consult work-
shop (example)
* The restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 41).
&WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury due to a malfunction in the windowbag
The windowbag might be triggered unintentionally or might not be triggered at all in the event of an accident.
#Have the windowbag checked and repaired immediately at a qualied specialist workshop.
Front passenger airbag dis-
abled See Owner's Manual
* The front passenger airbag has been disabled even though an adult or a person of adult build is on the front passenger
seat. If additional forces are applied to the seat, the weight the system detects may be too low.
&WARNING ‑ Risk of injury or even fatal injury when the front passenger airbag is disabled
If the front passenger airbag is disabled, It will not be deployed in the event of an accident and cannot perform its
intended protective function.
A person in the front passenger seat could then, for example, come into contact with the vehicle interior, especially
if the person is sitting too close to the dashboard.
#Be aware of the status of the front passenger airbag both before and during the journey.
#Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the trac conditions.
#Make sure that no objects are trapped under the front passenger seat.
#Check the status of the automatic front passenger airbag shuto (/ page 43).
#If necessary, consult a qualied specialist workshop immediately.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 415
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Front passenger airbag ena-
bled See Owner's Manual
* The front passenger airbag will be enabled while the vehicle is in motion in the following situations:
Reven when a child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the system weight threshold is located on the front
passenger seat
Reven when the front passenger seat is not occupied
The system may detect objects or forces that are adding to the weight applied to the seat.
&WARNING Risk of injury or death when using a child restraint system while the front passenger airbag is ena-
bled
If you secure a child in a child restraint system on the front passenger seat and the front passenger airbag is ena-
bled, the front passenger airbag can deploy in the event of an accident.
The child could be struck by the airbag.
#Ensure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct.
NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or
SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur.
#Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the trac conditions.
#Make sure that no objects are trapped under the front passenger seat.
#Check the status of the automatic front passenger airbag shuto (/ page 43).
#If necessary, consult a qualied specialist workshop immediately.
416 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Key
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Á
Replace key
* Have the key replaced.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
Á
Change key batteries
* The key battery is discharged.
#Replace the battery (/ page 78).
Á
Key not detected (white dis-
play message)
* The key is currently undetected.
#Change the location of the key in the vehicle.
#Try to start the vehicle.
#If the key is still not detected, place it in the slot for starting with the key (/ page 158).
#Start the vehicle.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 417
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Á
Key not detected (red dis-
play message)
* The key can no longer be detected during a journey and may no longer be in the vehicle.
If the key is no longer in the vehicle and you switch o the vehicle:
RYou can no longer start the vehicle.
RYou cannot centrally lock the vehicle.
#Ensure that the key is in the vehicle.
If the key is in the vehicle and is still not detected:
#Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the trac conditions.
#Place the key in the slot for starting the engine with the key (/ page 158).
The key battery is weak or discharged.
#Check the battery using the indicator lamp (/ page 76).
#Replace the key battery, if necessary (/ page 78).
Á
Key being taught in Please
wait
* The vehicle is processing in order to teach in the new key.
#Wait until processing is complete.
418 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Place the key in the
marked space See Owner's
Manual
* Key detection is malfunctioning.
#Change the location of the key in the vehicle.
#Place the key in the slot for starting the engine with the key (/ page 158).
Lights
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
:
Left low beam (example)
* The corresponding light source is defective.
#Drive on carefully.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop immediately.
or
#Check whether you are permitted to replace the light source yourself (/ page 136).
%LED light sources: the display message for the corresponding light appears only when all the light-emitting diodes
in the light are faulty.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 419
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
:
Malfunction See Owner's
Manual
* The exterior lighting is malfunctioning.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
*Vehicles with a trailer hitch: a fuse may have blown.
#Stop the vehicle in accordance with the trac conditions.
#Check the fuses and replace them if necessary (/ page 367).
:
Automatic driving lights
inoperative
* The light sensor for automatic driving lights is malfunctioning.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
:
Active Light System inoper-
ative
* The active headlamps are malfunctioning.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
420 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
:
Switch on headlamps
* You are driving without low-beam headlamps.
#Turn the light switch to the L or à position.
:
Switch off lights
* You are leaving the vehicle and the lights are still switched on.
#Turn the light switch to the à position.
:
Dynamic low beam inopera-
tive
* The dynamic low beam is malfunctioning. The lighting system continues to function properly without the functions of
the Dynamic Light System.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist
currently unavailable See
Owner's Manual
* Adaptive Highbeam Assist is temporarily unavailable.
The system limits have been reached (/ page 131).
Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. The Adaptive Highbeam
Assist available again display message will appear.
#Drive on
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 421
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
#Operate the high beam manually until Adaptive High Beam Assist is available again.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist
inoperative
* Adaptive Highbeam Assist is malfunctioning.
#Drive on
or
#Stop the vehicle in accordance with the trac conditions and restart the vehicle.
#If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualied specialist workshop.
#Until then, operate the high beam manually.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist
Plus currently unavailable
See Owner's Manual
* Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is temporarily unavailable.
The system limits have been reached (/ page 132).
Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. The Adaptive Highbeam
Assist Plus available again display message will appear.
#Drive on
#Operate the high beam manually until Adaptive High Beam Assist Plus is available again.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist
Plus inoperative
* Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is malfunctioning.
#Drive on
or
#Stop the vehicle in accordance with the trac conditions and restart the vehicle.
#If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualied specialist workshop.
422 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
#Until then, operate the high beam manually.
Hazard warning lamp sys-
tem Malfunction
* The hazard warning lamp switch is malfunctioning.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
Climate control
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
&
inoperative See Owner's
Man.
* The stationary heater is temporarily malfunctioning.
#When the vehicle is stationary on a level surface and the engine has cooled down, make up to four attempts to
switch on the stationary heater, waiting several minutes between each attempt.
#If the stationary heater does not switch on, consult a qualied specialist workshop.
%The stationary heater cannot be activated if the outside temperature is above 15°C.
&
Currently unavailable Bat-
tery low
* The on-board electrical system voltage is too low.
The stationary heater has switched itself o.
#Drive an extended distance until the battery has reached a sucient charge level again.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 423
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
&
Currently unavailable Refuel
* There is too little fuel in the fuel tank. The stationary heater cannot be switched on.
#Refuel the vehicle.
&
Currently unavailable High-
voltage battery charging
incomplete.
* The high-voltage battery is charging. Pre-entry climate control cannot be switched on.
#Wait until the charging process has achieved a minimum state of charge.
&
Currently unavailable
Charge high-voltage battery
* The charge of the high-voltage battery is too low. Pre-entry climate control cannot be switched on.
#Charge the high-voltage battery (/ page 187).
424 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
&
Pre-entry climate control
via key available again
after starting vehicle
* You have attempted to switch on pre-entry climate control more than twice with the vehicle switched o.
#Start the vehicle for ten seconds.
Pre-entry climate control is operational again.
&
Pre-entry climate control
via key currently unavaila-
ble. High-voltage battery
low
* The charge of the high-voltage battery is too low. Pre-entry climate control cannot be switched on.
#Charge the high-voltage battery (/ page 187).
When the high-voltage battery is suciently charged, pre-entry climate control will be operational again.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 425
Hybrid system
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
u
Towing not permitted See
Owner's Manual
* The drive system is malfunctioning.
#Have the vehicle transported only using a transporter or trailer (/ page 362).
ò
Acoustic presence indica-
tor inoperative
* The sound generator (acoustic vehicle warning system) is malfunctioning. No vehicle noises are being produced. The
vehicle may not be heard by other road users.
#Drive with particular care.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
è
Charger cable connected
* You cannot pull away while the charging cable is connected.
#Disconnect the charging cable from the vehicle.
Not possible to unlock
charging cable See Own-
er's Manual
* The charging cable connector cannot be removed from the charging station's socket.
#Press the EMERGENCY OFF switch on the charging station.
If the charging cable connector cannot be removed aer that:
426 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
#Request service personnel from the operator of the charging station via the emergency call button or the emer-
gency numbers attached to the charging station.
Vehicle not currently being
charged Charging station
fault
* A malfunction has occurred in the charging station or the RFID card is not recognised.
#Start the charging process at a dierent charging station.
or
#Have the RFID card checked to ensure it is functioning.
Charging method currently
unavailable Please try
again or change charging
method
* A temporary malfunction has occurred in the charging station.
#Wait until the malfunction has passed.
or
#Start the charging process at a dierent charging station.
Charging fault Please
change charging method
See Owner's Manual
* A temporary malfunction has occurred in the charging station.
#Wait until the malfunction has passed.
or
#Start the charging process at a dierent charging station.
Only electric drive availa-
ble Power limited
* The fuel tank is empty and the combustion engine is switched o. The output of your vehicle is limited because you
are driving in electric mode.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 427
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
#Refuel immediately.
Subsequently, there may be temporary restrictions in the availability of electric mode over a driving distance of
50 km.
If there is fuel in the vehicle, there is a fault with the combustion engine.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
"Electric" drive program
currently unavailable
* The state of charge of the high-voltage battery is not sucient for the Electric drive program.
Charge the high-voltage battery (/ page 187).
Reduced drive system per-
formance See Owner's
Manual
* The drive system switches to emergency operation mode due to a malfunction.
#Drive on carefully.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
Û
Battery overheated Stop,
everybody out! Outdoors if
possible
*Plug-in hybrid: the high-voltage battery is overheated. There is a risk of re.
#Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the trac conditions.
#If possible, stop the vehicle in the open air and ensure that all vehicle occupants get out.
%Supporting vehicle functions may activate automatically, e.g. air-recirculation mode as part of climate control.
#Do not continue driving.
#If smoke is present, leave the danger zone and call the re service immediately.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop even if there are no external signs of a re.
428 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Û
Malfunction
* The drive system is malfunctioning. A warning tone will also sound.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
Û
Malfunction Visit workshop
* The drive system is malfunctioning.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
Without changing gear,
consult workshop
* The drive system cannot be restarted due to a malfunction.
If the transmission position is changed using the DIRECT SELECT lever, the drive system will be switched o in park
position j or neutral i.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop and do not change the transmission position.
Consult workshop without
starting the vehicle again
* It is not possible to restart the drive system due to a malfunction.
#Do not switch o the drive system; drive on to the nearest qualied specialist workshop.
d
Malfunction
* The drive system is malfunctioning. The output of your vehicle is restricted.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 429
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
d
Stop Switch off the vehicle
* The drive system is malfunctioning.
#Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the trac conditions and switch o the drive system. Do not con-
tinue driving, as the drive system is automatically deactivated.
#Do not tow the vehicle; stop towing if necessary.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
d
Performance severely limi-
ted
* The drive system is outside the normal operating temperature range, e.g. due to extremely low or high outside temper-
atures.
The output is severely restricted.
Once the operating temperature of the drive system returns to normal, the full output will be available again. The dis-
play message will disappear.
* If the drive system power output is still reduced, there is a fault in the drive system.
#Drive on carefully.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
6
Please wait Depressurising
fuel tank
*Vehicles with petrol engines: the pressure in the fuel tank is reduced before the fuel ller ap is opened. This pressure
reduction can take up to 15 minutes.
430 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
6
Fuel tank is depressurised
Ready for refuelling
*Vehicles with petrol engines: the pressure in the fuel tank is released and the fuel ller ap opens.
6
Tank ventilation Malfunc-
tion Consult workshop
*Vehicles with petrol engines: There is a malfunction in the fuel system.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
Vehicle
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* The driver's display is inoperative due to a failed soware update.
The display message will be shown every time the engine is started.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 431
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
&WARNING Risk of accident if the driver display fails
If the driver display has failed or is malfunctioning, function restrictions in systems relevant to safety cannot be
detected.
The operating safety of your vehicle may be impaired.
#Drive on carefully.
#Have the vehicle checked immediately at a qualied specialist workshop.
If the operating safety of your vehicle is impaired, park the vehicle immediately and safely. Contact a qualied special-
ist workshop.
Plug-in hybrid:
&WARNING Risk of accident due to failure of the driver display
In the event that the driver display fails or malfunctions, you will not recognise function restrictions aecting sys-
tems relevant to safety. This may impair operating safety.
#Park the vehicle safely as soon as possible and notify a qualied specialist workshop.
If the driver's display fails, you may not recognise function restrictions aecting systems relevant to safety or the
speed display, for example. The operating safety of the vehicle may be impaired (/ page 289).
#Have the vehicle checked by a qualied specialist workshop immediately.
432 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
d
Vehicle is ready to drive
Shutdown occurs when
locked or automatically in
a few minutes
* You are leaving the vehicle in a ready-to-drive state.
#Get out of the vehicle, secure it against rolling away and take the key with you.
#If you do not leave the vehicle, switch o the electrical consumers, e.g. the seat heating. Otherwise, the 12‑V bat-
tery may discharge and starting the engine may be possible only with the help of a second battery (jump start).
Vehicle is ready to drive
Shutdown occurs when
locked or automatically in
XX mins
* You are about to leave the vehicle and the engine is running.
The vehicle will switch o automatically in 20 minutes.
#To prevent the vehicle from switching o automatically, conrm the message in the central display of the multime-
dia system.
* You are in the vehicle. Park position j is engaged and the engine is running.
Aer ten minutes, this display message appears in the driver display. The vehicle is switched o automatically aer a
further ten minutes.
#To prevent the vehicle from switching o automatically, conrm the message in the central display of the multime-
dia system.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 433
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
ï
Trailer coupling Check
lock (white display message)
* The trailer hitch is not operational during a journey with a trailer.
&WARNING Risk of an accident if the ball neck is not locked
The trailer may become detached.
#Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the trac conditions. Do not continue driving.
#Uncouple the trailer and secure it against rolling away.
#Initiate a new swivelling procedure and do not re-couple the trailer until the display message disappears.
#Initiate a new swivel movement (/ page 268).
#When the display message disappears, couple up the trailer and drive on.
If the display message does not disappear, the trailer hitch is malfunctioning and the ball neck is not locked.
#Do not couple up the trailer. Drive on without the trailer. Note the reduced ground clearance due to the unlocked
ball neck.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
* When the vehicle is stationary with a coupled trailer, the trailer hitch is not operational.
#Uncouple the coupled trailer and secure it against rolling away.
#If the ball neck has been folded in: unlock the ball neck (/ page 268).
#Swivel the ball neck into the end position manually and let it engage.
#If the ball neck has been folded out: unlock the ball neck (/ page 268).
434 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
#Swivel the ball neck beneath the bumper manually and let it engage.
If the display message does not disappear, the trailer hitch is malfunctioning and the ball neck is not locked.
#Do not couple up the trailer. Drive on without the trailer. Note the reduced ground clearance due to the unlocked
ball neck.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
Head-up display currently
unavailable See Owner's
Manual
* The head-up display is temporarily unavailable. Possible causes:
Rmalfunctions in the power supply
Rsignal interference
#Stop in accordance with the trac conditions and switch the vehicle o and on again.
#If the display message still appears, consult a qualied specialist workshop.
Head-up display inoperative * The head-up display has an internal error.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
Ù
Steering malfunction
Increased physical effort
See Owner's Manual
* The power steering assistance is malfunctioning.
&WARNING Risk of an accident due to altered steering characteristics
If the power assistance of the steering fails partially or completely, you will need to use more force to steer.
#If safe steering is possible, drive on carefully.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 435
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
#Visit or consult a qualied specialist workshop immediately.
Ù
Steering malfunction Stop
immediately See Owner's
Manual
* The steering is malfunctioning. Steering capability is signicantly impaired.
&WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired
If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardised.
#Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and trac conditions. Do
not continue driving under any circumstances.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
Ù
Steering malfunction See
Owner's Manual
* The electric steering lock is malfunctioning. The steering may be locked by the electric steering lock.
&WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired
If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardised.
#Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and trac conditions. Do
not continue driving under any circumstances.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
#Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the trac conditions. Do not continue driving.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
436 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
û
Before starting the engine,
turn the steering wheel.
* The electric steering lock could not unlock the steering.
#Switch o the vehicle.
#To unlock the steering, move the steering wheel slightly to the le and right.
#Switch on the vehicle again.
Active bonnet malfunction
See Owner's Manual
* The active bonnet (pedestrian protection) is malfunctioning or inoperative aer having already been triggered.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
C* At least one door is open.
#Close all doors.
M* The bonnet is open.
&WARNING Risk of accident due to driving with the bonnet unlocked
The bonnet may open and block your view.
#Never release the bonnet when driving.
#Before every trip, ensure that the engine bonnet is locked.
#Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the trac conditions.
#Close the bonnet.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 437
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
N* The boot lid is open.
&DANGER Risk of exhaust gas poisoning
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle
interior if the boot lid is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion.
#Always switch o the engine before opening the boot lid.
#Never drive with the boot lid open.
#Close the boot lid.
Anti-theft alarm system
Malfunction
* The anti-the alarm system is malfunctioning.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
¥
Top up washer fluid
* The washer uid level in the washer uid reservoir has dropped below the minimum.
#Top up the washer uid (/ page 336).
Wiper Malfunction * The windscreen wiper is malfunctioning.
#Restart the vehicle.
If the display message still appears:
438 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
Engine
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
To switch off the vehicle,
press the Start/Stop but-
ton for at least 3 seconds
or 3 times
* You have pressed the start/stop button while the vehicle is in motion.
#Information about switching o the vehicle while driving (/ page 157).
Cannot start vehicle See
Owner's Manual
* The vehicle cannot be started.
#Switch the vehicle o and switch it back on
#If the display message still appears, consult a qualied specialist workshop.
+
Top up coolant See Own-
er’s Manual
* The coolant level is too low.
*NOTE Engine damage due to insucient coolant
#Avoid long journeys with insucient coolant.
#Add coolant (/ page 335).
#Have the engine cooling system checked at a qualied specialist workshop.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 439
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
ÿ
Coolant Stop Switch off
the vehicle
* The coolant is too hot.
#Stop immediately in accordance with the trac conditions and switch o the vehicle.
&WARNING Risk of burns when opening the bonnet
If you open the bonnet in the event of an overheated engine or re in the engine compartment, the following situa-
tions may occur:
RYou may come into contact with hot gases.
RYou may come into contact with other escaping hot operating uids.
#Before opening the bonnet, allow the engine to cool down.
#In the event of a re in the engine compartment, keep the bonnet closed and call the re service.
#Wait until the engine has cooled down.
#Make sure that the air supply to the radiator is not obstructed.
#Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest qualied specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that the
coolant temperature display remains below 120°C.
ÿ* There is a malfunction in the engine cooling system.
#Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest qualied specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that the
coolant temperature display remains below 120°C.
440 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
æ
Reserve fuel level
* The fuel supply has dropped into the reserve range.
#Refuel.
!
Clean the fuel filter
*Vehicles with diesel engines: the fuel lter is dirty or the water in the fuel lter needs to be drained.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
ý
Replace air filter
*Vehicles with diesel engines: the engine air lter is dirty and must be replaced.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
Drive system Malfunction
Visit workshop
* The drive system is malfunctioning.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
Drive system malfunction
Stop Switch off the vehicle
* The drive system is malfunctioning.
#Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the trac conditions and switch o the engine.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 441
Transmission
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Only select P when vehicle
is stationary
* It is possible to select the park position j only if the vehicle is stationary.
#Depress the brake pedal to stop.
#Shi the transmission to park position j when the vehicle is stationary.
Apply brake to deselect P
position
* You have attempted to shi the transmission out of park position j and into another transmission position.
#Depress the brake pedal.
#Select transmission position h, k or neutral i.
Apply brake and start vehi-
cle to shift out of P or N
* You have attempted to shi the transmission out of park position j or neutral i and into another transmission posi-
tion.
#Depress the brake pedal.
#Start the vehicle.
#Change the transmission position.
Apply brake to engage D or
R
* You have attempted to select transmission position h or k.
#Depress the brake pedal.
#Select transmission position h or k.
Apply brake to engage R * You have attempted to select transmission position k.
#Depress the brake pedal.
442 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
#Select transmission position k.
Apply parking brake to
park Visit workshop
* A malfunction has occurred in the emergency power supply to park position j.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
#Until then, always select park position j manually before you switch o the vehicle.
#Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake.
Risk of vehicle rolling away
Driver's door open Trans-
mission not in P
* The driver's door is not fully closed and transmission position h, k or neutral i is selected.
The vehicle may roll away.
#Select park position j when switching o the vehicle.
Risk of vehicle rolling away
Apply parking brake to park
* The transmission is malfunctioning. Park position j cannot be selected.
#Park the vehicle safely.
#Use the electric parking brake to secure the vehicle against rolling away.
#On gradients, turn the front wheels so that the vehicle will roll towards the kerb if it starts moving.
Reversing not poss. Con-
sult workshop
* The transmission is malfunctioning. It is not possible to select transmission position k.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
Transmission Malfunction
Stop
* The transmission is malfunctioning. The transmission shis to neutral i automatically.
#Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the trac conditions.
#Depress the brake pedal.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 443
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
#Engage park position j.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
Consult workshop without
changing the transmission
position
* The transmission is malfunctioning. It is no longer possible to change the transmission position.
#If transmission position h is selected, consult a qualied specialist workshop and do not change the transmission
position.
#For all other transmission positions, park the vehicle safely.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
Transmission Malfunction * The transmission is malfunctioning. The cause could be an overheated clutch or blocked gears.
#Let the transmission cool down.
#If the display message still appears following a restart, consult a qualied specialist workshop.
d
Transmission oil overhea-
ted Drive on with care
* The transmission is overheating. When the display message is active, start-up and driving characteristics may be tem-
porarily impaired.
#Drive at low engine speed.
#Avoid sporty driving.
#Before pulling away on uphill gradients, let the transmission cool down until the display message disappears.
444 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
j
Parking lock inoperative
Apply the parking brake
* The transmission is malfunctioning. Park position j cannot be selected.
#Park the vehicle safely.
#Use the electric parking brake to secure the vehicle against rolling away.
Teaching in transmission
Operate selector lever
Brake for XX seconds Risk
of vehicle rolling
* The transmission is being taught in. There is a risk of the vehicle rolling away.
#Depress and hold the brake pedal until the teach-in process has been completed.
The electric parking brake is applied automatically during the teach-in process.
#Switch on the vehicle.
#Select park position j, transmission position k or neutral i.
Teaching in transmission
complete
* The transmission's teach-in process is complete. All transmission positions can be selected again.
Transmission Malfunction
Visit workshop
* The transmission is malfunctioning.
Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
Auxiliary battery malfunc-
tion (white display message) * There is a malfunction in the auxiliary battery.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
#Until then, always select park position j manually before you switch o the vehicle.
#Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 445
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Auxiliary battery malfunc-
tion (red display message) * There is a malfunction in the auxiliary battery.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
#Until then, always select park position j manually before you switch o the vehicle.
#Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake.
Brakes
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
!
Parking brake See Owner's
Manual
* The yellow ! indicator lamp is lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.
To apply:
#Switch the vehicle o and switch it back on
#Apply the electric parking brake manually (/ page 208).
If it is not possible to apply the electric parking brake:
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
#Where necessary, also secure the parked vehicle against rolling away.
* The yellow ! indicator lamp and the red ! indicator lamp are lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.
To release:
#Switch the vehicle o and switch it back on
446 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
#Release the electric parking brake manually (/ page 208).
or
#Release the electric parking brake automatically (/ page 207).
If it is still not possible to release the electric parking brake:
#Do not continue driving. Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
* The yellow ! indicator lamp is lit and the red ! indicator lamp is ashing. The electric parking brake is malfunc-
tioning.
The electric parking brake could not be applied or released.
#Switch the vehicle o and switch it back on
To apply:
#Release and then apply the electric parking brake manually (/ page 208).
To release:
#Apply and then release the electric parking brake manually.
If it is not possible to apply the electric parking brake or the red ! indicator lamp continues to ash:
#Do not continue driving. Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
#Where necessary, also secure the parked vehicle against rolling away.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 447
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
* The yellow ! indicator lamp is lit and the red ! indicator lamp ashes for approximately ten seconds aer the
electric parking brake has been applied or released. It then remains lit or goes out. The electric parking brake is mal-
functioning.
If the state of charge is too low:
#Charge the 12 V battery.
To apply:
#Switch o the vehicle.
The electric parking brake will be applied automatically.
If you do not want the electric parking brake to be applied, e.g. at an automatic car wash or when the vehicle is being
towed, leave the vehicle switched on. This does not include having the vehicle towed with the rear axle raised.
If the electric parking brake is not applied automatically:
#Switch the vehicle o and switch it back on
#Release and then apply the electric parking brake manually (/ page 208).
If it is still not possible to apply the electric parking brake:
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
#Where necessary, also secure the parked vehicle against rolling away.
To release:
448 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
#If the conditions for automatic release are fullled and the electric parking brake is not released automatically,
release the electric parking brake manually (/ page 208).
If it is still not possible to release the electric parking brake:
#Do not continue driving. Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
!
Release parking brake
* The red ! indicator lamp is ashing.
The electric parking brake is applied while you are driving:
RA condition for automatic release of the electric parking brake has not been fullled (/ page 207).
RYou are performing emergency braking using the electric parking brake (/ page 208).
#Check the conditions for automatic release of the electric parking brake.
#Release the electric parking brake manually.
!
Parking brake Switch on
vehicle to release
* The red ! indicator lamp is lit.
You have attempted to release the electric parking brake with the vehicle switched o.
#Switch on the vehicle.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 449
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
J
Check brake fluid level
* There is insucient brake uid in the brake uid reservoir.
&WARNING Risk of an accident due to low brake uid level
If the brake uid level is too low, the braking eect and the braking characteristics may be impaired.
#Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to road and trac conditions. Do not continue driving.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
#Do not top up the brake uid.
Check brake pads See
Owner's Manual
* The brakepads have reached the wear limit.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
450 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Driving and driving safety systems
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
!
÷
currently unavailable See
Owner's Manual
*ABS and ESP® are temporarily unavailable.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be temporarily unavailable.
The brake system will continue to operate normally. Braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation.
&WARNING Risk of skidding if ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning
The wheels may lock during braking and ESP® does not perform any vehicle stabilisation.
The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addi-
tion, other driving safety systems are switched o.
#Drive carefully on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 30 km/h.
#If the display message does not disappear, consult a qualied specialist workshop immediately. Drive care-
fully.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 451
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
!
÷
inoperative See Owner's
Manual
*ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning.
The brake system will continue to operate normally. Braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation.
&WARNING Risk of skidding if ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning
The wheels may block during braking and ESP® does not perform any vehicle stabilization.
The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addi-
tion, other driving safety systems are switched o.
#Drive on carefully.
#Have ABS and ESP® checked immediately at a qualied specialist workshop.
÷
currently unavailable See
Owner's Manual
*ESP® is temporarily unavailable.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning.
&WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP is malfunctioning®
If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilisation. In addition, other driving safety systems are
switched o.
#Drive carefully on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 30 km/h.
452 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
#If the display message does not disappear, consult a qualied specialist workshop immediately. Drive care-
fully.
÷
inoperative See Owner's
Manual
*ESP® is malfunctioning.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning.
The brake system will continue to operate normally. Braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation.
&WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® is malfunctioning
If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilisation. In addition, other driving safety systems are
switched o.
#Drive on carefully.
#Have ESP® checked at a qualied specialist workshop.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 453
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
T
!
÷
inoperative See Owner's
Manual
*EBD, ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning.
&WARNING Risk of skidding if EBD, ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning
The wheels may block during braking and ESP® does not perform any vehicle stabilization.
The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addi-
tion, other driving safety systems are switched o.
#Drive on carefully.
#Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualied specialist workshop.
ë
Off
* The HOLD function is deactivated because the vehicle is slipping or a condition for activation is not fullled.
#Reactivate the HOLD function later or check the activation conditions for the HOLD function (/ page 216).
é
ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a
break!
* ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue or an increasing lack of concentration on the part of the driver
(/ page 218).
#If necessary, take a break.
454 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
h
- - - km/h
* Cruise control cannot be activated as not all activation conditions are fullled.
#Observe the activation conditions for cruise control (/ page 221).
Cruise control inoperative * Cruise control is malfunctioning.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
Cruise control and Limiter
inoperative
* Cruise control and the limiter are malfunctioning.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
Cruise control off * Cruise control has been deactivated.
If there is an additional warning tone, cruise control has been deactivated automatically (/ page 220).
È
- - - km/h
* The limiter can temporarily not be engaged. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be
available again.
È
passive
* If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the point of resistance (kickdown), the limiter will be switched to passive
mode (/ page 220).
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 455
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Limiter inoperative * The limiter is malfunctioning.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
Speed Limit Assist cur-
rently unavailable See Own-
er's Manual
* Speed Limit Assist is temporarily unavailable.
#Drive on
Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again.
Speed Limit Assist inopera-
tive
* Speed Limit Assist is malfunctioning.
#Drive on
or
#Stop the vehicle in accordance with the trac conditions and restart the vehicle.
#If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualied specialist workshop.
Speed limit (winter tyres)
XXX km/h
* You have reached the maximum permissible stored speed for winter tyres. It is not possible to exceed this speed.
ð
Maximum speed exceeded
* You have exceeded the maximum permissible speed (for certain countries only).
#Drive more slowly.
456 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Traffic Sign Assist currently
unavailable See Owner's
Manual
*Trac Sign Assist is temporarily unavailable.
Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again.
#Continue driving in compliance with the trac regulations.
Traffic Sign Assist inopera-
tive
*Trac Sign Assist is malfunctioning.
#Continue driving in compliance with the trac regulations.
or
#Stop the vehicle in accordance with the trac conditions and restart the vehicle.
#If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualied specialist workshop.
ä
Fault Drive at max. 80
km/h
* The adjustable damping is malfunctioning. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be aected.
#No faster than 80 km/h.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 457
Driver assistance systems
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
ç
- - - km/h
* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC cannot be activated as not all activation conditions are fullled.
#Comply with the activation conditions of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 226).
ç
suspended
* If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the setting of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, the system will switch to
passive mode (/ page 223).
ç
Off
* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC was deactivated. If a warning tone also sounds, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
has deactivated automatically (/ page 226).
Active Distance Assist cur-
rently unavailable See Own-
er's Manual
* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is temporarily unavailable.
The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 223).
As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again.
#Drive on carefully.
or
458 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
#If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the trac conditions and restart
the vehicle.
Active Distance Assist inop-
erative
* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is malfunctioning.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning.
#Drive on carefully.
or
#Stop the vehicle in accordance with the trac conditions and restart the vehicle.
#If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualied specialist workshop.
Active Distance Assist
available again
* Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is operational again.
#Switch on Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 226).
Active Brake Assist Func-
tions limited See Owner's
Manual
* For vehicles with the Driving Assistance Package, the following functions may be temporarily unavailable or only parti-
ally available:
RActive Brake Assist with cross-trac function
REvasive Steering Assist
RPRE‑SAFE® PLUS
Vehicles without the Driving Assistance Package: Active Brake Assist is temporarily unavailable or only partially availa-
ble.
#Drive on carefully.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 459
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
or
#Stop the vehicle in accordance with the trac conditions and restart the vehicle.
#If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualied specialist workshop.
Active Steering Assist cur-
rently unavailable See Own-
er's Manual
* Active Steering Assist is temporarily unavailable.
The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 230).
As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again.
#Drive on
#Check the tyre pressure if necessary.
Active Steering Assist inop-
erative
* Active Steering Assist is malfunctioning. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC remains available.
#Drive on
or
#Stop the vehicle in accordance with the trac conditions and restart the vehicle.
#If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualied specialist workshop.
Active Steering Assist cur-
rently unavailable due to
multiple emergency stops
* Active Steering Assist is temporarily unavailable due to multiple emergency stops.
#Take over the steering and stop in accordance with the trac conditions.
#Switch the vehicle o and switch it back on
Active Steering Assist is available once more.
460 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Ø
Beginning emergency stop
* Your hands are not on the steering wheel. Active Steering Assist will initiate an emergency stop (/ page 230).
#Put your hands on the steering wheel.
Information on cancelling an emergency stop (/ page 232).
Ø* Active Steering Assist has reached the system limits (/ page 230).
You have not steered independently for a considerable period of time.
#Take over the steering and drive on in accordance with the trac conditions.
Blind Spot Assist currently
unavailable See Owner's
Manual
* Blind Spot Assist is temporarily unavailable.
The system limits have been reached (/ page 243).
Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again.
#Drive on
or
#If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the trac conditions and restart
the vehicle.
Blind Spot Assist inopera-
tive
* Blind Spot Assist is malfunctioning.
#Drive on
or
#Stop the vehicle in accordance with the trac conditions and restart the vehicle.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 461
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
#If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualied specialist workshop.
Blind Spot Assist unavaila-
ble when towing a trailer
See Owner's Manual
* When you establish the electrical connection to the trailer, Blind Spot Assist will be unavailable.
#Press the le-hand Touch Control and acknowledge the display message.
Active Blind Spot Assist
currently unavailable See
Owner's Manual
* Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily unavailable.
The system limits have been reached (/ page 243).
Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again.
#Drive on
or
#If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the trac conditions and restart
the vehicle.
Active Blind Spot Assist
inoperative
* Active Blind Spot Assist is malfunctioning.
#Drive on
or
#Stop the vehicle in accordance with the trac conditions and restart the vehicle.
#If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualied specialist workshop.
Active Blind Spot Assist
unavailable when towing a
trailer See Owner's Manual
* When you establish the electrical connection to the trailer, Active Blind Spot Assist will be unavailable.
#Press the le-hand Touch Control and acknowledge the display message.
462 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Active Lane Keeping Assist
currently unavailable See
Owner's Manual
* Active Lane Keeping Assist is temporarily unavailable.
The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 246).
As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again.
#Drive on
Active Lane Keeping Assist
inoperative
* Active Lane Keeping Assist is malfunctioning.
#Drive on
or
#Stop the vehicle in accordance with the trac conditions and restart the vehicle.
#If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualied specialist workshop.
Active Lane Keeping Assist
functions restricted See
Owner's Manual
* Active Lane Keeping Assist is available but restricted.
#Drive on
or
#Stop the vehicle in accordance with the trac conditions and restart the vehicle.
#If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualied specialist workshop.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 463
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
¸
ð
ç
Ä
temporarily unavailable
Sensors dirty
* Front and corner radar sensors (hereaer "sensors") are malfunctioning. Possible causes:
RThe sensors are dirty
RHeavy rain or snow
RExtended country driving without other trac, e.g. in the desert
Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable. The brake system, steer-
ing and drive system will continue to function normally.
#Drive on carefully.
Once the causes of the problem are no longer present, the driving systems and driving safety systems will be available
again and the corresponding symbols will be switched o.
If the display message does not disappear:
#Stop the vehicle in accordance with the trac conditions.
#Clean all sensor covers from outside (/ page 211).
#Restart the vehicle.
464 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
á
ð
Ä
Ø
Ô
Camera view restricted
See Owner's Manual
* The view of the multifunction camera is restricted. Possible causes:
RDirt on the windscreen in the eld of vision of the multifunction camera
RHeavy rain, snow or fog
RMist on the inside of the windscreen: in certain weather conditions, mist can form on the inside of the windscreen
during cold times of year in particular.
%This mist on the windscreen will be removed automatically within a short time with the aid of a heater. The restric-
tion is temporary.
Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable. The brake system, steer-
ing and drive system will continue to function normally.
#Drive on carefully.
Once the causes of the problem are no longer present, the driving systems and driving safety systems will be available
again and the corresponding symbols will be switched o.
If the display message does not disappear:
#Stop the vehicle in accordance with the trac conditions.
#Clean the windscreen, especially in the position of the multifunction camera (/ page 211).
#Restart the vehicle.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 465
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
ð
¸
Ø
Restricted during trailer
operation
* When the trailer socket is occupied, some driving systems will be available only to a limited extent.
#Drive carefully if you are towing a trailer or have the bicycle rack mounted.
Active Brake Assist Func-
tions currently limited See
Owner's Manual
* For vehicles with the Driving Assistance Package, the following functions may be temporarily unavailable or only parti-
ally available:
RActive Brake Assist with cross-trac function
REvasive Steering Assist
RPRE‑SAFE® PLUS
Vehicles with Blind Spot Assist: PRE‑SAFE® PLUS is temporarily unavailable.
The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 233).
Vehicles without the Driving Assistance Package: Active Brake Assist is temporarily unavailable.
466 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
#Drive on carefully.
As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again.
or
#If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the trac conditions and restart
the vehicle.
PRE-SAFE inoperative See
Owner's Manual
*The PRE‑SAFE® functions are malfunctioning.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
Parking assistance systems
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
PARKTRONIC inoperative
See Owner's Manual
* Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is malfunctioning.
Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again.
#Continue driving while paying attention to the vehicle's surroundings.
or
#Stop the vehicle in accordance with the trac conditions and restart the vehicle.
#If the display message still appears, consult a qualied specialist workshop.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 467
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Active Parking Assist and
PARKTRONIC inoperative
See Owner's Manual
* Active Parking Assist and Parking Assist PARKTRONIC are malfunctioning.
Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again.
#Continue driving while paying attention to the vehicle's surroundings.
or
#Stop the vehicle in accordance with the trac conditions and restart the vehicle.
#If the display message still appears, consult a qualied specialist workshop.
Mercedes-Benz emergency call system
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
G
Inoperative
* The Mercedes-Benz emergency call system is malfunctioning. The Mercedes me connect system is also malfunction-
ing.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
468 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Battery
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
#
12 V on-board electrical
system Visit workshop
* The 12 V on-board electrical system is malfunctioning.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop immediately.
#
Stop vehicle See Owner's
Manual
* The 12 V battery is no longer being charged and the state of charge is too low.
*NOTE Possible engine damage if you continue driving
#Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
#Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the trac conditions. Do not continue driving.
#Switch o the vehicle.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 469
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
#
Start the vehicle to charge
the 12 V battery
* The vehicle is o and the state of charge of the 12 V battery is too low.
#Switch o electrical consumers that are not required.
#Drive for 30–60 mins.
or
#Charge the 12 V battery when stationary (/ page 360).
#Plug-in hybrid: Charge the vehicle at a charging station (/ page 187).
#
Stop vehicle Leave vehicle
on to charge the 12 V bat-
tery
* The 12 V battery charge level is too low.
#Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the trac conditions. Do not continue driving.
#Leave the vehicle running
#If the display message disappears: drive on.
#If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualied specialist workshop.
Û
Battery overheated Stop,
everybody out! Outdoors if
possible
* The 48 V battery is overheating. There is a risk of re.
#Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the trac conditions.
#If possible, stop the vehicle in the open air and ensure that all vehicle occupants get out.
%Supporting vehicle functions may activate automatically, e.g. air-recirculation mode as part of climate control.
#Do not continue driving.
#If smoke is present, leave the danger zone and call the re service immediately.
470 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop even if there are no external signs of a re.
Û
48 V battery See Owner's
Manual
* The 48 V on-board electrical system has function restrictions.
Comfort functions may be restricted.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop immediately.
Ý
Please wait 48 V battery
charging
* The 48 V battery is discharged. You have switched on the vehicle while the 12 V battery was being charged with a
suitable charger or while another vehicle was providing starting assistance.
The discharged 48 V battery is charged automatically via the voltage converter. Aer a few minutes, the Possible to
start the vehicle again display message will be shown on the driver's display.
#Start the vehicle.
#Drive the vehicle for a while to charge the 12 V battery and the 48 V battery aer disconnecting the charger from
the vehicle.
If the Possible to start the vehicle again display message does not appear aer a few minutes:
#Try to start the vehicle.
#If the vehicle does not start, consult a qualied specialist workshop.
Cannot start vehicle See
Owner's Manual
* The state of charge of the 48 V battery is too low. You can no longer start the vehicle.
#Switch o electrical consumers that are not required.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 471
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
#Connect a suitable charger approved for Mercedes-Benz with sucient charge output to the jump-start connection
point of the 12 V battery (/ page 360).
The 48 V battery is charged via the voltage converter in the vehicle.
Possible to start the vehi-
cle again
* The 48 V battery has been charged automatically via the voltage converter.
#Start the vehicle and drive for a while to charge the 12 V battery and the 48 V battery.
Tyre pressure monitor
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Tyre press. monitor cur-
rently unavailable
* There is interference from a powerful radio signal source As a result, no signals from the tyre pressure sensors are
being received. The tyre pressure monitoring system is temporarily unavailable.
The tyre pressure monitoring system will restart automatically as soon as the cause has been rectied.
#Drive on
Tyre press. monitor inoper-
ative
* The tyre pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning.
&WARNING There is a risk of an accident if the tyre pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning
The tyre pressure monitoring system cannot issue a warning if there is pressure loss in one or more of the tyres.
Tyres with insucient tyre pressure may impair the driving characteristics as well as steering and braking.
#Have the tyre pressure monitoring system checked at a qualied specialist workshop.
472 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Tyre pressure monitor inop-
erative No tyre pressure
sensors
* The wheels tted do not have suitable tyre pressure sensors. The tyre pressure monitoring system is deactivated.
#Fit wheels with suitable tyre pressure sensors.
é
Wheel sensor(s) missing
* There is no signal from the tyre pressure sensor in at least one wheel. No pressure value is displayed for the aected
tyre.
#Have the faulty tyre pressure sensor replaced at a qualied specialist workshop.
é
Check tyre(s)
* The tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped signicantly.
The wheel position is displayed. A warning tone will also sound.
&WARNING Risk of an accident due to insucient tyre pressure
RThe tyres can burst.
RThe tyres can wear excessively and/or unevenly.
RThe driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking may be greatly impaired.
You could then lose control of the vehicle.
#Observe the recommended tyre pressures.
#Adjust the tyre pressure if necessary.
#Stop the vehicle in accordance with the trac conditions.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 473
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
#Check the tyre pressure (/ page 372) and the tyres.
é
Rectify tyre pressure
* The tyre pressure is too low in at least one of the tyres, or the dierence in tyre pressure between the individual
wheels is too great.
#Check the tyre pressure and add air, if necessary.
#When the tyre pressure is correct, restart the tyre pressure monitor (/ page 375).
é
Warning tyre malfunction
* The pressure in one or more tyres has dropped suddenly. The wheel position is displayed.
&WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with a at tyre
RThe tyres can overheat and be damaged.
RThe driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking characteristics may be greatly impaired.
You could then lose control of the vehicle.
#Do not drive with a at tyre.
#Do not exceed the maximum permissible driving distance in emergency mode and the maximum permissible
speed with a at MOExtended tyre.
#Observe the notes on at tyres.
Notes on at tyres (/ page 348).
#Stop the vehicle in accordance with the trac conditions.
#Check the tyres.
474 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
é
Tyre(s) overheated
* At least one tyre is overheating. The aected tyres are displayed in red. At temperatures close to the limit value, the
tyres are displayed in yellow.
&WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with overheated tyres
Overheated tyres can burst.
#Reduce speed so that the tyres cool down.
é
Reduce speed
* At least one tyre is overheating. The aected tyres are displayed in red. At temperatures close to the limit value, the
tyres are displayed in yellow.
&WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with overheated tyres
Overheated tyres can burst.
#Reduce speed so that the tyres cool down.
Tyre pressure loss warning system
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Tyre pressure Check tyres * The tyre pressure loss warning system has detected a signicant loss of pressure.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 475
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
&WARNING Risk of an accident due to insucient tyre pressure
RThe tyres can burst.
RThe tyres can wear excessively and/or unevenly.
RThe driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking may be greatly impaired.
You could then lose control of the vehicle.
#Observe the recommended tyre pressures.
#Adjust the tyre pressure if necessary.
#Stop the vehicle in accordance with the trac conditions.
#Check the tyre pressure (/ page 372) and the tyres.
#When the tyre pressure is correct, restart the tyre pressure loss warning system (/ page 375).
Check tyre pressure, then
restart Run Flat Indicator
* The tyre pressure loss warning system generated a display message and has not been restarted since.
#When the tyre pressure is correct, restart the tyre pressure loss warning system (/ page 375).
Run Flat Indicator inopera-
tive
* The tyre pressure loss warning system is malfunctioning.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
476 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Exhaust gas aertreatment
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Ú
Refill AdBlue See Owner’s
Manual
*The AdBlue® level has fallen into the reserve range.
#Top up at least 5 l of AdBlue® (/ page 185).
Ú
Top up AdBlue Emergency
op. in XXX km See Owner's
Manual
*The low AdBlue® level will lead to limited performance aer the remaining distance displayed has been covered.
#Rell with at least 5 l of AdBlue®(/ page 185).
Ú
Top up AdBlue XX,X l
Emerg. op.: max. XXX
km/h Start not poss. in
XXX km
*The low AdBlue® level will lead to limited performance from the speed displayed.
Aer the remaining distance displayed has been covered, it will no longer be possible to start the vehicle.
#Top up with at least the indicated amount of AdBlue® (/ page 185).
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 477
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Ú
Top up AdBlue XX,X l
Switch vehicle on, wait 60
sec. or engine start not
poss.
*The AdBlue® tank is empty. You can no longer start the vehicle.
#Top up with at least the indicated amount of AdBlue® (/ page 185).
#Switch on the vehicle and wait for approximately 60 seconds.
#Start the vehicle.
¯
AdBlue system fault See
Owner's Manual
*The AdBlue® system is malfunctioning.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop immediately.
¯
AdBlue system malfunction
Emergency op. in XXX km
See Owner's Manual
*The AdBlue® system is malfunctioning. Performance will be reduced once the remaining distance displayed has been
covered.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop immediately.
478 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
¯
AdBlue system malfunction
Emerg. op.: max. XXX
km/h Start not poss. in
XXX km
*Power restriction due to the AdBlue® system fault. Aer the distance displayed has been covered, it will no longer be
possible to start the vehicle.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop immediately.
¯
AdBlue system fault Engine
start not possible
*The AdBlue® system is malfunctioning. You can no longer start the vehicle.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop immediately.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 479
Engine oil
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
5
Add 1 litre engine oil when
next refuelling
* The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.
*NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insucient engine oil
#Avoid long journeys with insucient engine oil.
#When next refuelling, add 1 litre of engine oil (/ page 334).
Notes on engine oil (/ page 403).
5
Engine oil level Reduce oil
level
* The engine oil level is too high.
*NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with excess engine oil
#Avoid long journeys with excess engine oil.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop immediately and have the engine oil level reduced.
5
Engine oil level Stop
Switch off the vehicle
* The engine oil level is too low.
*NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insucient engine oil
#Avoid long journeys with insucient engine oil.
#Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the trac conditions. Do not continue driving.
480 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
#Switch o the vehicle.
#Add 1 l of engine oil (/ page 334).
#Check the engine oil level.
Notes on engine oil (/ page 403).
5
Engine oil pressure Stop
Switch off the vehicle
* The oil pressure is too low.
*NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insucient oil pressure
#Avoid driving with insucient oil pressure.
#Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the trac conditions. Do not continue driving.
#Switch o the vehicle.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
5
Engine oil level cannot be
measured
* The electrical connection to the oil level sensor has been interrupted or the oil level sensor is faulty.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 481
Warning and indicator lamps
Overview of indicator and warning lamps
Some systems will perform a self-test when the
vehicle is switched on. Some indicator and warn-
ing lamps may briey light up or ash. This behav-
iour is non-critical. These indicator and warning
lamps indicate a malfunction only if they light up
or ash aer the vehicle has been started or dur-
ing a journey.
Standard driver's display
Widescreen cockpit driver's display
Indicator and warning lamps
Occupant safety
6Restraint system (/ page 484)
üSeat belt (/ page 484)
Drive system
_Reduced power (/ page 485)
ÚSystem error (/ page 485)
#Electrical fault (/ page 485)
Vehicle
ïTrailer hitch (/ page 486)
ÙPower steering (yellow) (/ page 486)
ÙPower steering (red) (/ page 486)
Engine
ÿVehicles with a widescreen cockpit: cool-
ant temperature (/ page 488)
;Engine diagnostics (/ page 488)
pVehicles with a petrol engine: engine oper-
ating temperature (/ page 488)
%Vehicles with a diesel engine: preglow
#Electrical fault (/ page 488)
æReserve fuel with fuel ller ap location
indicator (/ page 488)
Brakes
!Electric parking brake (yellow)
(/ page 491)
!Electric parking brake (red) (/ page 491)
JBrakes (yellow) (/ page 491)
JBrakes (red) (/ page 491)
Driving and driving safety systems
!ABS (/ page 493)
482 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
÷ESP® (/ page 493)
åESP® OFF (/ page 493)
ÛATTENTION ASSIST (/ page 493)
LDistance warning (/ page 493)
ÓActive Brake Assist (/ page 493)
êActive Brake Assist (/ page 493)
ÆActive Brake Assist (/ page 493)
Mercedes-Benz emergency call system
HMercedes-Benz emergency call system
(/ page 497)
Tyre pressure monitoring system
hTyre pressure monitoring system
(/ page 498)
Exterior lighting
TStanding lights (/ page 126)
LLow beam (/ page 126)
KHigh beam (/ page 128)
#! Turn signal lights (/ page 128)
RRear fog light (/ page 126)
Symbols on the central display
ÉDrive Away Assist (/ page 265)
LRear cross trac warning (/ page 266)
ºManoeuvring brake function (/ page 266)
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 483
Occupant safety
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
6
Restraint system warning
lamp
* The restraint system red warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is on.
The restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 41).
&WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system
Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as intended in an accident.
#Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualied specialist workshop.
Plug-in hybrid:
&DANGER Risk of fatal injuries due to restraint system malfunctions
Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident. In the
event of an accident, the high-voltage on-board electrical system may not be deactivated as intended.
You may suer an electric shock if you touch the damaged components of the high-voltage on-board electrical sys-
tem.
#Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualied specialist workshop.
#Aer an accident, switch o the vehicle immediately.
#Drive on carefully.
#Note the messages on the driver's display.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop immediately.
484 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
ü
Seat belt warning lamp
ashes
* The red seat belt warning lamp ashes and an intermittent warning tone sounds.
The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt while the vehicle is in motion.
#Fasten your seat belt (/ page 41).
There are objects on the front passenger seat.
#Remove the objects from the front passenger seat.
ü
Seat belt warning lamp
lights up
* The red seat belt warning lamp lights up once the vehicle has started.
In addition, an intermittent warning tone may sound.
The red seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten their seat belts.
#Fasten your seat belt (/ page 41).
If you have placed objects on the front passenger seat, the red seat belt warning lamp may remain lit.
Hybrid system
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
_
Reduced-power warning
lamp
* The yellow reduced-power warning lamp is on.
Drive system power output is reduced.
#Note the messages on the driver's display.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 485
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Ú
System error warning lamp
*The red system error warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is in a state of operational readiness õ.
There is a malfunction in the drive system.
#Note the messages on the driver's display.
#
Electrical fault warning lamp
* The red electrical fault warning lamp is lit.
There is a fault with the electrics.
#Note the messages on the driver's display.
Vehicle
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
ï
Trailer hitch warning lamp
* The red trailer hitch warning lamp is lit.
The trailer hitch is not operational.
&WARNING Risk of an accident if the ball neck is not locked
The trailer may become detached.
#Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the trac conditions. Do not continue driving.
#Uncouple the trailer and secure it against rolling away.
486 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
#Initiate a new swivelling procedure and do not re-couple the trailer until the display message disappears.
#Note the messages on the driver's display.
Ù
Power steering warning
lamp (yellow)
* The yellow power steering warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running.
The power assistance or the steering itself is malfunctioning.
#Note the messages on the driver's display.
Ù
Power steering warning
lamp (red)
* The red power steering warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running.
The power assistance or the steering itself is malfunctioning.
&WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired
If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardised.
#Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and trac conditions. Do not
continue driving under any circumstances.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
#Note the messages on the driver's display.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 487
Engine
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
ÿ
Coolant warning lamp (red)
* The red coolant warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
Possible causes:
RThe temperature sensor is malfunctioning
RThe coolant level is too low
RThe air supply to the radiator is obstructed
RThe radiator fan is faulty
RThe engine coolant pump is faulty
If there is an additional warning tone, the coolant temperature has exceeded 120°C.
&WARNING Risk of burns when opening the bonnet
If you open the bonnet in the event of an overheated engine or re in the engine compartment, the following situa-
tions may occur:
RYou may come into contact with hot gases.
RYou may come into contact with other escaping hot operating uids.
#Before opening the bonnet, allow the engine to cool down.
#In the event of a re in the engine compartment, keep the bonnet closed and call the re service.
#Stop immediately in accordance with the trac conditions and switch o the vehicle. Do not continue driving.
488 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
#Note the messages on the driver's display.
If the coolant temperature display is at the lower end of the temperature scale:
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
If the coolant temperature display is at the upper end of the temperature scale:
#Exit the vehicle and keep a safe distance from it until the engine has cooled down.
#Check the coolant level (/ page 335).
#Make sure that the air supply to the radiator is not obstructed.
#Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest qualied specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that the
coolant temperature display remains below 120°C.
ÿ
Coolant warning lamp (yel-
low)
* The yellow coolant warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
Possible causes:
RThe temperature sensor is malfunctioning
RThe charge air, transmission oil or battery cooling is faulty
RThe radiator shutters are blocked or defective
#Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest qualied specialist workshop.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 489
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
;
Engine diagnostics warning
lamp
* The yellow engine diagnostics warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
A malfunction has occurred in the engine, the exhaust system or the fuel system.
The emissions limit value may have been exceeded and the engine may be running in emergency operation mode.
#Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualied specialist workshop.
Vehicles with a diesel engine: the fuel tank may have been run dry.
#Start the engine three to four times aer refuelling.
If the yellow engine diagnosis warning lamp goes out, emergency operation mode is cancelled. The vehicle need not
be checked.
#
Electrical fault warning lamp
* The red electrical fault warning lamp is lit.
There is a fault in the electrics.
#Note the messages on the driver's display.
p
Engine operating tempera-
ture warning lamp
*Vehicles with a petrol engine: aer a cold start, the blue engine operating temperature warning lamp is on.
Engine output and engine torque are reduced.
#Take this into consideration in your driving style.
490 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
æ
Fuel reserve warning lamp
lights up
* The yellow fuel reserve warning lamp lights up while the engine is running.
The fuel supply has dropped into the reserve range.
#Refuel.
Brakes
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
!
Electric parking brake indi-
cator lamp (red)
!
Electric parking brake indi-
cator lamp (yellow)
*The red electric parking brake indicator lamp ashes or is lit.
The yellow electric parking brake indicator lamp is also lit in the event of a malfunction.
#Note the messages on the driver's display.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 491
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
J
Brakes warning lamp (yel-
low)
* The yellow brakes warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running.
&WARNING Risk of an accident due to a brake system malfunction
If the brake system is malfunctioning, braking characteristics may be impaired.
#Drive on carefully.
#Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualied specialist workshop.
#Adjust your speed and drive on carefully, leaving a suitable distance to the vehicle in front.
#If the driver's display shows a display message, observe it.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
J
Brakes warning lamp (red)
* The red brakes warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running.
Possible causes:
RThe brake force boosting is malfunctioning and the braking characteristics may be aected.
RThere is insucient brake uid in the brake uid reservoir.
#Note the messages on the driver's display.
&WARNING Risk of accident and injury if brake force boosting is malfunctioning
If brake force boosting is malfunctioning, increased brake pedal force may be necessary for braking. The braking
characteristics may be impaired. The braking distance can increase in emergency braking situations.
492 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
#Stop in a safe location immediately. Do not continue driving!
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
&WARNING Risk of an accident due to low brake uid level
If the brake uid level is too low, the braking eect and the braking characteristics may be impaired.
#Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to road and trac conditions. Do not continue driving.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
#Do not top up the brake uid.
Driving and driving safety systems
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
!
ABS warning lamp
* The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running.
ABS is malfunctioning.
If an additional warning tone sounds, EBD is malfunctioning.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning.
#Note the messages on the driver's display.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 493
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
&WARNING There is a risk of skidding if EBD or ABS is malfunctioning
The wheels may lock during braking.
The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addition,
other driving safety systems are switched o.
#Drive on carefully.
#Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualied specialist workshop.
÷
ESP® warning lamp ashes
*The yellow ESP® warning lamp ashes while the vehicle is in motion.
One or more wheels have reached their grip limit (/ page 213).
#Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.
÷
ESP® warning lamp lights up
*The yellow ESP® warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running.
ESP® is malfunctioning.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning.
#Note the messages on the driver's display.
&WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® is malfunctioning
If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilisation. In addition, other driving safety systems are
switched o.
494 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
#Drive on carefully.
#Have ESP® checked at a qualied specialist workshop.
å
ESP® OFF warning lamp
*The yellow ESP® OFF warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running.
ESP® is deactivated.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be inoperative.
&WARNING Risk of skidding when driving with ESP® deactivated
ESP® does not act to stabilise the vehicle. The availability of further driving safety systems is also limited.
#Drive on carefully.
#Deactivate ESP® only for as long as the situation requires.
If ESP® cannot be activated, ESP® is malfunctioning.
#Have ESP® checked immediately at a qualied specialist workshop.
#Observe the notes on deactivating ESP® (/ page 213).
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 495
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Û
ATTENTION ASSIST warning
lamp
* The ATTENTION ASSIST warning lamp is lit.
ATTENTION ASSIST is malfunctioning.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
L
Warning lamp for distance
warning
* The red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is in motion.
The distance to the vehicle in front is too small for the speed selected.
If there is an additional warning tone, you are approaching an obstacle at too high a speed.
#Be prepared to brake immediately.
#Increase the distance.
Function of Active Brake Assist (/ page 233).
Ó
Active Brake Assist warning
lamp
* The Active Brake Assist warning lamp is on.
Due to dirty sensors or a malfunction, the system is not available or the range of functions is restricted.
#Note the messages on the driver's display.
496 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
ê
Active Brake Assist warning
lamp
* The Active Brake Assist warning lamp is on.
The system is switched o or the range of functions has been automatically restricted.
This may be the case if another driving system has been activated.
#Observe the notes on Active Brake Assist (/ page 233).
Mercedes-Benz emergency call system
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
H
Mercedes-Benz emergency
call system warning lamp
*The Mercedes-Benz emergency call system is malfunctioning. The Mercedes me connect system is also malfunctioning.
#Consult a qualied specialist workshop.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 497
Tyre pressure monitor
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
h
Tyre pressure monitoring
system warning lamp ashes
*The yellow tyre pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) ashes for approximately one minute and
then remains lit.
The tyre pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning.
&WARNING There is a risk of an accident if the tyre pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning
The tyre pressure monitoring system cannot issue a warning if there is pressure loss in one or more of the tyres.
Tyres with insucient tyre pressure may impair the driving characteristics as well as steering and braking.
#Have the tyre pressure monitoring system checked at a qualied specialist workshop.
h
Tyre pressure monitoring
system warning lamp lights
up
*The yellow tyre pressure monitoring system warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) is lit.
The tyre pressure monitoring system has detected tyre pressure loss in at least one of the tyres.
&WARNING Risk of an accident due to insucient tyre pressure
RThe tyres can burst.
RThe tyres can wear excessively and/or unevenly.
RThe driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking may be greatly impaired.
You could then lose control of the vehicle.
#Observe the recommended tyre pressures.
#Adjust the tyre pressure if necessary.
498 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
#Stop the vehicle in accordance with the trac conditions.
#Check the tyre pressure and the tyres.
Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 499
1, 2, 3 ...
4MATIC........................................................ 180
48 V on-board electrical system
Displays in the driver's display................ 279
Operating safety...................................... 22
A
A/C function
Activating/deactivating (operating
unit)....................................................... 145
Switching on/o (MBUX)....................... 145
ABS............................................................. 213
Acceleration
Kickdown............................................... 179
Accident
ERA-GLONASS test mode...................... 321
Accident, emergency call............................. 318
Activating/deactivating the acoustic lock-
ing verication signal...................................... 77
Active Blind Spot Assist
Activating/deactivating.......................... 246
Brake application................................... 245
Exit warning........................................... 243
Function................................................ 243
Trailer operation..................................... 245
Active bonnet............................................... 330
Active bonnet (pedestrian protection)
Resetting............................................... 330
Active Brake Assist
Function................................................ 233
Setting................................................... 237
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC
Activate/deactivate variable limiter........ 226
Activating/deactivating.......................... 226
Active Emergency Stop Assist................ 232
Calling up a speed................................. 226
Function................................................ 223
Increasing/decreasing the speed........... 226
Route-based speed adaptation............... 229
Storing a speed...................................... 226
Active Emergency Stop Assist...................... 232
Active headlamps......................................... 129
Active Lane Keeping Assist
Activating/deactivating.......................... 248
Function................................................ 246
Setting the sensitivity............................. 248
Trailer operation..................................... 246
Active light function..................................... 129
Active Parking Assist
Automatic braking function.................... 265
Exiting a parking space.......................... 264
Function................................................ 261
Manoeuvering brake function................. 266
Parking.................................................. 262
Pausing.................................................. 264
Active Service System PLUS......................... 328
Active Speed Limit Assist............................. 228
Active Steering Assist
Activating/deactivating.......................... 232
Active Emergency Stop Assist................ 232
Function................................................ 230
Adaptive brake lights.................................... 217
Adaptive cruise control................................. 229
Adaptive Highbeam Assist
Activating/deactivating.......................... 132
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus
Switching on/o.................................... 133
AdBlue®
Additives................................................ 402
Capacity................................................ 403
500 Index
Notes..................................................... 184
Purity..................................................... 402
Topping up............................................. 185
Additional door lock....................................... 80
Additives
AdBlue®......................................... 185, 402
Engine oil............................................... 403
Fuel....................................................... 400
Aer-sales service........................................ 328
Air conditioning menu
Air distribution....................................... 145
Climate control...................................... 145
Stationary heater/ventilation................. 151
Air distribution
Setting........................................... 144, 145
Air inlet........................................................ 337
Air pressure................................................. 372
Air vents
Setting................................................... 151
Air/water duct............................................. 337
Airbag
Front airbag............................................. 54
Inating................................................... 48
Overview.................................................. 54
PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps...... 43
Warning lamp........................................... 41
Airow
Setting................................................... 144
Alarm system................................................. 96
All-wheel drive.............................................. 180
Alternative route.......................................... 298
Ambient lighting........................................... 135
Animals.......................................................... 50
Anti-lock braking system.............................. 213
Anti-the alarm system.................................. 96
Anti-the protection
Additional door lock................................. 80
Immobiliser.............................................. 96
Anticipatory operating-mode strategy,
Route-based................................................. 171
Apps, Mercedes me
Mercedes me calls................................. 308
Mercedes me connect........................... 311
Assembly licence plate, front.......................... 25
Assistance system....................................... 212
ASSYST PLUS
Battery disconnection periods................ 329
Service interval display.......................... 328
Service requirements............................. 328
ATA Deactivating the alarm............................. 96
Function.................................................. 96
Interior protection.................................... 98
Interior protection function....................... 97
Tow-away protection................................ 97
Tow-away protection function................... 97
ATTENTION ASSIST
Function................................................ 218
Setting................................................... 219
Attention assistant....................................... 218
Authorised workshop...................................... 32
Automatic car wash...................................... 337
Automatic car wash mode............................ 339
Automatic climate control............................ 145
Automatic co-driver airbag shuto
Function.................................................. 45
Automatic distance control........................... 223
Automatic driving lights................................ 127
Index 501
Automatic emergency call............................ 318
Automatic engine start/stop........................ 163
Automatic front passenger airbag shuto
Information (child restraint system on
the front passenger seat)......................... 60
PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps...... 43
Automatic measures aer an accident............ 47
Automatic mirror folding function................. 143
Automatic seat adjustment........................... 108
Automatic transmission
DIRECT SELECT lever............................. 175
Drive programs...................................... 171
DYNAMIC SELECT button....................... 171
Engages neutral..................................... 176
Engaging drive position.......................... 177
Engaging reverse gear............................ 176
Faulty gear shi..................................... 177
Gear shi............................................... 175
Kickdown............................................... 179
Manual shiing...................................... 177
Oil temperature (driver's display)............ 277
Selecting park position........................... 176
Steering wheel gearshi paddles............ 177
Transmission position display................. 175
Transmission positions........................... 175
Autonomous braking.................................... 233
Axle load
Trailer operation..................................... 411
B
Ball neck
Folding out/in........................................ 268
Trailer coupling...................................... 270
BAS............................................................. 213
Basic information........................................... 38
Battery
High-voltage battery............................... 357
Battery (12 V battery)
Charging................................................ 360
Notes..................................................... 355
Notes (starting assistance and charg-
ing)........................................................ 358
Replacing............................................... 361
Starting assistance................................ 360
Battery (48 V)
Notes..................................................... 356
Battery (high-voltage on-board electrical
system)........................................................ 408
Battery (key).................................................. 78
Battery (starter battery)
Charging via Remote Online................... 159
Battery operation......................................... 153
BeltFastening................................................. 41
Notes on wearing correctly...................... 40
Releasing................................................. 53
Bicycle rack
Load capacity........................................ 410
Trailer operation..................................... 272
Blind Spot Assist
Activating/deactivating.......................... 246
Function................................................ 243
BlueTec
AdBlue®................................................. 184
Bluetooth®
Connecting a mobile phone.................... 306
Bonnet
Active bonnet......................................... 330
Opening/closing.................................... 331
502 Index
Resetting (active bonnet)........................ 330
Boost pressure, current (driver's display)...... 277
Boot lid
Closing.................................................... 86
HANDS-FREE ACCESS............................. 86
Limiter..................................................... 88
Opening................................................... 85
Brake Assist
Active Brake Assist................................. 233
Brake Assist System............................... 213
Brake Assist System..................................... 213
Brake disks.................................................. 160
Brake uid.................................................... 405
Brake force distribution................................ 215
Brake lamps
Adaptive brake lights.............................. 217
Brake pads................................................... 160
Brakes
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System).............. 213
Active Brake Assist................................. 233
Adaptive brake lights.............................. 217
BAS (Brake Assist System)..................... 213
Driving tips............................................ 160
EBD (Electronic Brakeforce Distribu-
tion)....................................................... 215
Electric parking brake............ 206, 207, 208
Handbrake............................. 206, 207, 208
HOLD function....................................... 216
Limited braking eect (salt-treated
roads).................................................... 160
New/replaced brake pads/brake discs.. 160
Parking brake......................... 206, 207, 208
Post-collision brake............................ 47, 48
Recuperation......................................... 167
Running-in notes.................................... 160
Braking assistance
Brake Assist System............................... 213
Breakdown
Flat tyre................................................. 348
Overview of aids...................................... 16
Tow-starting........................................... 367
Towing methods..................................... 363
Transporting the vehicle......................... 365
Wheel change........................................ 381
C
Calling the customer centre for
Mercedes-Benz............................................ 308
Calls
Mercedes me......................................... 307
Telephone menu.................................... 307
Using overhead control panel................. 307
Camera
360° camera......................................... 252
Button................................................... 256
Cleaning................................................ 341
Function................................................ 252
Information............................................ 211
Opening the camera cover (reversing
camera)................................................. 257
Reversing camera.................................. 249
Selecting the view.................................. 256
Car key.......................................................... 76
Car wash
Automatic car wash............................... 337
High-pressure cleaner............................ 339
Washing by hand.................................... 340
Car-to-X-Communication
Display on map...................................... 300
Care
Air/water duct....................................... 337
Automatic car wash............................... 337
Index 503
Camera.................................................. 341
Car parts............................................... 341
Decorative foil........................................ 340
Display................................................... 343
Exterior lighting...................................... 341
Head-up display..................................... 343
High-pressure cleaner............................ 339
Paint...................................................... 340
Plastic trim............................................ 343
Real wood/trim elements...................... 343
Roof lining............................................. 343
Seat belt................................................ 343
Steering wheel....................................... 343
Trailer hitch............................................ 341
Vehicle interior....................................... 343
Vehicle socket for the high-voltage
battery................................................... 341
Washing by hand.................................... 340
Wheels/rims.......................................... 341
Caring for plastic trim................................... 343
Caring for rims............................................. 341
Caring for the roof lining............................... 343
Caring for the steering wheel........................ 343
Carrier......................................................... 114
Central display............................................. 283
Central locking system
Button..................................................... 81
Key.......................................................... 77
Changing bulbs
Fitting/removing cover (front wheel
arch)...................................................... 137
Overview................................................ 136
Changing illuminants
Notes..................................................... 136
Charge level display..................................... 202
Charge level/charge display......................... 202
Charging
12 V battery........................................... 360
At time of departure............................... 293
Charge level display............................... 202
Charging cable control panel.................. 194
Charging station, mode 3....................... 191
Conguring weekly prole...................... 293
Ending the charging process (alternat-
ing current, mode 2/3).......................... 199
Ending the charging process (direct
current, mode 4).................................... 201
Indicator lamps on vehicle socket........... 195
Mains socket, mode 2............................ 190
Notes on charging the high-voltage
battery................................................... 187
Notes on the high-voltage battery........... 357
Rapid charging station, mode 4.............. 192
Setting the maximum permissible
charging current (mains socket)............. 193
Starting the charging process (alter-
nating current, mode 2/3)..................... 196
Starting the charging process (direct
current, mode 4).................................... 200
Stowing the charging cable.................... 189
USB port........................................ 117, 122
Wallbox, mode 3.................................... 191
Charging cable
Control panel......................................... 194
Stowing................................................. 189
Charging settings......................................... 293
Checking the coolant level........................... 335
Child safety lock
Rear door................................................. 73
Side window (rear)................................... 75
Child seat
Adjusting the vehicle seat........................ 68
504 Index
Approval categories................................. 62
Basic instructions.................................... 56
Brief overview of most important points... 55
Fitting ISOFIX/i-Size................................ 70
Front passenger seat............................... 59
Overview of warning stickers.................... 59
Rearward-facing....................................... 62
Recommendations for child restraint
systems................................................... 64
Risks/dangers......................................... 57
Seats suitable for belt-secured child
restraint systems..................................... 67
Seats suitable for i‑Size child restraint
systems................................................... 66
Seats suitable for ISOFIX child
restraint systems..................................... 65
Securing to the front passenger seat
with the seat belt..................................... 73
Securing to the rear seat with the
seatbelt................................................... 73
Top Tether................................................ 71
Without automatic co-driver airbag sh
uto......................................................... 62
Children
Avoiding dangers in the vehicle................ 57
Basic instructions.................................... 56
Chock.......................................................... 380
City lighting.................................................. 130
Clean varnish............................................... 340
Cleaning
Air/water duct....................................... 337
Automatic car wash............................... 337
Car parts............................................... 341
Decorative foil........................................ 340
High-pressure cleaner............................ 339
Paint...................................................... 340
Real wood/trim elements...................... 343
Sensors................................................. 341
Vehicle interior....................................... 343
Vehicle socket for the high-voltage
battery................................................... 341
Washing by hand.................................... 340
Cleaning carpets.......................................... 343
Cleaning seat covers.................................... 343
Climate control
Activating/deactivating.......................... 145
Activating/deactivating the A/C func-
tion (control panel)................................. 145
Activating/deactivating the synchro-
nisation function (control panel)............. 146
Air vents (front)...................................... 151
Air vents (rear)....................................... 152
Automatic control.................................. 145
Demisting the windscreen...................... 144
Demisting windows................................ 146
Immediate pre-entry climate control....... 149
Notes..................................................... 144
Pre-entry climate control for depar-
ture time................................................ 148
Pre-entry climate control using the key... 147
Residual heat......................................... 146
Setting the air distribution...................... 144
Setting the airow.................................. 144
Setting the vehicle interior tempera-
ture....................................................... 144
Stationary heater/ventilation................. 150
Switching air-recirculation mode
on/o................................................... 146
Switching the A/C function on/o
(MBUX).................................................. 145
Switching the rear window heater
on/o................................................... 144
Synchronisation function........................ 146
THERMATIC control panel...................... 144
Index 505
THERMOTRONIC control panel............... 144
Ventilation with comfort opening.............. 90
Co-driver airbag shuto, PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF........................................................ 45
COC papers, Certicate of conformity.......... 389
Cockpit
Dashboard overview............................... 6, 8
Coee cup symbol....................................... 218
Collision detection (parked vehicle)
Setting........................................... 208, 209
Combination switch
Lights.................................................... 128
Windscreen wipers................................. 138
Commuter route........................................... 298
Components subject to radio regulations
Declaration of conformity......................... 26
Control elements:.......................................... 21
Convenience closing...................................... 91
Convenience opening..................................... 90
Coolant
Notes..................................................... 405
Copyright....................................................... 37
Cornering light............................................. 130
Correct use.................................................... 32
Cover............................................................. 92
Cross trac (warning).................................. 266
Cross Trac Alert, Cross trac warning....... 266
Crosswind Assist.......................................... 214
Cruise control
activating/deactivating.......................... 221
Calling up a speed................................. 221
Function................................................ 220
Requirements:....................................... 221
Setting a speed...................................... 221
Storing a speed...................................... 221
D
Damage
Limited protection.................................... 50
Damping adjustment.................................... 248
Dashboard
Cockpit overview.................................... 6, 8
Dashcam
Notes..................................................... 302
Selecting a USB device.......................... 303
Starting/stopping video recording.......... 303
Data processing in the vehicle........................ 34
Data protection rights.................................... 37
Data storage
Data protection rights.............................. 37
Electronic control units............................ 34
Online services........................................ 36
Deactivating the alarm................................... 96
Dealership..................................................... 32
Declaration of conformity
Components subject to radio regula-
tions........................................................ 26
Electromagnetic compatibility.................. 26
Importer addresses.................................. 28
Jack......................................................... 28
TIREFIT kit................................................ 29
Decorative foil.............................................. 340
DeNOx agent
AdBlue®................................................. 184
Deployed components
Limited protection.................................... 50
Deployment situations.................................... 48
506 Index
Destination entry......................................... 297
Detecting inattentiveness............................. 218
Diagnostics connection.................................. 30
Diesel
Low outside temperatures...................... 400
Notes..................................................... 400
Digital Owner's Manual.................................. 18
DIRECT SELECT lever
Automatic transmission.......................... 175
Engages neutral..................................... 176
Engaging drive position.......................... 177
Engaging park position automatically...... 176
Engaging reverse gear............................ 176
Function................................................ 175
Gearshi recommendation..................... 178
Manual gearshiing................................ 177
Selecting park position........................... 176
Display
Care...................................................... 343
Display (driver's display)
Overview of displays............................... 280
Display message
Calling up on driver display..................... 412
Notes..................................................... 412
Display messages
ç - - - km/h.................................... 458
È - - - km/h.................................... 455
h - - - km/h.................................... 455
# 12 V on-board electrical sys-
tem Visit workshop................................ 469
Û 48 V battery See Owner's Man-
ual......................................................... 471
ò Acoustic presence indicator
inoperative............................................. 426
: Active Light System inoperative.... 420
¯ AdBlue system fault Engine
start not possible................................... 479
¯ AdBlue system fault See Own-
er's Manual............................................ 478
¯ AdBlue system malfunction
Emerg. op.: max. XXX km/h Start not
poss. in XXX km..................................... 479
¯ AdBlue system malfunction
Emergency op. in XXX km See Own-
er's Manual............................................ 478
5 Add 1 litre engine oil when next
refuelling............................................... 480
é ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a
break!.................................................... 454
: Automatic driving lights inoper-
ative...................................................... 420
Û Battery overheated Stop,
everybody out! Outdoors if possible
...................................................... 428, 470
û Before starting the engine, turn
the steering wheel.................................. 437
Ø Beginning emergency stop........... 461
á Camera view restricted See
Owner's Manual..................................... 465
Á Change key batteries................... 417
è Charger cable connected............. 426
J Check brake uid level................. 450
Index 507
é Check tyre(s)............................... 473
! Clean the fuel lter...................... 441
ÿ Coolant Stop Switch o the
vehicle................................................... 440
& Currently unavailable Battery
low........................................................ 423
& Currently unavailable Charge
high-voltage battery............................... 424
& Currently unavailable High-volt-
age battery charging incomplete............ 424
& Currently unavailable Refuel......... 424
! currently unavailable See Own-
er's Manual............................................ 451
÷ currently unavailable See Own-
er's Manual............................................ 452
: Dynamic low beam inoperative..... 421
5 Engine oil level cannot be
measured.............................................. 481
5 Engine oil level Reduce oil level.... 480
5 Engine oil level Stop Switch o
the vehicle............................................. 480
5 Engine oil pressure Stop Switch
o the vehicle........................................ 481
ä Fault Drive at max. 80 km/h........ 457
6 Front le malfunction Consult
workshop (example)............................... 414
6 Fuel tank is depressurised
Ready for refuelling................................ 431
& inoperative See Owner's Man....... 423
! inoperative See Owner's Manual.. 452
÷ inoperative See Owner's Manual.. 453
T inoperative See Owner's Manual.. 454
G Inoperative.................................. 468
Á Key being taught in Please wait.... 418
Á Key not detected (red display
message)............................................... 418
Á Key not detected (white dis-
play message)........................................ 417
: Le low beam (example).............. 419
6 Le window airbag malfunction
Consult workshop (example).................. 415
: Malfunction See Owner's Man-
ual......................................................... 420
Û Malfunction Visit workshop.......... 429
d Malfunction................................. 429
Û Malfunction................................. 429
ð Maximum speed exceeded........... 456
ç O............................................... 458
ë O............................................... 454
! Parking brake See Owner's
Manual.................................................. 446
! Parking brake Switch on vehi-
cle to release......................................... 449
j Parking lock inoperative Apply
the parking brake................................... 445
È passive........................................ 455
d Performance severely limited....... 430
Ý Please wait 48 V battery charg-
ing......................................................... 471
508 Index
6 Please wait Depressurising fuel
tank....................................................... 430
& Pre-entry climate control via
key available again aer starting vehi-
cle......................................................... 425
& Pre-entry climate control via
key currently unavailable. High-volt-
age battery low...................................... 425
é Rectify tyre pressure.................... 474
é Reduce speed.............................. 475
Ú Rell AdBlue See Owner’s Man-
ual......................................................... 477
! Release parking brake.................. 449
ý Replace air lter........................... 441
Á Replace key................................. 417
æ Reserve fuel level......................... 441
6 Restraint system malfunction
Consult workshop.................................. 413
ð Restricted during trailer opera-
tion........................................................ 466
# Start the vehicle to charge the
12 V battery........................................... 470
Ù Steering malfunction Increased
physical eort See Owner's Manual....... 435
Ù Steering malfunction See Own-
er's Manual............................................ 436
Ù Steering malfunction Stop
immediately See Owner's Manual........... 436
d Stop Switch o the vehicle........... 430
# Stop vehicle Leave vehicle on
to charge the 12 V battery..................... 470
# Stop vehicle See Owner's Man-
ual......................................................... 469
ç suspended................................... 458
: Switch o lights........................... 421
: Switch on headlamps................... 421
6 Tank ventilation Malfunction
Consult workshop.................................. 431
¸ temporarily unavailable Sen-
sors dirty............................................... 464
Ú Top up AdBlue Emergency op.
in XXX km See Owner's Manual.............. 477
Ú Top up AdBlue XX,X l Emerg.
op.: max. XXX km/h Start not poss.
in XXX km.............................................. 477
Ú Top up AdBlue XX,X l Switch
vehicle on, wait 60 sec. or engine
start not poss........................................ 478
+ Top up coolant See Owner’s
Manual.................................................. 439
¥ Top up washer uid...................... 438
u Towing not permitted See Own-
er's Manual............................................ 426
ï Trailer coupling Check lock
(white display message)........................ 434
d Transmission oil overheated
Drive on with care.................................. 444
é Tyre(s) overheated....................... 475
Index 509
d Vehicle is ready to drive Shut-
down occurs when locked or automat-
ically in a few minutes............................ 433
é Warning tyre malfunction............. 474
é Wheel sensor(s) missing............... 473
"Electric" drive program currently
unavailable............................................. 428
Active Blind Spot Assist currently
unavailable See Owner's Manual............ 462
Active Blind Spot Assist inoperative........ 462
Active Blind Spot Assist unavailable
when towing a trailer See Owner's
Manual.................................................. 462
Active bonnet malfunction See Own-
er's Manual............................................ 437
Active Brake Assist Functions cur-
rently limited See Owner's Manual......... 466
Active Brake Assist Functions limited
See Owner's Manual.............................. 459
Active Distance Assist available again..... 459
Active Distance Assist currently
unavailable See Owner's Manual............ 458
Active Distance Assist inoperative.......... 459
Active Lane Keeping Assist currently
unavailable See Owner's Manual............ 463
Active Lane Keeping Assist functions
restricted See Owner's Manual.............. 463
Active Lane Keeping Assist inoperative... 463
Active Parking Assist and
PARKTRONIC inoperative See Own-
er's Manual............................................ 468
Active Steering Assist currently
unavailable due to multiple emer-
gency stops........................................... 460
Active Steering Assist currently
unavailable See Owner's Manual............ 460
Active Steering Assist inoperative........... 460
Adaptive Highbeam Assist currently
unavailable See Owner's Manual............ 421
Adaptive Highbeam Assist inoperative.... 422
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus cur-
rently unavailable See Owner's Manual... 422
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus inop-
erative................................................... 422
Anti-the alarm system Malfunction....... 438
Apply brake and start vehicle to shi
out of P or N.......................................... 442
Apply brake to deselect P position.......... 442
Apply brake to engage D or R................. 442
Apply brake to engage R......................... 442
Apply parking brake to park Visit
workshop............................................... 443
Auxiliary battery malfunction (red dis-
play message)........................................ 446
Auxiliary battery malfunction (white
display message).................................... 445
Blind Spot Assist currently unavailable
See Owner's Manual.............................. 461
Blind Spot Assist inoperative.................. 461
510 Index
Blind Spot Assist unavailable when
towing a trailer See Owner's Manual...... 462
Cannot start vehicle See Owner's
Manual.......................................... 439, 471
Charging fault Please change charging
method See Owner's Manual................. 427
Charging method currently unavaila-
ble Please try again or change charg-
ing method............................................ 427
Check brake pads See Owner's Man-
ual......................................................... 450
Check tyre pressure, then restart Run
Flat Indicator......................................... 476
Consult workshop without changing
the transmission position....................... 444
Consult workshop without starting the
vehicle again.......................................... 429
Cruise control and Limiter inoperative.... 455
Cruise control inoperative...................... 455
Cruise control o................................... 455
Drive system malfunction Stop Switch
o the vehicle........................................ 441
Drive system Malfunction Visit work-
shop...................................................... 441
Front passenger airbag disabled See
Owner's Manual..................................... 415
Front passenger airbag enabled See
Owner's Manual..................................... 416
Hazard warning lamp system Malfunc-
tion........................................................ 423
Head-up display currently unavailable
See Owner's Manual.............................. 435
Head-up display inoperative................... 435
Limiter inoperative................................. 456
Not possible to unlock charging cable
See Owner's Manual.............................. 426
Only electric drive available Power
limited................................................... 427
Only select P when vehicle is station-
ary......................................................... 442
PARKTRONIC inoperative See Own-
er's Manual............................................ 467
Place the key in the marked space
See Owner's Manual.............................. 419
Possible to start the vehicle again.......... 472
PRE-SAFE inoperative See Owner's
Manual.................................................. 467
Reduced drive system performance
See Owner's Manual.............................. 428
Reversing not poss. Consult workshop... 443
Risk of vehicle rolling away Apply
parking brake to park............................. 443
Risk of vehicle rolling away Driver's
door open Transmission not in P............. 443
Run Flat Indicator inoperative................. 476
Speed limit (winter tyres) XXX km/h....... 456
Speed Limit Assist currently unavaila-
ble See Owner's Manual........................ 456
Speed Limit Assist inoperative................ 456
Teaching in transmission complete......... 445
Index 511
Teaching in transmission Operate
selector lever Brake for XX seconds
Risk of vehicle rolling............................. 445
To switch o the vehicle, press the
Start/Stop button for at least 3 sec-
onds or 3 times...................................... 439
Trac Sign Assist currently unavaila-
ble See Owner's Manual........................ 457
Trac Sign Assist inoperative................. 457
Transmission Malfunction....................... 444
Transmission Malfunction Stop............... 443
Transmission Malfunction Visit work-
shop...................................................... 445
Tyre press. monitor currently unavaila-
ble......................................................... 472
Tyre press. monitor inoperative.............. 472
Tyre pressure Check tyres...................... 475
Tyre pressure monitor inoperative No
tyre pressure sensors............................. 473
Vehicle is ready to drive Shutdown
occurs when locked or automatically
in XX mins............................................. 433
Vehicle not currently being charged
Charging station fault............................. 427
Wiper Malfunction.................................. 438
Without changing gear, consult work-
shop...................................................... 429
Displaying road names/house numbers....... 298
Distance control.......................................... 223
Distance warning......................................... 233
DISTRONIC.................................................. 223
Door
Additional door lock................................. 80
Child safety lock (rear door)..................... 73
Emergency key......................................... 83
Opening (from the inside)......................... 80
Unlocking (inside).................................... 80
Door control panel
Seat operation......................................... 14
Drive Away Assist......................................... 265
Drive position............................................... 177
Drive program display.................................. 173
Drive programs
Selecting............................................... 173
Driver's display
48 V on-board electrical system............. 279
Head-up display..................................... 278
Menus................................................... 276
Notes..................................................... 275
Operating.............................................. 275
Service due date.................................... 328
Status displays....................................... 280
Warning/indicator lamps.................. 10, 482
Driver's seat
Adjusting (Seat Comfort)........................ 102
Adjusting (without seat comfort)............ 100
Adjusting electrically.............................. 105
Easy entry and exit feature..................... 111
Seat heating.......................................... 109
Driving abroad
Light adjustment low beam.................... 126
Driving safety system
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System).............. 213
Active Brake Assist................................. 233
512 Index
Adaptive brake lights.............................. 217
ATTENTION ASSIST................................ 218
BAS (Brake Assist System)..................... 213
Blind Spot Assist/Active Blind Spot
Assist.................................................... 243
Cameras................................................ 211
Cruise control........................................ 220
EBD (Electronic Brakeforce Distribu-
tion)....................................................... 215
ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)........ 213
Hill Start Assist...................................... 217
HOLD function....................................... 216
Overview................................................ 212
Radar and ultrasonic sensors................. 211
STEER CONTROL................................... 215
Trac Sign Assist................................... 240
Your responsibility.................................. 210
Driving system............................................. 212
Driving tips
General driving tips................................ 160
Light adjustment when driving abroad.... 126
Recuperation......................................... 167
Running-in notes.................................... 160
Drowsiness detection................................... 218
Duplicate key................................................. 79
Dynamic handling control system................. 213
Dynamic low beam
Activating/deactivating.......................... 130
Overview................................................ 129
DYNAMIC SELECT
Calling up the fuel consumption indi-
cator...................................................... 175
Conguring drive program I.................... 173
Displaying engine data........................... 174
Displaying vehicle data........................... 174
Drive program display............................ 173
Drive programs...................................... 171
Function................................................ 171
Selecting the drive program................... 173
E
E10 petrol.................................................... 399
Easy entry feature
Setting................................................... 112
Easy exit feature
Setting................................................... 112
EBD, Electronic Brakeforce Distribution........ 215
ECO Assist
48 V on-board electrical system............. 166
Activating/deactivating.......................... 170
Plug-in hybrid......................................... 169
ECO display................................................. 165
ECO start/stop button
Automatic engine start/stop.................. 164
ECO start/stop function
Automatic engine start........................... 163
Automatic engine stop........................... 163
Function................................................ 163
Switching o/on.................................... 164
Electric drive................................................ 153
Electric parking brake
Applying automatically........................... 206
Emergency braking................................ 208
Manually applying/releasing.................. 208
Releasing automatically.......................... 207
Electrical fuses............................................. 367
Electromagnetic compatibility
Declaration of conformity......................... 26
Electronic Stability Program......................... 213
Index 513
Emergency
Fire extinguisher.................................... 347
First-aid kit (so sided).......................... 347
Overview of aids...................................... 16
Safety vest............................................. 346
Warning triangle..................................... 347
Emergency braking
Active Brake Assist................................. 233
Brake Assist System............................... 213
Carrying out........................................... 208
Electric parking brake/handbrake.......... 206
Emergency call
Automatic.............................................. 318
Manual.................................................. 319
Emergency call system
Mercedes me connect........................... 318
Emergency key
Door........................................................ 83
Inserting/removing.................................. 78
Emergency operation mode
Start the vehicle..................................... 158
Emergency shuto (high-voltage on-board
electrical system)......................................... 155
Emergency spare wheel
Inating................................................. 387
Emergency stop assistant............................. 232
Energy ow display
Function/notes...................................... 294
Engine
Emergency operation mode.................... 158
Engine number....................................... 396
Starting assistance................................ 358
switching o (start/stop button)............ 203
Tow-starting........................................... 367
Engine data
Displaying.............................................. 174
DYNAMIC SELECT.................................. 174
Engine electronics........................................ 389
Engine number............................................. 396
Engine oil
Additives................................................ 403
Capacity................................................ 404
Checking the oil level using the driver
display................................................... 333
MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval.................. 404
Quality................................................... 404
Temperature (driver's display)................. 277
Topping up............................................. 334
Engine oil temperature (driver's display)....... 277
Engine output, current (driver's display)........ 277
Engine starting
Remote Online....................................... 159
Start/stop button.................................. 157
Environmentally friendly driving...................... 19
ERA-GLONASS test mode............................. 321
ESC, Electronic Stability Control................... 213
ESP®
Activating/deactivating.......................... 215
Crosswind Assist.................................... 214
Function................................................ 213
Trailer stabilisation................................. 215
EU type approval number............................. 396
Exhaust gas aertreatment, diesel engine.... 402
Exit warning................................................. 243
Exiting a parking space
Active Parking Assist.............................. 261
Drive Away Assist................................... 265
PARKTRONIC......................................... 257
514 Index
Exterior lighting
Care...................................................... 341
Light adjustment when driving abroad.... 126
F
Factory settings
MBUX reset function.............................. 293
Fault message
Driver's display...................................... 412
Favourites.................................................... 286
Fire extinguisher.......................................... 347
First aid
First-aid kit (so sided).......................... 347
Fitting
Snow chains.......................................... 371
Tyres...................................................... 385
Wheels................................................... 385
Fitting accessories
Limited protection.................................... 50
Fitting the licence plate (front)........................ 25
Flat towing
Pulling/towing....................................... 274
Flat tyre
MOExtended.......................................... 348
Notes..................................................... 348
TIREFIT kit.............................................. 350
Wheel change........................................ 381
Floor mats................................................... 124
Foil covering
On camera/sensors............................... 211
Radar and ultrasonic sensors................. 211
Free soware................................................. 37
Frequencies
Mobile phone......................................... 390
Two-way radio........................................ 390
Front airbag
Inating................................................... 48
Front headlamps.......................................... 126
Front passenger airbag
Disabling/enabling.................................. 44
Front passenger airbag shuto
Information (child restraint system on
the front passenger seat)......................... 60
Front passenger seat
Adjusting (Seat Comfort)........................ 102
Adjusting (without seat comfort)............ 100
Adjusting electrically.............................. 105
Front wheel arch, Wing
Fitting/removing the cover..................... 137
Front wheel arch cover
Fitting/removing.................................... 137
FuelAdditives................................................ 400
Depressurising the fuel tank (plug-in
hybrid with petrol engine)....................... 184
Diesel.................................................... 400
Diesel quality......................................... 400
E10........................................................ 399
Low outside temperatures...................... 400
Petrol..................................................... 399
Quality (petrol)....................................... 399
Relling.................................................. 180
Reserve................................................. 402
Sulphur content..................................... 399
Tank content.......................................... 402
Fuel consumption indicator.......................... 175
Fuel reserve................................................. 402
Function in the event of an accident............... 48
Function seat................................................. 14
Index 515
Fuses
Boot...................................................... 370
Engine compartment.............................. 368
Front passenger footwell........................ 369
Fuse assignment diagram....................... 367
Notes..................................................... 367
G
G-meter, Accelerometer............................... 277
Garage door opener
Clearing the memory.............................. 206
Open/close gate.................................... 206
Problem................................................. 206
Garage door openers
Programming buttons............................. 204
Synchronising the rolling code................ 205
Gearshi
DIRECT SELECT lever............................. 175
Manual.................................................. 177
Gearshi paddles
Steering wheel gearshi paddles............ 177
General driving tips...................................... 160
Genuine parts................................................ 20
Glide mode.................................................. 179
Glove compartment..................................... 117
Grab handles
Notes..................................................... 100
Gross mass.................................................. 396
H
Handbrake................................................... 206
Handling characteristics
Unusual................................................. 371
HANDS-FREE ACCESS................................... 86
Hazard warning lights................................... 129
Hazard warnings
Car-to-X-Communication........................ 300
Head restraint
Adjusting (rear)...................................... 107
Adjusting manually (front)...................... 106
Removing/tting (rear)........................... 107
Head-up display
Care...................................................... 343
Function................................................ 278
Memory function................................... 113
Operating.............................................. 278
Switching on/o.................................... 279
Headlamp ashing........................................ 128
Headlamp range........................................... 127
Headlamps................................................... 126
Heating
Activating/deactivating.......................... 145
Seat....................................................... 109
Stationary heater................................... 150
Steering wheel....................................... 111
Help call
Mercedes-Benz emergency call system.. 318
High beam
Illuminants............................................. 137
High-pressure cleaner.................................. 339
High-voltage battery
Charge level display............................... 202
Charging at time of departure................ 293
Charging cable control panel.................. 194
Charging duration.................................. 408
Charging station, mode 3....................... 191
Conguring weekly prole...................... 293
Connection types................................... 408
516 Index
Ending the charging process (alternat-
ing current, mode 2/3).......................... 199
Ending the charging process (direct
current, mode 4).................................... 201
Energy ow display................................. 294
General notes on charging..................... 187
Mains socket, mode 2............................ 190
Notes..................................................... 357
Range.................................................... 408
Rapid charging station, mode 4.............. 192
Setting the maximum permissible
charging current (mains socket)............. 193
Starting the charging process (alter-
nating current, mode 2/3)..................... 196
Starting the charging process (direct
current, mode 4).................................... 200
Stowing the charging cable.................... 189
Type....................................................... 408
Voltage types......................................... 408
Wallbox, mode 3.................................... 191
High-voltage on-board electrical system
Indicator lamps on vehicle socket........... 195
Manual switch-o................................... 155
Operating safety...................................... 22
Hill Start Assist............................................ 217
HOLD function
Function................................................ 216
Switching on/o.................................... 216
Home screen
Central display....................................... 283
I
i-Size child restraint system
Fitting...................................................... 70
Suitable seats.......................................... 66
Identication plate
Engine................................................... 396
Vehicle.................................................. 396
Illuminants
High beam............................................. 137
Low beam.............................................. 137
Immediate pre-entry climate control............. 149
Immobiliser.................................................... 96
Implied warranty............................................ 34
Importer addresses
Wireless components............................... 28
Importer information
Regulatory radio information.................. 396
In-Car Oce................................................ 313
Incorrect behaviour by vehicle occupants
Limited protection.................................... 50
Indicator lamps/warning lamps
PASSENGER AIR BAG............................... 43
Indicator/warning lamps.............................. 482
Individual drive program
Conguring............................................ 173
Inside rearview mirror.................................. 141
Intelligent Light System
Active headlamps................................... 129
Adaptive Highbeam Assist...................... 131
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus............... 132
City lighting............................................ 130
Cornering light....................................... 130
Motorway mode..................................... 130
Interior lighting
Ambient lighting..................................... 135
Setting................................................... 134
Switch-o delay time.............................. 136
Interior protection.......................................... 98
Internet
Mercedes me connect........................... 311
Index 517
Setting up a Wi-Fi hotspot...................... 291
Web browsers........................................ 314
ISOFIX child restraint system
Fitting...................................................... 70
Suitable seats.......................................... 65
J
JackDeclaration of conformity......................... 28
Storage location..................................... 380
Jump-start connection.................................. 360
K
Key acoustic locking verication signal........... 77
Activating/deactivating pre-entry cli-
mate control.......................................... 147
Battery..................................................... 78
Deactivating a function............................ 77
Emergency key......................................... 78
Energy consumption................................ 77
Function.................................................. 76
Key ring attachment................................. 78
Problem................................................... 79
Replacement key...................................... 79
Unlocking setting..................................... 77
KEYLESS-GO
Deactivating............................................. 77
Locking/unlocking the vehicle................. 81
Problem................................................... 82
Unlocking setting..................................... 77
Kickdown..................................................... 179
Knee airbag.................................................... 54
L
Lane Keeping Assist..................................... 246
Lane recognition (automatic)
Active Lane Keeping Assist..................... 246
Language
Notes..................................................... 292
Setting................................................... 292
Light adjustment
Driving abroad....................................... 126
Light switch................................................. 126
Lighting
Interior lighting....................................... 134
Lights
Activating/deactivating dynamic low
beam..................................................... 130
Active headlamps................................... 129
Adaptive brake lights.............................. 217
Adaptive Highbeam Assist...................... 131
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus............... 132
Automatic driving lights.......................... 127
Changing illuminants.............................. 136
City lighting............................................ 130
Combination switch............................... 128
Cornering light....................................... 130
Dynamic low beam................................. 129
Hazard warning lights............................. 129
Headlamp range..................................... 127
High beam............................................. 128
Interior lighting....................................... 134
Light adjustment when driving abroad.... 126
Locator lighting...................................... 134
Motorway mode..................................... 130
Reading lamp......................................... 134
Rear fog light......................................... 127
Responsibility for lighting systems.......... 126
Setting low beam................................... 134
Switch-o delay time.............................. 134
Turn signal light...................................... 128
518 Index
Limiter
Activating/deactivating.................. 221, 226
Buttons.................................................. 221
Calling up a speed................................. 221
Function................................................ 220
Passive mode......................................... 220
Permanent setting.................................. 223
Requirements:....................................... 221
Selecting............................................... 221
Setting a speed...................................... 221
Storing a speed...................................... 221
LINGUATRONIC............................................ 283
Live Trac Information................................. 300
Load capacity
Bicycle rack........................................... 410
Loading
Roof luggage rack.................................. 120
Tie-down eyes........................................ 119
Loading guidelines....................................... 114
Loads........................................................... 114
Locator lighting............................................ 134
Locking/unlocking
Additional door lock................................. 80
Automatic locking (MMS)................... 82, 83
Doors (from the inside)............................ 80
Emergency key......................................... 83
KEYLESS-GO............................................ 81
Mercedes me connect............................. 80
Loud sound
PRE-SAFE® Sound................................... 46
Low beam
Activating/deactivating.......................... 126
Illuminants............................................. 137
Le-hand/right-hand trac................... 134
Light adjustment when driving abroad.... 126
Setting................................................... 134
lubricants..................................................... 398
Luggage....................................................... 114
Lumbar support........................................... 105
M
Maintaining safe distance
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC......... 226
Maintenance................................................ 328
Maintenance Management
Notes..................................................... 329
Transferred data..................................... 329
Malfunction
Restraint system...................................... 41
Manoeuvering brake function....................... 266
Manoeuvring
Manoeuvering brake function................. 266
Manoeuvring assistant
Activating/deactivating.......................... 267
Drive Away Assist................................... 265
Manoeuvering brake function................. 266
Manual gearshiing
Activating/deactivating.......................... 178
Map
Displaying online map contents.............. 300
Displaying weather information.............. 300
Moving................................................... 300
Selecting the map orientation................ 300
Setting the map scale............................ 300
Map functions.............................................. 300
Massage programmes.......................... 108, 109
Maximum full-stop braking........................... 213
Maximum permissible gross vehicle mass..... 396
Index 519
Maximum speeds......................................... 407
MBUX
Dashcam............................................... 302
MBUX multimedia system
Activating/deactivating standby mode... 210
Drive programs...................................... 173
Factory setting....................................... 293
Home screen......................................... 283
Language settings.................................. 283
Media.................................................... 323
Mercedes me & Apps............................. 313
Notes..................................................... 282
Overview................................................ 282
Set collision detection.................... 208, 209
Setting route-based speed adaptation.... 230
Standby mode function.......................... 210
Steering wheel heater/seat heating....... 111
Telephone.............................................. 304
MBUX voice assistant
Function................................................ 283
Voice prompting..................................... 284
Media
Overview of functions/symbols.............. 323
Medical aids................................................... 33
Memory function
Head-up display..................................... 113
Outside mirrors...................................... 113
Seat....................................................... 113
Menus (driver's display)
Notes..................................................... 276
Sport..................................................... 277
Mercedes me App
Activating on-demand features................. 22
Mercedes me Apps...................................... 313
Mercedes me calls
Arranging a service appointment............ 309
Calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer
Centre aer automatic accident/
breakdown detection............................. 308
Calls via the overhead control panel....... 307
Consenting to the transfer of data.......... 310
Information............................................ 308
Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre........... 308
Transferred data..................................... 310
Mercedes me connect
Accident/Breakdown Management........ 312
Information............................................ 311
Transferred data..................................... 313
Mercedes-AMG vehicles
Notes..................................................... 153
Mercedes-Benz emergency call system
Automatic emergency call...................... 318
Data processing..................................... 321
Data transfer......................................... 319
ERA-GLONASS test mode...................... 321
Information............................................ 316
Manual emergency call.......................... 319
Overview................................................ 318
Self-diagnosis........................................ 321
Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts......................... 20
Mercedes-Benz service centre....................... 32
Message memory......................................... 412
Mirrors
Mirror folding function............................ 143
Outside mirrors...................................... 140
Rear-view mirror..................................... 141
Mobile phone
Frequencies........................................... 390
Maximum transmission output............... 390
Notes on wireless charging.................... 122
Model type................................................... 396
520 Index
Modication
Limited protection.................................... 50
MOExtended tyres, Run-at tyres................. 348
Motorway mode........................................... 130
MULTIBEAM LED.......................................... 129
Multimedia system....................................... 282
N
Navigation
Activating............................................... 295
Destination entry................................... 297
Notes..................................................... 294
Overview................................................ 295
Neutral........................................................ 176
O
Objects in the vehicle interior
Limited protection.................................... 50
Occupant safety
Airbag...................................................... 54
Basic information..................................... 38
Child seat................................................ 56
Information on the child restraint sys-
tem.......................................................... 45
Information on the correct seat position... 39
Pets in the vehicle.................................... 50
PRE-SAFE®.............................................. 46
On-board diagnostics interface....................... 30
On-board electronics
Engine electronics................................. 389
Two-way radios...................................... 389
On-demand feature........................................ 22
Online services.............................................. 36
Open Source Soware................................... 37
Open/close garage door.............................. 206
Open/close gate.......................................... 206
Opening the boot lid using your foot
HANDS-FREE ACCESS............................. 86
Operating uids
AdBlue®................................................. 402
Additives................................................ 400
Brake uid............................................. 405
Coolant.................................................. 405
Diesel.................................................... 400
Engine oil............................................... 403
Notes..................................................... 398
Petrol..................................................... 399
Windscreen washer uid........................ 406
Operating safety
48 V on-board electrical system............... 22
High-voltage on-board electrical system... 22
Outside mirrors
Automatic mirror folding function........... 143
Blind Spot Assist/Active Blind Spot
Assist.................................................... 243
Folding in/out........................................ 140
Memory function................................... 113
Parking position..................................... 142
Setting................................................... 140
Warning lamp......................................... 243
Overhead control panel.................................. 12
Overview of airbags........................................ 54
Owner's Manual............................................. 21
P
Paint code................................................... 396
Park position
DIRECT SELECT lever............................. 175
Index 521
Parking
Active Parking Assist.............................. 261
PARKTRONIC......................................... 257
Parking Assist
Active Parking Assist.............................. 261
PARKTRONIC......................................... 257
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
Activating/deactivating.......................... 260
Adjusting warning tones......................... 260
Function................................................ 257
Parking assistance systems
Active Parking Assist.............................. 261
Drive Away Assist................................... 265
Manoeuvering brake function................. 266
PARKTRONIC......................................... 257
Parking brake............................................... 206
Parking lights............................................... 126
Parking position
Outside mirrors...................................... 142
Storing the position of the passenger
outside mirror using reverse gear........... 142
Parking up................................................... 209
PARKTRONIC............................................... 257
PASSENGER AIR BAG
Status display, front passenger airbag...... 43
Pedestrian protection................................... 330
Period out of use
Activating/deactivating standby mode... 210
Permissible axle load.................................... 396
Permissible towing methods......................... 362
Permitted towing methods
Overview................................................ 361
Personalisation............................................ 285
Petrol........................................................... 399
Pets in the vehicle.......................................... 50
Plug-in hybrid operation
Charging cable control panel.................. 194
Charging the high-voltage battery at a
rapid charging station (mode 4).............. 192
Ending the charging process (alternat-
ing current, mode 2/3).......................... 199
Ending the charging process (direct
current, mode 4).................................... 201
Function of the regenerative brake
system................................................... 167
Functions of the energy ow display....... 294
Indicator lamps on vehicle socket........... 195
Manually disconnecting the high-volt-
age on-board electrical system............... 155
Notes on charging (charging station,
mode 3)................................................. 191
Notes on charging (mains socket,
mode 2)................................................. 190
Notes on charging (wallbox, mode 3)...... 191
Notes on plug-in hybrid operation........... 153
Operating safety...................................... 22
Power meter.......................................... 280
Route-based operating-mode strategy.... 171
Sets recuperation.................................. 168
Setting the maximum permissible
charging current.................................... 193
Starting the charging process (alter-
nating current, mode 2/3)..................... 196
Starting the charging process (direct
current, mode 4).................................... 200
Stowing the charging cable.................... 189
Post-collision brake........................................ 48
Power supply
Start/stop button.................................. 156
Switching on (start/stop button)............ 156
522 Index
Pre-entry climate control
activating/deactivating for departure
time....................................................... 149
At departure time................................... 148
At time of departure............................... 148
immediate.............................................. 149
When vehicle is unlocked....................... 147
Pre-entry climate control using the key
Activating/deactivating.......................... 147
Function................................................ 147
PRE-SAFE®, Anticipatory occupant protection
Function.................................................. 46
PRE-SAFE® Sound................................... 46
Reversing measures................................. 46
PRE-SAFE® PLUS
Function.................................................. 46
Reversing measures................................. 46
Preventative occupant protection system....... 46
Prole.......................................................... 285
Programme.................................................. 171
Protection
Limited.................................................... 50
Protection against collision
Manoeuvering brake function................. 266
Protection of the environment
Driving style............................................. 19
Take-back of end-of-life vehicles............... 19
Pulling away
Hill Start Assist...................................... 217
Start-o assist....................................... 217
Pyrotechnical vehicle components................ 391
Q
QR code rescue card...................................... 34
Qualied specialist workshop......................... 32
R
Radar and ultrasonic sensors....................... 211
Radio........................................................... 325
Radio regulations
Importer information.............................. 396
Regulatory radio identication................ 396
Specic absorption rate......................... 396
Wireless applications............................. 392
Rain closing function
Side windows........................................... 90
Sliding sunroof......................................... 94
Rain sensor
Side windows........................................... 90
Sliding sunroof......................................... 94
Windscreen wipers................................. 138
REACH regulation........................................... 32
Reading lamp
Interior lighting....................................... 134
Rear door (child safety lock)
Securing.................................................. 73
Rear fog lamp............................................... 127
Rear fog light............................................... 127
Rear seat belt
Status display.......................................... 42
Rear window heater...................................... 144
Rear-view mirror
Automatic anti-glare mode..................... 141
Rearward-facing child seat
Information.............................................. 62
Index 523
Recuperation
Function................................................ 167
Setting................................................... 168
Recycling....................................................... 19
Reducing agent
AdBlue®................................................. 185
Refuelling
Depressurising the fuel tank (plug-in
hybrid with petrol engine)....................... 184
Fuel....................................................... 180
Refuelling the vehicle............................. 180
Topping up AdBlue®............................... 185
Registration................................................... 32
Remote Online
Charging the starter battery................... 159
Cooling/heating the vehicle interior....... 159
Starting the vehicle................................ 159
Replacement key............................................ 79
Replacing a bulb........................................... 136
Reserve
Fuel....................................................... 402
Resetting
MBUX reset function.............................. 293
Residual heat............................................... 146
Responsibility
Driving safety systems........................... 210
Restraint system
Basic information..................................... 38
Basic instructions for children.................. 56
Deployment situations.............................. 48
Functionality............................................ 41
Information on function............................ 48
Information on the correct seat position... 39
Limited protection.................................... 50
Malfunction............................................. 41
Protection................................................ 39
Self-test................................................... 41
Warning lamp........................................... 41
Reverse gear
DIRECT SELECT lever............................. 175
Reversing camera
360° Camera......................................... 249
Activating/deactivating.......................... 256
Care...................................................... 341
Function................................................ 249
Opening the camera cover..................... 257
Setting................................................... 256
Roll away protection..................................... 216
Roller sunblind
Sliding sunroof......................................... 92
Roof luggage rack
Loading.................................................. 120
Securing................................................ 120
Route
Alternative route.................................... 298
Calculating............................................. 298
Commuter route..................................... 298
Navigation............................................. 295
Selecting a type..................................... 298
Route guidance with augmented reality
Activating............................................... 298
Activating/deactivating the trac
light view............................................... 242
Displaying road names/house num-
bers....................................................... 298
Switching video on or o........................ 298
Route-based operating-mode strategy
Function................................................ 171
Route-based speed adaptation
Function................................................ 229
Setting................................................... 230
524 Index
Run-at characteristics................................ 348
Running-in notes.......................................... 160
S
Safety system.............................................. 212
Safety vest................................................... 346
Seat
Adjusting (Seat Comfort)........................ 102
Adjusting (without seat comfort)............ 100
Adjusting electrically.............................. 105
Automatic adjustment............................ 108
Conguring settings............................... 107
Correct driver's seat position................... 99
Folding back the backrest (rear)............. 118
Folding the backrest forwards (rear)....... 117
Locking the backrest (rear).................... 119
Lumbar support..................................... 105
Memory function................................... 113
Resetting settings (massage pro-
gramme)................................................ 109
Settings................................................... 14
Side airbag.............................................. 54
Seat belt
Activating/deactivating seat belt
adjustment.............................................. 47
Automatic tightening................................ 47
Care...................................................... 343
Fastening................................................. 41
Notes on wearing correctly...................... 40
Rear seat belt status display..................... 42
Releasing................................................. 53
Warning lamp........................................... 42
Seat belt adjustment
Activating/deactivating............................ 47
Function.................................................. 47
Seat belt tensioners
Inating................................................... 48
Seat belt warning........................................... 42
Seat heating
Activating/deactivating.......................... 109
Seat height.................................................. 105
Selecting a gear........................................... 177
Selector lever............................................... 175
Self-test
Automatic front passenger airbag shut
o............................................................ 43
Restraint system...................................... 41
Sensors
Cleaning................................................ 341
Service........................................................ 328
Service centre............................................... 32
Service due date.......................................... 328
Service interval display................................. 328
Shiing
Automatic transmission.......................... 177
Gearshi recommendation..................... 178
Manual.................................................. 177
Steering wheel gearshi paddles............ 177
Shortening the braking distance
Brake Assist System............................... 213
Shunting support......................................... 266
Side airbag..................................................... 54
Side windows
Automatic function................................... 90
Child safety lock (rear)............................. 75
Close with key.......................................... 91
Index 525
Convenience closing................................ 91
Convenience opening............................... 90
Opening/closing...................................... 88
Problem................................................... 91
Rain closing function................................ 90
Skid chains.................................................. 371
Sliding sunroof
Automatic functions................................. 94
Close with key.......................................... 91
Opening with the key................................ 90
Opening/closing...................................... 92
Problem................................................... 95
Rain closing function................................ 94
Smartphone Integration, iPhone®
Android Auto.......................................... 315
Apple CarPlay®...................................... 315
Snow chains................................................ 371
Socket
12 V (boot/load compartment).............. 121
12 V (front centre console).................... 121
Trailer operation..................................... 270
Socket ap................................................... 187
Soware update........................................... 289
SOS button.................................................. 307
Sound
Menu..................................................... 327
PRE-SAFE® Sound................................... 46
Wheels/tyres......................................... 371
Sound settings............................................. 327
Spare parts.................................................... 20
Spare wheel
Emergency spare wheel......................... 386
Specialist workshop....................................... 32
Specic absorption rate (SAR)...................... 396
Speed
Limit, Limiter.......................................... 220
Save, cruise control............................... 226
Save, DISTRONIC................................... 226
Save, Limiter.......................................... 226
Speed adjustment, route-based.................... 229
Speed control
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC......... 223
Cruise control........................................ 220
Limiter................................................... 220
Speed limit
Winter tyres........................................... 223
Speed Limit Assist
Setting................................................... 239
System limits......................................... 238
Standing lights............................................. 126
Start-o assist
Activating............................................... 218
Function................................................ 217
Hill Start Assist...................................... 217
Start/stop button
Parking the vehicle................................. 203
Starting the vehicle................................ 157
Switching on the power supply / vehi-
cle......................................................... 156
Start/stop function...................................... 163
Starter battery
Charging via Remote Online................... 159
Starting assistance...................................... 360
Starting the engine
Emergency operation mode.................... 158
Remote Online....................................... 159
Start/stop button.................................. 157
Starting-o aid
Drive Away Assist................................... 265
526 Index
Hill Start Assist...................................... 217
Start-o assist....................................... 217
Stationary heater/ventilation
Activating/deactivating.......................... 150
Operating.............................................. 151
Status display
Front passenger airbag............................. 43
Rear seat belt.......................................... 42
Steer Assist
Active Steering Assist............................. 230
STEER CONTROL................................... 215
STEER CONTROL......................................... 215
Steering wheel
Driver's airbag......................................... 54
Manually adjusting................................. 110
Steering wheel heater............................ 110
Steering wheel gearshi paddles.................. 177
Steering wheel heater
Linking to seat heating........................... 111
Stop/start
ECO start/stop function........................ 164
Stopping
Parking the vehicle................................. 203
Stowage areas............................................. 117
Stowage spaces
Armrest................................................. 117
Centre console (front)............................ 117
Door...................................................... 117
Glove compartment............................... 117
Sulphur content........................................... 399
Suspension
Adaptive damping adjustment................ 248
Damping characteristics......................... 248
SVHC
Substances of very high concern.............. 32
Switch-o delay time
Exterior.................................................. 134
Interior................................................... 136
Switching air-recirculation mode on/o....... 146
Synchronisation function
Activating/deactivating (control panel)... 146
System settings
MBUX reset function.............................. 293
Overview................................................ 289
T
Take-back of end-of-life vehicles..................... 19
Tank content
AdBlue®................................................. 403
Fuel....................................................... 402
Reserve................................................. 402
Tank ller cap / ap..................................... 180
Technical data
Axle load (trailer operation).................... 411
Fastening points of the trailer hitch........ 409
High-voltage battery............................... 408
Information............................................ 389
Maximum speeds................................... 407
Mounting dimensions of a trailer hitch.... 409
Overhang dimension of the trailer hitch.. 409
Pyrotechnical vehicle components.......... 391
Radio frequencies.................................. 390
Radio regulations................................... 396
Specic absorption rate (SAR)................ 396
Tongue weight........................................ 410
Towing capacity..................................... 410
Vehicle dimensions................................ 407
Telediagnosis
Diagnostic data...................................... 329
Index 527
Telediagnostics
Transferred data..................................... 330
Telephone
Bluetooth®............................................. 306
Charging wirelessly (mobile phone)........ 123
Connecting a mobile phone.................... 306
Emergency call...................................... 318
Menu..................................................... 307
Notes..................................................... 304
Notes on wireless charging (mobile
phone)................................................... 122
Operating modes................................... 306
Secure Simple Pairing............................ 306
Telephone menu overview...................... 306
Telephony operating modes
Bluetooth® telephony............................. 306
Temperature
Setting the vehicle interior tempera-
ture....................................................... 144
Tie-down eyes.............................................. 119
TIREFIT kit
Declaration of conformity......................... 29
Storage location............................. 349, 350
Tongue weight.............................................. 410
Top Tether...................................................... 71
Torque (driver's display)................................ 277
Touch Control
Driver's display...................................... 275
Touch-sensitive controls................................. 21
Tow bar system
Towing away.......................................... 274
Tow-away protection...................................... 97
Tow-starting................................................. 367
Towing
Pulling/towing....................................... 274
Towing methods..................................... 361
Towing eye
Fitting/removing.................................... 366
Storage location..................................... 366
Towing methods
Both axles on the ground....................... 363
Overview................................................ 361
Trac information........................................ 300
Trac light view
Activating/deactivating.......................... 242
Information............................................ 242
Trac light warning/display......................... 240
Trac Sign Assist
Function................................................ 240
Setting................................................... 242
Trailer coupling............................................. 268
Trailer drawbar, Pulling/towing..................... 274
Trailer hitch
Axle load................................................ 411
Bicycle rack........................................... 272
Care...................................................... 341
Coupling up/uncoupling a trailer............ 270
Fastening points.................................... 409
Folding the ball neck out/in................... 268
General notes........................................ 409
Mounting dimensions............................. 409
Overhang dimension.............................. 409
Socket................................................... 270
Tongue weight........................................ 410
Towing capacity..................................... 410
Trailer operation
Active Blind Spot Assist.......................... 245
Active Lane Keeping Assist..................... 246
Axle load................................................ 411
Bicycle rack........................................... 272
528 Index
Coupling up/uncoupling a trailer............ 270
Folding the ball neck out/in................... 268
Notes..................................................... 267
Socket................................................... 270
Trailer stabilisation....................................... 215
Transmission position display....................... 175
Transmission positions
DIRECT SELECT lever............................. 175
Transporting
Vehicle.................................................. 365
TuneIn Internet Radio................................... 326
Turn signal indicator..................................... 128
Turn signal light............................................ 128
Two-way radios
Frequencies........................................... 390
Installation............................................. 389
Transmission output............................... 390
Type approval number EG............................. 396
Tyre pressure
Checking............................................... 374
TIREFIT kit.............................................. 350
Tyre pressure loss warning system,
function................................................. 375
Tyre pressure loss warning system,
restarting............................................... 376
Tyre pressure table................................. 373
Tyre pressure loss warning system
Function................................................ 375
Restarting.............................................. 376
Tyre pressure monitoring system
Function................................................ 374
Restarting.............................................. 375
Tyre pressure table....................................... 373
Tyre sealant................................................. 350
Tyre tread.................................................... 371
Tyre-change tool........................................... 380
Tyre-change tool kit
Overview................................................ 380
Tyres
Breakdown............................................. 348
Checking............................................... 371
Checking the temperature...................... 374
Fitting.................................................... 385
Interchanging......................................... 379
MOExtended.......................................... 348
Noise..................................................... 371
Notes on tting...................................... 376
Removing............................................... 384
Removing/tting hub cap....................... 381
Replacing....................................... 376, 381
Selection............................................... 376
Snow chains.......................................... 371
Storing................................................... 380
TIREFIT kit.............................................. 350
Tyre pressure loss warning system,
function................................................. 375
Tyre pressure loss warning system,
restarting............................................... 376
Tyre pressure table................................. 373
Unusual handling characteristics............ 371
U
Unfastening................................................... 53
Unlocking setting........................................... 77
Updates....................................................... 289
USB port
Rear....................................................... 122
Stowage compartments (front)............... 117
User proles
Adding a user......................................... 286
Index 529
Note...................................................... 285
Selecting options................................... 286
V
Variable limiter............................................. 220
Vehicle
48 V on-board electrical system............... 22
Activating/deactivating standby mode... 210
Additional door lock................................. 80
Correct use.............................................. 32
Data storage............................................ 34
Diagnostics connection............................ 30
Emergency key......................................... 83
enabling, Remote Online........................ 159
Equipment............................................... 21
High-voltage on-board electrical system... 22
Implied warranty...................................... 34
KEYLESS-GO............................................ 81
lock automatically (MMS)................... 82, 83
Locking/unlocking (from inside)............... 81
Locking/unlocking using the emer-
gency key................................................ 83
Lowering................................................ 385
Medical aids............................................ 33
Parking up............................................. 209
QR code rescue card............................... 34
Raising................................................... 382
REACH regulation.................................... 32
Registration............................................. 32
Set collision detection.................... 208, 209
Standby mode function.......................... 210
Starting (start/stop button)................... 157
starting, emergency operation mode...... 158
Stopping................................................ 203
SVHC/substances of very high concern... 32
Switching o.......................................... 203
switching o (start/stop button)............ 203
Switching on (start/stop button)............ 156
Towing................................................... 274
Towing away.......................................... 361
Transporting.......................................... 365
ventilate / comfort opening..................... 90
Vehicle cameras........................................... 211
Vehicle data
Displaying, DYNAMIC SELECT................ 174
Displaying, MBUX................................... 174
Maximum speeds................................... 407
Vehicle height........................................ 407
Vehicle length........................................ 407
Vehicle width......................................... 407
Weights................................................. 407
Wheelbase............................................. 407
Vehicle dimensions...................................... 407
Vehicle emergency start............................... 367
Vehicle equipment......................................... 21
Vehicle identication plate
Axle load................................................ 396
EU type approval number....................... 396
Gross mass............................................ 396
Model type............................................ 396
Paint code............................................. 396
VIN........................................................ 396
Vehicle interior
Cooling/heating (Remote Online)........... 159
Vehicle key..................................................... 76
Vehicle sensors............................................ 211
Vehicle socket
Care...................................................... 341
Indicator lamps...................................... 195
Vehicle start
Emergency operation mode.................... 158
Remote Online....................................... 159
Start/stop button.................................. 157
530 Index
Vehicle tool kit
TIREFIT kit...................................... 349, 350
Towing eye............................................. 366
Ventilating...................................................... 90
Ventilation................................................... 151
Vents
Air vents................................................ 151
VIN, Vehicle identication number
Engine compartment.............................. 396
Identication plate................................. 396
Windscreen............................................ 396
Vision
Demisting windows................................ 146
Voice assistant
Voice prompting..................................... 284
W
Warning system.............................................. 96
Warning triangle................................... 346, 347
Warning/indicator lamp
! ABS warning lamp........................ 493
Ó Active Brake Assist warning
lamp.............................................. 496, 497
Û ATTENTION ASSIST warning
lamp...................................................... 496
J Brakes warning lamp (red)............ 492
J Brakes warning lamp (yellow)....... 492
ÿ Coolant warning lamp (red).......... 488
ÿ Coolant warning lamp (yellow)...... 489
! Electric parking brake indicator
lamp (red).............................................. 491
! Electric parking brake indicator
lamp (yellow).......................................... 491
# Electrical fault warning lamp
...................................................... 486, 490
; Engine diagnostics warning
lamp...................................................... 490
p Engine operating temperature
warning lamp......................................... 490
å ESP® OFF warning lamp............... 495
÷ ESP® warning lamp ashes.......... 494
÷ ESP® warning lamp lights up........ 494
æ Fuel reserve warning lamp
lights up................................................. 491
H Mercedes-Benz emergency call
system warning lamp............................. 497
Ù Power steering warning lamp
(red)...................................................... 487
Ù Power steering warning lamp
(yellow).................................................. 487
_ Reduced-power warning lamp...... 485
6 Restraint system warning lamp..... 484
ü Seat belt warning lamp ashes..... 485
ü Seat belt warning lamp lights up... 485
Ú System error warning lamp.......... 486
ï Trailer hitch warning lamp............ 486
h Tyre pressure monitoring sys-
tem warning lamp ashes....................... 498
h Tyre pressure monitoring sys-
tem warning lamp lights up.................... 498
Index 531
L Warning lamp for distance
warning.................................................. 496
Warning/indicator lamps
Driver's display...................................... 482
PASSENGER AIR BAG............................... 43
Washer uid
Topping up............................................. 336
Windscreen washer uid........................ 406
Washing by hand.......................................... 340
Water tank................................................... 337
Wear
Limited protection.................................... 50
Weather information..................................... 300
Web browsers.............................................. 314
Wedge......................................................... 380
Weight information....................................... 396
Wheel change
Fitting a new wheel................................ 385
Lowering the vehicle.............................. 385
Preparation............................................ 381
Raising the vehicle................................. 382
Removing a wheel.................................. 384
Removing/tting hub caps..................... 381
Wheel rotation............................................. 379
Wheels
Breakdown............................................. 348
Care...................................................... 341
Checking............................................... 371
Checking the tyre temperature............... 374
Fitting.................................................... 385
Interchanging......................................... 379
MOExtended.......................................... 348
Noise..................................................... 371
Notes on tting...................................... 376
Removing............................................... 384
Removing/tting hub cap....................... 381
Replacing....................................... 376, 381
Selection............................................... 376
Snow chains.......................................... 371
Storing................................................... 380
TIREFIT kit.............................................. 350
Tyre pressure......................................... 372
Tyre pressure monitoring system............ 374
Unusual handling characteristics............ 371
Wi-Fi
Setting up a hotspot............................... 291
Window airbag............................................... 54
Windows
Care...................................................... 341
Opening/closing...................................... 88
Removing mist....................................... 146
Windscreen
Demisting.............................................. 144
Replacing the wiper blades..................... 138
Windscreen washer uid............................... 406
Windscreen washer system.......................... 336
Windscreen wipers
Activating/deactivating.......................... 138
Replacing the wiper blades..................... 138
Replacing the wiper blades (wind-
screen).................................................. 138
Winter operation
Snow chains.......................................... 371
Winter tyres
Limiter................................................... 223
Setting the permanent speed limit.......... 223
Wiper blades
Care...................................................... 341
Replacing (windscreen).......................... 138
532 Index
Wipers......................................................... 138
Wireless applications.................................... 392
Wireless charging
Mobile phone......................................... 123
Overview................................................ 122
Wireless components
Importer addresses.................................. 28
Workshop....................................................... 32
Index 533
Publication details
Internet
Further information about Mercedes-Benz vehi-
cles and about Mercedes‑Benz AG can be found
on the following websites:
https://www.mercedes-benz.com
https://group.mercedes-benz.com
Documentation team
You are welcome to forward any queries or sug-
gestions you may have regarding this Owner's
Manual to the technical documentation team at
the following address:
Mercedes‑Benz AG, HPC: CAC, Customer Service,
70546 Stuttgart, Germany
©Mercedes‑Benz AG: Not to be reprinted, transla-
ted or otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part,
without written permission from
Mercedes‑Benz AG.
Vehicle manufacturer
Mercedes‑Benz AG
Mercedesstraße 120
70372 Stuttgart
Germany
Front passenger airbag warning
&WARNING Risk of injury or death due to
an enabled co-driver airbag
If the co-driver airbag is enabled, a child on
the co-driver seat may be struck by the co-
driver airbag during an accident.
#NEVER use a rearward-facing child
restraint system on a seat with an ENA-
BLED FRONT AIRBAG. DEATH or SERI-
OUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur.
Observe the chapter "Children in the vehicle".
As at 01.04.22
Digital – in the vehicle Vehicle document wallet Digital – on the Internet Digital – as an App
Familiarise yourself with
the contents of the Own-
er's Manual directly via
the vehicle's multimedia
system (menu item "Vehi-
cle information"). Start
with the quick guide or
broaden your knowledge
with practical tips.
Here you can nd com-
prehensive information
about operating your
vehicle and about serv-
ices and guarantees in
printed form.
You can nd the Owner's
Manual on the Mercedes-
Benz homepage.
The Mercedes-Benz
Guides App is available
free-of-charge in familiar
App stores.
É1775845013Z102(ËÍ
1775845013Z102
Apple® iOS AndroidTM
Order no. P177 0873 02 Part no. 177 584 50 13 Z102
Edition ÄJ2022-Ma
A-Class
Operator's Manual
A-Class
532

Brauchen Sie Hilfe? Stellen Sie Ihre Frage.

Forenregeln

Missbrauch melden von Frage und/oder Antwort

Libble nimmt den Missbrauch seiner Dienste sehr ernst. Wir setzen uns dafür ein, derartige Missbrauchsfälle gemäß den Gesetzen Ihres Heimatlandes zu behandeln. Wenn Sie eine Meldung übermitteln, überprüfen wir Ihre Informationen und ergreifen entsprechende Maßnahmen. Wir melden uns nur dann wieder bei Ihnen, wenn wir weitere Einzelheiten wissen müssen oder weitere Informationen für Sie haben.

Art des Missbrauchs:

Zum Beispiel antisemitische Inhalte, rassistische Inhalte oder Material, das zu einer Gewalttat führen könnte.

Beispielsweise eine Kreditkartennummer, persönliche Identifikationsnummer oder unveröffentlichte Privatadresse. Beachten Sie, dass E-Mail-Adressen und der vollständige Name nicht als private Informationen angesehen werden.

Forenregeln

Um zu sinnvolle Fragen zu kommen halten Sie sich bitte an folgende Spielregeln:

Neu registrieren

Registrieren auf E - Mails für Mercedes A-Klasse Limousine 2022 wenn:


Sie erhalten eine E-Mail, um sich für eine oder beide Optionen anzumelden.


Andere Handbücher von Mercedes A-Klasse Limousine 2022

Mercedes A-Klasse Limousine 2022 Bedienungsanleitung - Deutsch - 553 seiten

Mercedes A-Klasse Limousine 2022 Bedienungsanleitung - Holländisch - 561 seiten


Das Handbuch wird per E-Mail gesendet. Überprüfen Sie ihre E-Mail.

Wenn Sie innerhalb von 15 Minuten keine E-Mail mit dem Handbuch erhalten haben, kann es sein, dass Sie eine falsche E-Mail-Adresse eingegeben haben oder dass Ihr ISP eine maximale Größe eingestellt hat, um E-Mails zu erhalten, die kleiner als die Größe des Handbuchs sind.

Ihre Frage wurde zu diesem Forum hinzugefügt

Möchten Sie eine E-Mail erhalten, wenn neue Antworten und Fragen veröffentlicht werden? Geben Sie bitte Ihre Email-Adresse ein.



Info